FCC ID: SERCWFB124 Wi-Fi module

 

Action Cam SP360 User Manual Before You Start Declaration of Conformity Responsible Party: JK Imaging Ltd. Address: 1411 W. 190th Street, Suite 550, Gardena, CA 90248, USA Company Website: www.kodakpixpro.com About this Manual Thank you for purchasing this product. Please read this manual carefully and keep it in a safe place for future reference. JK Imaging Ltd. reserves all rights of this document. No part of this published manual may be reproduced, transmitted, transcribed, stored in a retrieval system or translated into any language or computer language, in any form, by any means, without the prior written permission of JK Imaging Ltd.. All trademarks mentioned in this manual are used for identification purposes only and are properties of their respective owners. This manual provides you with instructions on how to use your new KODAK PIXPRO Action Cam. Every effort has been made to ensure that the contents of this manual are accurate; however JK Imaging Ltd. reserves the right to make changes without notice. Throughout this manual, indicates the useful information, "

the page number" indicates the detailed information. INDUSTRY CANADA This device complies with Canadian RSS-210. This device complies with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard (s).Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. 1 Radiation Exposure Statement:

This product complies with the Canadian portable RF exposure limit set forth for an uncontrolled environment and is safe for intended operation as described in this manual. Additional RF exposure reduction can be achieved if the product can be kept as far as possible from the user body or set the device to lower output power if such function is available. Industry Canada statement:

Ce dispositif est conforme la norme CNR-210 dIndustrie Canada applicable aux appareils radio exempts de licence. Son fonctionnement est sujet aux deux conditions suivantes: (1) le dispositif ne doit pas produire de brouillage prjudiciable, et (2) ce dispositif doit accepter tout brouillage reu, y compris un brouillage susceptible de provoquer un fonctionnement indsirable. Dclaration dexposition aux radiations:

Le produit est conforme aux limites dexposition pour les appareils portables RF pour les Etats-Unis et le Canada tablies pour un environnement non contrl. Le produit est sr pour un fonctionnement tel que dcrit dans ce manuel. La rduction aux expositions RF peut tre augmente si lappareil peut tre conserv aussi loin que possible du corps de lutilisateur ou que le dispositif est rgl sur la puissance de sortie la plus faible si une telle fonction est disponible. For Customers in Europe This symbol [crossed-out wheel bin WEEE Annex IV] indicates separate collection of electrical waste and electronic equipment in the European countries. Please do not throw the equipment into domestic refuse. Please use the return and collection systems available in your country for proper, safe disposal of this product. CE mark indicates that this product complies with the European requirements for safety, health, environment and customer protection. CE marked cameras are intended for sales in Europe. Europe EU Declaration of Conformity This device complies with the essential requirements of the R&TTE Directive 1999/5/EC. The following test methods have been applied in order to prove presumption of conformity with the essential requirements of the R&TTE Directive 1999/5/EC:

- EN 60950-1: 2006+A11:2009 +A1:2010 +A12:2011 Safety of Information Technology Equipment

- EN 50566: 2013 Product standard to demonstrate compliance of radio frequency fields from handheld and body-mounted wireless communication devices used by the general public (30 MHz 6 GHz)

- EN 62209-2: 2010 Human exposure to radio frequency fields from handheld and body mounted wireless communication devices Human models, instrumentation, and procedures Part 2: Procedure to determine the specific absorption rate (SAR) for wireless communication devices used in close proximity to the human body (frequency range of 30 MHz to 6 GHz)

- EN 300 328 V1.8.1 : 2012 Electromagnetic compatibility and Radio spectrum Matters (ERM); Wideband Transmission systems; Data transmission equipment operating in the 2.4 GHz ISM band and using spread spectrum modulation techniques; Harmonized EN covering essential requirements under article 3.2 of the R&TTE Directive.

- EN 301 489-1 V1.9.2: 2008 Electromagnetic compatibility and Radio Spectrum Matters (ERM); Electro Magnetic Compatibility (EMC) standard for radio equipment and services; Part 1:

Common technical requirements.

- EN 301 489-17 V2.2.1:2012 Electromagnetic compatibility and Radio spectrum Matters (ERM); Electro Magnetic Compatibility (EMC) standard for radio equipment and services; Part 17: Specific conditions for 2.4 GHz wideband transmission systems and 5 GHz high performance RLAN equipment. For Customers in the U.S.A. Federal Communication Commission Interference Statement This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one of the following measures:

- Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.

- Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.

- Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.

- Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help. FCC Caution: Any changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate this equipment. This transmitter must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter. Radiation Exposure Statement:

This product complies with the FCC portable RF exposure limit set forth for an uncontrolled environment and is safe for intended operation as described in this manual. Additional RF exposure reduction can be achieved if the product can be kept as far as possible from the user body or set the device to lower output power if such function is available. Safety Notes Product Notes Do not disassemble or repair the product by yourself. Do not heavily drop or knock this product. Improper handling may damage this product. Avoid touching the lens element, please use professional lens cleaning paper together with lens cleaning agents to wipe the lens and keep the lens clean. Do not use corrosive, alcoholic or organic-solvent-containing cleaners to wipe this product. Do not use or store this product in high temperature environment. Do not expose the lens to strong light sources (e.g. daylight, etc.) for extended periods of time. Do not use or store the product in a strong magnetic field environment. If the product is quickly transferred from a low temperature environment to a high temperature environment, water condensation may occur in the product due to physical changes. In this case, it is recommended to wait until the product returns to room temperature before you turn it on. If a photo or video cannot be played back due to human-caused improper operation, the Company shall assume no liability or responsibility for compensation. Store the product in a dry and clean environment when you are going to store the product for a long period of time. Battery Notes:

Please use a battery that is the same type as the one included. If the battery overheats during charging or use, stop charging or use immediately. Turn off the product, remove the battery carefully, and wait until it cools down. Please keep the battery contacts clean and dry. Please install the battery according to the positive and negative markings on the battery compartment. Never force it into the battery compartment. If battery fluid leaks into the product, please contact your retailer. If battery fluid leaks onto your skin, rinse your skin immediately with clean water and seek for medical attention. To prevent the battery from being damaged, do not drop the battery, impact it with heavy objects or scratch it with sharp objects. Do not let the battery come in contact with metal objects (including coins) to avoid short circuiting, discharging, excessive heat, or possible leakage. Do not heat the battery or throw it into a fire to avoid a possible explosion. When the product is stored for a long period of time, please remove the battery. Do not store the battery in a hot environment. In colder environments, the performance of the battery may be noticeably reduced. Do not attempt to disassemble the battery. Disposal of used batteries should be carried out in accordance with the local (national or regional) regulations. Memory Card Notes The memory card referred to in this manual is microSD card or microSDHC card. Please keep the memory card clean and dry. When inserting a memory card, make sure the notch direction of the card matches the notch direction of the memory card mark near the card slot. Do not force the memory card into the card slot. Before using a brand new memory card, please format the memory card first. A photo or video taken with the product will be stored in the folder that is automatically generated on the memory card. Do not store photos or videos 4 that are not taken using the product in these folders in case that the files cannot be normally recognized in playback. Not recommended that directly edit the data on the memory card. Copy the data to your computer disk before editing. Please turn the product off before removing the memory card. Otherwise, the memory card could be damaged. When the product is stored for a long period of time, please backup the data on the memory card and remove the memory card for storage. Other Notes:

Do not disconnect the power or turn the product off during the update process. Doing so may cause incorrect data to be written and the product may not power on later. When using your product on an airplane, observe the relevant rules specified by the airline. Due to the limitations of manufacturing technology, the LCD may have a few dead or bright pixels. These pixels do no affect the quality of the photos or video. If the LCD is damaged, pay particular attention to the liquid crystal in the screen. If any of the following situations arise, take the recommended immediate action indicated below:

1. If liquid crystal comes in contact with your skin, please wipe with a dry cloth, wash thoroughly with soap, and rinse with plenty of clean water. 2. If liquid crystal gets into your eye, flush the eye immediately with plenty of clean water for at least 15 minutes and then seek for medical assistance. 3. If liquid crystal is swallowed, immediately flush your mouth thoroughly with clean water and induce vomiting. Seek for medical assistance. Waterproofing Notes:

This product is waterproof for the purposes of daily activities. Before use, please make sure to firmly tighten the lens cover, lock the battery cover, and tightly close the side cover. Any scratches, cracks, or small foreign objects (such as sand or hair) attached to the rubber ring inside of the side cover will affect the efficacy of the products waterproofing. Before use, please check to see whether the waterproofing rubber is damaged or contaminated with a foreign object before closing the side cover. When there is a foreign object on the waterproofing rubber and its adjacent surfaces, please use a clean, lint-free dry cloth in order to clean it. If there are any scratches or cracks, immediately go to a service center for maintenance and obtain a replacement waterproofing rubber. Before using the product in water, please make sure to first place it inside of the waterproof housing. It can be submerged to a depth of 60 meters (196 feet) in water of a temperature not exceeding 40 C. The product can maintain its waterproof performance for up to 4 hours in water 60 m (196 feet) deep. Do not open the waterproof housing when submerged in water. Do not directly open the side cover or battery cover, nor should you remove the lens cover the product accidentally comes into contact with water. Please turn off the power and wipe it with a clean, dry, lint-free cloth before opening the battery cover and side cover in order to remove the battery and the memory card. When opening the battery cover and the side cover, if there are water droplets on the surfaces located between the interior and the body, please make sure to wipe them off. After using the product in the presence of sand, mud or other foreign matter, please rinse it with clean water (please make sure to firmly tighten the lens cover, lock the battery cover, and close the side cover tightly before rinsing). After rinsing, wipe it with a clean, dry, lint-free cloth. Waterproof / Dustproof / Shockproof/ Freeze-proof:

Installing the lens cover, JIS / IEC waterproof grade 8 (IPX8). Installing the lens cover, JIS / IEC dustproof grade 6 (IP6X). Installing the lens cover, height for shockproof rating is 2.0m. Suitable temperature range for freeze proof capability is -10 C and above. 5 Contents Before You Start .........................................................................................................................................................1 Safety Notes ................................................................................................................................................................4 Contents ........................................................................................................................................................................6 Getting Ready .............................................................................................................................................................8 Accessories Included ................................................................................................................................................................... 8 Action Cam View ........................................................................................................................................................................... 9 Installing and Dismantling the Lens Cover ........................................................................................................................10 Installing Battery .........................................................................................................................................................................11 Installing Memory Card ............................................................................................................................................................12 Charging ........................................................................................................................................................................................13 Operation Method .................................................................................................................................................15 Introduction of the Main Screen ...........................................................................................................................................15 Turn On / Off ................................................................................................................................................................................16 Set your Language, Date and Time after the first power-on ......................................................................................16 Introduction of the Modes ......................................................................................................................................................17 Introduction of the Menu ........................................................................................................................................................19 General Settings

........................................................................................................................................................................................................... 20 6 Movie Settings

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................21 Still Settings

..................................................................................................................................................................................................23 Operational Applications .....................................................................................................................................24 Connect with Smart Device .....................................................................................................................................................24 Connect with Computer ...........................................................................................................................................................25 Action Cam operations when in Wi-Fi mode ....................................................................................................................26 Use an interface ......................................................................................................................................................27 Micro USB interface ...................................................................................................................................................................27 Charging ....................................................................................................................................................................................................................27 Using an external power supply ........................................................................................................................................................................27 Data transmission...................................................................................................................................................................................................27 Micro HDMI interface ................................................................................................................................................................28 Appendices ...............................................................................................................................................................29 Specifications ...............................................................................................................................................................................29 Prompts and Warning Messages ..........................................................................................................................................31 Trouble Shooting ........................................................................................................................................................................33 Special Accessories ................................................................................................................................................34 7 Getting Ready Accessories Included Your product box should contain the product you purchased along with the following accessories. If anything is missing or appears to be damaged, please contact your retailer. (The AC Adapter may be different in shape than what is pictured below. This is due to different power requirements across countries or regions.) Rechargeable Li-ion battery Battery charger AC Adapter Micro USB cable Protective cover Pouch CD-ROM Glass lens cover

(installed on the product when leaving factory) Quick Start Guide STOP Quick start guide Warranty card Service card 8 Action Cam View 1 2 3 7 6 5 4 8 12 11 10 8 9 10 13 14 1 2 3 Glass lens cover Status indicator Video recording button /

Shooting button / OK button 4 NFC mark 5 6 Menu button / Direction button (lower) Power button / Mode button /

Direction button (upper) LCD 7 8 Microphone 9 Tripod socket 10 Buzzer Side cover 11 Location hole 12 13 Battery cover 14 Battery cover lock 9 Installing and Dismantling the Lens Cover Dismantling the lens cover:

Turn the lens cover according to the illustrated direction until it separates from the product. Installing the lens cover Turn and firmly tighten the lens cover according to the illustrated direction. The lens cover plays an important role in protecting the product (dustproof, shockproof and waterproof). Before installing the lens cover, make sure that no dirt or foreign object is on the lens surface. Before taking pictures, please use a clean, dry, lint-free cloth to clean the lens cover without affecting the product's viewfinding. When the product is exposed to fluctuations in temperature, condensation may form on the inside surface of the lens cover. If this happens, remove the lens cover, clean it with a soft, dry, lint-free cloth, and then reinstall the lens. If the product will not be used for a length of time, the glass lens cover should be covered with a protective cover (as shown in the figure). 10 Installing Battery 1. Open the battery cover Push the battery cover lock from "LOCK" to "OPEN" along the direction of arrow , push the battery cover along the direction of arrow , and open the battery cover along the direction of arrow . 2. Insert the battery Insert the battery into the battery compartment along the direction of arrow

(note the location of the + and - symbols) 2 1 3 2 4 Gently pull the ribbon upward to remove the battery. When inserting the battery, please do not fold the ribbon underneath the battery. 3. Close the battery cover Align the battery cover over the battery compartment as shown and set it in place in the direction of arrow . Close the battery cover along the direction of arrow , and push the battery cover lock from "OPEN" to

"LOCK" along the direction of arrow . 5 6 6 7 11 Installing Memory Card Open the side cover, then insert the memory card into the card slot (note the direction of the memory card gap), push the bottom end of the memory card with a fingertip into the slot completely, and then close the side cover. A memory card (microSD / microSDHC) is optional and is not included in the product package. It needs to be purchased separately. Please use an original memory card which is Class 6 or higher and has a capacity of 4GB to 32GB. To remove your memory card, open the side cover, gently press the memory card to eject it and remove it carefully. The product will automatically turn off if the memory card is inserted and extracted when the product is on. 12 Charging Please use the battery charger or AC adapter to charge the battery in an ambient temperature ranging from 0 C to 40 C. Charging the battery with a battery charger:

1. Place the battery into the battery charger according to the direction illustrated. Use a Micro USB cable to connect the battery charger and the AC adapter, and then plug the AC adapter into an electrical outlet. 2. The indicator light is red while charging and green after the charging is complete. When charging the battery for the first time or after a long period of storage, please make sure that the charging time is no less than four hours in length. Charging the Action Cam with an AC adapter or an external power supply (vehicle power supply, portable power supply, etc):

1. Place the battery into the Action Cam, and while it is powered off, use a Micro USB cable to connect the Action Cam to the AC adapter before plugging the AC adapter into the power outlet. Or, place the battery into the Action Cam, and while it is powered off, use a Micro USB cable to connect the Action Cam to an external power supply. 2. "Charging ..." being displayed on the LCD indicates that the battery has begun charging. 3. The indicator light is orange while charging, and the Action Cam will automatically shut down after the charging is complete. Charging will stop after holding down the button when charging. In a shutdown state where the Action Cam was set to the Loop recording mode before shutdown, use a Micro USB cable to connect the Action Cam to the 13 AC adapter (or an external power supply). The Action Cam will automatically start up and start recording. (For example: when the Action Cam is connected to a vehicle power supply, it will start and record automatically when the automobile starts. And stop recording after the automobile shuts down, the Action Cam will shut down automatically after saving the recorded files.) Charging the Action Cam with a computer:

1. Place the battery into the Action Cam and use a Micro USB cable to connect the Action Cam to a computer (while the computer is on), in order to start charging. 2. The indicator light is orange while charging and turns off after charging is complete 14 Operation Method Introduction of the Main Screen Main screen displays under Wi-Fi mode Main screen displays under other modes 2 3 4 1 5 1. Mode Movie mode

/

/

Loop recording mode

/

/

/

/

Time Lapse mode Shooting mode Burst shot mode 2. Memory card /

Internal memory 3. Movie size

/

Photo size

/

/

/

/

/

/

/

/

/

8 7 6 4. Battery status 5. Motion detection (Open) 6. Remaining recording time hh:mm /

mm:ss /

none Number of remaining shots

:("+9999" will be displayed when it exceeds the maximum available display number) /

none 7. Unfold mode Dome/

Front/

Seg/

Ring 8. Recording time elapsed / Number of photos shot ("+9999" will be displayed when it exceeds the maximum available display number) 15 Turn On / Off Turn on:

When the power is off, press and hold the Turn off:

When the power is on, press and hold the button for more than 2 seconds to turn on the product button for more than 2 seconds to turn off the product. If the product cannot be turned on / off normally, you can remove the battery for forced power cut. Set your Language, Date and Time after the first power-on 1. Press and hold the button to turn on the product. When starting for the first time, the display will show the date and time setting screen, "Y M D hh:mm:ss"

2. The item to be adjusted will be highlighted with a black background color, press the or button to adjust the value, press the button to confirm. 3. After adjusting the "minute" value, press the button to enter the main screen. 16 Introduction of the Modes In the main screenpress the There are 4 modes Wi-Fi mode button to switch the mode.

, Movie mode

, Shooting mode

, Loop recording mode

, Time Lapse mode

, Burst shot mode Wi-Fi mode The Action Cam can be Wi-Fi connected with your smart device or PC.(

24) Movie mode Suitable for recording in the general environment. Operation method:

Press the button to start recording. Repress the button to stop recording. Shooting mode Suitable for shooting in the general environment. Operation method:

Press the button for photo. Loop recording mode Loop recording allows for the recording of independent segments of movies according to selected time length from the beginning of recording. The product will continually record movies of the length selected until the record button is pressed to end recording. When the memory card is full, the product will overwrite the recorded files starting from the first movie circularly. Operation method:

Press the button to start recording. Repress the button to stop recording. 17 When the remaining space on the memory card is insufficient to record 2 files, recording will be unavailable. Loop recording mode can only be used when a memory card is inserted. Time Lapse mode Time Lapse enables the recording of an interval of time, and splices the frames together to present a condensed video which usually requires a long period of time to complete. Operation method:

Press the button to start recording. Repress the butto to stop recording. indicates that the current countdown seconds 1 The sound cannot be recorded. Burst shot mode Burst Shot allows ten photos to be captured continuously one single time before auto pause. Operation method:

Press the buttonit will stop after 10 photos are taken. 18 Introduction of the Menu 1. In the main screen (except for Wi-Fi mode)press the button to enter the first-level menu interface, press the or button to select the item, and press the button to enter the corresponding secondary level menu interface. In Movie mode/Loop recording mode / Time lapse mode can enter Movie Settings and General Settings. In Shooting mode/Burst shot mode can enter Still Settings and General Settings. 2. Press the or button to select the item, press the button to confirm and to enter the tertiary menu interface(highlighted with a black background color). 3. Press the or button to select the item, press the button to confirm and to back to the secondary level menu interface. 4. Select press the button to back to the first-level menu interface. 5. Select press the button to back to the main screen. First Level Menu Movie Settings Still Settings General Settings Unfold mode Unfold mode Movie size Photo size Volume Power off Time Lapse White balance Date / Time Secondary Level Menu Motion detection Loop recording Wind cut White balance Format Reset settings FW version 19

 

 

User Manual Before You Start Declaration of Conformity Responsible Party:

Address:

Company Website:

JK Imaging Ltd. 1411 W. 190th Street, Suite 550, Gardena, CA 90248, USA www.kodakpixpro.com INDUSTRY CANADA This device complies with Canadian RSS-210. This device complies with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard (s).Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. Radiation Exposure Statement:

This product complies with the Canadian portable RF exposure limit set forth for an uncontrolled environment and is safe for intended operation as described in this manual. Additional RF exposure reduction can be achieved if the product can be kept as far as possible from the user body or set the device to lower output power if such function is available. Industry Canada statement:

Ce dispositif est conforme la norme CNR-210 dIndustrie Canada applicable aux appareils radio exempts de licence. Son fonctionnement est sujet aux deux conditions suivantes: (1) le dispositif ne doit pas produire de brouillage prjudiciable, et (2) ce dispositif doit accepter tout brouillage reu, y compris un brouillage susceptible de provoquer un fonctionnement indsirable. Dclaration dexposition aux radiations:

1 1 Le produit est conforme aux limites dexposition pour les appareils portables RF pour les Etats-Unis et le Canada tablies pour un environnement non contrl. Le produit est sr pour un fonctionnement tel que dcrit dans ce manuel. La rduction aux expositions RF peut tre augmente si lappareil peut tre conserv aussi loin que possible du corps de lutilisateur ou que le dispositif est rgl sur la puissance de sortie la plus faible si une telle fonction est disponible. For Customers in Europe This symbol [crossed-out wheel bin WEEE Annex IV] indicates separate collection of electrical waste and electronic equipment in the European countries. Please do not throw the equipment into domestic refuse. Please use the return and collection systems available in your country for proper, safe disposal of this product. CE mark indicates that this product complies with the European requirements for safety, health, environment and customer protection. CE marked cameras are intended for sales in Europe. Europe EU Declaration of Conformity This device complies with the essential requirements of the R&TTE Directive 1999/5/EC. The following test methods have been applied in order to provepresumption of conformity with the essential requirements of the R&TTE Directive 1999/5/EC:

- EN 60950-1: 2006+A11:2009 +A1:2010 +A12:2011 Safety of Information Technology Equipment

- EN 50566: 2013 Product standard to demonstrate compliance of radio frequency fields from handheld and body- mounted wireless communication devices used by the general public (30 MHz 6 GHz) 2

- EN 62209-2: 2010 Human exposure to radio frequency fields from handheld and bodymounted wireless communication devices Human models, instrumentation, and procedures Part 2: Procedure to determine the specific absorption rate (SAR) for wireless communication devices used in close proximity to the human body (frequency range of 30 MHz to 6 GHz)

- EN 300 328 V1.8.1 : 2012 Electromagnetic compatibility and Radio spectrum Matters (ERM); Wideband Transmission systems; Data transmission equipment operating in the 2.4 GHz ISM band and using spread spectrum modulation techniques; Harmonized EN covering essential requirements under article 3.2 of the R&TTE Directive.

- EN 301 489-1 V1.9.2: 2008 Electromagnetic compatibility and Radio Spectrum Matters (ERM); Electro Magnetic Compatibility (EMC) standard for radio equipment and services; Part 1: Common technical requirements.

- EN 301 489-17 V2.2.1:2012 Electromagnetic compatibility and Radio spectrum Matters (ERM); Electro Magnetic Compatibility (EMC) standard for radio equipment and services; Part 17: Specific conditions for 2.4 GHz wideband transmission systems and 5 GHz high performance RLAN equipment. For Customers in the U.S.A. Federal Communication Commission Interference Statement This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. 3 This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one of the following measures:

- Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.

- Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.

- Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.

- Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help. FCC Caution: Any changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the users authority to operate this equipment. This transmitter must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter. Radiation Exposure Statement:

This product complies with the FCC portable RF exposure limit set forth for an uncontrolled environment and is safe for intended operation as described in this manual. Additional RF exposure reduction can be achieved if the product can be kept as far as possible from the user body or set the device to lower output power if such function is available. 4 About this Manual Thank you for purchasing the KODAK PIXPRO Digital Camera. Please carefully read this manual and keep it well for future reference. JK Imaging Ltd. reserves all rights of this document. No part of this published manual may be reproduced, transmitted, transcribed, stored in a retrieval system or translated into any language or computer language, in any form, by any means, without the prior written permission of JK Imaging Ltd.. All trademarks mentioned in this manual are used for identification purposes only and are properties of their respective owners. This manual provides you with instructions on how to use your new KODAK PIXPRO Digital Camera. Every effort has been made to ensure that the contents of this manual are accurate;

however JK Imaging Ltd. reserves the right to make changes without notice. Throughout this manual, the following symbols are used to help you locate information quickly and easily:

Indicates useful information. Indicates precautions are to be taken while operating the camera. In introducing you how to operate this camera, the following symbols may appear to facilitate your understanding:

Item properties: The optional properties in the camera interface are indicated by the symbol . 5 Safety Notes Safety notes for this camera Do not drop the camera or allow it to hit When you take the camera from a solid objects. Do not disassemble or repair this camera by yourself. To prevent the camera from being damaged by moisture, do not use or store the camera in very humid environments, such as in rain or near bodies of water. Do not use or store the camera in dusty places or on a beach to prevent dust or sand from entering the camera, causing possible damage to it. Do not use or store the camera in a hot environment or under direct sunlight. Do not use or store the camera near a powerful magnetic field, for example near a magnet or transformer. Avoid touching the lens of the camera. Do not expose the camera to direct sunlight for a long period time. Turn the camera off, remove the battery and the memory card, and dry it within 24 hours if water accidentally comes in contact with the camera. 6 cold place to a warmer environment, condensation may occur. Please wait for a reasonable period of time before you turn it on. Before you remove the battery and memory card, the camera should be turned off. In cleaning the camera body, please dont use corrosive cleaning agents or those with alcohol or organic solvent. Use the professional lens wiping cloth and dedicated cleaner to wipe and clean the lens. Download your photos and remove the memory card when you are going to store the camera for a long period of time. If this camera is not in use for a long time, please keep it in a dry and clean condition. Our company will not pay compensation for any failure of playback of pictures or videos caused by improper operation. Safety notes for battery Please use a battery that is the same type Do not expose the battery to water. Always as the one included. keep the battery contacts dry. Please use the attached charger to charge Do not heat the battery or throw it into a the battery. If the liquid leaking from the battery contacts with your skin, please immediately flush with water and seek medical treatment. If the liquid leaks into the camera, please contact the retailer. Please dispose the wasted battery in accordance with local (national or regional) regulations. To prevent the battery from being damaged, do not drop the battery or allow it to hit solid objects or to be scratched by the objects. Do not let the battery come in contact with metal objects (including coins) to avoid short circuiting, discharging, excessive heat, or possible leakage. Do not attempt to disassemble the battery. fire to avoid a possible explosion. Do not store the battery in a hot environment or in direct sunlight. If an overheating happens during charging or use, please immediately stop charging or using and then take out the battery with care in shutdown mode to wait it for cooling. If it is not used for a long time, please remove the battery for proper keeping. In a colder environment, the performance of the battery could be noticeably reduced. When you install the battery, install it according to the positive and negative markings on the battery compartment. Never force it into the battery compartment. 7 7 Safety notes for memory card We suggest buying only well-known, name brand memory cards to ensure peak performance. Format the memory card using the camera before you use it or insert a new one. Do not make the memory card fall off from high places or hit by heavy objects to prevent damaging it. Do not attempt to disassemble or repair the memory card. Do not expose the memory card to water. Always keep it dry. Do not remove the memory card when the camera is turned on. Otherwise, the memory card could be damaged. Do not directly edit the data on the memory card. Copy the data to your PC before you edit them. When the camera is stored for a long period of time, be sure to download your photos and remove the memory card. Store it in a dry environment. Do not modify the name of the files or folders of the memory card using your PC. Modifying the file names may cause the files to not be recognized on the camera or a possible error may occur. A photo taken with the camera will be stored in the folder that is automatically generated on the memory card. Do not store photos that are not taken using this camera in these folders as the pictures cannot be recognized during the playback. When you insert a memory card, make sure the notch of the card matches the markings on the top of the card slot. 8 Other Safety Notes Do not disconnect the power or turn the camera off during the update process. Doing so may cause incorrect data to be written and the camera may not power on later. Do not hang the neck strap of the camera around the neck of a child. When using your camera on an airplane, observe the relevant rules specified by the airline. Due to the limitations of manufacturing technology, LCD may have a few dead or bright pixels. These pixels do no effect the quality or performance of the camera, photos or video. Do not expose LCD to water. In a humid environment, only wipe it with a soft and dry cleaning cloth. If LCD is damaged and the liquid crystal comes into contact with your skin, wipe your skin with a dry cloth immediately and rinse it with clean water. If liquid crystal comes into contact with your eyes, wash them with clean water at least for 15 minutes and seek immediate medical attention. If you accidentally swallow liquid crystal, rinse your mouth immediately and seek medical attention. 9 Contents Before You Start ..............................1 Set your Language, Date/Time after the first power-on ......................24 Safety Notes ....................................6 Resetting your Language ....................25 Contents .........................................10 Getting Ready ...............................15 Accessories Included ..................................15 Install Lens Cap and Neck Strap ...............16 Part Names ...................................................17 Installing Battery and Memory Card .......19 Charging Battery..........................................21 Turning Camera On and Off ......................23 Set your Language, Date/Time ................24 10 Resetting Date/Time ..........................26 Mode Overview ............................27 Display Setting .............................................27 LCD Display ..................................................28 Overview of the screen icons in photo shooting mode .....................28 Overview of the screen icons in movie mode ......................................29 Overview of the screen icons in playback mode .................................30 Using the Mode Dial ....................31 Select an appropriate capture mode .......31 Using the Zoom Function ...........................54 Auto Mode ............................................32 Focus Setting ................................................55 Program AE ...........................................34 Macro Mode .................................................56 Shutter priority .....................................34 Self-timer Setting ........................................57 Aperture priority ..................................34 Flash Mode ...................................................58 Manual Mode .......................................34 White Balance Setting ................................59 Face Beautifier ......................................36 Continuous Shot ..........................................60 Wi-Fi Mode ...........................................37 EV Settings ....................................................61 Scene Mode ..........................................45 Exposure Compensation ....................61 Movie Mode..........................................50 ISO ..........................................................62 Custom Settings...................................51 Shutter Adjustment.............................62 Basic Operation ............................53 Using EVF (Electronic View Finder) ........53 Aperture Adjustment .........................63 Using Quick Recording ...............................63 11 11 i Button Function Menu ..............................64 Image Size .............................................73 Playback Mode .............................65 Viewing Photos and Videos .......................65 Thumbnail View ...........................................66 Using Zoom Playback (for still pictures only) ...............................................67 OIS (Optical Image Stabilization) ....74 Cont. AF .................................................74 HDR ........................................................75 Beautifier ...............................................75 Scene ......................................................76 Photos and Video Deletion ........................68 Photo Shooting Settings Menu .................77 Slideshow ......................................................69 Quality ...................................................77 Continuous Capture Group Playback ......70 AF-Assist Beam ....................................78 Animation panorama play .........................71 Digital Zoom .........................................78 Using the Menus ..........................72 Photo Setup Menu .......................................72 Expo Metering ......................................72 12 Date Imprint .........................................78 Quick Review ........................................79 Custom Settings...................................79 Movie Menu .................................................80 i button playback function .................88 Expo Metering ......................................80 Playback Settings Menu .............................89 Movie Size .............................................81 Protect ....................................................90 OIS (Optical Image Stabilization) ....82 Delete .....................................................91 Movie Setting Menu ...................................83 DPOF (Digital Print Order Format) ..92 Digital Zoom .........................................84 Trim .........................................................92 Custom Settings...................................84 General Settings Menu ..............................93 Playback Menu.............................................85 Sound Settings .....................................94 Playback Mode .....................................85 Power Saver ..........................................94 HDR ........................................................86 Language ...............................................95 Touch-up ................................................86 Zone........................................................95 Rotate .....................................................87 Date/Time ............................................95 Resize .....................................................87 LCD Brightness .....................................95 13 File Settings ..................................................96 Connecting to your Printer ............. 104 Format ....................................................97 Using the PictBridge Menu ............. 105 Copy to Card .........................................97 Video System ............................................ 109 File Numbering .....................................98 Set Eye-Fi SD Card Connection Mode .. 110 Reset .......................................................98 Supported HDMI Connections .............. 111 FW Version ...........................................99 Connecting HDMI-Ready TV ......... 111 Connection Settings ................. 100 Appendices ................................. 112 Connecting to a Computer ..................... 101 Product Specifications ............................. 112 Setting the USB Mode ..................... 101 Prompts and Warning Messages .......... 116 Troubleshooting ........................................ 120 Transferring files to your computer ............................................ 102 Connecting to a PictBridge Compatible Printer ................................... 103 Setting the USB Mode ..................... 103 14 14 Getting Ready Accessories Included Your camera box should contain the camera model you purchased along with the following accessories. If anything is missing or appears to be damaged, please contact your retailer. (The battery chargers may be a little different in shape due to the difference of countries or regions this type of cameras are sold to, so please subject to the physical product.) Rechargeable Li-ion battery AC adapter Micro USB cable Lens cap with strap Quick Start Guide STOP Neck strap Quick start guide Warranty card Service card 15 Install Lens Cap and Neck Strap

16 Part Names 5 6 7 98 4 3 2 1 10 11 1. Micro HDMI Port 2. Micro USB Port 3. Zoom Lever 4. Shutter Button 5. Strap Eyelet 6. 7. Exposure Compensation Button Continuous Shot Button 8. Power Button 9. AF Assist Beam/Self-timer Lamp 10. Flash Lamp 11. Lens 17 12 13 14 15 285 27 26 25 24 23 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 29 30 18 Indicator Lamp 12. Microphone 13. Electronic View Finder (EVF) 14. EVF/ LCD Switch Button 15. 16. Mode Dial 17. 18. 19. 20.

21.

22.

AF Button/Up Button

Macro Button/Left Button

Flash Button/Right Button Fast Video Recording Button Menu Button

Delete Button/Self-timer Button/Down Button Display Button Playback Button SET Button i Button 23. 24. 25. 26. 27. LCD 28. Speaker 29. Battery Cover 30. Tripod Socket Installing Battery and Memory Card 1. Open the battery cover according to the 2. Insert the battery into the battery direction of arrow. compartment according to the negative and positive directions as illustrated in the picture. Push the battery down until it locks in place. 2 1 Battery lock knob 19 3. Insert the memory card into the memory 4. Close the battery cover. card slot as shown in the diagram. Write protection buckle 1 2 The memory card (SD/SDHC) is optional and not included in all camera packaging. If you have to purchase a memory card, select one with storage capacity between 4GB and 32GB to ensure correct data storage. To remove your memory card, open the battery cover, gently press the memory card to eject it and remove it carefully. 20 Charging Battery Please insert the battery and charge it under shutdown mode. 1. Connect the camera and the power charger using the supplied Micro USB cable. 2. Insert the plug of the power charger into the power outlet to charge the battery. After the battery is stored for a long period of time, use the supplied power charger to charge the battery prior to use. To have maximum battery life, charge the battery for at least 4 hours the first time. Charging indicator:

Flashing orange: Charging The indicator will go out once charging is finished, and the camera will be powered off automatically. 2 1 Indicator lamp 21 3. When the camera is turned off, you can also connect the camera to your PC using a USB cable to charge the battery. 3 Please charge the battery indoors between 0C and 40C. 22 Turning Camera On and Off Press the Power button to turn the camera on. To turn the camera off, press the Power button again. Power Button Press and hold the button to power on and enter Playback mode. 23 Set your Language, Date/Time Set your Language, Date/Time after the first power-on 1. When you turn the camera on for the first time, the language selection screen appears.

/

buttons to select your desired language.

/

/ 2. Press the

3. After you press the button to confirm the selection, the Date/Time settings screen appears. 4. Press the

/

button to select the Date/Time to be adjusted: Time is displayed in yyyy:MM:dd HH:mm. 5. Press the

/

button to adjust the value for the selected Date/Time. Language

English Franais Date & Time Espaol Portugus Italiano Deutsch y Svenska H-M 6. Press the button to confirm the time settings and the shooting screen appears. 2014 06

20 00 00

:

Back 24 Resetting your Language After you set your language for the first time, follow the instructions below to reset your language. button, press the 1. Press the

button to select button to enter the menu.

/

, and press the 2. Press the

/

button or the

button to select button to

, and press the enter the menu.

Press the button to select Languageand press the button or the

/

button to enter the menu.

/

/

4. Press the 3. Sound Settings Power Saver Language World Time Auto English Home Date & Time 2014.06.20 00:00

/

Language buttons to select your desired language and press the button to confirm. 5. Press the appears. button and the shooting screen

English Franais Espaol Portugus Italiano Deutsch y Svenska 25 Resetting Date/Time After you set your Date/Time for the first time, follow the instructions below to reset date and time. button, press the

/

1. Press the

button to select button to enter the menu.

, and press the 2. Press the

, and press the enter the menu.

/

button or the

button to select button to

3. Press the

/

button to select Date & Timeand press the

button to enter the menu.

button or the 4. Press the

/

button to select the Date/Time to be adjusted: Time is displayed in yyyy:MM:dd HH:mm. 5. Press the

/

button to press the value for your selected block. After you finish your settings, press the button to confirm. 6. Press the appears. button and the shooting screen 26 26 Sound Settings Power Saver Language World Time Auto English Home Date & Time 2014.06.20 00:00 Date & Time H-M 2014 06

20 00 00

:

Back Mode Overview Display Setting Press the button to display the settings: Classic, Full, Off. Classic: Displays the camera parameters on Off: Does not display any additional icons on screen screen SD 1234 00:56:00 F2.8 1/50

-0.3 EV 400 ISO Full: Camera parameters with Grid and Histogram SD 1234 00:56:00 F2.8 1/50

-0.3 EV 400 ISO 27 LCD Display Overview of the screen icons in photo shooting mode

SD x3.6x3.6 1234 16M 00:56:00 F3.6F3.6 1/50

-0.3 EV 400 ISO

1 Shooting Mode 2 Macro Mode 3 Self-timer 4 Zoom Display (By turning the Zoom Lever) 5 Focus Frame 6 SD Memory Card/Built-in Memory 7 Battery Status 28 Image Size 8 White Balance 9 Color Effect 10 Number of remaining shots 11 12 Video Quality 13 14 Remaining Recording Time 15 Exposure Compensation 16 Shutter Speed 17 Histogram 18 Aperture Value ISO Value 19 OIS (Optical Image Stabilization) 20 HDR 21 Eye-Fi ON (with signal) 22 Expo Metering 23 Continuous Shot 24 AF Mode 25 Flash Mode Overview of the screen icons in movie mode

SD x3.6 00:56:00 00:56:00

-0.3 EV

1 Movie Mode 2 Macro Mode 3 Self-timer 4 Zoom Display (By turning the Zoom Lever) 5 SD Memory Card/Built-in Memory 6 Battery Status 7 Color Effect 8 Video Quality 9 Remaining Recording Time 10 Exposure Compensation 11 OIS (Optical Image Stabilization) 12 Focus Frame 13 Eye-Fi ON (with signal) 14 Expo Metering 15 AF Mode For optimal video shooting, it is recommended that an SDHC memory card be used. Optical Zoom and Digital Zoom can be adjusted (208X in total). Digital Zoom can be adjusted to 4X. 29 Overview of the screen icons in playback mode 4 SD Memory Card/Built-in Memory 5 Battery Status 6 Zoom Magnification Area 7 8 Image Zoom Ratios Image Zone 9 Shooting Date 10 Continuous Capture Group Playback 11 Eye-Fi ON (with signal) 12 Red-Eye Reduction 13 HDR 14 Date Folder 1 DPOF File 2 File Protection 3 Memory Space (indicating the current number of photos and total number of photos) 30 30 Using the Mode Dial This camera provides a convenient mode dial that allows you to manually switch between different modes with ease. Select an appropriate capture mode 1. Press the Power button to turn the camera on, and make camera lens focus on the subject to be shot then find a view by the LCD. 2. Rotate the mode dial to select an appropriate shooting mode. Auto Mode Program AE Manual Mode Face Beautifier Movie Mode Custom Settings Shutter priority Wi-Fi Mode Aperture priority Scene Mode 3. Rotate the zoom lever to zoom in or out of the subjects and compose a photo within the framing scope. 4. Press the Shutter button half way down to focus on the subject. When the focus frame turns green, press the Shutter button completely down to take the picture. 31 Auto Mode The camera will automatically detect the most suitable scene to capture the best pictures. SD 00:56:00 Auto Mode The camera will automatically adjust the exposure and focus to ensure the best possible pictures. Landscape Mode For landscapes, will automatically adjust the exposure and reproduce vivid green and blue colors. 32 Portrait Mode Most suitable for capturing people with focus on their faces. Night Portrait When you take portraits at night, or in low light conditions, will automatically adjust the exposure for people and night scenes. Backlit Portrait When the sun or any other light source is behind you, will automatically adjust the foreground exposure to produce the best pictures possible. Night Mode For night scenes, will automatically increase the ISO value to compensate for low light. Macro Mode To produce more detailed close-ups, will automatically engage the cameras Macro Mode and automatically focus the lens. 33 Program AE The user can switch the ISO and EV value according to personal preference, the camera can automatically set the shutter speed and aperture value. Shutter priority The user can adjust the shutter speed, EV and ISO values. It is mostly used to shoot the moving object. Aperture priority The user can adjust the aperture size, EV and ISO values. It is generally used to shoot inanimate object and control the view depth. Manual Mode The user can adjust the aperture size, EV and ISO values manually. It is generally used to shoot static photos. 34 Mode:

Follow the steps below to adjust the parameters:

1. Rotate the mode dial to select a mode you want, press the button to configure settings. F2.8F2.8 1/50 1/50 0.3 EV 0.3 EV 400 ISO 400 ISO 2. Press the 3. Press the 4. Press the

/

/

button to select an adjustment item.

button to adjust the parameters. button to confirm the settings and enter the shooting screen. Items that can be adjusted under mode: ( O: Optional X: Not optional, auto display) Items Mode Aperture value Shutter speed EV value ISO value X X O O X O X O O O O X O O O O 35 Face Beautifier The camera is set to automatically adjust camera exposure for realistic portrayal of skin tones. 1. Rotate the mode dial to select

. button and press the 2. Press the 3. Press the

/

button to select an option and press the button to confirm and

/

button to select

. return to photo shooting mode. SD x3.6x3.6 1234 16M 00:56:00

-0.3 EV 400 ISO Effect 1: Skin Soften Effect 2: Skin Soften+Eye Brightening Effect 3: Skin Soften+Eye Brightening+Eye Enlargement 36 Wi-Fi Mode Make image transmission and remote control by connecting smart device with Wi-Fi. Matters needing attention before use Before use, please confirm that your smart device is a smart phone with Android 2.3 or 4.x system, a tablet computer with Android 4.x or is an iOS 6/7 system. If not, please upgrade your smart device before using the APP. Please do not use in places having high intensity magnetic field, electrostatic and electric wave interference (for example near a microwave oven), which may cause failure in receiving signals. To maintain a connection, please keep the camera within 10 meters (32.8 feet) without signal shielding interference. Please do not use Wi-Fi connection functionality on a plane. The camera and the smart device can only be connected one to one. 37 Route of downloading the APP package:

Please download APP installation package(APP name: PIXPRO Remote Viewer) to your smart device from the path below and install this application procedure according to the interface prompt. Android system:

iOS system:

Search for PIXPRO Remote Viewer from Google play and install it. Search for PIXPRO Remote Viewer from APP Store and install it. https://play.google.com/store/apps/

details?id=com.jkimaging.pixproremoteviewer https://itunes.apple.com/us/app/

pixpro-remote-viewer/id833154167?mt=8 Refer to the "PIXPRO Remote Viewer User Manual" located on the web:

Americas Europe http://kodakpixpro.com/

Americas/support/downloads.php http://www.kodakpixpro.com/

Europe/support/multi-lang-downloads.php 38 1. Rotate the mode dial to select and then enter the Wi-Fi selection interface. Wi-Fi Mode Settings Station AP mode In AP mode, the camera will act as an access point enabling another wifi device to connect to it. 2. Press the

/

button to select and set options. Settings: Customize the Wi-Fi settings for the camera system. Station:

Use the Station Mode to connect to a "Personal Hotspot" created by your mobile device. AP mode:

In AP mode, the camera will act as an access point enabling another Wi-

Fi device to connect to it. Rotate the mode dial to disconnect. 39 Settings of Smart Device:

2. Enable the Wi-Fi of smart device and then search surrounding wireless devices. 3. Select the name of camera SSID to be connected and then input the eight-digit number password after WPA2 PSK on the camera. 4. Click the icon of the APP to enable the APP. Set up completion:

5. Once the APP is connected to the camera, functional operations can be enabled on the smart device. AP mode This camera may connect with your smart device through Wi-Fi. Settings of Camera:

1. Select and press the button to enter the setting interface. AP mode Setting pre-connected device for the following serial number:

WPA2 PSK: XXXXXXXX Refresh Back Press the select :

/

button to Refresh: Create a new WPA2 PSK password Back:

Back to previous page 40 Station Enable image transmission and remote control by connecting the camera with a Wi-Fi access point created by your smart device. 1. Enable the Wi-Fi access point of smart device. 2. Select on camera and then press the button to confirm connection with smart device. Wi-Fi Mode Station Searching for devices.

*SSID Device1-SSID Device2-SSID Device3-SSID

Press the

/

button to select:

Scan: Search again surrounding wireless

:

devices. Select the name of device to be connected. Back: Back to previous page. 3. Press the

/

button to select the name of smart device to be connected and then press the button to confirm. Then, the camera enters the password input interface. Enter Password A K U 4 B C D E F G L M N O P Q V W X Y Z A/a H R 1 I S 2 J T 3 5 6 7 9 0

#!?

Type the network security key Save Cancel Meanings of interface icons:

Icon Description Delete the last letter

#!?

Switch the display of letters in capital and lowercase Move the Cursor Switch the symbol input Input Space 41 4. Press the

/

/

/

buttons to select and then press the button to confirm your selection. Enter the completion of WPA2 PSK after password storage. 5. Connect immediately after saving. If connected, the LCD will display as shown below:

Wi-Fi Mode Station Connected with device SSID: XXXXXXXX Disconnect If connect failed, please check Wi-Fi device and try again. 6. After connection, click the icon of the APP on the smart device, you may use it to carry out relative operation. 42 Display of Wi-Fi Connection Status The Wi-Fi has successfully connected but APP is not enabled:

Wi-Fi Mode AP mode Connected with device.

Disconnect The Wi-Fi has successfully connected and APP is enabled:

Wi-Fi Mode Connected with APP XXXXX Disconnect For interrupting the connection:

The Wi-Fi of smart device interrupts:

Wi-Fi Mode Disconnect from device?

No Yes Wi-Fi Mode AP mode Disconnected, please check Wi-Fi device and try again. Back No:

Keep Wi-Fi connected and back to previous page. Yes: Disconnect and back to Wi-Fi mode for interface connection. Back: Back to Wi-Fi mode SSID screen. 43 Settings The name of this camera can be changed through key stroking. 1. Select and then press the button to enter the setting interface. 2. Press the

/

button to select the option to be adjusted and then press the button to enter the menu. DSC device KODAK PIXPRO AZ526 MAC address 386793XXXXXX DSC device The default name of DSC device isKODAK PIXPRO AZ526. Change the name of DSC device through key stroking. DSC device KODAK PIXPRO AZ526 A K U 4 B C D E F G L M N O P Q V W X Y Z A/a H R 1 I S 2 J T 3 5 6 7 9 0

#!?

Name between 1-18 Letters Save Cancel For the method of input, please refer to the introduction on password input on Page 41. 3. Press the button to confirm settings and MAC address then skip the menu. Check the wireless MAC address of this camera. 44 Scene Mode The user can select an appropriate mode from the 13 scene modes according to the type of environment you are shooting. The camera then configures the most appropriate settings automatically. 1. Rotate the mode dial to select

/

2. Press the to confirm.

/

.

/

Multi Exposure

buttons to select a scene, and press the button 3. If any need of changing the scene, please press the button and then the button and finally the

/

/

/

buttons to reselect the scene. 45

 

 

User Manual Before You Start Declaration of Conformity Responsible Party:

Address:

Company Website:

JK Imaging Ltd. 1411 W. 190th Street, Suite 550, Gardena, CA 90248, USA www.kodakpixpro.com INDUSTRY CANADA This device complies with Canadian RSS-210. This device complies with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard (s).Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. Radiation Exposure Statement:

This product complies with the Canadian portable RF exposure limit set forth for an uncontrolled environment and is safe for intended operation as described in this manual. Additional RF exposure reduction can be achieved if the product can be kept as far as possible from the user body or set the device to lower output power if such function is available. Industry Canada statement:

Ce dispositif est conforme la norme CNR-210 dIndustrie Canada applicable aux appareils radio exempts de licence. Son fonctionnement est sujet aux deux conditions suivantes: (1) le dispositif ne doit pas produire de brouillage prjudiciable, et (2) ce dispositif doit accepter tout brouillage reu, y compris un brouillage susceptible de provoquer un fonctionnement indsirable. Dclaration dexposition aux radiations:

1 1 Le produit est conforme aux limites dexposition pour les appareils portables RF pour les Etats-Unis et le Canada tablies pour un environnement non contrl. Le produit est sr pour un fonctionnement tel que dcrit dans ce manuel. La rduction aux expositions RF peut tre augmente si lappareil peut tre conserv aussi loin que possible du corps de lutilisateur ou que le dispositif est rgl sur la puissance de sortie la plus faible si une telle fonction est disponible. For Customers in Europe This symbol [crossed-out wheel bin WEEE Annex IV] indicates separate collection of electrical waste and electronic equipment in the European countries. Please do not throw the equipment into domestic refuse. Please use the return and collection systems available in your country for proper, safe disposal of this product. CE mark indicates that this product complies with the European requirements for safety, health, environment and customer protection. CE marked cameras are intended for sales in Europe. Europe EU Declaration of Conformity This device complies with the essential requirements of the R&TTE Directive 1999/5/EC. The following test methods have been applied in order to provepresumption of conformity with the essential requirements of the R&TTE Directive 1999/5/EC:

- EN 60950-1: 2006+A11:2009 +A1:2010 +A12:2011 Safety of Information Technology Equipment

- EN 50566: 2013 Product standard to demonstrate compliance of radio frequency fields from handheld and body- mounted wireless communication devices used by the general public (30 MHz 6 GHz) 2

- EN 62209-2: 2010 Human exposure to radio frequency fields from handheld and bodymounted wireless communication devices Human models, instrumentation, and procedures Part 2: Procedure to determine the specific absorption rate (SAR) for wireless communication devices used in close proximity to the human body (frequency range of 30 MHz to 6 GHz)

- EN 300 328 V1.8.1 : 2012 Electromagnetic compatibility and Radio spectrum Matters (ERM); Wideband Transmission systems; Data transmission equipment operating in the 2.4 GHz ISM band and using spread spectrum modulation techniques; Harmonized EN covering essential requirements under article 3.2 of the R&TTE Directive.

- EN 301 489-1 V1.9.2: 2008 Electromagnetic compatibility and Radio Spectrum Matters (ERM); Electro Magnetic Compatibility (EMC) standard for radio equipment and services; Part 1: Common technical requirements.

- EN 301 489-17 V2.2.1:2012 Electromagnetic compatibility and Radio spectrum Matters (ERM); Electro Magnetic Compatibility (EMC) standard for radio equipment and services; Part 17: Specific conditions for 2.4 GHz wideband transmission systems and 5 GHz high performance RLAN equipment. For Customers in the U.S.A. Federal Communication Commission Interference Statement This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. 3 This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one of the following measures:

- Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.

- Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.

- Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.

- Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help. FCC Caution: Any changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the users authority to operate this equipment. This transmitter must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter. Radiation Exposure Statement:

This product complies with the FCC portable RF exposure limit set forth for an uncontrolled environment and is safe for intended operation as described in this manual. Additional RF exposure reduction can be achieved if the product can be kept as far as possible from the user body or set the device to lower output power if such function is available. 4 About this Manual Thank you for purchasing the KODAK PIXPRO Digital Camera. Please carefully read this manual and keep it well for future reference. JK Imaging Ltd. reserves all rights of this document. No part of this published manual may be reproduced, transmitted, transcribed, stored in a retrieval system or translated into any language or computer language, in any form, by any means, without the prior written permission of JK Imaging Ltd.. All trademarks mentioned in this manual are used for identification purposes only and are properties of their respective owners. This manual provides you with instructions on how to use your new KODAK PIXPRO Digital Camera. Every effort has been made to ensure that the contents of this manual are accurate;

however JK Imaging Ltd. reserves the right to make changes without notice. Throughout this manual, the following symbols are used to help you locate information quickly and easily:

Indicates useful information. Indicates precautions are to be taken while operating the camera. In introducing you how to operate this camera, the following symbols may appear to facilitate your understanding:

Item properties: The optional properties in the camera interface are indicated by the symbol . 5 Safety Notes Safety notes for this camera Do not drop the camera or allow it to hit When you take the camera from a solid objects. Do not disassemble or repair this camera by yourself. To prevent the camera from being damaged by moisture, do not use or store the camera in very humid environments, such as in rain or near bodies of water. Do not use or store the camera in dusty places or on a beach to prevent dust or sand from entering the camera, causing possible damage to it. Do not use or store the camera in a hot environment or under direct sunlight. Do not use or store the camera near a powerful magnetic field, for example near a magnet or transformer. Avoid touching the lens of the camera. Do not expose the camera to direct sunlight for a long period time. Turn the camera off, remove the battery and the memory card, and dry it within 24 hours if water accidentally comes in contact with the camera. 6 cold place to a warmer environment, condensation may occur. Please wait for a reasonable period of time before you turn it on. Before you remove the battery and memory card, the camera should be turned off. In cleaning the camera body, please dont use corrosive cleaning agents or those with alcohol or organic solvent. Use the professional lens wiping cloth and dedicated cleaner to wipe and clean the lens. Download your photos and remove the memory card when you are going to store the camera for a long period of time. If this camera is not in use for a long time, please keep it in a dry and clean condition. Our company will not pay compensation for any failure of playback of pictures or videos caused by improper operation. Safety notes for battery Please use a battery that is the same type Do not expose the battery to water. Always as the one included. keep the battery contacts dry. Please use the attached charger to charge Do not heat the battery or throw it into a the battery. If the liquid leaking from the battery contacts with your skin, please immediately flush with water and seek medical treatment. If the liquid leaks into the camera, please contact the retailer. Please dispose the wasted battery in accordance with local (national or regional) regulations. To prevent the battery from being damaged, do not drop the battery or allow it to hit solid objects or to be scratched by the objects. Do not let the battery come in contact with metal objects (including coins) to avoid short circuiting, discharging, excessive heat, or possible leakage. Do not attempt to disassemble the battery. fire to avoid a possible explosion. Do not store the battery in a hot environment or in direct sunlight. If an overheating happens during charging or use, please immediately stop charging or using and then take out the battery with care in shutdown mode to wait it for cooling. If it is not used for a long time, please remove the battery for proper keeping. In a colder environment, the performance of the battery could be noticeably reduced. When you install the battery, install it according to the positive and negative markings on the battery compartment. Never force it into the battery compartment. 7 7 Safety notes for memory card We suggest buying only well-known, name brand memory cards to ensure peak performance. Format the memory card using the camera before you use it or insert a new one. Do not make the memory card fall off from high places or hit by heavy objects to prevent damaging it. Do not attempt to disassemble or repair the memory card. Do not expose the memory card to water. Always keep it dry. Do not remove the memory card when the camera is turned on. Otherwise, the memory card could be damaged. Do not directly edit the data on the memory card. Copy the data to your PC before you edit them. When the camera is stored for a long period of time, be sure to download your photos and remove the memory card. Store it in a dry environment. Do not modify the name of the files or folders of the memory card using your PC. Modifying the file names may cause the files to not be recognized on the camera or a possible error may occur. A photo taken with the camera will be stored in the folder that is automatically generated on the memory card. Do not store photos that are not taken using this camera in these folders as the pictures cannot be recognized during the playback. When you insert a memory card, make sure the notch of the card matches the markings on the top of the card slot. 8 Other Safety Notes Do not disconnect the power or turn the camera off during the update process. Doing so may cause incorrect data to be written and the camera may not power on later. Do not hang the neck strap of the camera around the neck of a child. When using your camera on an airplane, observe the relevant rules specified by the airline. Due to the limitations of manufacturing technology, LCD may have a few dead or bright pixels. These pixels do no effect the quality or performance of the camera, photos or video. Do not expose LCD to water. In a humid environment, only wipe it with a soft and dry cleaning cloth. If LCD is damaged and the liquid crystal comes into contact with your skin, wipe your skin with a dry cloth immediately and rinse it with clean water. If liquid crystal comes into contact with your eyes, wash them with clean water at least for 15 minutes and seek immediate medical attention. If you accidentally swallow liquid crystal, rinse your mouth immediately and seek medical attention. 9 Contents Before You Start ............................. 1 Set your Language, Date/Time after the first power-on ......................24 Safety Notes ................................... 6 Resetting your Language ....................25 Contents .........................................10 Getting Ready ...............................15 Accessories Included ..................................15 Install Lens Cap and Neck Strap ...............16 Part Names ...................................................17 Installing Battery and Memory Card .......19 Charging Battery..........................................21 Turning Camera On and Off ......................23 Set your Language, Date/Time ................24 10 Resetting Date/Time ..........................26 Mode Overview ............................27 Display Setting .............................................27 LCD Display ..................................................28 Overview of the screen icons in photo shooting mode .....................28 Overview of the screen icons in movie mode ......................................29 Overview of the screen icons in playback mode .................................30 Using the Mode Dial ....................31 Select an appropriate capture mode .......31 Focus Setting ................................................54 Auto Mode ............................................32 Macro Mode .................................................55 Program AE ...........................................34 Self-timer Setting ........................................56 Shutter priority .....................................34 Flash Mode ...................................................57 Aperture priority ..................................34 White Balance Setting ................................58 Manual Mode .......................................34 Continuous Shot ..........................................59 Face Beautifier ......................................36 EV Settings ....................................................60 Wi-Fi Mode ...........................................37 Exposure Compensation ....................60 Scene Mode ..........................................45 ISO ..........................................................61 Movie Mode..........................................50 Shutter Adjustment.............................61 Custom Settings...................................51 Aperture Adjustment .........................62 Basic Operation ............................53 Using the Zoom Function ...........................53 Using Quick Recording ...............................62 i Button Function Menu ..............................63 11 11 Playback Mode .............................64 OIS (Optical Image Stabilization) ....73 Viewing Photos and Videos .......................64 Cont. AF .................................................73 Thumbnail View ...........................................65 HDR ........................................................74 Using Zoom Playback (for still pictures only) ...............................................66 Photos and Video Deletion ........................67 Slideshow ......................................................68 Continuous Capture Group Playback ......69 Animation panorama play .........................70 Beautifier ...............................................74 Scene ......................................................75 Photo Shooting Settings Menu .................76 Quality ...................................................76 AF-Assist Beam ....................................77 Digital Zoom .........................................77 Using the Menus ..........................71 Date Imprint .........................................77 Photo Setup Menu .......................................71 Quick Review ........................................78 Expo Metering ......................................71 Custom Settings...................................78 Image Size .............................................72 Movie Menu .................................................79 12 Expo Metering ......................................79 Playback Settings Menu .............................88 Movie Size .............................................80 Protect ....................................................89 OIS (Optical Image Stabilization) ....81 Delete .....................................................90 Movie Setting Menu ...................................82 DPOF (Digital Print Order Format) ..91 Digital Zoom .........................................83 Trim .........................................................91 Custom Settings...................................83 General Settings Menu ..............................92 Playback Menu.............................................84 Sound Settings .....................................93 Playback Mode .....................................84 Power Saver ..........................................93 HDR ........................................................85 Language ...............................................94 Touch-up ................................................85 Zone........................................................94 Rotate .....................................................86 Date/Time ............................................94 Resize .....................................................86 LCD Brightness .....................................94 i button playback function .................87 File Settings ..................................................95 13 Format ....................................................96 Using the PictBridge Menu ............. 104 Copy to Card .........................................96 Video System ............................................ 108 File Numbering .....................................97 Set Eye-Fi SD Card Connection Mode .. 109 Reset .......................................................97 Supported HDMI Connections .............. 110 FW Version ...........................................98 Connecting HDMI-Ready TV ......... 110 Connection Settings ....................99 Appendices .................................. 111 Connecting to a Computer ..................... 100 Product Specifications ............................. 111 Setting the USB Mode ..................... 100 Prompts and Warning Messages .......... 115 Troubleshooting ........................................ 119 Transferring files to your computer ............................................ 101 Connecting to a PictBridge Compatible Printer ................................... 102 Setting the USB Mode ..................... 102 Connecting to your Printer ............. 103 14 14 Getting Ready Accessories Included Your camera box should contain the camera model you purchased along with the following accessories. If anything is missing or appears to be damaged, please contact your retailer. (The battery chargers may be a little different in shape due to the difference of countries or regions this type of cameras are sold to, so please subject to the physical product.) Rechargeable Li-ion battery AC adapter Micro USB cable Lens cap with strap Quick Start Guide STOP Neck strap Quick start guide Warranty card Service card 15 Install Lens Cap and Neck Strap

16 Part Names

1. Micro HDMI port 2. Micro USB port

3. Zoom lever 4. Shutter button 5. Strap eyelet 6. 7.

Exposure compensation button Continuous shot button 8. Power button 9. AF assist beam/Self-timer lamp 10. Flash lamp 11. Lens 17

28 29 18 Indicator lamp 12. Flash button 13. Microphone 14. 15. Mode dial 16. 17. 18. 19. 20. 21.

Fast video recording button Menu button

AF button/Up button

Macro button/Left button

Flash button/Right button

Delete button/Self-timer button/Down button Display button Playback button SET button i button 22. 23. 24. 25. 26. LCD 27. Speaker 28. Battery cover 29. Tripod socket Installing Battery and Memory Card 1. Open the battery cover according to the 2. Insert the battery into the battery direction of arrow. compartment according to the negative and positive directions as illustrated in the picture. Push the battery down until it locks in place. 2 1 Battery lock knob 19 3. Insert the memory card into the memory 4. Close the battery cover. card slot as shown in the diagram. Write protection buckle 1 2 The memory card (SD/SDHC) is optional and not included in all camera packaging. If you have to purchase a memory card, select one with storage capacity between 4GB and 32GB to ensure correct data storage. To remove your memory card, open the battery cover, gently press the memory card to eject it and remove it carefully. 20 Charging Battery Please insert the battery and charge it under shutdown mode. 1. Connect the camera and the power charger using the supplied Micro USB cable. 2. Insert the plug of the power charger into the power outlet to charge the battery. After the battery is stored for a long period of time, use the supplied power charger to charge the battery prior to use. To have maximum battery life, charge the battery for at least 4 hours the first time. Charging indicator:

Steady orange: Charging The indicator will go out once charging is finished, and the camera will be powered off automatically. 2 1 Indicator lamp 21 3. When the camera is turned off, you can also connect the camera to your PC using a USB cable to charge the battery. 3 Please charge the battery indoors between 0C and 40C. 22 Turning Camera On and Off Press the Power button to turn the camera on. To turn the camera off, press the Power button again. Power Button Press and hold the button to power on and enter Playback mode. 23 Set your Language, Date/Time Set your Language, Date/Time after the first power-on 1. When you turn the camera on for the first time, the language selection screen appears.

/

buttons to select your desired language.

/

/ 2. Press the

3. After you press the button to confirm the selection, the Date/Time settings screen appears. 4. Press the

/

button to select the Date/Time to be adjusted: Time is displayed in yyyy:MM:dd HH:mm. 5. Press the

/

button to adjust the value for the selected Date/Time. Language

English Franais Date & Time Espaol Portugus Italiano Deutsch y Svenska H-M 6. Press the button to confirm the time settings and the shooting screen appears. 2014 06

20 00 00

:

Back 24 Resetting your Language After you set your language for the first time, follow the instructions below to reset your language. button, press the 1. Press the

button to select button to enter the menu.

/

, and press the 2. Press the

/

button or the

button to select button to

, and press the enter the menu.

Press the button to select Languageand press the button or the

/

button to enter the menu.

/

/

4. Press the 3. Sound Settings Power Saver Language World Time Auto English Home Date & Time 2014.06.20 00:00

/

Language buttons to select your desired language and press the button to confirm. 5. Press the appears. button and the shooting screen

English Franais Espaol Portugus Italiano Deutsch y Svenska 25 Resetting Date/Time After you set your Date/Time for the first time, follow the instructions below to reset date and time. button, press the

/

1. Press the

button to select button to enter the menu.

, and press the 2. Press the

, and press the enter the menu.

/

button or the

button to select button to

3. Press the

/

button to select Date & Timeand press the

button to enter the menu.

button or the 4. Press the

/

button to select the Date/Time to be adjusted: Time is displayed in yyyy:MM:dd HH:mm. 5. Press the

/

button to press the value for your selected block. After you finish your settings, press the button to confirm. 6. Press the appears. button and the shooting screen 26 26 Sound Settings Power Saver Language World Time Auto English Home Date & Time 2014.06.20 00:00 Date & Time H-M 2014 06

20 00 00

:

Back Mode Overview Display Setting Press the button to display the settings: Classic, Full, Off. Classic: Displays the camera parameters on Off: Does not display any additional icons on screen screen SD 1234 00:56:00 F2.8 1/50

-0.3 EV 400 ISO Full: Camera parameters with Grid and Histogram SD 1234 00:56:00 F2.8 1/50

-0.3 EV 400 ISO 27 LCD Display Overview of the screen icons in photo shooting mode

SD x3.6x3.6 1234 16M 00:56:00 F3.6F3.6 1/50

-0.3 EV 400 ISO

1 Shooting Mode 2 Macro Mode 3 Self-timer 4 Zoom Display (By turning the Zoom Lever) 5 Focus Frame 6 SD Memory Card/Built-in Memory 7 Battery Status 28 Image Size 8 White Balance 9 Color Effect 10 Number of remaining shots 11 12 Video Quality 13 14 Remaining Recording Time 15 16 Shutter Speed 17 Histogram 18 Aperture Value Exposure Compensation ISO Value 19 OIS (Optical Image Stabilization) Eye-Fi ON (with signal) 20 HDR 21 22 Expo Metering 23 Continuous Shot 24 AF Mode 25 Flash Mode Overview of the screen icons in movie mode

SD x3.6 00:56:00 00:56:00

-0.3 EV

1 Movie Mode 2 Macro Mode 3 Self-timer 4 Zoom Display (By turning the Zoom Lever) 5 SD Memory Card/Built-in Memory 6 Battery Status 7 Color Effect 8 Video Quality 9 Remaining Recording Time 10 Exposure Compensation 11 OIS (Optical Image Stabilization) 12 13 Focus Frame Eye-Fi ON (with signal) 14 Expo Metering 15 AF Mode For optimal video shooting, it is recommended that an SDHC memory card be used. Optical Zoom and Digital Zoom can be adjusted (208X in total). Digital Zoom can be adjusted to 4X. 29 Overview of the screen icons in playback mode 4 SD Memory Card/Built-in Memory 5 Battery Status 6 Zoom Magnification Area 7 8 Image Zoom Ratios Image Zone 9 Shooting Date 10 Continuous Capture Group Playback 11 Eye-Fi ON (with signal) 12 Red-Eye Reduction 13 HDR 14 Date Folder 1 DPOF File 2 File Protection 3 Memory Space (indicating the current number of photos and total number of photos) 30 30 Using the Mode Dial This camera provides a convenient mode dial that allows you to manually switch between different modes with ease. Select an appropriate capture mode 1. Press the Power button to turn the camera on, and make camera lens focus on the subject to be shot then find a view by the LCD. 2. Rotate the mode dial to select an appropriate shooting mode. Auto Mode Program AE Manual Mode Face Beautifier Movie Mode Custom Settings Shutter priority Wi-Fi Mode Aperture priority Scene Mode 3. Rotate the zoom lever to zoom in or out of the subjects and compose a photo within the framing scope. 4. Press the Shutter button half way down to focus on the subject. When the focus frame turns green, press the Shutter button completely down to take the picture. 31 Auto Mode The camera will automatically detect the most suitable scene to capture the best pictures. SD 00:56:00 Auto Mode The camera will automatically adjust the exposure and focus to ensure the best possible pictures. Landscape Mode For landscapes, will automatically adjust the exposure and reproduce vivid green and blue colors. 32 Portrait Mode Most suitable for capturing people with focus on their faces. Night Portrait When you take portraits at night, or in low light conditions, will automatically adjust the exposure for people and night scenes. Backlit Portrait When the sun or any other light source is behind you, will automatically adjust the foreground exposure to produce the best pictures possible. Night Mode For night scenes, will automatically increase the ISO value to compensate for low light. Macro Mode To produce more detailed close-ups, will automatically engage the cameras Macro Mode and automatically focus the lens. 33 Program AE The user can switch the ISO and EV value according to personal preference, the camera can automatically set the shutter speed and aperture value. Shutter priority The user can adjust the shutter speed, EV and ISO values. It is mostly used to shoot the moving object. Aperture priority The user can adjust the aperture size, EV and ISO values. It is generally used to shoot inanimate object and control the view depth. Manual Mode The user can adjust the aperture size, EV and ISO values manually. It is generally used to shoot static photos. 34 Mode:

Follow the steps below to adjust the parameters:

1. Rotate the mode dial to select a mode you want, press the button to configure settings. F2.8F2.8 1/50 1/50 0.3 EV 0.3 EV 400 ISO 400 ISO 2. Press the 3. Press the 4. Press the

/

/

button to select an adjustment item.

button to adjust the parameters. button to confirm the settings and enter the shooting screen. Items that can be adjusted under mode: ( O: Optional X: Not optional, auto display) Items Mode Aperture value Shutter speed EV value ISO value X X O O X O X O O O O X O O O O 35 Face Beautifier The camera is set to automatically adjust camera exposure for realistic portrayal of skin tones. 1. Rotate the mode dial to select

. button and press the 2. Press the 3. Press the

/

button to select an option and press the button to confirm and

/

button to select

. return to photo shooting mode. SD x3.6x3.6 1234 16M 00:56:00

-0.3 EV 400 ISO Effect 1: Skin Soften Effect 2: Skin Soften+Eye Brightening Effect 3: Skin Soften+Eye Brightening+Eye Enlargement 36 Wi-Fi Mode Make image transmission and remote control by connecting smart device with Wi-Fi. Matters needing attention before use Before use, please confirm that your smart device is a smart phone with Android 2.3 or 4.x system, a tablet computer with Android 4.x or is an iOS 6/7 system. If not, please upgrade your smart device before using the APP. Please do not use in places having high intensity magnetic field, electrostatic and electric wave interference (for example near a microwave oven), which may cause failure in receiving signals. To maintain a connection, please keep the camera within 10 meters (32.8 feet) without signal shielding interference. Please do not use Wi-Fi connection functionality on a plane. The camera and the smart device can only be connected one to one. 37 Route of downloading the APP package:

Please download APP installation package(APP name: PIXPRO Remote Viewer) to your smart device from the path below and install this application procedure according to the interface prompt. Android system:

iOS system:

Search for PIXPRO Remote Viewer from Google play and install it. Search for PIXPRO Remote Viewer from APP Store and install it. https://play.google.com/store/apps/

details?id=com.jkimaging.pixproremoteviewer https://itunes.apple.com/us/app/

pixpro-remote-viewer/id833154167?mt=8 Refer to the "PIXPRO Remote Viewer User Manual" located on the web:

Americas Europe http://kodakpixpro.com/

Americas/support/downloads.php http://www.kodakpixpro.com/

Europe/support/multi-lang-downloads.php 38 1. Rotate the mode dial to select and then enter the Wi-Fi selection interface. Wi-Fi Mode Settings Station AP mode In AP mode, the camera will act as an access point enabling another wifi device to connect to it. 2. Press the

/

button to select and set options. Settings: Customize the Wi-Fi settings for the camera system. Station:

Use the Station Mode to connect to a "Personal Hotspot" created by your mobile device. AP mode:

In AP mode, the camera will act as an access point enabling another Wi-

Fi device to connect to it. Rotate the mode dial to disconnect. 39 Settings of Smart Device:

2. Enable the Wi-Fi of smart device and then search surrounding wireless devices. 3. Select the name of camera SSID to be connected and then input the eight-digit number password after WPA2 PSK on the camera. 4. Click the icon of the APP to enable the APP. Set up completion:

5. Once the APP is connected to the camera, functional operations can be enabled on the smart device. AP mode This camera may connect with your smart device through Wi-Fi. Settings of Camera:

1. Select and press the button to enter the setting interface. AP mode Setting pre-connected device for the following serial number:

SSID: KODAK PIXPRO AZ525_XXXX WPA2 PSK: XXXXXXXX Refresh Back Press the select :

/

button to Refresh: Create a new WPA2 PSK password Back:

Back to previous page 40

 

 

General Settings Volume

/

Set the volume of the product. There are 2 options:

Enable Off Power off

/

When this function is enabled, if there are no actions taken within a set time frame (except while recording or connected to Wi-Fi), the product will automatically shut down. There are 2 options:

60 seconds Off Date / Time Set the date and time of the product 1. The display shows the date and time setting screen, "Y M D hh:mm:ss";

2. The item to be adjusted will be highlighted with a black background color, press the to confirm;

or button to adjust the value, press the button 3. After adjusting the "minute" value, press the button to enter the secondary level menu interface. Format Format can clear all data stored in the memory card or the internal memory. When a memory card is inserted, only the card can be formatted. If you need to format the internal memory, remove the memory card first. Confirm Cancel There are 2 options:

If select secondary level menu interface after finishing.

, press the button to start formatting, and back to the Reset settings Reset settings can recover all product settings to the factory defaults (except for date and time). There are 2 options:

If select secondary level menu interface after finishing. button to start resetting, and back to the Confirm Cancel

, press the FW version button to back to FW version can display the current version. Press the the secondary level menu interface. When a new version is stored in the memory card, the firmware can be updated. There are 2 options in the update firmware interface:

If select automatically shut down after finishing. button to start updating, and the product will Confirm Cancel

, press the If the low battery warning is shown, charge the battery before updating the firmware. 20 Movie Settings Unfold mode (for Movie mode / Loop recording mode / Time Lapse mode) An Image unfold mode with several different effects has been provided for you. This function only modifies the unfold effect of a file instead of saving the display effect as a new file or replacing the original file. There are 4 options:

Dome *1 Front *2 Seg *1 Ring *1

*1 indicates that the default movie size corresponding to this option is

, which is not displayed when the movie size is set to or

.

*2 indicates that the default movie size corresponding to this option is

, which is only displayed when the movie size is set to

. or The movie size will automatically be restore to its default when switching between the *1 and *2 options. Movie size (for Movie mode / Loop recording mode / Time Lapse mode) Movie size refers to the image resolution during recording. There are 9 options:

19201080(30fps) *1 14401440(30fps) *2 10721072(30fps) *2 1280960(50fps) *1 1280960(30fps) *1 1280720(60fps) *1 1280720(30fps) *1 848480(60fps) *1 *3 848480(120fps) *1 *3

/

/

*1 indicates that the display is available in the

*2 indicates that the display is available in the

*3 indicates that the selection is unavailable in the Loop recording or Time Lapse modes. If such a movie size is set while in Movie mode, the movie size will be automatically set to recording or Time Lapse modes. when switching to Loop status. status. High speed movie The product shoots ultra high speed movies, and plays back with normal 30fps speed, in order to capture visually indistinguishable moments easily. The maximum recordable time is 60 seconds, when the time reaches 60 seconds, the product will automatically stop recording The sound cannot be recorded. Motion detection is invalid. Time Lapse (for Time Lapse mode) There are 6 options:

1 second 2 seconds 5 seconds 10 seconds 30 seconds 60 seconds 21 Time Lapse mode Motion detection is invalid. or cannot be selected. Loop recording (for Loop recording mode) There are 2 options:

5 minutes 10 minutes Loop recording mode Motion detection is invalid. or cannot be selected. Motion detection (for Movie mode) Motion detection means that if the product detects moving objects entering into the LCD screen, it will automatically start recording. During the recording process, if there is no moving object detected for 10 continuous seconds, the recording will be automatically paused. There are 2 options:

Off Enable 1. Enter the tertiary menu interface of Motion detectionselect and back to main screen. 2. The display shows the icon. Press the button, the product start detecting. If the product detects moving objects, it will automatically start recording 3. The product will stop recording when there is no change in the image within 10 seconds. When the image changes again, the product will start recording automatically, and this time it will regenerate a video file. 1 2 Indicates the total time of recording Indicates the total time from enable the Motion detection 4. Repress the button to stop recording and detecting. cannot be selected when the Motion detection is enable. Wind cut (for Movie mode / Loop recording mode / Time Lapse mode) Wind cut refers to the reduction of noise caused by wind. There are 2 options:

Enable Off White balance (for Movie mode / Loop recording mode / Time Lapse mode) White balance means that the user adjusts the color temperature under different light sources to ensure that the colors are reproduced correctly. There are 5 options:

Auto white balance Daylight Cloudy Fluorescent Under water 22 Still Settings Unfold mode(for Shooting mode / Burst shot mode) White balance(for Shooting mode / Burst shot mode) White balance means that the user adjusts the color temperature under different light sources to ensure that the colors are reproduced correctly. There are 5 options:

Auto white balance Daylight Cloudy Fluorescent Under water An Image unfold mode with several different effects has been provided for you. This function only modifies the unfold effect of a file instead of saving the display effect as a new file or replacing the original file. There are 4 options:

Dome *1 Front *2 Seg *1 Ring *1

*1 indicates that the default photo size corresponding to this option is

, which is not displayed when the photo size is set to

.

*2 indicates that the default photo size corresponding to this option is

, which is only displayed when the photo size is set to

. or The photo size will automatically be restore to its default when switching between the *1 and *2 options. Photo size(for Shooting mode / Burst shot mode) Photo size indicates the number of pixels used to capture the images. A photo having higher image resolution contains more details and is capable of better meeting big-screen fine photo printing requirements. There are 3 options:

32643264(1:1) *1 25921944(4:3) *2 19201080(16:9) *2

*1 indicates that the display is available in the

*2 indicates that the display is available in the

/

/

status. status. 23 Operational Applications The User Manuals for the Applications "PIXPRO SP360" (for smart device and for PC) are available at the website location below:

http://kodakpixpro.com/AsiaOceania/cn/support/downloads.php Please review the following items before your first connection:

1. Please do not use in places having high intensity magnetic field, electrostatic and electric wave interference (for example near a microwave oven), which may cause failure in receiving signals. 2. Please do not use Wi-Fi or NFC connection functionality on a plane. 3. To maintain a connection, please keep Action Cam within 20 meters (65 feet) without signal shielding interference. 4. Action Cam and the smart device can only be connected one to one. 5. Action Cam and PC only be connected one to one. Connect with Smart Device Your smart device operating system version needs to be iOS 6 or higher, or Android 4.0 or higher. Download and Install App Download the App installation package (App name: PIXPRO SP360) the interface. For Android devices, search and download the App "PIXPRO SP360" in Google play, and install it following the instructions on the interface. to your smart device from the path belowand install it following the instructions on For Apple devices, search and download the App "PIXPRO SP360" in App store, and install it following the instructions on the interface. Wi-Fi Connection Method (Android System and iOS System) 1. Action Cam: check SSID (PIXPRO-SP360_XXXX) and password (the initial password: 12345678) indicated on the label in the battery compartment of the Action Cam. In the main interface, press the button to switch to Wi-Fi mode. 2. Smart device: enable Wi-Fi mode, it will automatically search the nearby Wi-Fi hotspots. Select the one with the same SSID (PIXPRO-SP360_XXXX) and input the password. Upon connection, you can tap App icon to start using the App. NFC Connection Method (Android System) 1. Enable NFC mode on your smart device. 2. Use your smart device to slightly touch the NFC mark on the Action Cam; if the smart device has a prompt tone or vibration, it means the connection is successful. 24 3. The APP will open automatically on your smart device. The NFC feature will be available only when your smart device's screen is unlocked. After successful connection of your smart device with Action Cam, if you use another Action Cam to touch the smart device, the previous connection will be replaced. Connect with Computer Your computer operating system version needs to be Mac OS X10.7 or higher, or Window 8/7 or higher. Installing the Application Put the CD-ROM, one of the accessories, into the CD-ROM drive of the computer. The installation interface will appear after the driver operates automatically, click the icon on the desktop. 1.The Wi-Fi Connection (for Remote Viewfinder / Playback & Edit):

on the interface and then complete installation according to hints on the interface. After a successful installation, an icon will appear 1.1. Action Cam: check SSID (PIXPRO-SP360_XXXX) and password (the initial password: 12345678) indicated on the label in the battery compartment of the Action Cam. In the main interface, press the button to switch to Wi-Fi mode. 1.2. PC: enable Wi-Fi mode, it will automatically search the nearby Wi-Fi hotspots. Select the one with the same SSID (PIXPRO-SP360_XXXX) as the Action Cam and input the password. Upon connection, you can double click the App icon on the desktop to start using the App. 2.The USB Connection (for Playback & Edit):

2.1. Use a Micro USB cable to connect a computer (the computer should already be on) to the Action Cam. During the connection process, the Action Cam will display "Connecting ...", and the computer will automatically detect the Action Cam. 2.2. Double-click the application icon on the desktop to begin using. 3.Read Image Data in Computer Disk:

3.1. Use a Micro USB cable to connect a computer (the computer should already be on) to the Action Cam. During the connection process, the Action Cam will display "Connecting ...", and the computer will automatically detect the Action Cam. 3.2. Open the folder of the product on the computer and copy the data you need to the computer. After transmission is completed, please cancel the USB connection by safely pulling out the USB device from the computer system. 3.3. Pull out the Micro USB cable. The product will automatically shut down. 3.4. Double-click the application icon on the desktop to begin using. 25 Action Cam operations when in Wi-Fi mode When in Wi-Fi mode, press the exit Wi-Fi mode. button to immediately disconnect and 1. The Action Cam will enter the Waiting for Connection interface after entering Wi-Fi mode:

Now press the pressing the for the Connection interface. or button to select whether or not to disconnect. After button to wait buttons to select , press the Now press the Wi-Fi. After pressing the button to exit Wi-Fi mode. button in order to choose whether or not to turn off buttons to select

, press the or 4. Enter the Recording interface after the remote control starts recording. 2. When the Wi-Fi connection is successful, enter the Wi-Fi connection interface. Now press to recording). After pressing the the button to select whether or not to disconnect (stop

, press buttons to select or button to wait for the Connection interface. button in order to choose whether or not to Now press the disconnect. After pressing the the button to wait for the Connection interface or buttons to select

, press If connection is cut off while recording, the Action Cam will continue to record and enter the Connectionless recording interface.Now press the button to select whether or not to stop recording. After pressing the or button to wait for the buttons to select

, press the 3. When "PIXPRO SP360

" is enabled on a smart device or computer, enter the App connected interface. connection interface. 26 Use an interface Micro USB interface Charging

(

13) Using an external power supply In case of low battery power, or when a long-term power supply needed, an external power supply (AC adapter, vehicle power supply, portable power supply or other power unit) can be used instead of a battery. At this time, the setting of functions, photography, and other operations can be performed. When powered on, use a Micro USB cable to connect the Action Cam to an external power supply. When connected with an external power supply, "

be displayed on the LCD, but the battery will not be charged. When powered off, use a Micro USB cable to connect the Action Cam to the external power supply. Press and hold the connected to an external power supply, "

" will be displayed on the LCD, but the battery will not be charged. button to power on. When

" will Requirements for the external power supply: output power supply of 5 V, output current of 1 A. When powered on with a battery inserted, press ahd hold the button to shut down and begin charging the battery. In a shutdown state where the Action Cam was set to the Loop recording mode before shutdown, use a Micro USB cable to connect the Action Cam to the AC adapter (or an external power supply). The Action Cam will automatically start up and start recording. (For example: when the Action Cam is connected to a vehicle power supply, it will start and record automatically when the automobile starts. And stop recording after the automobile shuts down, the Action Cam will shut down automatically after saving the recorded files.) Data transmission Use a Micro USB cable to connect the Action Cam to a computer and copy files from the Action Cam to the computer. The steps are as follows:

1. Use a Micro USB cable to connect a computer (the computer should be on) to the Action Cam. During the connection, the Action Cam will display

"Connecting ...", and the computer will automatically detect the Action Cam. 2. Open the Action Cam folder on the computer to copy the needed files to the computer. After the transmission is completed, please unplug the USB 27 connection in a safe manner according to the computer's settings. 3. Unplug the Micro USB cable and the Action Cam will automatically shut down. The Action Cam supports Windows 8/7 and Mac OS X (V10.6.8~V10.9) systems. If there is a memory card inserted into the Action Cam, only files in the memory card will be read. If you want to read files in the internal memory, please remove the memory card before connecting to the computer. Micro HDMI interface The Action Cam can play back videos and photos on a TV through a Micro HDMI cable. Steps are as follows:

1. Use a Micro HDMI cable (to be purchased separately) to connect an HDMI-compliant TV and the Action Cam (the Action Cam and the TV need to be powered on);

2. "Connecting ..." will be displayed on the Action Cam. After the connection is successful, files in the intelnal memory or the memory card will be displayed on the TV. 3. Press the 4. When a video file appears on the screen, press the buttons browse the files to be switched. or button to start playback, press the button to rewind, press the button to fast forward, and press the button again to pause playback. When the Action Cam is connected to the TV while powered off, press and hold the button to power on. 28 Appendices Specifications Design and specifications are subject to change without notice. Image Sensor Lens Type Effective Pixels Total Pixels Focal Length 1/2.3" BSI CMOS 16.38 Megapixels 16.79 Megapixels 0.805mm Equivalent to 35mm film 16.8mm F number F2.8 Lens Construction 7 groups 9 elements Optical Zoom Fix Focus, 214 Degree Focusing Range 50cm~

Anti-Handshake Electronic Image Stabilization Number of Recording Pixels File Format Modes Photo size Movie size Photo Movie 10M : 32643264(1:1) 5M : 25921944(4:3) 2M : 19201080(16:9) 19201080(30fps) 14401440(30fps) 10721072(30fps) 1280960(50fps) 1280960(30fps) 1280720(60fps) 1280720(30fps) 848480(60fps) High Speed Movie : 848480(120fps) Exif 2.3 (JPEG) MP4 [Image: H.264; Audio: AAC(Stereo)]

Wi-FiMovieShootingLoop recordingTime LapseBurst shot 29 Waterproof Shockproof Dustproof Equivalent to JIS/IEC IPX5(Body) Up to 2m Equivalent to JIS/IEC (IP6X) Freeze-proofing

-10 LCD Level Gauge ISO Sensitivity 1.0 inch TN LCD 2-axis Auto (100~800) Exposure Metering Method Artificial Intelligence AE (AiAE) Exposure Control Method Burst shot White balance Recording Media Language Interface Wi-Fi NFC Program AE Supported Auto (AWB), Daylight, Cloudy, Fluorescent, Under water Internal Memory: Approx. 8MB microSD/microSDHC Card (Up to 32GB Support) [MMC Card Not Supported]

English USB 2.0 ( Micro 5 pin USB ) , HDMI ( Type D ) Supported(802.11b/g/n) Supported Remote Viewfinder Supported (via smart device) Power Shooting Capability (Battery Performance) Operation Environment Rechargeable Li-ion Battery LB-080, 3.6V 1250mAh, In-Action Cam Charging Approx. 350Shots (Based on CIPA Standards) Approx. 160min for Video (@1080p/30fps) Temperature: -10 ~ 40 , Humidity: 0 ~ 90%

Dimensions (WHD) Approx.41.150.038.0mm (Based on CIPA Standards) Weight Approx. 103g (Body Only) 30 Prompts and Warning Messages Message Description Processing mode The read time during a power up may be too long when there are too many folders. When pressing the because there are too many folders. button for shooting, the memory card cannot be accessed After copying the files to the computer, choose to delete or format. When turning on the product or pressing the the memory card is out of space. button, the product detects that After copying the files to the computer, choose to delete or format. When turning on the product or pressing the the internal memory is out of space. button, the product detects that After copying the files to the computer, choose to delete or format. Use memory card. The memory card still cannot be recognized after format. An error occurs when reading the memory card. Interruption logging problem is encountered in the period of writing in the memory card or recording in the video recording or shooting process. Format. The internal memory still cannot be recognized after format. An error occurs when reading the internal memory. Interruption logging problem is encountered in the period of writing in the memory card or recording in the video recording or shooting process. Format. 31 Message Description Processing mode When a memory card lower than Class 6 is used to record a HD or above movie, the writing speed is too slow and recording will not continue. Please select a memory card Class 6 and above. When the internal memory fails to record Loop recording, the write speed will slow down and recording will not continue. Use memory card. File processing (saving, formatting, etc.) time exceeds 2 seconds. User should do nothing. Connecting to the computer USB. Connecting to the HDMI device. The display is ended after connection is succeeded. Caution will appear before power off when the battery of the product is already dead. The firmware cannot be updated when power is insufficient. Charge or replace with a new battery. Updating firmware. User should do nothing. The product will turn off automatically after the update is completed. 32 Licensed Product The Kodak trademark and trade dress are used under license from Kodak. 2014 by JK Imaging Ltd. All rights reserved. JK Imaging Ltd. 1411 W. 190th Street, Suite 550, Gardena, CA 90248, USA www.kodakpixpro.com Ver.1

 

 

Handheld Night Reduce blur when shooting low light/ illuminated scenes. Quickly take 4 photos below 8M (including 8M) and then overlap as a clear night image. Pet Mode Rapidly identify pet (dog/cat), capture the dynamic moment of pet. When a cat /dog face is detected, a white focus frame appears. The camera will take a picture and save it regardless of whether the focus is successful (if successful, there appears a green focus frame; if not, there is an orange frame). At most, 10 dog/cat faces can be detected at one time. Sunset For sunsets. Capture subjects in strong sunlight. Fireworks For fireworks at night. Slow shutter speed adjusted for brilliant images. 46 Multi Exposure Suitable for shooting moving objects (as many as 7) in the same background. Keep camera steady before shooting. Press and hold the Shutter button to take 7 photos continuously when it will stop automatically. To stop shooting, release the Shutter button in the midway. Objects shall be moved only from left to the right in order to be recorded. Objects moving from other directions would not be recorded. Shooting effect will be influenced if object is moving too fast or too close. Sport For fast-moving subjects. Capture sharp action shots without blur. Night Portrait For portraits against night time scenery (Suggest using tripod). Landscape Speed adjusted for brilliant images. 47 Portrait For shooting portraits Snow For subjects in the snow. Reduce underexposure. Children For kids and pets. Flash is disabled for eye protection. Party For subjects at night without using a tripod. Capture sharp shots without blur. Panorama Mode This feature allows you to capture a panoramic view that will have significantly more content than a single photograph. Follow the instruction arrow with a smooth and steady movement of the camera to seamlessly shoot an ultra-wide scene of up to 360 degrees. Follow the steps below:

1. Select Panorama Mode (

2. Press the

/

), and then press the

/

/

buttons to select a shooting direction. (The right direction is used as default if you do not make any choice) 2 seconds later, the camera is ready to take pictures. You can also press the take pictures. button or half press the Shutter button to be ready to button to confirm. 48 3. Compose your shot on the LCD and half press the Shutter button to focus on the subject. After focusing, fully press the Shutter button down to take picture. At this time, the process dialog of panorama mode stitching appears on the screen. 4. Rotate the camera according to the set direction. When the range of rotation does not exceed the range that the camera can detect, the progress dialog along the indication arrow partially turns red. When it completely turns red, panorama mode shooting is finished. Panoramic image can be played back by the method of flash playing. Please see the animation panoramic playback on page 71. During shooting, the flash, self-timer, macro modes and exposure compensation are not available. Focus adjustment is also not available at this time. During panorama mode shooting, press the

current pictures taken. Press the previously taken pictures.

button to interrupt shooting and save the button to cancel shooting and not to save the During panorama mode shooting, when the moving direction of the camera is wrong or the angle deviates from the internal settings, the LCD shows a warning messageImproper alignment. Please try again.and the current pictures taken are saved. 49 Movie Mode Use this mode to record videos. Follow the steps below:

1. Rotate the mode dial to select

, and it will enter the movie screen. 2. Press the button or the Shutter button to start recording. x3.6 00:00:06 3. Press the button or the Shutter button again to stop recording, save it automatically and then the camera will return to the movie screen. In the recording process, you can rotate the zoom lever to zoom in or out of the subject. 50 Custom Settings The user can store the frequently used shooting modes or scene modes and parameters and switch to this mode for quick adjustment. Settings under after reset):

mode (unset state or state 1. Rotate the mode dial to select

, and then the camera enters the setting interface as shown below:

Select one capture mode to define CS . Auto Mode Save Exit 2. As shown in the figure, press the

/

button to select a capture mode that

you want to define as button to enter the shooting screen.

, and press the 3. As shown in the picture, press the button to confirm setting or to exit without setting by turning the mode dial. Go to setting CS mode. Yes Or Rotate the mode dial to skip . For setting under other modes (use this method to select a different custom setting):

1. Select any mode or scene mode to be stored. 2. Set your desired parameters in the current mode. 51 button and then the

/

3. Press the

button to select 4. Press the

/

select

, and press the button to enter the menu.

button to button or the 5. Press the

button to select Custom Settingsand then press the button or the

button to enter the Custom Settings Reset camera settings to custom settings mode. No Yes menu. Custom Settings 7. Rotate the mode dial to switch to

. 8. The photo settings you stored the last time are invoked. mode is used for the first When the time, there is no preset parameter stored in the mode. 6. SelectYesto save orNoto cancel. If you want to remove the parameter setting ofCustom Settings, please utilize the reset function as described on page 98. 52 52 Basic Operation Using EVF (Electronic View Finder) EVF can be used to observe the scenes and objects. EVF has the following advantages:

It will not be affected by ambient light and may avoid poor composition due to light reflection on the LCD. Follow the steps below:

1. Press the Power button to turn the camera on and press the button to switch to the EVF display. At this time, the LCD is closed. 2. View the scenes and objects through the EVF. 3. Press the button again or restart the camera to switch back to the LCD display. In Wi-Fi mode or Playback mode, the button is invalid. 53 Using the Zoom Function Your camera is equipped with two types of zoom functions: Optical Zoom and Digital Zoom. Rotate the Zoom Lever of the camera to zoom in or out of the subject while taking pictures. Zoom Lever When the Optical Zoom reaches the threshold as Digital Zoom, release and turn the Zoom Lever to T to switch between the Optical zoom and Digital zoom. Zoom Indicator 54 Focus Setting This function can be adjusted in settings:

1. Press the

button to enter the Focus menu. mode, please follow the steps below to configure the Single-AF

button to select the following 3 modes:

2. Press the

/

Single-AF The focus frame appears on the center of the LCD to focus on the subject. Multi-AF The camera automatically focuses the subject in a wide area to find the focus point. Object Tracking Smart tracking of the object in motion under the focusing shooting. 3. Press the button to confirm the settings and exit the menu. Once enabled, Object Tracking will only work when lens is focused on the object. 55 Macro Mode The Macro Setting is ideal for shooting small objects or close-up photos. This mode allows you to focus on subjects very close to the camera. It can be adjusted in 1. Press the mode, please follow the steps below to configure the settings:

button to enter the Marco menu. Macro Off 2. Press the

/

button to select the following 2 modes:

Macro Off Select this option to disable Macro. Macro On Select this option to make focusing on the object closer to the lens (At the W side, the shooting distance should be more than 1 cm). 3. Press the button to confirm the settings and exit the menu. 56 Self-timer Setting Using this function can take photos at regular time. The camera can be set to shoot after 2 seconds, 10 seconds since pressing the Shutter button or shoot after smile. It can be adjusted in settings:

1. Press the mode, please follow the steps below to configure the

button to enter the

Self-timer Smile Self-timer menu. Self-timer Off

button to select the 2. Press the

/

following 4 modes:

Self-timer Off Disables the Self-timer. Self-timer 2 sec A single picture is shot 2 seconds after the Shutter button is pressed. Self-timer 10 sec A single picture is shot 10 seconds after the Shutter button is pressed. Press the Shutter button and a picture will be taken immediately after a smile is detected. 3. Press the button to confirm the settings and exit the menu. When enabling the self-timer, pressing

the Shutter button or the button can disable the self-timer and return to the shooting screen, and keep the self-timer setting.

When enabling the smile detection, pressing the Shutter button or the button can disable the self-timer smile and return to the shooting screen, and keeping the self-timer smile setting. 57 Flash Mode The Flash is used to illuminate a subject in low light or for fill-in lighting to achieve better illumination of a subject with pronounced shadows. It can be adjusted in mode, please follow the steps below to configure the settings:

1. Press the

button to enter the Flash menu.

Force Off 2. Press the

/

button to select the following 6 modes:

Force Off Flash is turned off. Flash Auto Camera flash goes off automatically based on existing light conditions. Fill Flash The flash will engage with each shot even if there is enough available light to take the photo without flash. Slow Sync. This allows for night scenery photos that include people in the foreground. (Suggest using tripod) Slow Sync. + Red-Eye Use this mode for slow synchro shots with red-eye reduction. Red-Eye Reduction The camera emits a brief pre-flash before the picture is taken to reduce red-eye effects. 3. Press the button to confirm the settings and exit the option. Except for Force Off mode, half-pressing the shutter button to focus, the flash automatically pops up. 58 White Balance Setting The white balance function allows adjustment of the color temperature for different light sources. It can be adjusted in mode, please follow the steps below to configure the settings:

1. Press menu. button to enter the White Balance

AWBAWB

button to select 2. Press the

/

the following 8 modes:

AWB Daylight Cloudy Fluorescent Fluorescent CWF Incandescent Manual WB

(Fully press the Shutter button to detect the white balance value) Color Temp. (1900K~10000K)

/

Press the button to "Adjust the K value";

Press the K value.

button to exit the

3. Press the button to confirm the settings and exit the menu. 59 Continuous Shot This function can be adjusted in settings:

1. Press the button to enter the Continuous Shot menu. Single 2. Press the

/

button to select the following 5 modes:

Single Capture a single shot only. Continuous Shot Take several pictures at a time. 60 mode, please follow the steps below to configure the Cont.Shot-High Speed (VGA) For continuous shot with VGA pixel. Cont.Shot-Fast (4M) For continuous shot with 4M pixels. Time-Lapse Take pictures based on the preset interval (30sec/ 1min/ 5min/

10min). 3. Press the button to confirm the settings and exit the menu. 4. Press the Shutter button to start continuous shooting. In Continuous Shot mode, the flash is automatically set to Force Off in order to achieve quick succession of shots. EV Settings The EV function menu of the camera includes functions, such as EV adjustment, ISO adjustment, Shutter adjustment, Aperture adjustment, etc. Using the appropriate function settings can improve your pictures. Please follow the steps below to configure the settings:

1. Press the button to display the settings screen. 2. Press the

/

the setting options.

/

3. Press the

button to select

button to Exposure Compensation Set up to adjust the picture brightness. In the case of a very high contrast between the photographed object and the background, the brightness of the picture can be appropriately adjusted. (Adjustable in Mode) adjust the option values. 4. Press the button to complete the setting and enter shooting mode. F2.8F2.8 1/50 1/50 0.3 EV 0.3 EV 400 ISO 400 ISO The adjustable range of exposure value is from EV -3.0 to EV+3.0. 61 ISO ISO allows you to set the sensitivity of the camera sensor. Please use a higher ISO value in darker places and a lower value in brighter conditions. (Adjustable in Mode). Shutter Adjustment For shutter speed, the camera may automatically set the aperture value corresponding to the manually set shutter speed so as to obtain a most suitable exposure value. The movement of object may be shown by adjusting the shutter speed. High shutter value can make you clearly capture the movement of fast moving object while low shutter value can allow you to take a picture for fact moving object with a strong sense of movement. (Adjustable in Mode). F2.8F2.8 1/501/50 0.3 EV 0.3 EV 400 ISO 400 ISO The cameras ISO settings include: Auto, 100, 200, 400, 800, 1600 and 3200. F2.8F2.8 1/50 1/50 0.3 EV 0.3 EV

-1.0 EV 400 ISO 400 ISO 62 Aperture Adjustment You can adjust the aperture size value. Selecting a large aperture opening will emphasize the point of focus and show a blurry background and foreground. A small aperture opening will keep both the background and main object in clear focus. (Adjustable in Mode) Using Quick Recording In shooting mode, press the recording video. button to begin F2.8F2.8 1/501/50 0.3 EV 0.3 EV 400 ISO 400 ISO After recording, press the press the Shutter button to stop recording. The camera will store the video and return to the shooting screen. button again or 63 i Button Function Menu The Image Color Setting allows you to select different color effects. It can be adjusted in mode, please follow the steps below to configure the settings:

1. Press the button to select the Image Color Setting Menu.

2. Press the

/

button to select the Image Color Setting options.

(

) represents optional in Movie mode. Normal There are 20 Image Color options in photo shooting mode

:

Normal (

) Sepia (

) Vivid(

) Japan Style Italian Style French Style Punk Black and White (

) 64 64 Partial Color-Red (

) ) Partial Color-Blue (

) Partial Color-Yellow (

Partial Color-Green (

)

) Negative Dreamy Vignetting Salon Fish Eye Reflection 4 Grids - Stylish(2M) Sketch Playback Mode Viewing Photos and Videos Photos and videos are previewed in portrait mode even when made as landscape. To view photos and videos on the LCD:

1. After pressing the 2. Use the

/

button, the last photo or video clip taken will be displayed on the LCD.

button to scroll through the photos or video clips stored in the internal memory or on the memory card. 3. To play a selected video clip, press the During video playback, the operating instructions will appear on the screen. Press the appropriate buttons to enable the corresponding functions. button to enter the Movie Playback mode. Under Playback Paused Mute 1 2 3 4 5 00:00:47 00:01:23 Back to the beginning of the video 6 Play 7 Frame Forward 8 Cancel playback 9 10 Frame Backward 6 7 8 9 10 65 00:00:47 00:01:23 1 2 3 4 5 Increase Volume Pause Fast Forward Decrease Volume Rewind

 

 

Station Enable image transmission and remote control by connecting the camera with a Wi-Fi access point created by your smart device. 1. Enable the Wi-Fi access point of smart device. 2. Select on camera and then press the button to confirm connection with smart device. Wi-Fi Mode Station Searching for devices.

*SSID Device1-SSID Device2-SSID Device3-SSID

Press the

/

button to select:

Scan: Search again surrounding wireless

:

devices. Select the name of device to be connected. Back: Back to previous page. 3. Press the

/

button to select the name of smart device to be connected and then press the button to confirm. Then, the camera enters the password input interface. Enter Password A K U 4 B C D E F G L M N O P Q V W X Y Z A/a H R 1 I S 2 J T 3 5 6 7 9 0

#!?

Type the network security key Save Cancel Meanings of interface icons:

Icon Description Delete the last letter

#!?

Switch the display of letters in capital and lowercase Move the Cursor Switch the symbol input Input Space 41 Display of Wi-Fi Connection Status The Wi-Fi has successfully connected but APP is not enabled:

Wi-Fi Mode AP mode Connected with device.

Disconnect The Wi-Fi has successfully connected and APP is enabled:

Wi-Fi Mode Connected with APP XXXXX Disconnect 4. Press the

/

/

/

buttons to select and then press the button to confirm your selection. Enter the completion of WPA2 PSK after password storage. 5. Connect immediately after saving. If connected, the LCD will display as shown below:

Wi-Fi Mode Station Connected with device SSID: XXXXXXXX Disconnect If connect failed, please check Wi-Fi device and try again. 6. After connection, click the icon of the APP on the smart device, you may use it to carry out relative operation. 42 For interrupting the connection:

The Wi-Fi of smart device interrupts:

Wi-Fi Mode Disconnect from device?

No Yes Wi-Fi Mode AP mode Disconnected, please check Wi-Fi device and try again. Back No:

Keep Wi-Fi connected and back to previous page. Yes: Disconnect and back to Wi-Fi mode for interface connection. Back: Back to Wi-Fi mode SSID screen. 43 Settings The name of this camera can be changed through key stroking. 1. Select and then press the button to enter the setting interface. 2. Press the

/

button to select the option to be adjusted and then press the button to enter the menu. DSC device KODAK PIXPRO AZ525 MAC address 386793XXXXXX DSC device The default name of DSC device isKODAK PIXPRO AZ525. Change the name of DSC device through key stroking. DSC device KODAK PIXPRO AZ525 A K U 4 B C D E F G L M N O P Q V W X Y Z A/a H R 1 I S 2 J T 3 5 6 7 9 0

#!?

Name between 1-18 Letters Save Cancel For the method of input, please refer to the introduction on password input on Page 41. 3. Press the button to confirm settings and MAC address then skip the menu. Check the wireless MAC address of this camera. 44 Scene Mode The user can select an appropriate mode from the 13 scene modes according to the type of environment you are shooting. The camera then configures the most appropriate settings automatically. 1. Rotate the mode dial to select

/

2. Press the to confirm.

/

.

/

Multi Exposure

buttons to select a scene, and press the button 3. If any need of changing the scene, please press the button and then the button and finally the

/

/

/

buttons to reselect the scene. 45 Handheld Night Reduce blur when shooting low light/ illuminated scenes. Quickly take 4 photos below 8M (including 8M) and then overlap as a clear night image. Pet Mode Rapidly identify pet (dog/cat), capture the dynamic moment of pet. When a cat /dog face is detected, a white focus frame appears. The camera will take a picture and save it regardless of whether the focus is successful (if successful, there appears a green focus frame; if not, there is an orange frame). At most, 10 dog/cat faces can be detected at one time. Sunset For sunsets. Capture subjects in strong sunlight. Fireworks For fireworks at night. Slow shutter speed adjusted for brilliant images. 46 Multi Exposure Suitable for shooting moving objects (as many as 7) in the same background. Keep camera steady before shooting. Press and hold the Shutter button to take 7 photos continuously when it will stop automatically. To stop shooting, release the Shutter button in the midway. Objects shall be moved only from left to the right in order to be recorded. Objects moving from other directions would not be recorded. Shooting effect will be influenced if object is moving too fast or too close. Sport For fast-moving subjects. Capture sharp action shots without blur. Night Portrait For portraits against night time scenery (Suggest using tripod). Landscape Speed adjusted for brilliant images. 47 Portrait For shooting portraits Snow For subjects in the snow. Reduce underexposure. Children For kids and pets. Flash is disabled for eye protection. Party For subjects at night without using a tripod. Capture sharp shots without blur. Panorama Mode This feature allows you to capture a panoramic view that will have significantly more content than a single photograph. Follow the instruction arrow with a smooth and steady movement of the camera to seamlessly shoot an ultra-wide scene of up to 360 degrees. Follow the steps below:

1. Select Panorama Mode (

2. Press the

/

), and then press the

/

/

buttons to select a shooting direction. (The right direction is used as default if you do not make any choice) 2 seconds later, the camera is ready to take pictures. You can also press the take pictures. button or half press the Shutter button to be ready to button to confirm. 48 3. Compose your shot on the LCD and half press the Shutter button to focus on the subject. After focusing, fully press the Shutter button down to take picture. At this time, the process dialog of panorama mode stitching appears on the screen. 4. Rotate the camera according to the set direction. When the range of rotation does not exceed the range that the camera can detect, the progress dialog along the indication arrow partially turns red. When it completely turns red, panorama mode shooting is finished. Panoramic image can be played back by the method of flash playing. Please see the animation panoramic playback on page 70. During shooting, the flash, self-timer, macro modes and exposure compensation are not available. Focus adjustment is also not available at this time. During panorama mode shooting, press the

current pictures taken. Press the previously taken pictures.

button to interrupt shooting and save the button to cancel shooting and not to save the During panorama mode shooting, when the moving direction of the camera is wrong or the angle deviates from the internal settings, the LCD shows a warning messageImproper alignment. Please try again.and the current pictures taken are saved. 49 Movie Mode Use this mode to record videos. Follow the steps below:

1. Rotate the mode dial to select

, and it will enter the movie screen. 2. Press the button or the Shutter button to start recording. x3.6 00:00:06 3. Press the button or the Shutter button again to stop recording, save it automatically and then the camera will return to the movie screen. In the recording process, you can rotate the zoom lever to zoom in or out of the subject. 50 Custom Settings The user can store the frequently used shooting modes or scene modes and parameters and switch to this mode for quick adjustment. Settings under after reset):

mode (unset state or state 1. Rotate the mode dial to select

, and then the camera enters the setting interface as shown below:

Select one capture mode to define CS . Auto Mode Save Exit 2. As shown in the picture, press the

/

button to select a capture mode that and then press the

you want to define as

button to enter the shooting screen. 3. As shown in the picture, press the button to confirm setting or to exit without setting by turning the mode dial. Go to setting CS mode. Yes Or Rotate the mode dial to skip . For setting under other modes (use this method to select a different custom setting):

1. Select any mode or scene mode to be stored. 2. Set your desired parameters in the current mode. 51 button and then the

/

3. Press the

button to select 4. Press the

/

select

, and press the button to enter the menu.

button to button or the 5. Press the

button to select Custom Settingsand then press the button or the

button to enter the Custom Settings Reset camera settings to custom settings mode. No Yes menu. Custom Settings 7. Rotate the mode dial to switch to

. 8. The photo settings you stored the last time are invoked. mode is used for the first When the time, there is no preset parameter stored in the mode. 6. SelectYesto save orNoto cancel. If you want to remove the parameter setting ofCustom Settings, please utilize the reset function as described on page 97. 52 52 Basic Operation Using the Zoom Function Your camera is equipped with two types of zoom functions: Optical Zoom and Digital Zoom. Rotate the Zoom Lever of the camera to zoom in or out of the subject while taking pictures. Zoom Lever When the Optical Zoom reaches the threshold as Digital Zoom, release and turn the Zoom Lever to T to switch between the Optical zoom and Digital zoom. Zoom Indicator 53 Focus Setting This function can be adjusted in settings:

1. Press the

button to enter the Focus menu. mode, please follow the steps below to configure the Single-AF

button to select the following 3 modes:

2. Press the

/

Single-AF The focus frame appears on the center of the LCD to focus on the subject. Multi-AF The camera automatically focuses the subject in a wide area to find the focus point. Object Tracking Smart tracking of the object in motion under the focusing shooting. 3. Press the button to confirm the settings and exit the menu. Once enabled, Object Tracking will only work when lens is focused on the object. 54 Macro Mode The Macro Setting is ideal for shooting small objects or close-up photos. This mode allows you to focus on subjects very close to the camera. It can be adjusted in 1. Press the mode, please follow the steps below to configure the settings:

button to enter the Marco menu. Macro Off 2. Press the

/

button to select the following 2 modes:

Macro Off Select this option to disable Macro. Macro On Select this option to make focusing on the object closer to the lens (At the W side, the shooting distance should be more than 1 cm). 3. Press the button to confirm the settings and exit the menu. 55 Self-timer Setting Using this function can take photos at regular time. The camera can be set to shoot after 2 seconds, 10 seconds since pressing the Shutter button or shoot after smile. It can be adjusted in settings:

1. Press the mode, please follow the steps below to configure the button to enter the

Self-timer Smile Self-timer menu. Press the Shutter button and a picture will be taken immediately after a smile is detected. 3. Press the button to confirm the settings and exit the menu. When enabling the self-timer, pressing

the Shutter button or the button can disable the self-timer and return to the shooting screen, and keep the self-timer setting.

When enabling the smile detection, pressing the Shutter button or the button can disable the self-timer smile and return to the shooting screen, and keeping the self-timer smile setting. Self-timer Off

button to select the 2. Press the

/

following 4 modes:

Self-timer Off Disables the Self-timer. Self-timer 2 sec A single picture is shot 2 seconds after the Shutter button is pressed. Self-timer 10 sec A single picture is shot 10 seconds after the Shutter button is pressed. 56 Flash Mode The Flash is used to illuminate a subject in low light or for fill-in lighting to achieve better illumination of a subject with pronounced shadows. It can be adjusted in mode, please follow the steps below to configure the settings:

1. Press the Flash Button flash. to pop up the 2 1 2. Press the

button to enter the Flash menu.

Force Off 3. Press the

/

button to select the following 6 modes:

Force Off Flash is turned off. Flash Auto Camera flash goes off automatically based on existing light conditions. Fill Flash The flash will engage with each shot even if there is enough available light to take the photo without flash. Slow Sync. This allows for night scenery photos that include people in the foreground. (Suggest using tripod) Slow Sync. + Red-Eye Use this mode for slow synchro shots with red-eye reduction. Red-Eye Reduction The camera emits a brief pre-flash before the picture is taken to reduce red-eye effects. 4. Press the button to confirm the settings and exit the option. 57 White Balance Setting The white balance function allows adjustment of the color temperature for different light sources. It can be adjusted in mode, please follow the steps below to configure the settings:

1. Press menu. button to enter the White Balance

AWBAWB

button to select 2. Press the

/

the following 8 modes:

AWB Daylight Cloudy 58 Fluorescent Fluorescent CWF Incandescent Manual WB

(Fully press the Shutter button to detect the white balance value) Color Temp. (1900K~10000K)

/

Press the button to "Adjust the K value";

Press the K value.

button to exit the

3. Press the button to confirm the settings and exit the menu. Continuous Shot This function can be adjusted in settings:

1. Press the button to enter the Continuous Shot menu. Single 2. Press the

/

button to select the following 5 modes:

Single Capture a single shot only. Continuous Shot Take several pictures at a time. mode, please follow the steps below to configure the Cont.Shot-High Speed (VGA) For continuous shot with VGA pixel. Cont.Shot-Fast (4M) For continuous shot with 4M pixels. Time-Lapse Take pictures based on the preset interval (30sec/ 1min/ 5min/

10min). 3. Press the button to confirm the settings and exit the menu. 4. Press the Shutter button to start continuous shooting. In Continuous Shot mode, the flash is automatically set to Force Off in order to achieve quick succession of shots. 59 EV Settings The EV function menu of the camera includes functions, such as EV adjustment, ISO adjustment, Shutter adjustment, Aperture adjustment, etc. Using the appropriate function settings can improve your pictures. Please follow the steps below to configure the settings:

1. Press the button to display the settings screen. 2. Press the

/

the setting options.

/

3. Press the

button to select

button to Exposure Compensation Set up to adjust the picture brightness. In the case of a very high contrast between the photographed object and the background, the brightness of the picture can be appropriately adjusted. (Adjustable in Mode) adjust the option values. 4. Press the button to complete the setting F2.8F2.8 1/50 1/50 0.3 EV 0.3 EV 400 ISO 400 ISO and enter shooting mode. The adjustable range of exposure value is from EV -3.0 to EV+3.0. 60

 

 

Thumbnail View When in Playback Mode, rotate the Zoom Lever counter clockwise to the thumbnail images of the photos and videos on the screen. position to display W Zoom Out T Zoom In 1. Slide the Zoom Lever to switch between 3x3 and 4x4 thumbnails. 2. Press the and press the

/

button to restore it to the original size.

/

/

buttons to select a picture or video clip to view When the icon appears, it means this is a video file. 66 Using Zoom Playback (for still pictures only) When playing back photos, you can also use the Zoom Lever to zoom in on the photos 2 to 8 times. button to switch to Playback mode. 1. Press the 2. Press the 3. Rotate the Zoom Lever clockwise to

/

to zoom in. button to select a picture to be zoomed in. 4. The bottom right corner of the screen will display the number of times and area of the photo zooming operation. 5. Press the

/

to be zoomed in.

/

/

buttons to navigate and select a part of the image 6. Press the button to return the image to its original scale. x2 Movie images cannot be magnified. 67 Photos and Video Deletion

In Playback mode, press the To delete photos or videos:

button to delete your photos and videos. 1. Press the 2. Press the

3. Press the button to switch to Playback mode.

button to select the photos and videos to be deleted.

/

button and the deletion screen is displayed. Delete One Exit 4. Press the to confirm.

/

button to select Delete OneorExitand press the button Erased photos/video clips cannot be recovered. Please refer to page 91 for instructions on deleting more than one image at a time. 68 Slideshow This setting allows you to view all the stored images as a slideshow. 1. Press the button to enter playback screen. 2. Press the 3. Press the screen. button to enter slide option.

/

button to select slideshow playing orCancelto return to the playback Cancel 4. Press the button to confirm the setting. The continuous capture group playback may be displayed by slideshow. Pictures rotate automatically during a slide show. Slide playing function supports movie playing. 69 Continuous Capture Group Playback Cont.Shot-High Speed (VGA) and Cont.Shot-Fast (4M) can make continuous capture for group image playback. button to enter playback screen.

/

button to select Cont. Group. 1. Press 2. Press the 3. Press to start playback. 1/45 SD 25 42014 06-20 00:00 06-20 00:00 70 Animation panorama play Panoramic animation playing is to play full size image in accordance with the shooting direction. After playing, it will automatically return to the static screen of panoramic image. 1. Press the 2. Press the 3. Press the button to enter playback screen.

/

button to select animated panoramic photos. button to play in selected shooting direction.

In the process of panoramic animation playback, press the playing and return to the playback screen.

button (

) to stop 71 Using the Menus Photo Setup Menu Mode:

1. In Photo Shooting Mode, press the button to enter the Photo Setup menu. 2. Press the

/

select the item to be set.

button to 3. Press the

/

select an option and press the button to confirm. button to Refer to the following pages for more details about each setting. 72 Expo Metering Use this setting to select the target size of the cameras field of view to be metered. AiAE (Artificial Intelligence AE): For automatically selecting the central and surrounding metering to weight a proper metering value. Spot: For metering the block displayed in the center of the screen. Center: For metering the object in the center of the screen. It can be adjusted in all modes except for Panorama Mode. Image Size The size setting refers to the image resolution in pixels. A higher image resolution allows you to print that image in larger sizes without degrading the image quality. 16M Size: High quality printing Size: Full size printing Size: 16:9 display Size: Poster printing 5M Size: A3 printing 3M Size: A3 printing 2M Size: 4x 6 printing Size: E-Mail The larger the number of recorded pixels, the larger the file size and the fewer files that can be saved on your memory card. 73 73 OIS (Optical Image Stabilization) This mode can help reduce photo blur caused by unintentional hand shake, low light or slow shutter speed. Cont. AF Enable the continuous AF to be able to continuously focus automatically when taking pictures. OIS: Off OIS: On Cont.AF: Off Cont.AF: On Use Stabilization Mode in dark environments or when using a slower shutter speed. Shooting in a windy or unstable environment (such as a moving vehicle) may cause blurred images. 74 HDR Use this setting to control wide dynamic image range when taking static pictures. Photos with extreme contrast of bright and dark areas will still maintain distinguishable detail and depth. (Suggest using tripod) Beautifier Set the effect of the face beautifier mode. Effect 1: Skin Soften Effect 2: Skin Soften+Eye Brightening Effect 3: Skin Soften+Eye Brightening

+Eye Enlargement HDR: Off HDR: On In the scenario with high light contrast

(too dark or too light), this function can be used to shoot satisfactory photos. 75 Scene Select the scene mode under the SCN mode. Press SET To Select Scene Night Portrait Shooting menu in the Photo shooting mode

( O: Optional X: Not optional) Options 16M Photo Shooting Modes O O X X X X O O O O O X O O O O O X O O O O O X O O O O O X O O O O X O 76 Photo Shooting Settings Menu Mode:

1. Press the button in Photo Shooting mode and press the select

.

/

button to Quality The Quality Setting can be used to adjust the image compression ratio. Quality Best Fine Normal button to enter the menu. There are three options for picture quality:

2. Press the 3. Press the

/

, and press the

button to select button or the

button to enter the menu. 4. Press the

/

the item to be set and press the the button to enter the menu.

5. Press the

/

option and press the

button to select button or Best Fine Normal

button to select an button to confirm. 77 AF-Assist Beam In a darker environment, AF Assist Beam can be turned on for better focus. Date Imprint Include a Date/Time stamp on the photo image. AF Assist Beam Digital Zoom Turn on or off the digital zoom. Off On Off On Digital Zoom 78 Off Date Date/Time Date Imprint Off Date Date / Time Quick Review This option allows quick review of the photos immediately after they are taken. Each photo is displayed on the LCD based on the selected time. Custom Settings Custom Settings stores the current photo shooting mode and its parameters. The stored mode and parameters are directly invoked in mode. Off 1 sec 2 sec 3 sec Custom Settings Reset camera settings to custom settings mode. No Yes There are 2 options:

No Yes Quick Review There are 4 options:

Off 1 sec 2 sec 3 sec 79 Movie Menu Mode:

1. Rotate the mode dial to select and press the button to enter the Movie menu. Expo Metering Use this setting to select the target size of the cameras field of view to be metered. Expo Metering: AiAE Expo Metering: AiAE 2. Press the

/

button to 3. Press the select the item to be set.

button to select an button to confirm. option and press the

/

AiAE (Artificial Intelligence AE) For automatically selecting the central and surrounding metering to weight a proper metering value. Spot For metering the block displayed in the center of the screen. Center For metering the object in the center of the screen. 80 Movie Size Set the image resolution used during video recording. Size: 1080p 30fps Size: 1080p 30fps Size: 720p 60fps Size: 720p 30fps Size: 640x480 30fps Size: High Speed Movie The speed requirements for reading and writing high image pixel images to SD card are as follows:

No. Image Pixel Frame Recommendation Recording time (4GB) About 1 2 3 4 5 1920x1080 1280x720 1280x720 640x480 640x480 30 60 30 30 120 Class 6 Class 6 Class 4 Class 4 Class 6 30 minutes 32 minutes 59 minutes 106 minutes 54 minutes 81 Recording time limit above 1280x720 30 fps format is under 29 minutes. When recording in higher pixel resolutions for extended periods of time, this can cause the camera to generate heat. This is not a camera malfunction. When the video format is set as 640x480 (120fps), shooting time is 30 seconds, playback time is 2 minutes. OIS (Optical Image Stabilization) This mode can help reduce photo blur caused by hand shake and low light.

Sound recording is disabled when 640x480 120fps is chosen. OIS: Off OIS: On Use this image stabilization mode in dark environments. Shooting in a windy or unstable environment (such as a moving vehicle) may cause blurred images. 82 to enter the video recording screen.

/

button to select

, and press the button Movie Setting Menu Mode:

1. Rotate the Mode Dial and select button, press the to enter the Movie Setting menu. 2. Press the Press SET To Enter Menu 3. Press the

/

to enter the menu.

button to select

, and press the button or the

button 4. Select the item to be set and press the 5. Press the

/

button to select an option and press the button or the

button to enter the menu. button to confirm. 83 Digital Zoom Turn on or off the digital zoom. Digital Zoom Off On Custom Settings Custom Settings stores the current movie mode and its parameters. The stored mode and parameters can be invoked directly in mode. Custom Settings Reset camera settings to custom settings mode. No Yes 84 Playback Menu Mode:

1. Press the button to display the button 2. Press the playback screen and press the to enter the Playback menu.

button to select the item to be set and press the button to enter.

/

Playback Mode Select settings screen:

, and press the button to enter the 3. Press the

an option and press the confirm.

/

button to select button to Press SET To Confirm Normal Mode Refer to the following pages for more details about each setting. Normal Mode: Display all images. Normal Mode:

Display all images. Date Mode:

Arranged by date. Cont. Photo Mode:

Arranged by Cont. Photo Group. The Date Folder is displayed in date order based on camera's Date/Time Settings. If there is no any continuous shot image file in the memory, continuous shot playback mode cannot be enabled. 85

 

 

ISO ISO allows you to set the sensitivity of the camera sensor. Please use a higher ISO value in darker places and a lower value in brighter conditions. (Adjustable in Mode). Shutter Adjustment For shutter speed, the camera may automatically set the aperture value corresponding to the manually set shutter speed so as to obtain a most suitable exposure value. The movement of object may be shown by adjusting the shutter speed. High shutter value can make you clearly capture the movement of fast moving object while low shutter value can allow you to take a picture for fact moving object with a strong sense of movement. (Adjustable in Mode). F2.8F2.8 1/501/50 0.3 EV 0.3 EV 400 ISO 400 ISO The cameras ISO settings include: Auto, 100, 200, 400, 800, 1600 and 3200. F2.8F2.8 1/50 1/50 0.3 EV 0.3 EV

-1.0 EV 400 ISO 400 ISO 61 Aperture Adjustment You can adjust the aperture size value. Selecting a large aperture opening will emphasize the point of focus and show a blurry background and foreground. A small aperture opening will keep both the background and main object in clear focus. (Adjustable in Mode) Using Quick Recording In shooting mode, press the recording video. button to begin F2.8F2.8 1/501/50 0.3 EV 0.3 EV 400 ISO 400 ISO After recording, press the press the Shutter button to stop recording. The camera will store the video and return to the shooting screen. button again or 62 i Button Function Menu The Image Color Setting allows you to select different color effects. It can be adjusted in mode, please follow the steps below to configure the settings:

1. Press the button to select the Image Color Setting Menu.

2. Press the

/

button to select the Image Color Setting options.

(

) represents optional in Movie mode. Normal There are 20 Image Color options in photo shooting mode

:

Normal (

) Sepia (

) Vivid(

) Japan Style Italian Style French Style Punk Black and White (

) Partial Color-Red (

) ) Partial Color-Blue (

) Partial Color-Yellow (

Partial Color-Green (

)

) Negative Dreamy Vignetting Salon Fish Eye Reflection 4 Grids - Stylish(2M) Sketch 63 Playback Mode Viewing Photos and Videos Photos and videos are previewed in portrait mode even when made as landscape. To view photos and videos on the LCD:

1. After pressing the 2. Use the

/

button, the last photo or video clip taken will be displayed on the LCD.

button to scroll through the photos or video clips stored in the internal memory or on the memory card. 3. To play a selected video clip, press the During video playback, the operating instructions will appear on the screen. Press the appropriate buttons to enable the corresponding functions. button to enter the Movie Playback mode. Under Playback Paused Mute 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 00:00:47 00:01:23 Back to the beginning of the video 6 Play 7 Frame Forward 8 Cancel playback 9 10 Frame Backward 00:00:47 00:01:23 1 2 3 4 5 Increase Volume Pause Fast Forward Decrease Volume Rewind 64 Thumbnail View When in Playback Mode, rotate the Zoom Lever counter clockwise to the thumbnail images of the photos and videos on the screen. position to display W Zoom Out T Zoom Out 1. Slide the Zoom Lever to switch between 3x3 and 4x4 thumbnails. 2. Press the and press the

/

button to restore it to the original size.

/

/

buttons to select a picture or video clip to view When the icon appears, it means this is a video file. 65 65 Using Zoom Playback (for still pictures only) When playing back photos, you can also use the Zoom Lever to zoom in on the photos 2 to 8 times. button to switch to Playback mode. 1. Press the 2. Press the 3. Rotate the Zoom Lever clockwise to

/

to zoom in. button to select a picture to be zoomed in. 4. The bottom right corner of the screen will display the number of times and area of the photo zooming operation. x2 5. Press the

/

to be zoomed in.

/

/

buttons to navigate and select a part of the image 6. Press the button to return the image to its original scale. Movie images cannot be magnified. 66 Photos and Video Deletion

In Playback mode, press the To delete photos or videos:

button to delete your photos and videos. 1. Press the 2. Press the

3. Press the button to switch to Playback mode.

button to select the photos and videos to be deleted.

/

button and the deletion screen is displayed. Delete One Exit 4. Press the to confirm.

/

button to select Delete OneorExitand press the button Erased photos/video clips cannot be recovered. Please refer to page 90 for instructions on deleting more than one image at a time. 67 Slideshow This setting allows you to view all the stored images as a slideshow. 1. Press the button to enter playback screen. button to enter slide option. 2. Press the 3. Press the playback screen.

/

button to select slideshow playing orCancelto return to the Cancel 4. Press the button to confirm the setting. The continuous capture group playback may be displayed by slideshow. Pictures rotate automatically during a slide show. Slide playing function supports movie playing. 68 Continuous Capture Group Playback Cont.Shot-High Speed (VGA) and Cont.Shot-Fast (4M) can make continuous capture for group image playback. button to enter playback screen.

/

button to select Cont. Group. 1. Press 2. Press the 3. Press to start playback. 1/45 SD 25 42014 06-20 00:00 06-20 00:00 69 Animation panorama play Panoramic animation playing is to play full size image in accordance with the shooting direction. After playing, it will automatically return to the static screen of panoramic image. 1. Press the 2. Press the 3. Press the button to enter playback screen.

/

button to select animated panoramic photos. button to play in selected shooting direction.

In the process of panoramic animation playback, press the playing and return to the playback screen.

button (

) to stop 70 70 Using the Menus Photo Setup Menu Mode:

1. In Photo Shooting Mode, press the button to enter the Photo Setup menu. 2. Press the

/

select the item to be set.

button to 3. Press the

/

select an option and press the button to confirm. button to Refer to the following pages for more details about each setting. Expo Metering Use this setting to select the target size of the cameras field of view to be metered. AiAE (Artificial Intelligence AE): For automatically selecting the central and surrounding metering to weight a proper metering value. Spot: For metering the block displayed in the center of the screen. Center: For metering the object in the center of the screen. It can be adjusted in all modes except for Panorama Mode. 71 Image Size The size setting refers to the image resolution in pixels. A higher image resolution allows you to print that image in larger sizes without degrading the image quality. Size: Poster printing 5M Size: A3 printing 3M Size: A3 printing 2M Size: 4x 6 printing Size: E-Mail The larger the number of recorded pixels, the larger the file size and the fewer files that can be saved on your memory card. 16M Size: High quality printing Size: Full size printing Size: 16:9 display 72 OIS (Optical Image Stabilization) This mode can help reduce photo blur caused by unintentional hand shake, low light or slow shutter speed. Cont. AF Enable the continuous AF to be able to continuously focus automatically when taking pictures. OIS: Off OIS: On Cont.AF: Off Cont.AF: On Use Stabilization Mode in dark environments or when using a slower shutter speed. Shooting in a windy or unstable environment (such as a moving vehicle) may cause blurred images. 73 HDR Use this setting to control wide dynamic image range when taking static pictures. Photos with extreme contrast of bright and dark areas will still maintain distinguishable detail and depth. (Suggest using tripod) Beautifier Set the effect of the face beautifier mode. Effect 1: Skin Soften Effect 2: Skin Soften+Eye Brightening Effect 3: Skin Soften+Eye Brightening

+Eye Enlargement HDR: Off HDR: On In the scenario with high light contrast

(too dark or too light), this function can be used to shoot satisfactory photos. 74 Scene Select the scene mode under the SCN mode. Press SET To Select Scene Night Portrait Shooting menu in the Photo shooting mode

( O: Optional X: Not optional) Options 16M Photo Shooting Modes O O X X X X O O O O O X O O O O O X O O O O O X O O O O O X O O O O X O 75

 

 

HDR With the HDR function, pictures that are overexposed may be corrected to optimize the highlights and lowlights captured to more accurately represent the actual scene. Select the settings screen:

button to enter

, and press the Touch-up The playback beauty feature allows for beautification using three individual effects. Select button to enter the settings screen:

, and press the HDR HDR Cancel After using the HDR function, the image will be saved as a new file and the original file is still stored in the memory. 86 Red-Eye Reduction Red-Eye Reduction Skin Soften Eye Brightening Eye Enlargement Cancel Using the face beautifier mode allows you to select from single, two, or all three effects combined. Rotate You can use this setting to change the orientation of the picture. Select

, and press the the settings screen:

button to enter Resize This setting allows you to resize a picture to a particular resolution and saves it as a new picture. Select the settings screen:

, and press the button to enter Turn Right Turn Right Turn Left Cancel Resize to 1024x768 Resize to 1024x768 Resize to 640x480 Cancel Videos and panoramic pictures cannot be rotated. The rotated picture file will replace the original photo. Only for adjusting pictures with high resolution to those with low resolution. Sizes of photos taken in panorama mode or rotated cannot be adjusted. 87 i button playback function This setting allows you to change the picture color effect. The file is saved as a new photo and stored in memory together with the original photo. Press the button to enter the settings screen:

Cancel There are 19 options:

Cancel Vivid Japan Style (8M) Italian Style (8M) French Style (8M) Punk (4M) Sepia Partial Color-Red Partial Color-Blue Partial Color-Yellow Partial Color-Green Negative (8M) Vignetting Salon Fish Eye Reflection 4 Grids - Stylish(2M) Black and White Dreamy 88 Playback Settings Menu Mode:

1. Press the button to select

2. Press the

/

button to show the playback screen, press the button, press the

/

, and press the button to enter the menu.

button to select

, and press the button or the

button to enter the menu. Protect Delete DPOF Trim 3. Press the

/

button to select the item to be set and press the button or the

button to enter the menu. 4. Press the Refer to the following pages for more details about each setting. button to select an option and press the

/

button to confirm. 89 Protect To prevent any pictures or videos from being accidentally erased, use this setting to lock one or all of the files. Protect One Date Folder Cont. Group ResetAll Reset There are 5 options available:

One:

Lock the selected photo or video if they are unprotected; unlock the selected photo or video if they are protected. Date Folder:

Protect all photos in the Date Folder. Cont. Group: Protect all photos in the Cont. Photo Folder. All:

Lock all photos or videos. Reset:

Cancel all locked photos or videos. 90 Delete You can delete one or all photo/video files. Delete One Date Folder Cont. Group All There are 4 options available:

One:

Delete one photo or video. Date Folder: Delete all photos in the Date Folder. Cont. Group: Delete all photos in the Cont. Photo Folder. All:

Delete all photos or videos The file can be deleted. indicator means a file is protected. File protection must be removed first before a Deleting files will cause DPOF settings to be reset. When one photo in the Cont. Photo and Date Folders is protected, it will be kept but any other photos will be deleted. 91 DPOF (Digital Print Order Format) The DPOF feature allows you to compile and select a group of pictures that you would like to print and will save your selection on the memory card so that you can use the SD memory card to print without having to individually specify the photos you want to print. One All Reset DPOF The printer that supports DPOF is needed for printing. Trim The Trim Setting allows you to crop photos and save them as new pictures. 1. SelectYesto confirm trim. Rotate the zoom lever to select the aspect ratio and press the

to trim. buttons to adjust the part you want

/

/

/

2. Press the button and theSave change?prompt appears. Select Select return to the trim prompt screen. to cancel changes and to change and save the picture. 92 The image cannot be clipped/trimmed again once it has been clipped to 640X480. General Settings Menu Mode:

1. Press the button in any mode, press the

/

button to select

, and press the button to enter the menu. 2. Press the enter the menu.

/

button to select

, and press the button or the

button to Sound Settings Power Saver Language World Time Auto English Home Date & Time 2014.06.20 00:00 3. Press the

/

button to select the item to be set and press the button or the

button to enter the menu. 4. Press the

/

button to select an option and press the button to confirm. Refer to the following pages for more details about each setting. 93 Sound Settings With this setting you may adjust the sound volume. Press the volume and press the setting. button to adjust the button to confirm our

/

Sound Settings Volume Back 94 Power Saver This setting allows you to save power and get the maximum possible running time for your cameras batteries. Turn the LCD and camera off automatically after a consecutive period of inactivity. Power Saver Auto Normal Best Power Saver Auto Normal Best LCD power off time 3 min 1 min 30 s Turn off time 5 min 3 min 1 min Language Refer to the Reset your language section on page 25. Date/Time Refer to the Reset Date/Time section on page 26. Zone The Zone setting is a useful function for your overseas trips. This feature enables you to display the local time on the LCD while you are abroad. 1. Press the button to

/

select the departure place (

destination (

) and 2. Press the button to select a city located in the same time zone as that of the field. Press the button to confirm settings.

) fields.

/

LCD Brightness Use this setting to adjust the brightness of your LCD. Press the the brightness of screen, and press the button to confirm our setting. button to adjust

/

LCD Brightness Bcfa U`+2

+1 Normal

-1

-2 95 button, press the

/

button to select and press the button to

/

/

button to select and press the button or the

button to

button to select the item to be set and press the button or the File Settings Mode:

1. Press the enter the menu. 2. Press the enter the menu. 3. Press the

button to enter the menu. Format Copy to Card File Numbering Reset FW Version X.XX 4. Press the

/

button to select an option and press the button to confirm. Refer to the following pages for more details about each setting. 96 Format Please note: formatting enables you to delete all contents in the memory card and built-in memory, including protected photo and movie files. Format Doing so will clear all data. No Yes Copy to Card Use this setting to copy the files stored in the built-in memory to a memory card. Copy to Card Copy files from built-in memory to the memory card. No Yes If there is no memory card in the camera, the built-in memory will be formatted;

if there is a memory card, it will be formatted only. If there is no card available in the camera, this function will not be displayed. 97 File Numbering After you take a picture or video clip, the camera will save it with a sequential number. You can use this to reset the file numbering to 1. Reset Use this setting to restore the camera to its original default settings. File Numbering Create a new directory and reset the file number. No Yes Reset Reset camera settings to factory defaults. No Yes 98 FW Version Use this setting to view the current camera firmware version. When there is a new firmware version in the memory card, selectYesto update. FW Version Current Ver:1.XX Back FW Version Current Ver:1.XX New Ver.:2.XX Update Firmware?

Yes Cancel 99 Connection Settings Mode:

1. Press the button, press the

/

button to select and press the button to

/

/

button to select and press the button or the

button to button to select the item to be set and press the button or the enter the menu. 2. Press the enter the menu. 3. Press the

button to enter the menu. USB TV-System Eye-Fi PC NTSC Off 4. Press the

/

button to select an option and press the button to confirm. Refer to the following pages for more details about each setting. 100 Connecting to a Computer You can use the Micro USB cable to connect the camera and copy (transmit) photos to a computer, printer or other device. Setting the USB Mode The cameras Micro USB port can be set to connect with either a computer or a printer. The following steps will allow you to ensure that the camera is correctly configured to connect with a PC. 1. Press the button to selectUSBand press the button or the button

/

to enter the menu.

/

2. Press the

button to selectPCand press the button to confirm. USB PC Printer 101 101 Transferring files to your computer The computer will automatically detect the camera as a removable drive. Double-click the My Computer icon on the desktop to locate the removable drive and to copy folders and files in the drive to a directory on your PC as you would copy any typical folder or file. Follow the steps below to connect the camera to a computer. 1. Make sure the computer is turned on. 2. Connect one end of the supplied Micro USB cable to the Micro USB port on your camera. 3. Connect the other end of the cable to an available USB port on your computer. 4. After the transmission is complete, disconnect the Micro USB cable according to the instructions specifying how to safely remove USB devices. 102 Connecting to a PictBridge Compatible Printer PictBridge technology allows printing of the photos saved in the memory card by the printer. To find out if a printer is PictBridge compatible, simply look for the PictBridge logo on the packaging or check the owners manual for specifications. With the PictBridge function on your camera, you can print the captured photos directly to a PictBridge compatible printer using the supplied Micro USB cable, without the need for a PC. Setting the USB Mode The cameras Micro USB port can be set to connect with either a PC or a Printer; the following steps will ensure that the camera is correctly configured to connect with a Printer. 1. Press the button to

/

selectUSBand press the the button to enter the menu. button or

2. Press the

/

button to selectPrinterand press the to confirm. button USB PC Printer After the camera is reset, it will switch to PC mode automatically from USB mode. See PictBridge section on page 105. 103 Connecting to your Printer 1. Make sure the printer is turned on. 2. Connect one end of the supplied Micro USB cable to the Micro USB port on your camera. 3. Connect the other end of the cable to the USB port on the printer. If the camera is not connected to a PictBridge compatible printer, the following error message will appear on the LCD. Connection Failed!

The error message above will also appear if the USB mode is set incorrectly, in which case you should disconnect the Micro USB cable, check the USB mode settings, ensure that the printer is turned on, and then try connecting the Micro USB cable again. 104 Using the PictBridge Menu After setting the USB mode to Printer, the PictBridge menu will appear. PictBridge Print (with Date) Print (without Date) Print Index Print DPOF Images Exit Print (with Date) If you have set the date and time on your camera, the date and time will be recorded and saved with each photo you take. 1. In the PictBridge menu, selectPrint (with Date)and the screen as shown below appears.

/

Press the a menu item and press the

button to enter the item.

button to select button or the Refer to the following sections for more detailed information on each setting. 01 Back 2. Press the

/

photo to be printed.

button to select a 105 3. Press the

/

button to select the number of copies for the currently displayed photo. 4. Press the button and the following screen will appear. Print (without Date) Use this setting to print the photos without dates on them. 1. In the PictBridge menu, selectPrint

(without Date)and the screen as shown below appears. Print (with Date) Yes Cancel 01 Back 5. SelectYesand press the button to confirm printing; selectCanceland button to cancel printing. press the 2. Press the

/

photo to be printed.

/

3. Press the

button to select a

button to select the number of copies for the currently displayed photo. 106 4. Press the button and the following screen will appear. Print (Without Date) Yes Cancel 5. SelectYesand press the button to confirm printing; selectCanceland button to cancel printing. press the Print Index You can print all photos in the camera via this function. 1. In the PictBridge menu, selectPrint Indexand the screen as shown below appears. Print Index Yes Yes Cancel 2. SelectYesand press the button to confirm printing; selectCanceland button to cancel printing. press the 107 Print DPOF Images Exit To use DPOF printing, you must select your photos for printing using the DPOF settings beforehand. See DPOF section on page 92. SelectExitto exit the PictBridge menu. At this time, the messageRemove USB Cable!

appears on the screen. 1. In the PictBridge menu, selectPrint DPOF Imagesand the screen as shown below appears. Remove USB Cable!

Print DPOF Images Yes Cancel Disconnect the Micro USB cable from the camera and printer. 2. SelectYesand press the button to confirm printing; selectCanceland button to cancel printing. press the 108 Video System You can use the AV cable (which should be purchased separately) to connect the camera and the television for realizing the video output. Connect one end of the AV cable to USB/AV port of the camera; connect the other end to AV-OUT port of the television. Adjust the format of the video output system according to your requirements, and the steps are as follows:

1. Press the button to selectTV-Systemand press the button or the

/

button to enter the menu. 2. Press the

/

button to selectNTSC, and press the button to confirm. TV-System PAL NTSC The video output system would change accordingly based upon the changes of the selected language. NTSC: English, Chinese (Traditional), Japanese, French, Korean, Russian, Vietnamese, PAL:

Greek, Hungarian German, Spanish, Italian, Chinese (Simplified), Portuguese, Swedish, Danish, Finnish, Indonesia, Norwegian, Dutch, Turkish, Polish, Thai, Croatian, Czech, Arabic, Hindi 109 Set Eye-Fi SD Card Connection Mode This camera supports the wireless connection for Eye-Fi memory card, Enable Eye-Fi connection by following below steps.

/

1. Press the

button to selectEye-Fiand press the button or the

button to enter the menu. 2. Press the confirm.

/

button to selectOnorOffand press the button to Off On Eye-Fi If the Eye-Fi card is not available in the camera, this feature is not displayed. 110 Supported HDMI Connections HDMI (High Definition Multimedia Interface) is a fully digital audio/video transmission interface, through which uncompressed audio and video signals are transmitted. Direct transmission of digital video signals to your TV reduces conversion loss and improves image quality. HDMI

(Type D) Connecting HDMI-Ready TV 1. Use the cable with high resolution output terminal (which should be purchased separately) to connect the camera to the television which meets HDMI standard. 2. The camera will be automatically detected by the TV. 3. After connecting via HDMI, the camera enters Playback Mode. Make sure the camera and the TV are both turned on before connecting. Refer to your TV instruction manual for information on what resolution sizes it will support. The resolution and output formats that are not supported will be grayed out on the cameras LCD. 111 Appendices Product Specifications Design and specifications are subject to change without notice. Image Sensor Type Effective Pixels Total Pixels Focal Length 35mm film equivalent F number 1/2.3BSI CMOS 16.35 Megapixels 16.76 Megapixels 4.3mm (Wide) 223.6mm (Tele) 24mm (Wide) 1248mm (Tele) F2.8 (Wide) ~ F5.6 (Tele) Lens Lens Construction 13 groups 15 elements Optical Zoom Optical Zoom Autofocus System Electronic Viewfinder Anti-Handshake Digital Zoom 52x Normal: (Wide) 60cm ~ , (Tele) 300cm ~ ;

Macro: 1cm ~ (Wide Only) TTL Autofocus Yes Optical Image Stabilization 4x Digital Zoom (Combined Zoom: 208x) 112 Still Image Number of Recording Pixels Movie Image Compression DCF, DPOF (Ver1.1) Support File Format Still Image Movie Shooting Modes Detection Features Photo Touch-up HDR

(3:2) 14MP: 4608 X 3072

(16:9) 12MP: 4608 X 2592 2MP: 1920 X 1080

(4:3) 16MP: 4608 X 3456 10MP: 3648 X 2736 5MP: 2592 X 1944 3MP: 2048 X 1536 0.3MP: 640 X 480 1920 X 1080 (30fps), 1280 X 720 (60fps/30fps), 640 X 480 (30fps), High-Speed Movie: 640 X 480 (120fps) Best, Fine, Normal Yes Exif 2.3 (JPEG) MOV [Image: H.264; Audio: Linear PCM (Stereo)]

Auto Mode, Program AE, Shutter priority, Aperture priority, Manual Mode, Face Beautifier, Wi-Fi Mode, Scene Mode [Handheld Night, Pet Mode, Sunset, Fireworks, Multi Exposure, Sport, Night Portrait, Landscape, Portrait, Snow, Children, Party Panorama Mode], Movie Mode, Custom Settings Face, Smile, Blink, Cat, Dog Red-Eye Reduction, Skin Soften, Eye Brightening, Eye Enlargement Yes 113 113 Scan Panorama LCD Image Auto Rotation ISO Sensitivity AF Method Up to 360 3.0 inch (460k Pixels) Yes Auto, ISO100/200/400/800/1600/3200 Single AF, Multi-AF (TTL 25-point), Object Tracking , Face-Detection Artificial Intelligence AE (AiAE), Center-Weighted Average, Spot

(Fixed to Center of Frame), Face AE Exposure Metering Method Exposure Control Method Program AE (AE-Lock Available), Shutter Prior AE, Aperture Prior AE Exposure Compensation Shutter Speed Continuous Shot Playback Modes White Balance Control Flash Flash Method Flash Modes 3EV in 1/3 Step Increments 1/2000 ~ 30 Seconds Yes Single, Index (9/16 Thumbnails), Slide Show, Date, Continuous Shooting, Zoom (Approx. X 2 ~ X 8) AWB, Daylight, Cloudy, Fluorescent, Fluorescent CWF, Incandescent, Manual WB, Color Temp. (1900K ~ 10000K) Pop-up (Auto) Force Off, Flash Auto, Fill Flash, Red-Eye Reduction, Slow Sync., Slow Sync.+Red-Eye Reduction, 114 Recording Media PictBridge, ExifPrint Support Multi-Language Support Jacks Eye-Fi Support Wi-Fi Remote Viewfinder Power Shooting Capability

(Battery Performance) Internal Memory: Approx. 8MB SD/SDHC Card (Up to 32GB Support) [MMC Card Not Supported]

Yes 27 Languages AV-OUT/USB 2.0 (Micro 5 pin USB), HDMI (Type D) Yes Yes (802.11 b/g/n) Yes (via smart device) Rechargeable Li-ion Battery LB-060, 3.7V 1100mAh, In-Camera Charging Approx. 240 Shots (Based on CIPA Standards) Operation Environment Temperature: 0 ~ 40C, Humidity: 0 ~ 90%

Dimensions (W X H X D) Weight Approx. 118.9 X 88.9 X 97.5mm (Based on CIPA Standards) Approx. 535g (Body only) 115 Description Action Prompts and Warning Messages Message Warning! Battery exhausted. Lens obstruction, Re-start Camera. Suggest using tripod. Warning before power off when the camera battery is exhausted. The lens is jammed or some foreign object is preventing the lens from functioning properly. When continuous exposure is enabled, this prompt message is displayed when the photo shooting screen is displayed for the first time. Built-in memory error!

An error occurs in built-in memory. Improper alignment. Please try again. The offset is too big for panorama shooting. Warning! Do not turn off your camera during update!

The message appears during the firmware update process. 116 Displaying that it will power off after 2 seconds. Turn off the camera and restart it to reset the lens. The message will disappear after 2 seconds. The message will disappear after 2 seconds. Remove the message after 2 seconds and return to shooting. The message disappears after the camera update and restart. Message Description Action Remove USB Cable!

Indicates that you can disconnect the Micro USB cable. The message disappears after you disconnect the Micro USB cable. Connection Failed!

Failure to connect to your PC, printer, TV (with HDMI). Remove the cable and retry connection. Write Protect !

Card Full !

Memory Full !

When you boot, press the shutter button or edit the files under playback mode, and the SD card is locked, the message appear. When you boot, press the shutter button or edit the files under playback mode, and the SD card is full, the message appear. When you boot, press the shutter button or edit the files under playback mode, and the camera memory is full, the message appear. The message will disappear after 2 seconds. The message will disappear after 2 seconds. The message will disappear after 2 seconds. 117 Message Description Action Card Error !

The memory card cant be identified after being formatted. Normal display. Card is not formatted. Slow access When an error occurs in the SD card, the message Not Formatted appears. When a SD card lower than Class 4 is used to record a HD movie, the writing speed will be slower and recording will not continue. Disappear after 2 seconds and enter the formatting process. Remove the message after 2 seconds and return to shooting. Cannot write to SD card. The photo shooting or video recording has been interrupted so recording cannot continue. Remove the message after 2 seconds and return to shooting. No Red-Eye Detected!

Red eyes have not been detected in the image. The message will disappear after 2 seconds. This image cannot be edited. The file format does not support editing or the edited file cannot be edited again. The message will disappear after 2 seconds. 118 Message Description Action Exceeded maximum folder number. When you boot, press the shutter button or edit the files under playback mode, and the SD card exceeded the maximum number of folders (999), the message appear. Too many pictures for fast processing. During the playback by date, the images exceed specifications so that it is not possible to play by date. The message will end after the camera processing is complete. The message disappears after 2 seconds and the camera returns to the normal playback mode. Unable to recognize files. The format of the file to be viewed is not supported or the file is corrupted so it cannot be properly read. This image message disappears only after the file is deleted. No Picture!

When you press the play button, no image files exist in the camera or memory card. No continuous group file. When you switch from the playback mode to continuous photo mode, there is no continuous group file. Protected!

Undeletable!

The file is protected. The message appears when you delete it. The message disappears 2 seconds later to return to the photo shooting screen. The message disappears after 2 seconds and the camera returns to the normal playback mode. The message will disappear after 2 seconds. 119 Troubleshooting Problem Possible Causes Solution Camera does not turn on Camera turns off suddenly during operation The battery has been depleted. The battery is not inserted correctly. Recharge the battery. Correctly reinstall the battery. The batteries have been depleted. Recharge the battery. The picture is blurred Camera shakes while taking a picture. Images and video files cannot be saved The SD memory card is full. The memory card is locked. Turn on OIS feature. Please use tripod for high magnification (above 15X) optical zoom. Use another memory card or delete unnecessary files. Unlock the memory card. Images will not print from the connected printer The camera is not connected to Check the connection between the the printer correctly. The printer is not PictBridge compatible. camera and printer. Use a PictBridge compatible printer. Load paper into the printer or replace The printer is out of paper or ink. The printer paper is jammed. the ink cartridge in the printer. Remove the jammed paper. 120 Problem Possible Causes Solution Saving data to memory card is slow Using a memory card below Class Use an SD card with write 4 may result in slower recording times. Class higher than 4 to improve performance. Cannot write to the memory card The SD memory card has been locked. The camera may experience Release the write lock of the memory card or replace with another card. trouble recording HD movies to SD cards with a rating lower than Class 4. Use an SD card with write Class higher than 4 to improve performance. Too many movies to process The number of pictures or folders in the SD memory card exceed the specifications, so the playback of data folder cannot be displayed. Delete unwanted files. When shooting with stacked filters attached, the corners of the photo may turn dark

(Vignetting effect) because the filter holder blocks light from reaching the camera image sensor; especially, at wide angle zoom control settings. Please take test shots and review the results when using stacked filters. 121 Licensed Product The Kodak trademark and trade dress are used under license from Kodak. 2014 by JK Imaging Ltd. All rights reserved. JK Imaging Ltd. 1411 W. 190th Street, Suite 550, Gardena, CA 90248, USA www.kodakpixpro.com Ver. 1

 

 

Photo Shooting Settings Menu Mode:

1. Press the button in Photo Shooting mode and press the select

.

/

button to Quality The Quality Setting can be used to adjust the image compression ratio. Quality Best Fine Normal There are three options for picture quality:

Best Fine Normal 2. Press the 3. Press the button to enter the menu.

/

, and press the

button to select button or the

button to enter the menu. 4. Press the

/

button to select button or the item to be set and press the the button to enter the menu.

5. Press the

/

option and press the

button to select an button to confirm. 76 AF-Assist Beam In a darker environment, AF Assist Beam can be turned on for better focus. Date Imprint Include a Date/Time stamp on the photo image. AF Assist Beam Digital Zoom Turn on or off the digital zoom. Digital Zoom Off On Off On Off Date Date/Time Date Imprint Off Date Date / Time 77 Quick Review This option allows quick review of the photos immediately after they are taken. Each photo is displayed on the LCD based on the selected time. Custom Settings Custom Settings stores the current photo shooting mode and its parameters. The stored mode and parameters are directly invoked in mode. Off 1 sec 2 sec 3 sec Custom Settings Reset camera settings to custom settings mode. No Yes There are 2 options:

No Yes Quick Review There are 4 options:

Off 1 sec 2 sec 3 sec 78 Movie Menu Mode:

1. Rotate the mode dial to select and press the button to enter the Movie menu. Expo Metering Use this setting to select the target size of the cameras field of view to be metered. Expo Metering: AiAE Expo Metering: AiAE 2. Press the

/

button to 3. Press the select the item to be set.

button to select an button to confirm. option and press the

/

AiAE (Artificial Intelligence AE) For automatically selecting the central and surrounding metering to weight a proper metering value. Spot For metering the block displayed in the center of the screen. Center For metering the object in the center of the screen. 79 Movie Size Set the image resolution used during video recording. Size: 1080p 30fps Size: 1080p 30fps Size: 720p 60fps Size: 720p 30fps Size: 640x480 30fps Size: High Speed Movie The speed requirements for reading and writing high image pixel images to SD card are as follows:

No. Image Pixel Frame Recommendation Recording time (4GB) About 1 2 3 4 5 1920x1080 1280x720 1280x720 640x480 640x480 30 60 30 30 120 Class 6 Class 6 Class 4 Class 4 Class 6 30 minutes 32 minutes 59 minutes 106 minutes 54 minutes 80 Recording time limit above 1280x720 30 fps format is under 29 minutes. When recording in higher pixel resolutions for extended periods of time, this can cause the camera to generate heat. This is not a camera malfunction. When the video format is set as 640x480 (120fps), shooting time is 30 seconds, playback time is 2 minutes. OIS (Optical Image Stabilization) This mode can help reduce photo blur caused by hand shake and low light.

Sound recording is disabled when 640x480 120fps is chosen. OIS: Off OIS: On Use this image stabilization mode in dark environments. Shooting in a windy or unstable environment (such as a moving vehicle) may cause blurred images. 81 to enter the video recording screen.

/

button to select

, and press the button Movie Setting Menu Mode:

1. Rotate the Mode Dial and select button, press the to enter the Movie Setting menu. 2. Press the Press SET To Enter Menu 3. Press the

/

to enter the menu.

button to select

, and press the button or the

button 4. Select the item to be set and press the 5. Press the

/

button or the

button to enter the menu.

button to select an option and press the button to confirm. 82 Digital Zoom Turn on or off the digital zoom. Digital Zoom Off On Custom Settings Custom Settings stores the current movie mode and its parameters. The stored mode and parameters can be invoked directly in mode. Custom Settings Reset camera settings to custom settings mode. No Yes 83 Playback Menu Mode:

1. Press the button to display the button 2. Press the playback screen and press the to enter the Playback menu.

button to select the item to be set and press the button to enter.

/

Playback Mode Select settings screen:

, and press the button to enter the 3. Press the

an option and press the confirm.

/

button to select button to Press SET To Confirm Normal Mode Refer to the following pages for more details about each setting. 84 Normal Mode: Display all images. Normal Mode:

Display all images. Date Mode:

Arranged by date. Cont. Photo Mode:

Arranged by Cont. Photo Group. The Date Folder is displayed in date order based on camera's Date/Time Settings. If there is no any continuous shot image file in the memory, continuous shot playback mode cannot be enabled. HDR With the HDR function, pictures that are overexposed may be corrected to optimize the highlights and lowlights captured to more accurately represent the actual scene. Select the settings screen:

button to enter

, and press the Touch-up The playback beauty feature allows for beautification using three individual effects. Select button to enter the settings screen:

, and press the HDR HDR Cancel After using the HDR function, the image will be saved as a new file and the original file is still stored in the memory. Red-Eye Reduction Red-Eye Reduction Skin Soften Eye Brightening Eye Enlargement Cancel Using the face beautifier mode allows you to select from single, two, or all three effects combined. 85 Rotate You can use this setting to change the orientation of the picture. Select

, and press the the settings screen:

button to enter Resize This setting allows you to resize a picture to a particular resolution and saves it as a new picture. Select the settings screen:

, and press the button to enter Turn Right Turn Right Turn Left Cancel Resize to 1024x768 Resize to 1024x768 Resize to 640x480 Cancel Videos and panoramic pictures cannot be rotated. The rotated picture file will replace the original photo. Only for adjusting pictures with high resolution to those with low resolution. Sizes of photos taken in panorama mode or rotated cannot be adjusted. 86 i button playback function This setting allows you to change the picture color effect. The file is saved as a new photo and stored in memory together with the original photo. Press the button to enter the settings screen:

Cancel There are 19 options:

Cancel Vivid Japan Style (8M) Italian Style (8M) French Style (8M) Punk (4M) Sepia Partial Color-Red Partial Color-Blue Partial Color-Yellow Partial Color-Green Negative (8M) Vignetting Salon Fish Eye Reflection 4 Grids - Stylish(2M) Black and White Dreamy 87 Playback Settings Menu Mode:

1. Press the

button to select 2. Press the

/

to enter the menu. button to show the playback screen, press the button, press the

/

, and press the button to enter the menu.

button to select

, and press the button or the

button Protect Delete DPOF Trim 3. Press the

/

button to select the item to be set and press the button or the

button to enter the menu. 4. Press the

/

button to select an option and press the button to confirm. Refer to the following pages for more details about each setting. 88 Protect To prevent any pictures or videos from being accidentally erased, use this setting to lock one or all of the files. Protect One Date Folder Cont. Group ResetAll Reset There are 5 options available:

One:

Lock the selected photo or video if they are unprotected; unlock the selected photo or video if they are protected. Date Folder:

Protect all photos in the Date Folder. Cont. Group: Protect all photos in the Cont. Photo Folder. All:

Lock all photos or videos. Reset:

Cancel all locked photos or videos. 89 Delete You can delete one or all photo/video files. Delete One Date Folder Cont. Group All There are 4 options available:

One:

Delete one photo or video. Date Folder: Delete all photos in the Date Folder. Cont. Group: Delete all photos in the Cont. Photo Folder. All:

Delete all photos or videos The file can be deleted. indicator means a file is protected. File protection must be removed first before a Deleting files will cause DPOF settings to be reset. When one photo in the Cont. Photo and Date Folders is protected, it will be kept but any other photos will be deleted. 90 DPOF (Digital Print Order Format) The DPOF feature allows you to compile and select a group of pictures that you would like to print and will save your selection on the memory card so that you can use the SD memory card to print without having to individually specify the photos you want to print. One All Reset DPOF The printer that supports DPOF is needed for printing. Trim The Trim Setting allows you to crop photos and save them as new pictures. 1. SelectYesto confirm trim. Rotate the zoom lever to select the aspect ratio and press the

to trim. buttons to adjust the part you want

/

/

/

2. Press the button and theSave change?prompt appears. Select Select return to the trim prompt screen. to cancel changes and to change and save the picture. The image cannot be clipped/trimmed again once it has been clipped to 640X480. 91 General Settings Menu Mode:

button in any mode, press the 1. Press the the button to enter the menu.

/

button to select

, and press 2. Press the enter the menu.

/

button to select

, and press the button or the

button to Sound Settings Power Saver Language World Time Auto English Home Date & Time 2014.06.20 00:00 3. Press the

/

button to select the item to be set and press the button or the

button to enter the menu. 4. Press the

/

button to select an option and press the button to confirm. Refer to the following pages for more details about each setting. 92 Sound Settings With this setting you may adjust the sound volume. Press the volume and press the setting. button to adjust the button to confirm our

/

Sound Settings Volume Back Power Saver This setting allows you to save power and get the maximum possible running time for your cameras batteries. Turn the LCD and camera off automatically after a consecutive period of inactivity. Power Saver Auto Normal Best Power Saver Auto Normal Best LCD power off time 3 min 1 min 30 s Turn off time 5 min 3 min 1 min 93 Language Refer to the Reset your language section on page 25. Date/Time Refer to the Reset Date/Time section on page 26. Zone The Zone setting is a useful function for your overseas trips. This feature enables you to display the local time on the LCD while you are abroad. 1. Press the button to

/

select the departure place (

destination (

) and 2. Press the button to select a city located in the same time zone as that of the field. Press the button to confirm settings.

) fields.

/

LCD Brightness Use this setting to adjust the brightness of your LCD. Press the the brightness of screen, and press the button to confirm our setting. button to adjust

/

LCD Brightness Bcfa U`+2

+1 Normal

-1

-2 94 button, press the

/

button to select and press the button to

/

/

button to select and press the button or the

button to

button to select the item to be set and press the button or the File Settings Mode:

1. Press the enter the menu. 2. Press the enter the menu. 3. Press the

button to enter the menu. Format Copy to Card File Numbering Reset FW Version X.XX 4. Press the

/

button to select an option and press the button to confirm. Refer to the following pages for more details about each setting. 95

 

 

Format Please note: formatting enables you to delete all contents in the memory card and built-in memory, including protected photo and movie files. Format Doing so will clear all data. No Yes Copy to Card Use this setting to copy the files stored in the built-in memory to a memory card. Copy to Card Copy files from built-in memory to the memory card. No Yes If there is no memory card in the camera, the built-in memory will be formatted;

if there is a memory card, it will be formatted only. If there is no card available in the camera, this function will not be displayed. 96 File Numbering After you take a picture or video clip, the camera will save it with a sequential number. You can use this to reset the file numbering to 1. Reset Use this setting to restore the camera to its original default settings. File Numbering Create a new directory and reset the file number. No Yes Reset Reset camera settings to factory defaults. No Yes 97 FW Version Use this setting to view the current camera firmware version. When there is a new firmware version in the memory card, selectYesto update. FW Version Current Ver:1.XX Back FW Version Current Ver:1.XX New Ver.:2.XX Update Firmware?

Yes Cancel 98 98 Connection Settings Mode:

1. Press the button, press the

/

button to select and press the button to

/

/

button to select and press the button or the

button to button to select the item to be set and press the button or the enter the menu. 2. Press the enter the menu. 3. Press the

button to enter the menu. USB TV-System Eye-Fi PC NTSC Off 4. Press the

/

button to select an option and press the button to confirm. Refer to the following pages for more details about each setting. 99 Connecting to a Computer You can use the Micro USB cable to connect the camera and copy (transmit) photos to a computer, printer or other device. Setting the USB Mode The cameras Micro USB port can be set to connect with either a computer or a printer. The following steps will allow you to ensure that the camera is correctly configured to connect with a PC. 1. Press the button to selectUSBand press the button or the

/

button to enter the menu. 2. Press the

/

button to selectPCand press the button to confirm. USB PC Printer 100 Transferring files to your computer The computer will automatically detect the camera as a removable drive. Double-click the My Computer icon on the desktop to locate the removable drive and to copy folders and files in the drive to a directory on your PC as you would copy any typical folder or file. Follow the steps below to connect the camera to a computer. 1. Make sure the computer is turned on. 2. Connect one end of the supplied Micro USB cable to the Micro USB port on your camera. 3. Connect the other end of the cable to an available USB port on your computer. 4. After the transmission is complete, disconnect the Micro USB cable according to the instructions specifying how to safely remove USB devices. 101 Connecting to a PictBridge Compatible Printer PictBridge technology allows printing of the photos saved in the memory card by the printer. To find out if a printer is PictBridge compatible, simply look for the PictBridge logo on the packaging or check the owners manual for specifications. With the PictBridge function on your camera, you can print the captured photos directly to a PictBridge compatible printer using the supplied Micro USB cable, without the need for a PC. Setting the USB Mode The cameras Micro USB port can be set to connect with either a PC or a Printer; the following steps will ensure that the camera is correctly configured to connect with a Printer. 1. Press the

button to selectUSBand press the the button to enter the menu. button or

/

102 2. Press the

/

button to selectPrinterand press the to confirm. button USB PC Printer After the camera is reset, it will switch to PC mode automatically from USB mode. See PictBridge section on page 104. Connecting to your Printer 1. Make sure the printer is turned on. 2. Connect one end of the supplied Micro USB cable to the Micro USB port on your camera. 3. Connect the other end of the cable to the USB port on the printer. If the camera is not connected to a PictBridge compatible printer, the following error message will appear on the LCD. Connection Failed!

The error message above will also appear if the USB mode is set incorrectly, in which case you should disconnect the Micro USB cable, check the USB mode settings, ensure that the printer is turned on, and then try connecting the Micro USB cable again. 103 Using the PictBridge Menu After setting the USB mode to Printer, the PictBridge menu will appear. PictBridge Print (with Date) Print (without Date) Print Index Print DPOF Images Exit Print (with Date) If you have set the date and time on your camera, the date and time will be recorded and saved with each photo you take. 1. In the PictBridge menu, selectPrint (with Date)and the screen as shown below appears.

/

Press the a menu item and press the

button to enter the item.

button to select button or the Refer to the following sections for more detailed information on each setting. 104 01 Back 2. Press the

/

photo to be printed.

button to select a 3. Press the

/

button to select the number of copies for the currently displayed photo. 4. Press the button and the following screen will appear. Print (without Date) Use this setting to print the photos without dates on them. 1. In the PictBridge menu, selectPrint

(without Date)and the screen as shown below appears. Print (with Date) Yes Cancel 01 Back 5. SelectYesand press the button to confirm printing; selectCanceland button to cancel printing. press the 2. Press the

/

photo to be printed.

/

3. Press the

button to select a

button to select the number of copies for the currently displayed photo. 105 4. Press the button and the following screen will appear. Print (Without Date) Yes Cancel 5. SelectYesand press the button to confirm printing; selectCanceland button to cancel printing. press the Print Index You can print all photos in the camera via this function. 1. In the PictBridge menu, selectPrint Indexand the screen as shown below appears. Print Index Yes Yes Cancel 2. SelectYesand press the button to confirm printing; selectCanceland button to cancel printing. press the 106 Print DPOF Images Exit To use DPOF printing, you must select your photos for printing using the DPOF settings beforehand. See DPOF section on page 91. SelectExitto exit the PictBridge menu. At this time, the messageRemove USB Cable!

appears on the screen. 1. In the PictBridge menu, selectPrint DPOF Imagesand the screen as shown below appears. Remove USB Cable!

Print DPOF Images Yes Cancel Disconnect the Micro USB cable from the camera and printer. 2. SelectYesand press the button to confirm printing; selectCanceland button to cancel printing. press the 107 Video System You can use the AV cable (which should be purchased separately) to connect the camera and the television for realizing the video output. Connect one end of the AV cable to USB/AV port of the camera; connect the other end to AV-OUT port of the television. Adjust the format of the video output system according to your requirements, and the steps are as follows:

1. Press the button to selectTV-Systemand press the button or the

/

button to enter the menu. 2. Press the

/

button to selectNTSC, and press the button to confirm. TV-System PAL NTSC The video output system would change accordingly based upon the changes of the selected language. NTSC: English, Chinese (Traditional), Japanese, French, Korean, Russian, Vietnamese, PAL:

Greek, Hungarian German, Spanish, Italian, Chinese (Simplified), Portuguese, Swedish, Danish, Finnish, Indonesia, Norwegian, Dutch, Turkish, Polish, Thai, Croatian, Czech, Arabic, Hindi 108 Set Eye-Fi SD Card Connection Mode This camera supports the wireless connection for Eye-Fi memory card, Enable Eye-Fi connection by following below steps.

/

1. Press the

button to selectEye-Fiand press the button or the

button to enter the menu. 2. Press the confirm.

/

button to selectOnorOffand press the button to Off On Eye-Fi If the Eye-Fi card is not available in the camera, this feature is not displayed. 109 Supported HDMI Connections HDMI (High Definition Multimedia Interface) is a fully digital audio/video transmission interface, through which uncompressed audio and video signals are transmitted. Direct transmission of digital video signals to your TV reduces conversion loss and improves image quality. Connecting HDMI-Ready TV 1. Use the cable with high resolution output terminal (which should be purchased separately) to connect the camera to the television which meets HDMI standard. 2. The camera will be automatically detected by the TV. 3. After connecting via HDMI, the camera enters Playback Mode. Make sure the camera and the TV are both turned on before connecting. Refer to your TV instruction manual for information on what resolution sizes it will support. The resolution and output formats that are not supported will be grayed out on the cameras LCD. HDMI

(Type D) 110 110 Appendices Product Specifications Design and specifications are subject to change without notice. Image Sensor Type Effective Pixels Total Pixels Focal Length 35mm film equivalent F number 1/2.3BSI CMOS 16.35 Megapixels 16.76 Megapixels 4.3mm (Wide) 223.6mm (Tele) 24mm (Wide) 1248mm (Tele) F2.8 (Wide) ~ F5.6 (Tele) Lens Lens Construction 13 groups 15 elements Optical Zoom Optical Zoom Autofocus System Anti-Handshake Digital Zoom 52x Normal: (Wide) 60cm ~ , (Tele) 300cm ~ ;

Macro: 1cm ~ (Wide Only) TTL Autofocus Optical Image Stabilization 4x Digital Zoom (Combined Zoom: 208x) 111 Still Image Number of Recording Pixels Movie Image Compression DCF, DPOF (Ver1.1) Support

(3:2) 14MP: 4608 X 3072

(16:9) 12MP: 4608 X 2592 2MP: 1920 X 1080

(4:3) 16MP: 4608 X 3456 10MP: 3648 X 2736 5MP: 2592 X 1944 3MP: 2048 X 1536 0.3MP: 640 X 480 1920 X 1080 (30fps), 1280 X 720 (60fps/30fps), 640 X 480 (30fps), High-Speed Movie: 640 X 480 (120fps) Best, Fine, Normal Yes File Format Still Image Exif 2.3 (JPEG) Movie MOV [Image: H.264; Audio: Linear PCM (Stereo)]

Shooting Modes Detection Features Photo Touch-up HDR Auto Mode, Program AE, Shutter priority, Aperture priority, Manual Mode, Face Beautifier, Wi-Fi Mode, Scene Mode [Handheld Night, Pet Mode, Sunset, Fireworks, Multi Exposure, Sport, Night Portrait, Landscape, Portrait, Snow, Children, Party, Panorama Mode], Movie Mode, Custom Settings Face, Smile, Blink, Cat, Dog Red-Eye Reduction, Skin Soften, Eye Brightening, Eye Enlargement Yes 112 Scan Panorama LCD Image Auto Rotation ISO Sensitivity AF Method Up to 360 3.0 inch (460k Pixels) Yes Auto, ISO100/200/400/800/1600/3200 Single AF, Multi-AF (TTL 25-point), Object Tracking , Face-Detection Artificial Intelligence AE (AiAE), Center-Weighted Average, Spot

(Fixed to Center of Frame), Face AE Exposure Metering Method Exposure Control Method Program AE (AE-Lock Available), Shutter Prior AE, Aperture Prior AE Exposure Compensation Shutter Speed Continuous Shot Playback Modes White Balance Control Flash Flash Method Flash Modes 3EV in 1/3 Step Increments 1/2000 ~ 30 Seconds Yes Single, Index (9/16 Thumbnails), Slide Show, Date, Continuous Shooting, Zoom (Approx. X 2 ~ X 8) AWB, Daylight, Cloudy, Fluorescent, Fluorescent CWF, Incandescent, Manual WB, Color Temp. (1900K ~ 10000K) Pop-up (Manual) Force Off, Flash Auto, Fill Flash, Red-Eye Reduction, Slow Sync., Slow Sync.+Red-Eye Reduction, 113 Recording Media Internal Memory: Approx. 8MB SD/SDHC Card (Up to 32GB Support) [MMC Card Not Supported]

PictBridge, ExifPrint Support Yes Multi-Language Support 27 Languages Jacks AV-OUT/USB 2.0 (Micro 5 pin USB), HDMI (Type D) Eye-Fi Support Yes Wi-Fi Yes (802.11 b/g/n) Remote Viewfinder Yes (via smart device) Power Shooting Capability

(Battery Performance) Rechargeable Li-ion Battery LB-060, 3.7V 1100mAh, In-Camera Charging Approx. 240 Shots (Based on CIPA Standards) Operation Environment Temperature: 0 ~ 40C, Humidity: 0 ~ 90%

Dimensions (W X H X D) Approx. 121.3 X 85.8 X 97.5mm (Based on CIPA Standards) Weight Approx. 508g (Body only) 114 Description Action Prompts and Warning Messages Message Warning! Battery exhausted. Lens obstruction, Re-start Camera. Suggest using tripod. Warning before power off when the camera battery is exhausted. The lens is jammed or some foreign object is preventing the lens from functioning properly. When continuous exposure is enabled, this prompt message is displayed when the photo shooting screen is displayed for the first time. Built-in memory error!

An error occurs in built-in memory. Improper alignment. Please try again. The offset is too big for panorama shooting. Warning! Do not turn off your camera during update!

The message appears during the firmware update process. Displaying that it will power off after 2 seconds. Turn off the camera and restart it to reset the lens. The message will disappear after 2 seconds. The message will disappear after 2 seconds. Remove the message after 2 seconds and return to shooting. The message disappears after the camera update and restart. 115 Message Description Action Remove USB Cable!

Indicates that you can disconnect the Micro USB cable. The message disappears after you disconnect the Micro USB cable. Connection Failed!

Failure to connect to your PC, printer, TV (with HDMI). Remove the cable and retry connection. Write Protect !

Card Full !

Memory Full !

When you boot, press the shutter button or edit the files under playback mode, and the SD card is locked, the message appear. When you boot, press the shutter button or edit the files under playback mode, and the SD card is full, the message appear. When you boot, press the shutter button or edit the files under playback mode, and the camera memory is full, the message appear. The message will disappear after 2 seconds. The message will disappear after 2 seconds. The message will disappear after 2 seconds. 116 Message Description Action Card Error !

The memory card cant be identified after being formatted. Normal display. Card is not formatted. When an error occurs in the SD card, the message Not Formatted appears. Slow access When a SD card lower than Class 4 is used to record a HD movie, the writing speed will be slower and recording will not continue. Disappear after 2 seconds and enter the formatting process. Remove the message after 2 seconds and return to shooting. Cannot write to SD card. The photo shooting or video recording has been interrupted so recording cannot continue. Remove the message after 2 seconds and return to shooting. No Red-Eye Detected!

Red eyes have not been detected in the image. The message will disappear after 2 seconds. This image cannot be edited. The file format does not support editing or the edited file cannot be edited again. The message will disappear after 2 seconds. 117 Message Description Action Exceeded maximum folder number. When you boot, press the shutter button or edit the files under playback mode, and the SD card exceeded the maximum number of folders (999), the message appear. Too many pictures for fast processing. During the playback by date, the images exceed specifications so that it is not possible to play by date. The message will end after the camera processing is complete. The message disappears after 2 seconds and the camera returns to the normal playback mode. Unable to recognize files. The format of the file to be viewed is not supported or the file is corrupted so it cannot be properly read. This image message disappears only after the file is deleted. No Picture!

When you press the play button, no image files exist in the camera or memory card. No continuous group file. When you switch from the playback mode to continuous photo mode, there is no continuous group file. The message disappears 2 seconds later to return to the photo shooting screen. The message disappears after 2 seconds and the camera returns to the normal playback mode. Protected!

Undeletable!

The file is protected. The message appears when you delete it. The message will disappear after 2 seconds. 118 Troubleshooting Problem Possible Causes Solution Camera does not turn on Camera turns off suddenly during operation The battery has been depleted. The battery is not inserted correctly. Recharge the battery. Correctly reinstall the battery. The batteries have been depleted. Recharge the battery. The picture is blurred Camera shakes while taking a picture. Images and video files cannot be saved The SD memory card is full. The memory card is locked. Turn on OIS feature. Please use tripod for high magnification (above 15X) optical zoom. Use another memory card or delete unnecessary files. Unlock the memory card. Check the connection between the Images will not print from the connected printer The camera is not connected to camera and printer. the printer correctly. Use a PictBridge compatible The printer is not PictBridge printer. compatible. The printer is out of paper or ink. The printer paper is jammed. Load paper into the printer or replace the ink cartridge in the printer. Remove the jammed paper. 119 Problem Possible Causes Solution Saving data to memory card is slow Using a memory card below Class Use an SD card with write 4 may result in slower recording times. Class higher than 4 to improve performance. Cannot write to the memory card Too many movies to process The SD memory card has been locked. The camera may experience trouble recording HD movies to SD cards with a rating lower than Class 4. The number of pictures or folders in the SD memory card exceed the specifications, so the playback of data folder cannot be displayed. Release the write lock of the memory card or replace with another card. Use an SD card with write Class higher than 4 to improve performance. Delete unwanted files. The flash icon appears on the LCD Current shooting environment requires flash. Turn on flash. When shooting with stacked filters attached, the corners of the photo may turn dark

(Vignetting effect) because the filter holder blocks light from reaching the camera image sensor; especially, at wide angle zoom control settings. Please take test shots and review the results when using stacked filters. 120 Licensed Product The Kodak trademark and trade dress are used under license from Kodak. 2014 by JK Imaging Ltd. All rights reserved. JK Imaging Ltd. 1411 W. 190th Street, Suite 550, Gardena, CA 90248, USA www.kodakpixpro.com Ver. 1

 

 

User Manual BEFORE YOU START Declaration of Conformity Responsible Party: JK Imaging Ltd. Address: 1411 W. 190th Street, Suite 550, Gardena, CA 90248, USA Company Website: www.kodakpixpro.com INDUSTRY CANADA This device complies with Canadian RSS-210. This device complies with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard (s).Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. Radiation Exposure Statement:

This product complies with the Canadian portable RF exposure limit set forth for an uncontrolled environment and is safe for intended operation as described in this manual. Additional RF exposure reduction can be achieved if the product can be kept as far as possible from the user body or set the device to lower output power if such function is available. Industry Canada statement:

Ce dispositif est conforme la norme CNR-210 dIndustrie Canada applicable aux appareils radio exempts de licence. Son fonctionnement est sujet aux deux conditions suivantes: (1) le dispositif ne doit pas produire de brouillage prjudiciable, et (2) ce dispositif doit accepter tout brouillage reu, y compris un brouillage susceptible de provoquer un fonctionnement indsirable. 1 1 Dclaration dexposition aux radiations:

Le produit est conforme aux limites dexposition pour les appareils portables RF pour les Etats-Unis et le Canada tablies pour un environnement non contrl. Le produit est sr pour un fonctionnement tel que dcrit dans ce manuel. La rduction aux expositions RF peut tre augmente si lappareil peut tre conserv aussi loin que possible du corps de lutilisateur ou que le dispositif est rgl sur la puissance de sortie la plus faible si une telle fonction est disponible. For Customers in Europe This symbol [crossed-out wheel bin WEEE Annex IV] indicates separate collection of electrical waste and electronic equipment in the European countries. Please do not throw the equipment into domestic refuse. Please use the return and collection systems available in your country for proper, safe disposal of this product. CE mark indicates that this product complies with the European requirements for safety, health, environment and customer protection. CE marked cameras are intended for sales in Europe. Europe EU Declaration of Conformity This device complies with the essential requirements of the R&TTE Directive 1999/5/

EC. The following test methods have been applied in order to prove presumption of conformity with the essential requirements of the R&TTE Directive 1999/5/EC:

- EN 60950-1: 2006+A11:2009 +A1:2010 +A12:2011 Safety of Information Technology Equipment

- EN 50566: 2013 Product standard to demonstrate compliance of radio frequency fields from handheld and body- mounted wireless communication devices used by the general public (30 MHz 6 GHz) 2

- EN 62209-2: 2010 Human exposure to radio frequency fields from handheld and bodymounted wireless communication devices Human models, instrumentation, and procedures Part 2: Procedure to determine the specific absorption rate (SAR) for wireless communication devices used in close proximity to the human body (frequency range of 30 MHz to 6 GHz)

- EN 300 328 V1.8.1 : 2012 Electromagnetic compatibility and Radio spectrum Matters (ERM); Wideband Transmission systems; Data transmission equipment operating in the 2.4 GHz ISM band and using spread spectrum modulation techniques; Harmonized EN covering essential requirements under article 3.2 of the R&TTE Directive.

- EN 301 489-1 V1.9.2: 2008C Electromagnetic compatibility and Radio Spectrum Matters (ERM); Electro Magnetic Compatibility (EMC) standard for radio equipment and services; Part 1: Common technical requirements.

- EN 301 489-17 V2.2.1:2012 Electromagnetic compatibility and Radio spectrum Matters (ERM); Electro Magnetic Compatibility (EMC) standard for radio equipment and services; Part 17: Specific conditions for 2.4 GHz wideband transmission systems and 5 GHz high performance RLAN equipment. For Customers in the U.S.A. Federal Communication Commission Interference Statement This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. 3 This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one of the following measures:

- Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.

- Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.

- Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.

- Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help. FCC Caution: Any changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the users authority to operate this equipment. This transmitter must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter. Radiation Exposure Statement:

This product complies with the FCC portable RF exposure limit set forth for an uncontrolled environment and is safe for intended operation as described in this manual. Additional RF exposure reduction can be achieved if the product can be kept as far as possible from the user body or set the device to lower output power if such function is available. 4 About this Manual Thank you for purchasing this KODAK PIXPRO digital camera. Please read this manual carefully and keep it in a safe place for future reference. JK Imaging Ltd. reserves all rights of this document. No part of this published manual may be reproduced, transmitted, transcribed, stored in a retrieval system or translated into any language or computer language, in any form, by any means, without the prior written permission of JK Imaging Ltd.. All trademarks mentioned in this manual are used for identification purposes only and are properties of their respective owners. This manual provides you with instructions on how to use your new KODAK PIXPRO digital camera. Every effort has been made to ensure that the contents of this manual are accurate, however JK Imaging Ltd. reserves the right to make changes without notice. Throughout this manual, the following symbols are used to help you locate information quickly and easily:

Indicates useful information. Indicates precautions are to be taken while operating the camera. In the instructions below, the following symbols may be used throughout this manual on how to operate the camera. This is to facilitate better understanding. Item properties The optional properties in the camera interface are indicated by the symbol . 5 SAFETY NOTES Safety notes for this camera Do not drop the camera or allow it to hit solid objects. Do not attempt to disassemble or repair the camera. Do not use or store the camera in dusty places or on a beach to prevent dust or sand from entering the camera, causing possible damage to it. Do not use or store the camera in a hot environment or under direct sunlight. Do not use or store the camera near a powerful magnetic field, for example near a magnet or transformer. Avoid touching the lens of the camera. Do not expose the camera to direct sunlight for a long period time. To prevent the camera from being damaged by moisture, do not use or store the camera in very humid environments, such as in rain or near bodies of water. If water accidentally comes in contact with the camera, turn the camera off, remove the battery and the memory card, and dry it within 24 hours. 6 When you take the camera from a cold place to a warmer environment, condensation may occur. Please wait for a reasonable period of time before you turn it on. Before you remove the battery and memory card, the camera should be turned off. When you clean the body of the camera, do not use abrasive, alcohol-based or organic cleaner. Use the professional lens wiping cloth and dedicated cleaner to wipe and clean the lens. Download your photos and remove the memory card when you are going to store the camera for a long period of time. If this camera is not in use for a long time, please keep it in a dry and clean condition. Our company will not pay compensation for any failure of playback of pictures or videos caused by improper operation. Safety notes for battery Please use a battery that is the same type as the one included. Please use the attached charger to charge the battery. If battery fluid leaks inside the camera, contact our customer service department. If battery fluid leaks onto your skin, rinse your skin with clean water and seek immediate medical attention. Disposal of used batteries should be carried out in accordance with the local

(national or regional) regulations. To prevent the battery from being damaged, do not drop the battery or allow it to hit solid objects or to be scratched by the objects. Do not let the battery come in contact with metal objects (including coins) to avoid short circuiting, discharging, excessive heat, or possible leakage. Do not attempt to disassemble the battery. Do not expose the battery to water. Always keep the battery contacts dry. Do not heat the battery or throw it into a fire to avoid a possible explosion. Do not store the battery in a hot environment or in direct sunlight. If the battery overheats during charging or use, stop charging or use immediately. Turn off the product, remove the battery carefully, and wait until it cools down. When the camera is stored for a long period of time, remove the battery and keep it in a dry place that is not accessible to infants and children. In a colder environment, the performance of the battery could be noticeably reduced. When you install the battery, install it according to the positive and negative markings on the battery compartment. Never force it into the battery compartment. 7 7 Do not modify the name of the files or folders of the memory card using your PC. Modifying the file names may cause the files to not be recognized on the camera or a possible error may occur. A photo taken with the camera will be stored in the folder that is automatically generated on the memory card. Do not store photos that are not taken using this camera in these folders as the pictures cannot be recognized during the playback. When you insert a memory card, make sure the notch of the card matches the markings on the top of the card slot. Safety notes for memory card We suggest buying only well-known, name brand memory cards to ensure peak performance. Format the memory card using the camera before you use it or insert a new one. Do not drop the memory card or allow it to hit solid objects to avoid damaging it. Do not attempt to disassemble or repair the memory card. Do not expose the memory card to water. Always keep it dry. Do not remove the memory card when the camera is turned on. Otherwise, the memory card could be damaged. Do not directly edit the data on the memory card. Copy the data to your PC before you edit them. When the camera is stored for a long period of time, be sure to download your photos and remove the memory card. Store it in a dry environment. 8 Other Safety Notes Do not disconnect the power or turn the camera off during the update process. Doing so may cause incorrect data to be written and the camera may not power on later. Do not hang the neck strap of the camera around the neck of a child. When using your camera on an airplane, observe the relevant rules specified by the airline. Due to the limitations of manufacturing technology, the LCD screen may have a few dead or bright pixels. These pixels do no effect the quality or performance of the camera, photos or video. Do not expose the LCD screen to water. In a humid environment, only wipe it with a soft and dry cleaning cloth. If the LCD screen is damaged and the liquid crystal comes into contact with your skin, wipe your skin with a dry cloth immediately and rinse it with clean water. If liquid crystal comes into contact with your eyes, wash them with clean water at least for 15 minutes and seek immediate medical attention. If you accidentally swallow liquid crystal, rinse your mouth immediately and seek medical attention. 9 CONTENTS BEFORE YOU START ............ 1 SAFETY NOTES .................... 6 CONTENTS ...........................10 GETTING READY .................14 Accessories Included ......................... 14 Install lens cap and neck strap ........... 15 Part Names ........................................ 16 Installing Battery and Memory Card ... 19 Charging Battery ................................ 21 Pivoting LCD Screen .......................... 22 Turning Camera On and Off ............... 23 Set your Language, Date/Time .......... 24 Set your Language, Date/Time after the first power-on ..................24 Resetting your Language ..............25 Resetting Date/Time .....................26 10 MODE OVERVIEW ...............27 LCD Screen Display ........................... 27 Overview of the screen icons in photo shooting mode ....................27 Overview of the Screen Icons in Movie Mode ..................................29 Overview of the Screen Icons in Playback Mode .............................30 How to take pictures ........................... 31 Using the Mode Dial ........................... 32 Face Beautifier ..............................35 Wi-Fi Mode ...................................36 Scene Mode ..................................43 Custom Settings ...........................49 BASIC OPERATION ..............51 Using EVF (Electronic View Finder) ... 51 Using the Zoom Function ................... 52 Display Setting ................................... 53 AF Area .............................................. 55 Macro Mode ....................................... 56 Self-timer Mode ................................. 57 Flash Mode ....................................... 58 WB (White Balance) Mode ................ 60 Continuous Shot Mode ....................... 62 Exposure Compensation Functions Setting ................................................ 64 EV Adjustment ..............................64 ISO ................................................65 Shutter Speed Adjustment ............65 Aperture Adjustment .....................66 Using Quick Recording ...................... 66 i Button Function Menu ...................... 67 Using the Lens Function Ring . 68 Zoom/AF Mode .............................68 Function Ring (Smart) Mode .........69 MF(Manual Focus) Mode ..............70 PLAYBACK ............................71 Viewing Photos and Videos ............... 71 Thumbnail View .................................. 72 Using Zoom Playback (for still pictures only) ...................................... 73 Continuous Shot Group Playback ........74 Animation panorama play .................. 75 Slideshow ........................................... 76 Photos and Video Deletion ................. 77 USING THE MENUS .............78 Shooting Menu ................................... 78 Expo Metering ...............................79 OIS (Optical Image Stabilization) ..79 Beautifier .......................................80 Select Scene .................................80 Shoot Setting1 .................................... 81 Image Size ....................................82 11 11 Movie Size ....................................83 Quality ...........................................84 MF (Manual Focus) Assist ............85 AF Assist Beam ............................86 Digital Zoom ..................................86 Shoot Setting 2 ................................... 87 Date Imprint ..................................88 Quick Review ................................88 Cont. AF ........................................89 Face Detection ..............................89 Custom Settings ...........................90 Function Ring (Smart) ...................91 Playback Menu ................................... 92 Menu .............................................92 Display Mode ................................93 Rotate ...........................................93 Color .............................................94 HDR ..............................................95 Touch-up .......................................96 Resize ...........................................97 Playback Settings .............................. 97 Protect ..........................................98 Delete ...........................................98 DPOF

(Digital Print Order Format) ..........99 Trim ............................................ 100 Play Slide Show ......................... 100 General Settings .............................. 101 Sound Settings .......................... 102 Power Saver .............................. 102 Language ................................... 103 Zone ........................................... 103 Date/Time .................................. 103 LCD Brightness .......................... 103 File Settings ..................................... 104 Format ...................................... 105 12 Exit ............................................. 115 Video System ................................... 116 Supported HDMI Connections ......... 117 Connecting HDMI-Ready TV ..... 117 HDMI CEC Control ........................... 118 Set Eye-Fi SD Card Connection Mode ................................................ 123 APPENDICES ..................... 124 Product Specifications ...................... 124 Prompts and Warning Messages ..... 129 Troubleshooting ............................... 134 Copy to Card .............................. 106 File Numbering .......................... 106 Reset settings ............................ 107 Version ....................................... 107 CONNECTION SETTINGS . 108 Connecting to a Computer ............... 108 Setting the USB Mode ............... 108 Transferring files to your computer .................................... 109 Connecting to a PictBridge Compatible Printer ........................... 110 Setting the USB Mode ............... 110 Connecting to your Printer ......... 111 Using the PictBridge Menu ............... 112 Print (with Date) ......................... 112 Print (without Date) .................... 113 Print Index .................................. 114 Print DPOF Images .................... 115 13 GETTING READY Accessories Included Your camera box should contain the camera model you purchased along with the following accessories. If anything is missing or appears to be damaged, please contact your retailer.

(Based on sales in different countries or regions, the shape of the AC adapter will vary. Please subject to the actual product will prevail.) Rechargeable Li-ion battery AC adapter Micro USB cable Neck strap Lens cap with strap Quick Start Guide STOP Quick start guide Warranty card Service card CD-ROM 14 14 Install lens cap and neck strap

15 15 Part Names 7654 98 3 2 1 16 10 11 1. Micro HDMI Port 2. Micro USB Port 3. Zoom Lever 4. Shutter Button 5. Strap Eyelet 6. 7. 8. Power Button 9. AF Assist Beam/Self-timer Lamp 10. Flash Lamp 11. Lens Exposure Compensation Button Continuous Shot Button 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 12. Microphone 13. Electronic View Finder (EVF) 14. Electronic View Finding Window/

LCD Screen Button 15. LED Indicator Lamp 16. Mode Dial 17. 18. 19. Fast Video Recording Button Menu Button Jog Dial

] AF Button/Up Button

] Delete Button/Self-timer

[

[

Button/Down Button

[

[

] Macro Button/Left Button

] Flash Button/Right Button 23 22 21 20 20. 21. 22. 23. Display Button Playback Button SET Button i Button Rolling the

[

]/[

jog dial can be for fast selection instead of pressing the [

] direction button.

]/[

]/

17 17 24. Pivoting LCD Screen 25. Speaker 26. Lens Function Ring Lever 27. Lens Function Ring 28. Battery Cover 29. Tripod Socket 28. Battery Cover 29. Tripod Socket 27 26 25 24 29 28 18 18 Installing Battery and Memory Card 1. Open the battery cover according to the direction of arrow. 1 2 2. Insert the battery into the battery compartment according to the negative and positive directions as illustrated in the picture. Push the battery down until it locks in place. Battery lock knob 19 3. Insert the memory card into the memory card slot as shown in the diagram . 4. Close the battery cover. 1 2 Write protection buckle The memory card (SD/SDHC) is optional and not included in all camera packaging. If you have to purchase a memory card, select one with storage capacity between 4GB and 32GB to ensure correct data storage. To remove your memory card, open the battery cover, gently press the memory card to eject it and remove it carefully. 20 20 Charging Battery Please insert the battery and charge it under shutdown mode. 1. Connect the camera and the power charger using the supplied Micro USB cable. 2. Insert the plug of the power charger into the power outlet to charge the battery. After the battery is stored for a long period of time, use the supplied power charger to charge the battery prior to use. Charging indicator:

Steady orange: Charging Steady green: Charging complete To have maximum battery life, charge the battery for at least 4 hours the first time. Please charge the battery indoors between 0C and 40C. 2 1 Indicator lamp 21 Pivoting LCD Screen The LCD screen is housed in the camera's body. You may follow the directions shown below to move it as needed:

2 1 3 5 4 1. Turn on the LCD screen along the direction shown by arrow . 2. Available to rotate 180 along the direction shown by arrow . 3. Turn off the LCD screen along the direction shown by arrow . 1. Turn on the LCD screen along the direction shown by arrow . 2. Available to rotate 90 along the direction shown by arrow . Please don't rotate the LCD screen with excessive force to prevent damages. Please turn off the LCD screen inwards after use to protect it from scratches. 22 Turning Camera On and Off Press the power button to turn the camera on. To turn the camera off, press the power button again. Power Button When the power is off, press and hold the mode. button to power on and enter playback 23 Set your Language, Date/Time Set your Language, Date/Time after the first power-on 1. When you turn the camera on for the first time, the language selection screen appears. 2. Press the [

]/[

] button to select your desired language. 3. After you press the button to confirm the selection, the Date/Time settings screen appears. 4. Press the [

]/[

] button to select the Date/Time to be adjusted: Time is displayed in yyyy:MM:dd HH:mm. 5. Press the [

] button to adjust the value for the selected Date/

Time.

]/[

6. Press the button to confirm the time settings and the shooting screen appears. 24 Language Sound Settings Sound

Power Saver Powe

Language Langu

World World Time

Date Date & Time English LCD Brightness LCD B Franais Auto Auto English nglish Home Home 00:00 2014.04.23 00:00 Select Se Set Exit Exit Date & Time H-M

Select Set Exit Resetting your Language After you set your language for the first time, follow the instructions below to reset your language. 1. Press the button, press the [

]/

, and press

[

the

] button to select button to enter the menu. 2. Press the [

.

]/[

] button to select 3. Press the [

]/[

selectLanguageand press the button to enter the menu.

] button to 4. Press the [

] button to select your desired language and press the button to confirm.

]/[

5. Press the button and the shooting screen appears. Sound Settings Power Saver Language World Time Date & Time LCD Brightness Auto English Home 2014.04.23 00:00 Select Set Exit Language Sound Settings Sound

Power Saver Powe

Langu Language

World World Time

Date Date & Time English LCD B LCD Brightness Franais Auto Auto nglish English Home Home 00:00 2014.04.23 00:00 Select Se Set Exit Exit 25 25 Resetting Date/Time After you set your Date/Time for the first time, follow the instructions below to reset date and time. 1. Press the button, press the [

[

the

] button to select button to enter the menu.

]/

, and press 2. Press the [

.

]/[

] button to select 3. Press the [

]/[

] button to selectDate & Timeand press the button to enter the menu. Sound Settings Power Saver Language World Time Date & Time LCD Brightness Auto English Home 2014.04.23 00:00 Select Set Exit 4. Press the [

]/[

] button to select the Date/Time to be adjusted: Time is displayed in yyyy:MM:dd HH:mm. 5. Press the [

] button to press the value for your selected block. After you finish your settings, press the

]/[

button to confirm. 6. Press the button and the following shooting screen appears. 26 26 Date & Time H-M

Select Set Exit MODE OVERVIEW LCD Screen Display Overview of the screen icons in photo shooting mode 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 9 1011 8 00:00:00 x3.0 0000 20M 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 EV-0.0 F00.0 0/0000 ISO00000 1 Eye-Fi ON (with signal) 2 Focus Mode 3 Quality 4 Face Detection 5 Maximum Record Time 6 Recording Speed (fps) Zoom Lever) 7 Video Pixels 8 Zoom Display(By turning the 9 Number of Pictures in Static 10 Ratio of Shooting Pixels 11 Image Size 12 Battery Status Mode 13 Color Effect 14 NO Memory Card Tips 15 Beautifier 16 Flash Mode 17 OIS 18 Self-timer 27 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 00:00:00 x3.0 0000 20M EV-0.0 F00.0 0/0000 ISO00000 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 19 Lens Function Ring Custom Settings 20 ISO Value 21 Shutter Speed 24 Focus Frame 25 Exposure Compensation 26 Shooting Mode Value 29 White Balance 30 AF Area 31 Expo Metering 22 Histogram 27 Custom Settings 32 23 Aperture Value 28 Macro Mode Single / Continuous Shot / HDR / WDR /

AE Bracketing 28 Overview of the Screen Icons in Movie Mode 1 00:00:00 4 3 00/15 2 1 Battery Status 2 Number of Videos Captured 3 Continuous Recording Time 4 Movie Mode 29 Overview of the Screen Icons in Playback Mode 16 15 14 13 1 2 3 4 6 75 2014/04/23 000-0000 20M 0000 x2 Thumbnail3x3 8 9 10 11 12 File Name 1 Eye-Fi ON (with signal) 2 Quality 3 Capture Date 4 5 Shooting Pixel Ratio 6 7 Battery Status 8 Continuous Shot Group Playback Image Size Image Area 9 10 Zoom Magnification Area 11 Image Zoom Ratio 12 Index Prompt 13 Touch-up 14 HDR 15 DPOF File Icon 16 File Protection Icon 30 30 How to take pictures 1. Hold the camera with both hands as shown in the figure, not blocking the flash and lens by fingers. 2. Aim the camera at the object and then frame with the LCD screen. 3. Use the zoom lever to select Tele or Wide positions to zoom in or out on your subject. 4. Press the shutter button half way to focus on the subject. When the focus frame turns green, press the shutter button completely down to take the picture. 31 Using the Mode Dial This camera provides a convenient mode dial that allows you to manually switch between different modes with ease. The available modes are listed below:

Description Mode Name Icon Auto Mode Program AE Shutter priority Aperture priority In this mode, the optimal conditions for taking pictures will be set based on the subject and environment. It is the most commonly used mode for taking pictures. Under different scenes, the user can switch the ISO and EV value according to personal preference, the camera can automatically set the shutter speed and aperture value. Setting allows you can adjust the shutter speed / EV value and ISO value. The camera automatically sets the aperture value based on the shutter speed and ISO value to get the most appropriate exposure value. In this mode, you can adjusting the aperture size, EV and ISO values. The large aperture is to highlight the object focused through blurring the background, while the small aperture is for clear focusing on both the background and the object. 32 Manual Mode For manually setting the aperture, shutter speed and ISO value. Face Beautifier Wi-Fi Mode Scene Mode This mode automatically enhances facial features with skin softening touches and eye brightening capabilities. Make image transmission and remote control by connecting smart device with Wi-Fi. Choose from 14 different pre-set scene types and effects for your photos. Movie Mode Record videos. Custom Settings The user can store the frequently used shooting modes and parameters and switch to this mode for quick adjustment. 33 33 1. Turn the mode dial to select the mode you want. 2. Press the 2. Press the [

button to configure settings.

] button to select

]/[

an adjustment setting.

]/[

3. Press the [

adjust the parameters.

] button to 4. Press the button to confirm the settings and enter the shooting screen. Please refer to the table below if any nonadjustable options in

(O: Optional X: Not optional) mode:

Aperture Shutter EV ISO

(Display)

(Display)

(Display)

(Display)

(Display) Mode Options 34 Face Beautifier 1. Turn the mode dial to select face beautifier mode (

2. Press the 3. Roll the button and press the [

jog dial to select an option and press the

]/[

). shooting screen.

] button to select

. button to confirm and enter the Beautifier:Effect 1 Skin Soften Effect 1: Skin Soften Effect 2: Skin Soften + Eye Brightening Effect 3: Skin Soften + Eye Brightening + Eye Enlargement 35 Wi-Fi Mode Make image transmission and remote control by connecting smart device with Wi-Fi. Matters needing attention before use:

Before use, please confirm that your smart device is a smart phone with Android 2.3 or 4.x system, a tablet computer with Android 4.x or is an iOS 6/7 system. If not, please upgrade your smart device before using the APP. Please do not use in places having high intensity magnetic field, electrostatic and electric wave interference (for example near a microwave oven), which may cause failure in receiving signals. To maintain a connection, please keep the camera within 10 meters (32.8 feet) without signal shielding interference. Please do not use Wi-Fi connection functionality on a plane. The camera and the smart device can only be connected one to one. 36 1. Rotate the mode dial to and then enter the Wi-Fi selection interface. 2. Press the [

]/[

] button to select and set options. AP Mode This camera may connect with your smart device through Wi-Fi. Settings of Camera:

1. Select and press the enter the setting interface. button to 2. Press the [

]/[

] button to select options to be adjusted, and press the button to enter the option setting interface. Settings Customize the Wi-Fi settings for the camera system. Station Use the Station Mode to connect to a Personal Hotspot created by your mobile device. AP Mode In AP mode, the camera will act as an access point enabling another Wi-Fi device to connect to it. Rotate the mode dial to disconnect. AP mode Setting pre-connected device for the following serial number:

SSID: KODAK PIXPRO AZ651_XXXX WPA2-PSK: XXXXXXXX Refresh Back Refresh: Create a new WPA2 PSK password. Back: Back to previous page. 37 Settings of Smart Device:

1. Enable the Wi-Fi of smart device and then search surrounding wireless devices. 2. Select the name of camera SSID to be connected and then input the eight-digit number password after WPA2-PSK on the camera. 3. Download a dedicated installation package from the application store corresponding to the device (APP name: PIXPRO Remote Viewer) and then install it. Route of downloading the APP package:

Android: Search for "PIXPRO Remote Viewer" from Google play and install it. Search for PIXPRO Remote Viewer from APP Store and install it. iPhone:

4. Click the icon of the APP the APP. to enable Set up completion:

Once the APP is connected to the camera, functional operations can be enabled on the smart device. 38 Station Enable image transmission and remote control by connecting the camera with a Wi-Fi access point created by your smart device. 1. Enable the Wi-Fi access point of smart device. 2. Select the on camera and then press button to confirm connection with the smart device. 3. Press the [

]/[

] button to select the name of smart device to be connected and then press the button to confirm. Then, the camera enters the password input interface.

-

Press the [

] button to select:

Scan: Search again surrounding

]/[

wireless devices.

: Select the name of device to be connected. Back: Back to Wi-Fi mode select screen. 4. Press the [

]/[

]/ [

] direction button or roll the

[

jog dial to select and then press the button to confirm your selection. Enter the completion of WPA2- PSK after password storage.

]/

Enter Password

Type the network security key Save Cancel Meanings of Interface Icons:

Icon Description Delete the last letter

#!?

Switch the display of letters in capital and lowercase Move the Cursor Switch the symbol input Input Space 39 5. Connect to network after storing the password. If connected, the LCD screen will display as shown below:

Display of Wi-Fi Connection Status:

The Wi-Fi has successfully connected but APP is not enabled. If connect failed, please check Wi-Fi device and try again. 6. After connection, you may use the dedicated APP installed on smart device to carry out relative operation. The Wi-Fi has successfully connected and APP is enabled. 40 For interrupting the connection:

The Wi-Fi of smart device interrupts:

Wi-Fi Mode Disconnect from device?

No Yes No: Keep Wi-Fi connected and back to previous page. Yes: Disconnect and back to Wi-Fi mode for interface selection. Back: Back to Wi-Fi mode select screen. 41 Setting The name of this camera can be changed through key stroking. 1. Select the and then press the button to enter the setting interface. 2. Press the [

] button to select options to be adjusted and then press the button to enter the menu.

]/[

DSC device MAC address KODAK PIXPRO AZ651 38:67:93:XX:XX:XX Select Set Exit 3. Press the button to confirm settings and then skip the menu. DSC Device The default name of DSC device isKODAK PIXPRO AZ651. Change the name of DSC device through key stroking. DSC device KODAK PIXPRO AZ651 Name between 1-18 Letters

#!?

Save Cancel For the method of input, please refer to the introduction on password input on page 39. MAC address Check the wireless MAC address of this camera. 42 Scene Mode You can select an appropriate mode from the 14 scene modes according to the type of environment you are shooting. The camera then configures the most appropriate settings automatically. 1. Rotate the mode dial to

, then the LCD screen will display as below:

Auto Scence The camera automatically detects the most suitable shooting scene. 2. Press the [

3. If any need of changing the scene, please press the

] button to reselect the scene. finally the [

] button to select a scene, and press the

]/[

]/[

button to confirm. button and then the button and 43 Scene Auto Scene Description The camera automatically detects the most suitable shooting scene. Panorama Mode For shooting 360-degree landscape. Handheld Night Multi Exposure Cat/Dog Snow Party Sport Reduce blur when shooting low light/ illuminated scenes. Take several shots and overlap as a single image. The camera automatically takes a picture when a dogs face is detected. For subjects in the snow. Reduce underexposure. For subjects at night without using a tripod. Capture sharp shots without blur. For fast-moving subjects. Capture sharp action shots without blur. Night Portrait For portraits against night time scenery. Portrait Children For shooting portraits For kids and pets. Flash is disabled for eye protection. Landscape For landscapes. Vivid reproduction of greens and blues. Sunset Fireworks For sunsets. Capture subjects in strong sunlight. For fireworks at night. Slow shutter speed adjusted for brilliant images. 44 Auto Scene (ASCN) In ASCN scene mode, the camera can detect different environments intelligently and automatically select the best scene and photo settings for you. ASCN can intelligently detect the following scenes:

Mode Name Description Auto Landscape Backlit Portrait Macro Night Landscape Portrait Night Portrait The camera will automatically adjusts the exposure and focus to ensure the best possible pictures. For landscapes, will automatically adjust the exposure to match the background. When the sun or any other light source is behind you, will automatically adjust the foreground exposure to produce the best pictures possible. The Macro Setting is ideal for shooting small objects or close-up photos. For night scenes, will automatically increase the ISO value to compensate for low light. Most suitable for capturing people with focus on their faces. When you take portraits at night, or in low light conditions, will automatically adjust the exposure for people and night scenes. 45 Panorama Mode This feature allows you to capture a panoramic view that will have significantly more content than a single photograph. Follow the instruction arrow with a smooth and steady movement of the camera to seamlessly shoot an ultra-wide scene of up to 360 degrees. 3. Compose your shot on the LCD screen and half press the shutter button to focus on the subject. After focusing, fully press the shutter button down to take the first picture. At this time, the process dialog of panorama mode stitching appears on the screen. F00.0 0/0000 Cancel Save 4. Move or rotate the camera according to the set direction. When the range of movement or rotation meets the internal settings of the camera, the progress dialog along the indication arrow partially turns red. When it completely turns red, panorama mode shooting is finished. Panorama Mode For shooting 360-degree landscape Follow the steps below:

1. Select the panorama mode (

then press the 2. Press the [

button to confirm.

]/

]/[

]/[

) and

] button to select a shooting

[

direction. (The right direction is used as default if you do not make any choice), 2 seconds later, the camera is ready to take pictures. You can also press the button or half press the shutter button to be ready to take pictures. 46 Multi Exposure Suitable for shooting moving objects (as many as 6) in the same background. Keep camera steady before shooting. Press and hold the shutter button to take 6 photos continuously when it will stop automatically. To stop shooting, release the shutter button in the midway. Objects shall be moved only from left to the right in order to be recorded. Objects moving from other directions would not be recorded. Shooting effect will be influenced if object is moving too fast or too close. Panoramic image can be played back by the method of flash playing. Please see the animation panoramic playback on page 75. During shooting, the flash, self-timer, macro modes and exposure compensation are not available. Focus adjustment is also not available at this time. button to interrupt During panorama mode shooting, press the shooting and save the current pictures taken. Press the [

] button to cancel shooting and not to save the previously taken pictures. During panorama mode shooting, when the moving direction of the camera is wrong or the angle deviates from the internal settings, the LCD screen shows a warning message Improper alignment. Please try again.and the current pictures taken are saved. 47 Functions that can be adjusted in each scene are as below:

Scene Adjustable Functions Flash*1/Self-timer None Expo Metering/Self-timer*2 Expo Metering Auto Shooting/Continuous Shot/Expo Metering/Macro Continuous Shot/Expo Metering/Flash/Self-timer Continuous Shot/HDR/Expo Metering/Flash/Self-timer/Macro Continuous Shot/Expo Metering Single/HDR/Expo Metering/Self-timer Continuous Shot/Expo Metering/Flash/Self-timer/Macro Continuous Shot/Expo Metering Expo Metering/Self-timer*2 Single/HDR/Expo Metering/Flash/Self-timer*2 Continuous Shot/Expo Metering/Self-timer*2 Auto Scene Panorama Mode Handheld Night Multi Exposure Cat/Dog Snow Party Sport Night Portrait Portrait Children Landscape Sunset Fireworks

*1 Means the flash as an option of Night Landscape mode in Auto Scene is non-adjustable.

*2 Means self-timer smile is not included in the self-timer. For continuous shot, there are onlyContinuous ShotandTime-Lapsefor selection. 48 Custom Settings The user can store the frequently used shooting modes and parameters and switch to this mode for quick adjustment. Settings under state after reset):

1. Turn the mode dial to select the mode (unset state or mode, and enter the setup screen, as shown in the figure below:

Go to setting CS mode Yes Or Rotating the mode dial to skip . Select one capture mode to define CS . Auto Mode Confirm Exit For setting under other modes (use this method to select a different custom setting):

1. Select any mode or scene mode to be stored. 2. Set your desired parameters in the current mode. 2. As shown in the figure, press the [

]/

] button to select a capture mode

[

that you want to define as the screen. button to enter the shooting

, and press 3. As shown in the figure, press the button, and choose whether to continue the mode setting or rotating the mode dial to skip. 3. Press the button, press the [

[

the

] button to select button to enter the menu.

]/

, and press 4. Press [

]/[

] button to select 2 . 49 5. Press the [

] button select Custom Settingsand press the button to enter the menu. 7. Turn the mode dial to switch to the custom settings (

). 8. The photo settings you stored the last time are invoked. mode is used for the When the first time, there is no preset parameter stored in the mode.

) in mode, if you need to Under the retain or modify the set parameters

(except the parameters in restart or all modes. Please enter the Custom Settingsmenu and select Yesafter setup. Otherwise, the parameter settings are not retained in the case of switching on/off or mode switching. If you want to remove the parameter setting ofCustom Settings, please see the reset function on page 90 to operate. Date Imprint Quick Review Cont. AF Face Detection Custom Settings Function Ring (Smart) Select Set Off Off Off Off Normal Exit 6. SelectYesto save orNoto cancel. Custom Settings Set camera to user custom mode No Yes 50 50 BASIC OPERATION Using EVF (Electronic View Finder) EVF functions as the LCD screen, which can be used to observe the scene and objects and for playback, preview and menu operations. EVF has the following advantages:

It will not be affected by ambient light and may avoid poor composition due to light reflection on the LCD screen. Follow the steps below:

1. Turn the camera on and press the the LCD screen will become black. button to switch to the EVF display. At this time, 2. View the scenes and objects through the EVF. 3. Press the button again or restart the camera to switch back to the LCD screen display. 51 Using the Zoom Function Your camera is equipped with two types of zoom functions: optical zoom and digital zoom. Toggle the zoom lever of the camera to zoom in or out of the subject while taking pictures. x3.0 Zoom Indicator EV-0.0 F00.0 0/0000 ISO00000 When the optical zoom reaches the threshold as digital zoom, release and turn the zoom lever to T to switch between the optical zoom and digital zoom. Zoom Lever 52 Display Setting button to switch among 4 Mode:

Press the screens. Function Message Display No Message Display 00:00:00 x3.0 0000 20M EV-0.0 F00.0 0/0000 ISO00000 Message Display EV-0.0 F00.0 0/0000 ISO00000 Display with Grid and Histogram 00:00:00 x3.0 0000 20M x00.0 00:00:00 0000 20M EV-0.0 F00.0 0/0000 ISO00000 EV-0.0 F00.0 0/0000 ISO00000 53 Mode:

Press the screen, press the 3 screens. Function Message Display button to enter playback button to switch among No Message Display 0000/00/00 000-0000 20M

3x3 Detailed Message Display 0000/00/00 000-0000 20M EV-0.0 F00.0 000mm 0/0000 ISO00000 54 54 AF Area In different photo shooting modes, you can select different focus methods.

(Adjustable in 1. Press the [

] button to display the mode) settings screen. Center-AF 2. Press the [

]/[

] button to select the following 3 modes:

Center-AF The focus frame appears on the center of the LCD screen to focus on the subject. Multi-AF The camera automatically focuses the subject in a wide area to find the focus point. Spot Focus Select a single focus point within the scope of focus. Object Tracking:

Smart tracking of the object in motion under the focusing shooting. 3. Press the button to confirm the settings and enter the shooting screen. After enabling spot focus, rolling the jog dial to adjust the position of focus point in the screen. The function of object tracking cannot be enabled until successful focus. For tracking the focus, you need to keep the shutter semi-pressed. 55 Macro Mode The Macro Setting is ideal for shooting small objects or close-up photos. This mode allows you to focus on subjects very close to the camera. 1. Press the [

] button to enter the Marco Menu. Macro On 2. Press the [

] button to select the following 2 modes:

]/[

Macro On Select this option to make focusing on the object closer to the lens (At the W side, the shooting distance should be more than 3 cm). Macro Off Select this option to disable Macro. 3. Press the button to confirm the settings and enter the shooting screen. 56 Self-timer Mode Using this function can take photos at regular time. The camera can be set to shoot after 2 seconds, 10 seconds since pressing the shutter or shoot after smile. 1. Press the [

] button to enter the self-timer menu. Self-timer 2sec Self-timer 10sec A single picture is shot 10 seconds after the shutter button is pressed. Self-timer Smile Press the shutter button and a picture will be taken immediately after a smile is detected. Self-timer Off Disables the self-timer. 2. Press [

]/[

] buttont to select the following 4 modes:

Self-timer 2sec A single picture is shot 2 seconds after the Shutter button is pressed. 3. Press the button to confirm the settings and enter the shooting screen. When enabling the self-timer, pressing the shutter or the [

] button can disable the self-timer and return to the shooting screen, and keep the self-timer setting. 57 When enabling the smile detection, pressing the shutter or the button can disable the self-timer smile and return to the shooting screen, and keeping the self-timer smile setting. Self-timer settings will be remained after completion of shooting with self-timer, but which can be canceled in switching modes and on, off the camera. 58 Flash Mode The flash is mainly for supplementing light for the scene. The flash is usually used in shooting against the light to highlight the object shot through lightening the object while darkening the background; it is also suitable for metering and shooting in darker scenes through exposure. 1. Press the [

] button to enter the flash settings menu. Force Off 2. Press the [

]/[

] button to select the following 6 modes:

Force Off Flash is turned off. Fill Flash The flash will engage with each shot even if there is enough available light to take the photo without flash. Flash Auto Camera flash goes off automatically based on existing light conditions. Red-Eye Reduction The camera emits a brief pre-flash before the picture is taken to reduce red-eye effects. Slow Sync. This allows you to take pictures of people at night that clearly show both your subjects and the night time backdrop. The use of a tripod is recommended when shooting with this setting. Slow Sync.+Red-Eye Reduction Use this mode for slow synchrony shots with red-eye reduction. 3. Press the button to confirm the settings and enter the shooting screen. After pressing the shutter button half way to make focusing, if the photometric value is less, the flashlight on the top will bounce automatically. 59 59 WB (White Balance) Mode The white balance function allows adjustment of the color temperature for different light Mode) sources. (Adjustable in Follow the steps below to set white balance of the camera:

1. Press menu. button to enter white balance AWB 2. Press the [

]/[

] button to select the following 9 modes:

AWB Daylight Cloudy Fluorescent Fluorescent H Incandescent Manual WB According to the current light source to set WB, Press the button to set. Color Temp. (1900K~10000K) Press the rolling the the color temperature value. button to enter and jog dial to adjust WB Bracketing Press the shutter button once to take three photos with different WB settings. 3. Press the button to confirm the settings and enter the shooting screen. 60 button to enter options and then press the [

WB Bracketing:

Press the

]

directional button to adjust the shift and roll the jog dial to adjust the BKT value (0, 1 and 2). Rotate clockwise to adjust X axis (B-A).BKT value Rotate counterclockwise to adjust Y axis (G-M). BKT value Press the button to confirm your settings.

]/ [

]/[

]/[

WB Bracketing : BG1 2G Shift B 9 BKT 1 Confirm WB bracketing is for setting the bracketing range. Shift to both sides for 3 spaces at most. If at the page border, shift only to the other side and 2 photos can be taken. If no shift, only one photo can be taken. 61 61 Continuous Shot Mode Functions that can be enabled under each mode may be different. Mode For setting the single, self-timer, continuous shot, HDR , WDR or AE bracketing functions. Please follow the following steps to set:

1. Press the shot menu. button to enter the continuous

2. Press the [

]/[

] button to select the following 8 modes:

Single Capture a single shot only. 62 Continuous Shot For taking more than one picture continuously. Cont.Shot-Fast (4M) For continuous shot with 4M pixels. Cont.Shot-High Speed (VGA) For continuous shot with VGA pixel. Time-Lapse Take pictures based on the preset interval (30sec/ 1min/ 5min/ 10min). Press the interval time. button to select the HDR (-1EV, 0EV, +1EV) This setting is to control the high dynamic image range in taking still pictures, with vivid effect in highlight and that the effect in dark parts can identify the outline and depth of the object. (Use of tripod is recommended) WDR (Wide Dynamic Range) When the camera detects that there is a big contrast in brightness between scenes and such scenes are against the light, it will automatically adjust the brightness and saturation to capture an image that better represents the scene. AE Bracketing (0.3EV, 0.7EV, 1.0EV, 1.3EV, 1.7EV, 2.0EV) The camera will automatically and continuously take three pictures separately with a brightness of original, darker and brighter as long as you press the shutter once. Press the button to select the range of exposure. 3. Press the button to confirm the settings and then enter shooting screen. 63 63 Exposure Compensation Functions Setting EV Adjustment Set up to adjust the picture brightness. In the case of a very high contrast between the photographed object and the background, the brightness of the picture can be appropriately adjusted. (Adjustable in Mode) EV-0.0 F00.0 0/0000 ISO00000 The adjustable range of exposure value is from EV -3.0 to EV+3.0. The EV function menu of the camera includes functions, such as EV adjustment, ISO, shutter adjustment, aperture adjustment, etc. Using the appropriate function settings can improve your pictures. Please follow the steps below to set:

1. Press the button to display the settings screen. 4 options in [ Exposure Compensation Functions Setting ]:

EV Adjustment ISO Shutter Speed Adjustment Aperture Adjustment 2. Press the [

]/[

the setting options.

] button to select 3. Press the [

]/[

adjust the option values.

] button to 4. Press the button to complete the setting and enter shooting screen. 64 ISO ISO allows you to set the sensitivity of the camera sensor. Please use a higher ISO value in darker places and a lower value in brighter conditions.

(Adjustable in Mode) Shutter Speed Adjustment For shutter speed, the camera may automatically set the aperture value corresponding to the manually set shutter speed so as to obtain a most suitable exposure value. The movement of object may be shown by adjusting the shutter speed. High shutter value can make you clearly capture the movement of fast moving object while low shutter value can allow you to take a picture for fact moving object with a strong sense of movement.

(Adjustable in Mode) EV-0.0 F00.0 0/0000 ISO00000 The camera's ISO settings include:

automatic, 100, 200, 400, 800, 1600 and 3200. EV-0.0 F00.0 0/0000 ISO00000 65 65 Aperture Adjustment You can adjust the aperture size value. Selecting a large aperture opening will emphasize the point of focus and show a blurry background and foreground. A small aperture opening will keep both the background and main object in clear focus.

(Adjustable in Mode) EV-0.0 F00.0 ISO00000 66 66 Using Quick Recording In shooting mode, press the Recording shortcut button to begin recording video. 00:00:00 00/15 15 pictures at most can be taken by pressing the shutter when recording. The sizes of images taken are as below when playing them back:

FHD -> 2M 2M HD -> 1M DVD -> VGA After recording, press again the to save the video and return to the shooting screen. button i Button Function Menu Functions that can be enabled are different under each mode. Mode:

The image color setting allows you to select different color effects. 1. Press the button to select the Image color setting menu. Normal 2. Press the [

]/[

] button to select the image color setting options. Normal Vivid Black and White Sepia Partial Color-Red Partial Color-Yellow Partial Color-Blue Partial Color-Green Dreamy Vignetting Ektachrome Kodachrome Kodacolor Salon Punk Negative Reflection Sketch Fish Eye 4 Grids - Stylish(2M) 67 67 Using the Lens Function Ring There is a lens function ring lever in one side of the lens. Moving it up and down can switch among ZOOM/AF, SMART and MF. Zoom/AF Mode Rotate the lens function ring for optical zoom. 1. Switch the lens function ring lever to position

. 2. Rotate the lens function ring to optically zoom the object. x3.0 EV-0.0 F00.0 0/0000 ISO00000 Rotating the lens function ring in Zoom/

AF mode is only for optical zoom. 00:00:00 0000 20M 68 EV-0.0 F00.0 0/0000 ISO00000 Function Ring (Smart) Mode Rotate the lens function ring to set parameters of aperture, shutter, ISO, EV, etc. 1. Switch the lens function ring lever to position

. 2. Rotate the lens function ring or rolling the jog dial to select options needed. EV-0.7 EV+0.7 EV-0.3 EV+0.3 EV+0.0 EV-0.0 F00.0 ISO00000 3. Press the button to complete the setting and enter shooting screen. The selection of functions of Function Ring (Smart) in the before using Function Ring (Smart) mode. The default setting is Normal.

(See P91 for details) menu is needed Options Nomal Aperture priority Shutter priority EV ISO Continuous Shot Color White Blance Image Size Expo Metering Flash AF Area Referred Pages P64 P66 P65 P64 P65 P62 P67 P60 P82 P79 P58 P55 69 69 MF(Manual Focus) Mode Rotate the lens function ring for manual focus. 1. Switch the lens function ring lever to position

. 00:00:00 0000 20M EV-0.0 F00.0 0/0000 ISO00000 70 70 jog dial , the AF enlargement frame will If the lens function ring is operated or rolling the appear on the LCD screen. After clear focus is achieved through manual adjustment, press button to close the AF enlargement the frame. The camera will return to the normal shooting screen. Semi-pressing the shutter button will have no effect; you need to fully press the shutter button to take a normal photo. 00:00:00 0000 20M cm 30 1010 5 3 EV-0.0 F00.0 0/0000 ISO00000 The MF assist needs to be enabled with the button before you need use the manual focus function. (See P85 for details) PLAYBACK Viewing Photos and Videos For viewing taken photos and videos on the LCD screen:

1. After pressing the button, the last photo or video clip taken will be displayed on the LCD screen. 2. Use the [

memory or on the memory card.

]/[

] button to scroll through the photos or video clips stored in the internal 3. To play a selected video clip, press the An operation guide appears on the screen when playing back a video. Press the appropriate buttons to enable the corresponding functions. button to enter the movie playback mode. Under Playback Paused 00:00:00 00:00:00 00:00:00 00:00:00 Pause Rewind Fast Forward Clockwise Volume Up Counterclockwise Volume Down Volume Mute Play Frame Backward Frame Forward Cancel playback 71 Thumbnail View When in playback mode, rotate the zoom lever counter clockwise to the to display thumbnail images of the photos and videos on the screen. position W Zoom Out T Zoom In 2. Press the arrow buttons to select a picture or video clip to view and press the button to restore it to the original size. 3. As shown in the picture, press the button to select index mode. 4 options in [ Index Mode ] :

Single Index Date Folder Cont. Group Play Slide Show When the icon this is a video file. appears, it means When the icon this is a continuous group file. appears, it means 1. Slide the zoom lever to switch between 3x3 and 4x4 thumbnails. Select index mode Select index mode 72 Using Zoom Playback (for still pictures only) button to switch to playback mode. When playing back photos, you can also use the zoom lever to zoom in on the photos 2 to 8 times. 1. Press the 2. Press the [

3. Rotate the zoom lever clockwise to 4. Rolling the 5. The bottom right corner of the screen will display the number of times and area of the photo jog dial clockwise to zoom in and counterclockwise to zoom out.

] button to select a picture to be zoomed in. to zoom in.

]/[

zooming operation. x2 x2

]/ [

]/[

] button to navigate and select a part of the 6. Press the[

]/[

image to be zoomed in. 7. Press the button to return the image to its original scale. Movie images cannot be magnified. 73 Continuous Shot Group Playback Ultra-high speed (VGA) and high speed (4M) can make Continuous Shot for group image playback. 1. Press the 2. Press the [

3. Press the

] button to select continuous group. button to enter playback screen. button to start playback.

]/[

0000/00/00 000-0000 20M 0000/00/00 000-0000 20M 0000 Thumbnail3x3 Cont. Group 00 00 00 00 Playing Pause Pause Cancel Play (back to 1:1 playback for continuous group) Playing Play Previous photo (loop available only in continuous group) Next photo (loop available only in continuous group) Cancel Play (back to 1:1 playback for continuous group) Pause 74 Animation panorama play Panoramic animation playing is to play full size image in accordance with the shooting direction. After playing, it will automatically return to the static screen of panoramic image. 1. Press the 2. Press the [

3. Press

] button to select animated panoramic photos. button to play in selected shooting direction. button to enter playback screen.

]/[

0000/00/00 000-0000 2M

Video Panorama Pause Cancel Play Playing Pause In the process of panoramic animation playback, press the return to the playback screen. button to stop playing and Picture will not be rotated during panorama play or pause. 75

 

 

Slideshow This setting allows you to view all the stored images as a slideshow. 1. Press the button to enter playback screen. 2. Rotate the zoom lever counter clockwise to position to display thumbnails 3x3 button to select the the and then press the index mode. Slide show Back Exit Type 1: Slow-in and slow-out Type 2: Separate in middle and move off to the left and right Type 3: Separate into blocks and spin in 3. Press the [

]/[

] button to select slideshow playing and then press the button to confirm.

]/[

4. Press the [

] button to select button play effect and then press the to confirm. 76 Photos and Video Deletion

] button to delete your photos and videos. In playback mode, press the [

To delete photos or videos:

1. Press the 2. Press the [

3. Press the [

]/[

button to switch to playback mode.

] button to select the photos and videos to be deleted.

] button and the deletion screen is displayed. 4. Press the [

button to confirm.

]/[

] button to select Delete OneorExitand press the Erased photos/video clips cannot be recovered. Please refer to page 98 for instructions on deleting more than one image at a time. 77 USING THE MENUS Shooting Menu 2. Press the [

]/[

] button to select the shooting menu to be set. 3. Press the [

]/[

] button or rolling jog dial to select options of the the shooting menu to be set and then press the button to confirm. Refer to the following pages for more details about each setting. Mode:

1. In shooting mode, press the button to enter the shooting menu. 12 options in [ Shooting Menu ]:

Continuous Shot Mode (refer to P62) Expo Metering AF (Auto Focus) Area (refer to P55) WB (White Balance) Mode (refer to P60) Macro Mode (refer to P56) Color (refer to P67) Flash mode (refer to P58) OIS (Optical Image Stabilization) Self-Timer Mode (refer to P57) Beautifier Select Scene Menu Functions that can be enabled are different under each mode. 78 Expo Metering Use this setting to select the target size of the cameras field of view to be metered. OIS (Optical Image Stabilization) This mode can help reduce photo blur caused by unintentional hand shake. Expo Metering: AiAE OIS: On Spot For metering targets a small area in the center of the cam-

eras field of view. Center For metering the object in the center of the screen. AiAE (Artificial Intelligence AE) For automatically selecting the central and surrounding meter-

ing to weight a proper metering value.. OIS: Off OIS: On Use this image stabilization mode in dark environments. Shooting in a windy or unstable environment (such as a moving vehicle) may cause blurred images. 79 79 Beautifier Set the effect of the beautifier mode. Select Scene Select the scene mode under the SCN mode. Beautifier:Effect 1 Skin Soften Select Scene Effect 1: Skin Soften Effect 2: Skin Soften

+ Eye Brightening Effect 3: Skin Soften

+ Eye Brightening

+ Eye Enlargement 80 80 4. Press the [

] button to select the item to be set and press the button to enter the menu.

]/[

5. Press the [

]/[

] button to select an option and press the to confirm. button Shoot Setting1 Mode:

1. Press the button, press the [

]/

[

] button to select

. 2. Press the 3. Press [

button to enter the menu.

]/[

] button to select 1 . 6 options in [ Shoot Settings 1 ]:

Image Size Movie Size Quality MF Assist AF Assist Beam Digital Zoom Functions that can be enabled are different under each mode. 81 Image Size The size setting refers to the image resolution in pixels. A higher image resolution allows you to print that image in larger sizes without degrading the image quality. Image Size Image Size Image 20M Movie Movie Size 18M-3:2 Quali Quality 15M-16:9 MF A MF Assist 10M AF As AF Assist Beam 5M Digita Digital Zoom 3M Se Select 20M 20M 30fps 1920x1080 30fps G Fine JPG Fine Off Off Off Off Off Off Exit Exit Set 20M: High quality printing 18M-3:2: Full size printing 15M-16:9: display 10M: Poster printing 5M: A3 printing 3M: A4 printing 2M-16:9: 4x 6 printing VGA: E-Mail The larger the number of recorded pixels, the larger the file size and the fewer files that can be saved on your memory card. 82 Movie Size Set the image resolution used during video recording. Movie Size Image Size Image 1920x1080 30fps Movie Movie Size 1280x720 60fps Quali Quality 1280x720 30fps MF Assist MF A 640x480 30fps AF As AF Assist Beam 640x480 120fps Digital Zoom Digita Select Se Set 20M 20M 30fps 1920x1080 30fps G Fine JPG Fine Off Off Off Off Off Off Exit Exit Total time of video recorded for each setting:

No. Image Pixel 1 2 3 4 5 1920x1080 1280x720 1280x720 640x480 640x480 Frame

(fps) 30 60 30 30 120 Recommendation Class 6 Class 6 Class 4 Class 4 Class 6 Recording time

(approximate)

(4GB) 20 minutes 25 minutes 45 minutes 105 minutes 40 minutes 83 Recording time limit above 1280x720 30 fps format is under 29 minutes. When recording in higher pixel resolutions for extended periods of time, this can cause the camera to generate heat. This is not a camera malfunction. When the video format is set as 640x480 (120fps), shooting time is 30 seconds, playback time is 2 minutes. Sound recording is disabled when 640x480 120fps is chosen. Quality The quality setting can be used to adjust the image compression ratio. Quality Image Size Image RAW+JPG Movie Size Movie RAW Quality Quali JPG Fine MF A MF Assist JPG Best AF As AF Assist Beam Digita Digital Zoom Select Se Set 20M 20M 1920x1080 30fps 30fps JPG Fine G Fine Off Off Off Off Off Off Exit Exit RAW+JPG Creates two images: one in RAW and the other in JPG best. RAW The image file will contain more data that can be used for the purpose of editing on a computer. JPG Fine JPG Best 84 If RAW or RAW+JPG is selected, the settings of Colour Effect, Continuous Shot, Cont.Shot-High Speed, HDR and AE Bracketing cannot be adjusted. 00:00:00 0000 16M RAW is a format of lossless compression, which is a raw data file not processed by the camera. You may use the image processing software PhotoStudio Darkroom (in CD-ROM of the component) we provide to process the image effect. PhotoStudio Darkroom supports windows vista /7/8 and iOS (v10.6.8-v10.8). EV-0.0 F00.0 0/0000 ISO00000 Single MF (Manual Focus) Assist Enables an enlarged focus window during the use of manual focus to provide the user better visibility for focus control.

(Adjustable in mode) MF Assist 20M 20M 1920x1080 30fps 30fps JPG Fine G Fine Image Size Image Off Movie Size Movie On Quality Quali MF A MF Assist AF As AF Assist Beam Digita Digital Zoom Select Se Set Off On Off Off Off Off Off Off Exit Exit 85 AF Assist Beam In a darker environment, AF assist beam can be turned on for better focus. AF Assist Beam Image Size Image Off Movie Movie Size On Quali Quality MF A MF Assist AF As AF Assist Beam Digita Digital Zoom Select Se Set 20M 20M 1920x1080 30fps 30fps G Fine JPG Fine Off Off Off Off Off Off Exit Exit Off On Digital Zoom This setting is for adjusting digital zoom. If this function is disabled, only optical zoom can be used. Digital Zoom 20M 20M 1920x1080 30fps 30fps JPG Fine G Fine Off Off Off Off Off Off Exit Exit Image Size Image Off Movie Size Movie On Quality Quali MF A MF Assist AF As AF Assist Beam Digita Digital Zoom Select Se Set Off On 86 86 4. Press the [

] button to select the item to be set and press the button to enter the menu.

]/[

5. Press the [

]/[

] button to select an option and press the to confirm. button Shoot Setting 2 Mode:

1. Press the button, press the [

[

] button to select

.

]/

2. Press the 3. Press [

button to enter the menu.

]/[

] button to select 2 . 6 options in [ Shoot Settings 2 ]:

Date Imprint Quick Review Cont. AF Face Detection Custom Settings Function Ring (Smart) Functions that can be enabled are different under each mode. 87 Date Imprint Include a Date/Time stamp on the photo image. Date Imprint Date Date Imprint Off Quick Quick Review Date Cont. Cont. AF Date/Time Face Face Detection Custom Settings Custo Funct Function Ring (Smart) Se Select Set Off Off Off Off Off Off Off Off Normal Normal Exit Exit Quick Review This option enables a brief review of images immediately after capture. Each picture will be displayed on the LCD screen per the selections below. Quick Review Date Date Imprint Off Quick Quick Review 1 Sec Cont. Cont. AF 2 Sec Face Detection Face 3 Sec Custom Settings Custo Funct Function Ring (Smart) Select Se Set Off Off Off Off Off Off Off Off Normal Normal Exit Exit Off 1 sec 2 sec 3 sec 2014/04/23 00:00 Off Date Date / Time 88 Cont. AF Enable the continuous AF to be able to continuously focus automatically when taking pictures. Face Detection For detecting and focusing on faces to make all faces as clear as possible in photo mode. Cont. AF Date Date Imprint Off Quick Quick Review On Cont. Cont. AF Face Detection Face Custom Settings Custo Funct Function Ring (Smart) Select Se Set Off Off Off Off Off Off Off Off Normal Normal Exit Exit Off On Face Detection Date Date Imprint Off Quick Quick Review On Cont. Cont. AF Face Detection Face Custom Settings Custo Funct Function Ring (Smart) Select Se Set Off Off Off Off Off Off Off Off Normal Normal Exit Exit 1. Hold the camera steadily and then focus on the object to detect its face. A focus frame will appear at the face on the screen when a face is detected. 89 2. Press the shutter button half-way down to focus. The LCD screen will show a green focus frame when the subject is in focus. Custom Settings Custom Settings stores the current photo shooting mode and its parameters. The stored mode and parameters are directly invoked in Custom Settings mode. Custom Settings Set camera to user custom mode No Yes F2.9 1/50 3. Press the shutter button all the way down to take pictures. The closed eyes detection is usually on. If the camera detects in the course of quick review there is a face with eyes closed, a prompt of closed eyes will appear

. No Yes 90 Function Ring (Smart) Any option could be set as Function Ring (Smart) Custom. The setting of this parameter could be quickly adjusted through operating the lens function ring in shooting. Function Ring (Smart) Off Off Off Off Off Off Off Off Normal ormal Exit Exit Date Date Imprint Normal Quick Review Quick Aperture priority Cont. Cont. AF Shutter priority Face Detection Face EV Custo Custom Settings ISO Function Ring (Smart) Funct Continuous Shot Select Se Set Nomal Aperture priority Shutter priority EV ISO Continuous Shot Color White Blance Image Size Expo Metering Flash AF Area 91 Playback Menu Mode:

1. Press the screen and press the the menu. 2. Press the [

]/[

button to display the playback button to enter button to enter.

] button to select the playback to be set and press the 7 options in [ Playback Menu ]:

Menu Display Mode Rotate Color HDR Touch-up Resize 3. Press the [

]/[

] button to select an option and press the confirm. button to Refer to the following pages for more details about each setting. 92 Menu 2 7 options in [Menu]

Shoot Settings 1

(See P81 for details) Shoot Settings 2

(See P87 for details) Playback Settings

(See P97 for details) General Settings

(See P101 for details) File Settings

(See P104 for details) Connection Settings

(See P108 for details) Wi-Fi Settings

(See P42 for details) Display Mode Rotate You can use this setting to change the orientation of the picture. Date Folder Date Mode: Arranged by date. Back Normal Mode: Display all images. Date Mode: Arranged by date. Cont. Photo Mode: Arranged by Cont. Photo Group. Slide Show The Date Folder is displayed in date order based on photo shooting date/

time. If there is no any continuous shot image file in the memory, continuous shot playback mode cannot be enabled!

Exit

: Cancel

: Turn Left

: Turn Right Videos and panoramic pictures cannot be rotated. The rotated picture file will replace the original photo. 93 93 Vignetting Salon Punk (4M) Negative (8M) Fish Eye Reflection 4 Grids - Stylish (2M) In playing back single photos, press the button to enter the color effect setting menu. Color This setting allows you to change the picture color effect. The file is saved as a new photo and stored in memory together with the original photo.

Exit Vivid Black and White Sepia Partial Color-Red Partial Color-Yellow Partial Color-Blue Partial Color-Green Dreamy 94 HDR With the HDR function, pictures that are overexposed may be corrected to optimize the highlights and lowlights captured to more accurately represent the actual scene. Select with HDR :

0000/00/00 000-0000 20M Exit Thumbnail3x3 After using the HDR function, the image will be saved as a new file and the original file is still stored in the memory.

: Cancel

: HDR 95 Touch-up The playback beauty feature allows for beautification using three individual effects. Select with touch-up:

0000/00/00 000-0000 20M Thumbnail 3x3 Exit

: Cancel

: Red-Eye Reduction

: Skin Soften

: Eye Brightening

: Eye Enlargement Using the face beautifier mode allows you to select from single, two, or all three effects combined. 96 96 Resize This setting allows you to resize a picture to a particular resolution and saves it as a new picture. Exit

: Exit

: Resize to 1024x768

: Resize to 640X480 Only for adjusting pictures with high resolution to those with low resolution. Sizes of photos taken in panorama mode or rotated cannot be adjusted. Playback Settings Mode:

1. Press the

[

button, press the [

] button to select

.

]/

2. Press the 3. Press [

button to enter the menu.

]/[

] button to select 5 options in [ Playback Settings ]:

Protect Delete DPOF Trim Play Slide Show 4. Press the [

] button to select the item to be set and press the button to enter the menu.

]/[

5. Press the [

]/[

] button to select an option and press the to confirm. button Refer to the following pages for more details about each setting. 97 Delete You can delete one or all photo/video files. Delete Protect Prote One Delete Delet DPOF DPOF Date Folder Cont. Group Trim Trim All Play Slide Show Play S Select Se Set Exit Exit One Delete one photo or video. Date Folder Delete all photos in the Date Folder. Cont. Group Delete all photos in the Cont. Group. All Delete all photos or videos. Protect To prevent any pictures or videos from being accidentally erased, use this setting to lock one or all of the files. Protect One One Protect Protec One Delete Delete DPOF DPOF Date Folder Cont. Group Trim Trim All Play Slide Show Play S Reset Select Se Set Exit Exit One Lock the selected photo or video if they are unprotected; unlock the selected photo or video if they are protected. Date Folder Protect all photos in the Date Folder. Cont. Group Protect all photos in the Cont. Group. All Lock all photos or videos. Reset Cancel all locked photos or videos. 98 The indicator means a file is protected. File protection must be removed first before a file can be deleted. Deleting files will cause DPOF settings to be reset. When one photo in the Cont. Group and Date Folders is protected, it will be kept but any other photos will be deleted. DPOF (Digital Print Order Format) The DPOF feature allows you to compile and select a group of pictures that you would like to print and will save your selection on the memory card so that you can use the memory card to print without having to individually specify the photos you want to print. DPOF Protect Prote Delete Delet One All DPOF DPOF Reset Trim Trim Play Slide Show Play S Select Se Set Exit Exit One All Reset The printer that supports DPOF is needed for printing. 99 Trim The Trim setting allows you to crop photos and save them as new pictures. 1. SelectYesto confirm trim. Toggle the zoom lever or rolling the the aspect ratio and press the [

[

]/[

part you want to trim.

]/ [

jog dial to select

]/

] button to adjust the Yes Back 2. Press the button and theSave change?prompt appears. Select to change and save the picture. Select to cancel changes and return to the trim prompt screen. The image cannot be clipped/trimmed again once it has been clipped to 640X480. Videos, RAW files cannot be trimmed. 100 100 The picture after trimming cannot be trimmed again. Play Slide Show This setting allows you to view all the stored images as a slideshow. Play Slide Show Protect Prote All Files Delete Delet DPOF DPOF Trim Trim Still Captures Videos Cont. Group Play Slide Show Play S Select Se Set Exit Exit All Files To display and play back all images in memory card. Still Captures To display and play back images of photo files in memory card. Videos To play back movies on memory card. Cont. Group To only play back images arranged by cont. group in memory card. General Settings Mode :

1. Press the

[

button, press the [

] button to select

.

]/

2. Press the 3. Press [

button to enter the menu.

]/[

.

] button to select 6 options in [ General Settings ] :

Sound Settings Power Saver Language World Time Date & Time LCD Brightness 4. Press the [

] button to select the item to be set and press the button to enter the menu.

]/[

5. Press the [

]/[

] button to select an option and press the to confirm. button Refer to the following pages for more details about each setting. 101 Sound Settings With this setting you may adjust the sound volume. Press the [

option and press the our setting.

] button to select an button to confirm

]/[

Sound Settings Volume Power Saver This setting allows you to save power and get the maximum possible running time for your camera's batteries. Follow the steps below to turn the LCD screen and camera off automatically after a consecutive period of inactivity. Power Saver Sound Settings Sound Auto Power Saver Power Normal Langua Language Best World T World Time Date &

Date & Time LCD B LCD Brightness Off Off Auto Auto glish English ome Home 0:00 2014.04.2300:00 Select Set Exit Select Sele Set Exit Exit Auto Normal Best Power Saver Auto Normal Best LCD power off time Turn off time 5 min 3 min 1 min 3 min 1 min 30 s 102 Language Refer to the Reset your language section on page 25. Date/Time Refer to the Reset Date/Time section on page 26. Zone The Zone setting is a useful function for your overseas trips. This feature enables you to display the local time on the LCD screen while you are abroad. 1. Press the [

] button to

]/[

select the departure place (

destination (

) and 2. Press the [

] button to select a city located in the same time zone as that of the field. Press the button to confirm settings.

) fields.

]/[

LCD Brightness Use this setting to adjust the brightness of your LCD screen. Press the [

]/[

option and press the

] button to select an button to confirm. LCD Brightness Select Set Exit 103 4. Press the [

] button to select the item to be set and press the button to enter the menu.

]/[

5. Press the [

] button to selectYesorNoand press the button to confirm.

]/[

Refer to the following pages for more details about each setting. File Settings Mode :

1. Press the

[

button, press the [

] button to select

.

]/

2. Press the 3. Press [

button to enter the menu.

]/[

] button to select

. 5 options in [ File Settings ] :

Format Copy to Card File Numbering Reset Settings Version 104 Format Please note: formatting enables you to delete all contents in the memory card and built-in memory, including protected photo and movie files. Format Doing so will clear all data. No Yes If you selectYesthe camera formats its memory. If there is no memory card in the camera, the built-in memory will be formatted; if there is a memory card, it will be formatted only. 105 105 Copy to Card Use this setting to copy the files stored in the internal memory to a memory card. Copy to Card Copy files from built-in memory to the memory card. No Yes If there is no card available in the camera, this function will not be displayed. File Numbering After you take a picture or video clip, the camera will save it with a sequential number. You can use this to reset the file numbering to 1. File Numbering Create a new directory and reset the file number. No Yes 106 Reset settings Use this setting to restore the camera to its original default settings. Version Use this setting to view the current camera firmware version. Reset Settings Reset camera settings to factory defaults. No Yes

FW FW Version: X.XX When there is a new firmware version in the memory card, selectYesto update. Version Current Ver: X.XX New Ver: X.XX Update Fireware?

No Yes 107 CONNECTION SETTINGS Connecting to a Computer You can use a Micro USB cable to connect the camera and copy (transmit) photos to a computer, printer or other device. 4. Press the [

]/[

selectPCand press the confirm.

] button to button to USB USB PC TV-System TV-Sys Printer HDMI C HDMI CEC Control USB PC PC NTSC TSC Off Off Select Sele Set Exit Exit Setting the USB Mode The cameras Micro USB port can be set to connect with either a computer or a printer. The following steps will allow you to ensure that the camera is correctly configured to connect with a PC. 1. Press the button, press the [

]/

and press

[

the

] button to select button to enter the menu. 2. Press [

3. Press the [

]/[

] button to select

]/[

] button to

. selectUSBand press the enter the menu. button to 108 Transferring files to your computer The computer will automatically detect the camera as a removable drive. Double-click the my computer icon on the desktop to locate the removable drive and to copy folders and files in the drive to a directory on your PC as you would copy any typical folder or file. Follow the steps below to connect the camera to a computer. 1. Make sure the computer is turned on. 2. Connect one end of the supplied Micro USB cable to the Micro USB port on your camera. 3. Connect the other end of the cable to an available USB port on your computer. 4. After the transmission is complete, disconnect the Micro USB cable according to the instructions specifying how to safely remove USB devices. 109 109 Connecting to a PictBridge Compatible Printer PictBridge technology allows printing of the photos saved in the memory card by the printer. To find out if a printer is PictBridge compatible, simply look for the PictBridge logo on the packaging or check the owner's manual for specifications. With the PictBridge function on your camera, you can print the captured photos directly to a PictBridge compatible printer using the supplied Micro USB cable, without the need for a PC. Setting the USB Mode The cameras Micro USB port can be set to connect with either a PC or a Printer, the following steps will ensure that the camera is correctly configured to connect with a Printer. 1. Press the button, press the [

]/

and press

[

the

] button to select button to enter the menu. 3. Press the [

]/[

selectUSBand press the to enter the menu.

] button to button 4. Press the [

]/[

] button to selectPrinterand press the to confirm. button USB USB PC TV-System TV-Sys Printer HDMI C HDMI CEC Control USB Printer inter NTSC TSC Off Off Select Sele Set Exit Exit After the camera is reset, it will switch to PC mode automatically from USB mode. See PictBridge section on page 112. 2. Press [

]/[

] button to select

. 110 Connecting to your Printer 1. Make sure the printer is turned on. 2. Connect one end of the supplied Micro USB cable to the Micro USB port on your camera. 3. Connect the other end of the cable to the USB port on the printer. If the camera is not connected to a PictBridge compatible printer, the following error message will appear on the LCD screen. Connect failed The error message above will also appear if the USB mode is set incorrectly, in which case you should disconnect the Micro USB cable, check the USB mode settings, ensure that the printer is turned on, and then try connecting the USB cable again. 111 111 Using the PictBridge Menu After setting the USB mode to printer, the PictBridge menu will appear. PictBridge Print (with Date) Print (without Date) Print Index Print DPOF Images Exit Select Set Exit

] button to select

]/[

Press the [

a menu item and press the enter the item. Refer to the following sections for more detailed information on each setting. button to Print (with Date) If you have set the date and time on your camera, the date and time will be recorded and saved with each photo you take. 1. In the PictBridge menu, selectPrint

(with Date)and the screen as shown below appears. 01 Back 2. Press the [

]/[

photo to be printed.

] button to select a 112 3. Press the [

]/[

] button to select the number of copies for the currently displayed photo. 4. Press the button and the following screen will appear. PictBridge Print (With Date) Yes Cancel 5. SelectYesand press the button to confirm; selectCancelto cancel printing. Print (without Date) Use this setting to print the photos without dates on them. 1. In the PictBridge menu, selectPrint

(without Date)and the screen as shown below appears. 01 Back

] button to select a 2. Press the [

]/[

photo to be printed.

]/[

3. Press the [

select the number of copies for the currently displayed photo.

] button to 4. Press the button and the following screen will appear. 113 113 PictBridge Print (Without Date) Yes Cancel 5. SelectYesand press the button to confirm; selectCancelto cancel printing. Print Index You can print all photos in the camera via this function. 1. In the PictBridge menu, selectPrint Indexand the screen as shown below appears. PictBridge Print Index Yes Cancel 2. SelectYesand press the button to confirm; selectCancelto cancel printing. 114 Print DPOF Images To use DPOF printing, you must select your photos for printing using the DPOF settings beforehand. See DPOF section on page 100. 1. In the PictBridge menu, selectPrint DPOF Imagesand the screen as shown below appears. Exit SelectExitto exit the PictBridge menu. At this time, the messageRemove USB Cable!appears on the screen. PictBridge Print DPOF Images Yes Cancel 2. SelectYesand press the button to confirm; selectCancelto cancel printing. Disconnect the Micro USB cable from the camera and printer. 115 Video System You can use the AV cable (which should be purchased separately) to connect the camera and the television for realizing the video output. Connect one end of the AV cable to AV port of the camera, connect the other end to AV-OUT port of the television. Adjust the format of the video output system according to your requirements, and the steps are as follows:

1. Press the button, press the [

]/

and press

[

the

] button to select button to enter the menu. 2. Press [

3. Press the [

]/[

] button to select

]/[

] button to

. selectTV-Systemand press the button to enter the menu. 4. Press the [

]/[

] button to selectNTSCorPALand press the button to confirm. 116 TV-System USB Mode USB M PAL TV-System TV-Sy NTSC HDMI CEC Control HDMI PC PC NTSC NTSC Off Off Select Se Set Exit Exit NTSC: English, Chinese (Traditional), Japanese, French, Korean, Russian, Vietnamese, Greek, Hungarian PAL: German, Spanish, Italian, Chinese (Simplified), Portuguese, Swedish, Danish, Finnish, Indonesia, Norwegian, Dutch, Turkish, Polish, Thai, Croatian, Czech, Arabic, Hindi The video output system would change accordingly based upon the changes of the selected language. Supported HDMI Connections HDMI (High Definition Multimedia Interface), is a fully digital audio/video transmission interface, through which uncompressed audio and video signals are transmitted. Connecting HDMI-Ready TV 1. Use the cable with high resolution output terminal (which should be purchased separately) to connect the camera to the television which meets HDMI standard. 2. The camera will be automatically detected by the TV. 3. After connecting via HDMI, the camera enters Playback Mode. Make sure the camera and the TV are both turned on before connecting. HDMI

(Type D) 117 HDMI CEC Control After connecting the camera with TV-System, you may view pictures taken with the camera on the TV screen and operate the camera with your TV remote control to view and edit all images. HDMI CEC Control USB Mode USB M Off TV-Sy TV-System On HDMI HDMI CEC Control PC PC NTSC NTSC Off Off Introduction on Icons 1. Info Hiding/Display 2. Zoom-in

: Zoom in Images

: Zoom out Images 3. Rotate Images Select Se Set Exit Exit It is required that the TV-System supports HDMI CEC. After the camera is successfully connected with TV-System, other buttons of the camera except the Power button cannot work, with the LCD screen staying dark. Please refer to TV manual for relative settings of TV-System. 4. 5. 6. 7.

: Only Turn Left Image Index

: 5*3 Index Playback

: 10*5 Index Playback

: 3*1 Date Folder Index

: 5*3 Cont. Group Index Back Play Slide Show Button for Switching Between Previous and Next Images 118 8. Videos 9. Movie Length:00:00:00 10. Cont. Group File 11. First Image Mark 12. 000/000:Current Sorting/Total Number of Images in Group 13.

:Confirm Effect 14.

:No Change The following operations are available during HDMI CEC playback:

1:1 Single Playback Zoom-in Playback Rotate Index Playback Cont. Group Playback Slide Show Playback Video Play Time-lapse Movie Play Panoramic File Play Image Edit Pressing the four-color button on remote control can enable relative functions displayed on the TV-System screen. Remote control TV-System Red Green Yellow Blue 119 119 Cont. Group Playback:

Under the 1:1 single playback mode, press the central button to start playing images in continuous group. If no images in the cameras cont. group, there will appear a prompt of no pictures if you select interface. on the index playback Slide Show Playback:

Under the 1:1 single playback mode, press the down arrow button to enter slide show playback. While playing, you may press the left and right arrow buttons to directly switch between previous and next images and the central button to end playing. 1:1 Single Playback:

Pressing the left and right arrow buttons can switch among images. Zoom-in Playback:

Under the 1:1 single playback mode, press the red button to zoom in images; press the red and green buttons on remote control to zoom out images. Rotate:

Under the 1:1 single playback mode, press the blue button to rotate single picture. Index Playback:

Under the 1:1 playback mode, press the green button to enter index playback;

press the central button to enter image selection and then the arrow buttons to select files you want and finally press the central button again to back to the 1:1 single playback. Under the 5*3 index playback mode, press the green button to enter index selection and then the left and right arrow buttons to select

, and finally press the central button again to confirm your selection.

, and

,

, 120 Video Play:

Under the 1:1 single playback mode, select a video and then press the central button to start playing. While playing, you may use the arrow buttons and the central button to perform operations such as fast forward/backward, pause, frame forward/backward, back to play, etc. according to prompts on the screen. Time-lapse Movie Play:

Same play mode as that of images. There is no volume in playing time-lapse files. Panoramic File Play:

Under the 1:1 single playback mode, select a panoramic file and then press the central button to begin playing. Image Edit:

Multiple edit can be repeated under image edit mode. Only one picture is saved finally. Under the 1:1 single playback mode, select a picture and then press the up arrow button to enter image edit and start detecting face. Press the up arrow button to do HDR editing. Press the down arrow button to delete one picture. Press the left and right arrow buttons to edit the color. 12 effects in total for selection. The following beautifier touch-up functions cannot be enabled until a face is detected. You may press relative color buttons to edit.

: Skin Soften

: Eye Enlargement

: Eye Brightening Edit tings corresponding to each type of files can be tabled.(O : Available; X : Non-available HDR Color Beautifier Delete Normal (face) O Normal

(no face) Panorama Video O X X O O X X O X X X O O O O 121 HDMI CEC Connection Function Full Size Playback Zoom In Zoom Out Rotate O X O

(turn left only) Play Slide Show Edit Image O O*1 Info Hiding/Dis-

play Delete O O Zoom-in Playback O

(Movable to four directions during zoom-in) O X X X O X Index Playback Video Play Cont. Group Play Panoramic File Play X X X X X X X X X X O O X X X O O X X X O O O*2 O*3 O*2 O*3 O*2 O*3

*1 After entering the image edit, relative operation of the beautifier cannot appear until a face is detected.

*2 It is available before and in playing and during pause.

*3 The function of delete one cannot work until the camera enters image edit mode. 122 122 Set Eye-Fi SD Card Connection Mode This camera supports the wireless connection for Eye-Fi memory card, Enable Eye-Fi connection by following below steps. 1. Press the

]/

and press button, press the [

] button to select button to enter the menu.

[

the 2. Press [

3. Press the [

]/[

] button to select

]/[

] button to

. selectEye-Fiand press the to enter the menu. button 4. Press the [

] button to selectOnorOffand press the button to confirm.

]/[

Eye-Fi USB Mode USB M Off TV-Sy TV-System On HDMI HDMI CEC Control Eye-F Eye-Fi PC PC NTSC NTSC Off Off On On Select Se Set Exit Exit If the Eye-Fi card is not available in the camera, this feature is not displayed. 123 APPENDICES Product Specifications Design and specifications are subject to change without notice. Image Sensor Type Effective Pixels Total Pixels Lens Focal Length 35mm film equivalent F number Lens Construction Optical Zoom Focusing Range Autofocus System Electronic Viewfinder Anti-Handshake Digital Zoom 1/2.3 BSI CMOS 20.68 Megapixels 21.14 Megapixels 4.3mm (Wide) 279.5mm (Tele) 24mm (Wide) 1560mm (Tele) F2.9 (Wide) F6.9 (Tele) 14 groups 18 elements 65x Normal: (Wide) 60cm ~ , (Tele) 600cm ~ ;

Macro: 3cm ~ (Wide Only) TTL Autofocus Yes Optical Image Stabilization 4x Digital Zoom (Combined Zoom: 260x) 124 Still Image Number of Recording Pixels Movie Image Compression DCF, DPOF (Ver1.1) Support Yes File For-

mat Still Image Movie Shooting Modes Scene Mode Detection Features Photo Touch-up

(3:2) 18MP: 51843456

(16:9) 15MP: 51842916 2MP: 19201080

(4:3) 20MP: 51843888 10MP: 36482736 5MP: 25921944 3MP: 20481536 0.3MP: 640480 19201080 (30fps), 1280720 (60fps), 1280720 (30fps), 640480 (30fps), High-Speed Movie: 640480 (120fps) Best, Fine, Normal JPEG (Fine, Standard), RAW, RAW+ JPEG (Fine) MOV [Image: H.264; Audio: Linear PCM (Stereo)]

Auto Mode, Program AE, Shutter Priority, Aperture priority, Manual Mode, Face Beautifier, Wi-Fi Mode, Scene Mode Movie Mode, Custom Settings Auto Scene, Panorama Mode,Handheld Night, Multi Exposure, Cat/Dog, Snow, Party , Sport, Night Portrait, Portrait, Children, Landscape, Sunset, Fireworks Face, Smile, Blink, Cat, Dog Red-Eye Reduction, Skin Soften, Eye Brightening, Eye Enlargement 125 125 HDR Yes Scan Panorama Up to 360 Display 3.0 inch (460k Pixels) LCD Angle Adjustment Image Auto Rotation ISO Sensitivity Focus Mode Yes Yes Auto, ISO100/200/400/800/1600/3200 Center AF, Continuous AF, Object Tracking ,Manual Focus Focusing Area Selection Single Area Focusing, 25-Area-Focusing, Face Detection, Manual Area Focusing Exposure Metering Method Artificial Intelligence AE (AiAE), Center-Weighted Average, Spot (Fixed to Center of Frame), Face AE Exposure Control Method Program AE (AE-Lock Available), Shutter Prior AE, Aperture Prior AE Exposure Compensation 3EV in 1/3 Step Increments Shutter Speed 1/2000 ~ 30 Seconds Continuous Shooting Yes 126 Playback Modes Single, Index (9/16 Thumbnails), Slide Show, Date, Burst Shooting, Zoom (Approx. 2 ~ 8) White Balance Control AWB, Daylight, Cloudy, Fluorescent, Fluorescent CWF, Incandescent, Manual WB, Color Temp. (1900K ~ 10000K) Flash Method Pop-up (Auto) Flash Flash Modes Force Off, Flash Auto, Fill Flash, Red-Eye Reduction, Slow Sync., Slow Sync. + Red-Eye Reduction, Recording Media Internal Memory: Approx. 8MB SD/SDHC Card (Up to 32GB Support)

[MMC Card Not Supported ]

PictBridge, ExifPrint Support Yes Multi-Language Support 27 Languages 127 Jacks AV-OUT/USB 2.0 (Micro 5 pin USB), HDMI (Type D) Eye-Fi Support Yes Wi-Fi Yes (802.11 b/g/n) Remote Viewfinder Yes (via Smartphone) Power Shooting Capability (Bat-

tery Performance) Rechargeable Li-ion Battery LB-070, 7.4V 1000mAh, In-Camera Charging Approx. 400 Shots (Based on CIPA Standards) Operation Environment Temperature: 0 ~ 40oC, Humidity: 0 ~ 90%

Dimensions (WHD) Approx. 124.789.0113.8mm (Based on CIPA Standards) Weight Approx. 604g (Body only) 128 128 Description Action Prompts and Warning Messages Message Warning! Battery exhausted. Built-in memory error!

Warning! Do not turn off your camera during update!

Battery temperature is too high. Warning before power off when the camera battery is exhausted. In the case of built-in memory error. The message appears during the firmware update process. Battery temperature is too high Cannot change settings under this mode. If this setting in shoot mode appears through rotating the function ring after setting functions of function ring (Smart), it cannot be set. Displaying that it will power off after 2 seconds. Disappear after 2 seconds and return to shooting. The message disappears after the camera update and restart. Let the battery cool before attempting to use the camera again. The message will disappear after 2 seconds Remove the message after 2 seconds and return to shooting. 129 Message Description Improper alignment. Please try again. The offset is too big for panorama shooting. Connection Failed!

The color effects can not be used in the video. In this capture ********

Still size limited to ** M Capture reached maximum limit Failure to connect to your PC, printer, TV (with HDMI). In shooting mode, select Dreamy, Vignetting, Kodacolor, Salon, Fish Eye and 4 Grids - Stylish effects under color effect, this restriction description will be displayed below the options. Choose the image size in the Function Ring (Smart), then encountering the option of limiting Still size, rotating the lens function ring . Press the shutter to capture images in recording a video. If the number of images captured exceeds 15, there will be a prompt if you press the shutter again. Action Remove the message after 2 seconds and return to shooting. Remove cable and retry connection Remains displaying below the options without hiding. Remove the message after 2 seconds and return to shooting. The message will disappear in 2 seconds with no influence to video recording. 130 Message Write Protect !

Card Full !

Memory Full !

Exceeded maximum folder number. Card Error !

Card is not formatted. Description Action In the case that there is lock protection for the card when saving the image. In the case that the camera detects the card capacity is insufficient when turning on or pressing the shutter. In the case that the camera detects the memory capacity is insufficient when turning on or pressing the shutter. When the folder number in the card exceeds the maximum folder number

(999), the time for turning on and reading will be too long, it will prompt the message until the reading is completed. The card cannot be recognized after being formatted. When the card reading error occurs,the message of not formatted will be displayed. Disappear after 2 seconds and return to the previous image. Disappear after 2 seconds and return to the previous image. Disappear after 2 seconds and return to the previous image. The message will end after the camera processing is complete. Normal display. Disappear after 2 seconds and enter the formatting process. 131 Message Description Action Slow access Cannot write to SD card. No Picture!

No continuous group file. When a card lower than Class 4 is recording movie above HD, it may be accessed slowly and the recording cannot be continued. The operation image may appear after 2 seconds (it may need to wait up to 9 seconds for the built-in memory). The recording cannot be continued if there are problems which may cause interruption of the recording during writing to the card or recording in the process of shooting or recording. When pressing the button there is no image in the camera or the card. When it switches from playback mode to Cont. playback mode, if there is no continuous group file in the files, this prompt message will display. No Red-Eye Detected!

No red-eye detected when pressing for red-eye removing in playback touch-up. Remove the message after 2 seconds and return to the shooting image. Disappear after 2 seconds and return to shooting. Disappear after 2 seconds and return to shooting. Remove the message after 2 seconds and return to Thumbnail 3x3 mode. Disappear after 2 seconds and return to the touch-up menu. 132 Message Description Action Too many pictures for quick processing. Unable to recognize files. Protected!

Undeletable!

The image may be unable to enter the date playback if the image exceeds the specification in the case of date playback. (when the image number in the card exceed 5000) When the format of the file viewed is not supported or the file is damaged and cannot be recognized properly. This message will be displayed on the image immediately when executing delete action to the protected files. This image cannot be edited. When pressing bad files. to play back the Cannot edit because no face detected!

No face image entered into the touch-up menu. Remove the message after 2 seconds and return to Thumbnail 3x3 mode. This image message disappears only after the file is deleted. Disappear after 2 seconds and return to the previous image. Remove the message after 2 seconds and return to the original image.. Remove the message after 2 seconds and return to the touch-up menu.. 133 Troubleshooting Problem Camera does not turn on Camera turns off suddenly during operation The picture is blurred Images will not print from the connected printer 134 Possible causes The battery has been The battery is not inserted depleted. correctly. Solution Recharge the battery. Correctly reinstall the battery. The batteries have been depleted. Recharge the battery. Camera shakes while taking a picture. Turn on OIS feature. Please use tripod for high magnification (above 15X) optical zoom. Use another memory card or delete unnecessary files. Unlock the memory card. Check the connection between the camera and printer. The camera is not connected to the printer correctly. The printer is not PictBridge Use a PictBridge compatible compatible. The printer is out of paper The printer paper is or ink. jammed. printer. Load paper into the printer or replace the ink cartridge in the printer. Remove the jammed paper. Images and video files cannot be saved The memory card is full. The memory card is locked. Problem Saving data to memory card is slow Cannot write to the memory card Too many movies to process Possible Causes Using a memory card below Class 4 may result in slower recording times. The memory card has been locked. The number of pictures or folders in the memory card exceed the specifications, so the playback of data folder can not be displayed. Solution Use a memory card with write Class 4 or higher than 4 to improve performance. Release the write lock of the memory card or replace with another card. Delete unwanted files. When shooting with stacked filters attached, the corners of the photo may turn dark

(vignetting effect) because the filter holder blocks light from reaching the camera image sensor; especially, at wide angle zoom control settings. Please take test shots and review the results when using stacked filters. 135 135 Licensed Product The Kodak trademarks, Kodachrome, Ektachrome and Kodacolor and trade dress are used under license from Kodak. 2014 by JK Imaging Ltd. All rights reserved. JK Imaging Ltd. 1411 W. 190th Street, Suite 550, Gardena, CA 90248, USA www.kodakpixpro.com Ver. 1

 

 

User Manual Before You Start Declaration of Conformity Responsible Party:

Address:

JK Imaging Ltd. JK Imaging Ltd., 17239 So. Main Street, Gardena, CA 90248 USA JK Imaging Europe, 71 Clarendon Road, Watford, WD17 1DS, UK Company Website: http://kodakpixpro.com INDUSTRY CANADA This device complies with Canadian RSS-210. This device complies with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard (s).Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. Radiation Exposure Statement:

This product complies with the Canadian portable RF exposure limit set forth for an uncontrolled environment and is safe for intended operation as described in this manual. Additional RF exposure reduction can be achieved if the product can be kept as far as possible from the user body or set the device to lower output power if such function is available. 1 1 For Customers in Europe This symbol [crossed-out wheel bin WEEE Annex IV] indicates separate collection of electrical waste and electronic equipment in the European countries. Please do not throw the equipment into domestic refuse. Please use the return and collection systems available in your country for proper, safe disposal of this product. Batteries: Please dispose of used batteries at designated collection centers. Packaging: Please follow local regulations for the recycling of packaging. CE mark indicates that this product complies with the European requirements for safety, health, environment and customer protection. CE marked cameras are intended for sales in Europe. Europe EU Declaration of Conformity This device complies with the essential requirements of the R&TTE Directive 1999/5/EC. The following test methods have been applied in order to provepresumption of conformity with the essential requirements of the R&TTE Directive 1999/5/EC:

- EN 60950-1: 2006+A11:2009 +A1:2010 +A12:2011 Safety of Information Technology Equipment

- EN 50566: 2013 Product standard to demonstrate compliance of radio frequency fields from handheld and body- mounted wireless communication devices used by the general public (30 MHz 6 GHz)

- EN 62209-2: 2010 Human exposure to radio frequency fields from handheld and bodymounted wireless communication devices Human models, instrumentation, and procedures 2 Part 2: Procedure to determine the specific absorption rate (SAR) for wireless communication devices used in close proximity to the human body (frequency range of 30 MHz to 6 GHz)

- EN 300 328 V1.8.1 : 2012 Electromagnetic compatibility and Radio spectrum Matters (ERM); Wideband Transmission systems; Data transmission equipment operating in the 2.4 GHz ISM band and using spread spectrum modulation techniques; Harmonized EN covering essential requirements under article 3.2 of the R&TTE Directive.

- EN 301 489-1 V1.9.2: 2011 Electromagnetic compatibility and Radio Spectrum Matters (ERM); Electro Magnetic Compatibility (EMC) standard for radio equipment and services; Part 1: Common technical requirements.

- EN 301 489-17 V2.2.1:2012 Electromagnetic compatibility and Radio spectrum Matters (ERM); Electro Magnetic Compatibility (EMC) standard for radio equipment and services; Part 17: Specific conditions for 2.4 GHz wideband transmission systems and 5 GHz high performance RLAN equipment. For Customers in the U.S.A. Federal Communication Commission Interference Statement This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. 3 This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one of the following measures:

- Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.

- Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.

- Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.

- Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help. FCC Caution: Any changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the users authority to operate this equipment. This transmitter must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter. Radiation Exposure Statement:

This product complies with the FCC portable RF exposure limit set forth for an uncontrolled environment and is safe for intended operation as described in this manual. Additional RF exposure reduction can be achieved if the product can be kept as far as possible from the user body or set the device to lower output power if such function is available. 4 About this Manual Thank you for purchasing the KODAK PIXPRO Digital Camera. Please carefully read this manual and keep it well for future reference. JK Imaging Ltd. reserves all rights of this document. No part of this published manual may be reproduced, transmitted, transcribed, stored in a retrieval system or translated into any language or computer language, in any form, by any means, without the prior written permission of JK Imaging Ltd.. All trademarks mentioned in this manual are used for identification purposes only and are properties of their respective owners. This manual provides you with instructions on how to use your new KODAK PIXPRO Digital Camera. Every effort has been made to ensure that the contents of this manual are accurate;

however JK Imaging Ltd. reserves the right to make changes without notice. Throughout this manual, the following symbols are used to help you locate information quickly and easily:

Indicates useful information. In the instructions below, the following symbols may be used throughout this manual on how to operate the camera. This is to facilitate better understanding:

Item properties:

The optional properties in the camera interface are indicated by the symbol . 5 Safety Notes Safety notes for this camera Do not drop the camera or allow it to hit solid objects. Do not attempt to disassemble or repair the camera. Do not use or store the camera in dusty places or on a beach to prevent dust or sand from entering the camera, causing possible damage to it. Do not use or store the camera in a hot environment or under direct sunlight. Do not use or store the camera near a powerful magnetic field, for example near a magnet or transformer. Avoid touching the lens of the camera. Do not expose the camera to direct sunlight for a long period time. To prevent the camera from being damaged by moisture, do not use or store the camera in very humid environments, such as in rain or near bodies of water. If water accidentally comes in contact with the camera. turn the camera off, remove the battery and the memory card, and dry it within 24 hours When you take the camera from a cold place to a warmer environment, condensation may occur. Please wait for a reasonable period of time before you turn it on. Before you remove the battery and memory card, the camera should be turned off. When you clean the body of the camera, don not use abrasive, alcohol-based or organic cleaner. Use a professional lens wiping cloth and dedicated cleaner to wipe and clean the lens. Download your photos and remove the memory card when you are going to store the camera for a long period of time. If this camera is not in use for a long time, please keep it in a dry and clean condition. Our company will not pay compensation for any failure of playback of pictures or videos caused by improper operation. 6 Safety notes for battery Please use a battery that is the same type as the one included. Please use the attached charger to charge the battery. If battery fluid leaks inside the camera, contact our customer service department. If the battery fluid leaks onto your skin, rinse your skin with clean water and seek immediate medical attention. Disposal of used batteries shoud be carried out in accordance with local (national or regional) regulations. To prevent the battery from being damaged, do not drop the battery or allow it to hit solid objects or to be scratched by the objects. Do not let the battery come in contact with metal objects (including coins) to avoid short circuiting, discharging, excessive heat, or possible leakage. Do not attempt to disassemble the battery. Do not expose the battery to water. Always keep the battery contacts dry. Do not heat the battery or throw it into a fire to avoid a possible explosion. Do not store the battery in a hot environment or in direct sunlight. If the battery overheats during charging or use, stop charging or use immediately. Turn off the product, remove the battery carefully, and wait until it cools down. When the camera is stored for a long period of time, remove the battery and keep it in a dry place that is not accessible to infants and children. In a colder environment, the performance of the battery could be noticeably reduced. When you install the battery, install it according to the positive and negative markings on the battery compartment. Never force it into the battery compartment. 7 7 Safety notes for memory card We suggest buying only well-known, name brand memory cards to ensure peak performance. Format the memory card using the camera before you use it or insert a new one. Do not drop the memory card or allow it to hit solid objects to avoid damaging it. Do not attempt to disassemble or repair the memory card. Do not expose the memory card to water. Always keep it dry. Do not remove the memory card when the camera is turned on. Otherwise, the memory card could be damaged. Do not directly edit the data on the memory card. Copy the data to your PC before you edit them. When the camera is stored for a long period of time, be sure to download your photos and remove the memory card. Store it in a dry environment. Do not modify the name of the files or folders of the memory card using your PC. Modifying the file names may cause the files to not be recognized on the camera or a possible error may occur. A photo taken with the camera will be stored in the folder that is automatically generated on the memory card. Do not store photos that are not taken using this camera in these folders as the pictures cannot be recognized during the playback. When you insert a memory card, make sure the notch of the card matches the markings on the top of the card slot. 8 Other Safety Notes Do not disconnect the power or turn the camera off during the update process. Doing so may cause incorrect data to be written and the camera may not power on later. Do not hang the neck strap of the camera around the neck of a child. When using your camera on an airplane, observe the relevant rules specified by the airline. Due to the limitations of manufacturing technology, the LCD may have a few dead or bright pixels. These pixels do no effect the quality or performance of the camera, photos or video. Do not expose the LCD to water. In a humid environment, only wipe it with a soft and dry cleaning cloth. If the LCD screen is damaged, pay particular attention to the liquid crystal in the screen. If any of the following situations arise, take the recommended immediate action indicated below:

1. If liquid crystal comes in contact with your skin, please wipe with a dry cloth, wash thoroughly with soap, and rinse with plenty of clean water. 2. If liquid crystal gets into your eye, flush the eye immediately with plenty of clean water for at least 15 minutes and then seek for medical assistance. 3. If liquid crystal is swallowed, immediately flush your mouth thoroughly with clean water and induce vomiting. Seek for medical assistance. 9 Contents Before You Start ......................................................................................................1 Safety Notes ...........................................................................................................6 Contents ................................................................................................................ 10 Getting Ready .......................................................................................................15 Accessories Included .....................................................................................................................................15 Install Lens Cap and Neck Strap ..................................................................................................................16 Part Names ......................................................................................................................................................17 Installing Battery and Memory Card ..........................................................................................................19 Charging Battery.............................................................................................................................................21 Turning Camera On and Off ........................................................................................................................ 23 How to take pictures ..................................................................................................................................... 23 Set your Language, Date/Time ..................................................................................................................24 Mode Overview ...................................................................................................27 Display Setting ............................................................................................................................................... 27 LCD Display ....................................................................................................................................................28 10 Overview of the screen icons in photo shooting mode .................................................................28 Overview of the screen icons in movie mode ..................................................................................29 Overview of the screen icons in playback mode .............................................................................30 Using the Mode Dial ............................................................................................31 Select an appropriate capture mode ..........................................................................................................31 Auto Mode .............................................................................................................................................. 32 Program AE .............................................................................................................................................34 Shutter priority .......................................................................................................................................34 Aperture priority ....................................................................................................................................34 Manual Mode .........................................................................................................................................34 Face Beautifier ........................................................................................................................................36 Wi-Fi Mode ............................................................................................................................................. 37 Scene Mode ............................................................................................................................................45 Movie Mode............................................................................................................................................50 Custom Settings......................................................................................................................................51 Basic Operation ...................................................................................................53 11 11 Using the Zoom Function ............................................................................................................................. 53 Focus Setting .................................................................................................................................................. 54 Macro Mode ................................................................................................................................................... 55 Self-timer Setting .......................................................................................................................................... 56 Flash Mode ..................................................................................................................................................... 57 White Balance Setting .................................................................................................................................. 58 Continuous Shot ............................................................................................................................................ 59 EV Setting........................................................................................................................................................60 Using Quick Recording ................................................................................................................................. 62 i Button Function Menu ................................................................................................................................ 63 Playback Mode ....................................................................................................64 Viewing Photos and Videos .........................................................................................................................64 Thumbnail View ............................................................................................................................................. 65 Using Zoom Playback (for still pictures only) .........................................................................................66 Photos and Video Deletion .......................................................................................................................... 67 Slideshow ........................................................................................................................................................68 Continuous Capture Group Playback ........................................................................................................ 69 12 Animation panorama play ...........................................................................................................................70 Using the Menus ..................................................................................................71 Photo Setup Menu ..........................................................................................................................................71 Photo Shooting Settings Menu ................................................................................................................... 76 Movie Menu ...................................................................................................................................................80 Movie Setting Menu .....................................................................................................................................83 Playback Menu...............................................................................................................................................85 Playback Settings Menu ...............................................................................................................................89 Setup Menu ....................................................................................................................................................93 Sound Settings .......................................................................................................................................94 Power Saver ............................................................................................................................................94 Language .................................................................................................................................................95 Date/Time ..............................................................................................................................................95 LCD Brightness .......................................................................................................................................95 File Setting ......................................................................................................................................................96 Format ......................................................................................................................................................97 13 Copy to Card ...........................................................................................................................................97 File Numbering .......................................................................................................................................98 Reset .........................................................................................................................................................98 FW Version .............................................................................................................................................99 Connection Settings ........................................................................................ 100 Connecting to a Computer .........................................................................................................................101 Connecting to a PictBridge Compatible Printer ....................................................................................103 Using the PictBridge Menu ........................................................................................................................105 Video System ...............................................................................................................................................109 Set Eye-Fi Card Connection Mode ............................................................................................................110 Supported HDMI Connections ...................................................................................................................111 Appendices ..........................................................................................................112 Product Specifications ................................................................................................................................. 112 Prompts and Warning Messages ..............................................................................................................116 Troubleshooting ...........................................................................................................................................120 14 14 Getting Ready Accessories Included Your camera box should contain the camera model you purchased along with the following accessories. If anything is missing or appears to be damaged, please contact your retailer. (The battery charger may be different in shape than what is pictured below. This is due to different power requirements across countries or regions) Rechargeable Li-ion battery AC adapter Micro USB cable Lens cap with cord Quick Start Guide STOP Neck strap Quick start guide Warranty card Service card 15 Install Lens Cap and Neck Strap

16 Part Names

1 . Micro HDMI port 2. Micro USB port

3. Zoom lever 4. Shutter button 5. Strap eyelet 6. 7.

Exposure compensation button Continuous shot button 8. Power button 9. AF assist beam/Self-timer lamp 10. Flash lamp 1 1 . Lens 17

28 29 18 Indicator lamp 12. Flash button 13. Microphone 14. 15. Mode dial 16. 17. 18. 19. 20. 21.

Fast video recording button Menu button

AF button/Arrow button (Up)

Macro button/Arrow button (Left)

Flash button/Arrow button (Right)

Delete button/Self-timer button/

Arrow button (Down) Display button Playback button SET button i button 22. 23. 24. 25. 26. LCD 27. Speaker 28. Battery cover 29. Tripod socket Installing Battery and Memory Card 1. Open the battery cover. 2. Insert the battery into the battery compartment according to the negative and positive directions as illustrated in the picture. Push the battery down until it locks in place. 2 1 Battery lock knob 19 3. Insert the memory card into the memory card slot as shown in the diagram below:

4. Close the battery cover. Write protection buckle 1 2 The memory card (SD/SDHC) is optional and not included in all camera packaging. It needs to be purchased separately. Please use an original memory card which is Class 4 or higher and has a capacity of 4GB to 32GB. To remove your memory card, open the battery cover, gently press the memory card to eject it and remove it carefully. 20 Charging Battery Please insert the battery and charge it under shutdown mode. 1. Connect the camera and the power charger using the supplied Micro USB cable. 2. Insert the plug of the power charger into the power outlet to charge the battery. After the battery is stored for a long period of time, use the supplied power charger to charge the battery prior to use. To have maximum battery life, charge the battery for at least 4 hours the first time. Charging indicator:

Steady orange: Charging The indicator will go out once charging is finished, and the camera will be powered off automatically. 2 1 Indicator lamp 21 3. When the camera is turned off, you can also connect the camera to your PC using a Micro USB cable to charge the battery. 3 Please charge the battery indoors between 0C and 40C. 22 Turning Camera On and Off Press the Power button to turn the camera on. To turn the camera off, press the Power button again. Power Button How to take pictures 1. Hold the camera with both hands , not blocking the flash and lens by fingers. 2. Aim the camera at the object and then frame with the LCD. 3. Use the zoom lever to select Tele or Wide positions to zoom in or out on your subject. 4. Press the shutter button half way to focus on the subject. When the focus frame turns green, press the shutter button completely down to take the picture. Press and hold the and enter Playback mode. button to power on 23 Set your Language, Date/Time Set your Language, Date/Time after the first power-on 1. When you turn the camera on for the first time, the language selection screen appears.

/

buttons to select your desired language.

/

/ 2. Press the

3. After you press the button to confirm the selection, the Date/Time settings screen appears. 4. Press the

/

button to select the Date/Time to be adjusted: Time is displayed in YYYY.MM.DD HH:MM. 5. Press the

/

button to adjust the value for the selected Date/Time. Language

English Franais Date & Time Espaol Portugus Italiano Deutsch y Svenska H-M 6. Press the button to confirm the time settings and the shooting screen appears. 2015 04

08 00 00

:

24 Resetting your Language After you set your language for the first time, follow the instructions below to reset your language. 1. Press the button, press the button to select enter the menu.

, and press the

/

button to 2. Press the and press the

button to select

, button to enter the menu.

3. Press the

Languageand press the enter the menu. button to select

/

/

/

Sound Settings Power Saver Language World Time Auto English Home

/

button to Date & Time 2015.04.08 00:00 4. Press the

/

/

/

buttons to select your desired language and press the button to confirm. 5. Press the appears. button and the shooting screen Language

English Franais Espaol Portugus Italiano Deutsch y Svenska 25 Resetting Date/Time After you set your Date/Time for the first time, follow the instructions below to reset date and time. 1. Press the button, press the button to select enter the menu.

, and press the

/

button to 2. Press the and press the 3. Press the

/

/

/

button to select

,

button to enter the menu.

button to select Date & Timeand press the to enter the menu.

/

4. Press the

button to select the Sound Settings Power Saver Language World Time Auto English Home

/

button Date & Time 2015.04.08 00:00 Date/Time to be adjusted: Time is displayed in YYYY.MM.DD HH:MM. 5. Press the

/

button to press the value for your selected block. After you finish your settings, press the button to confirm. 6. Press the appears. button and the shooting screen Date & Time H-M 2015 04

08 00 00

:

Back 26 26 Mode Overview Display Setting Press the button to display the settings: Classic, Full, Off. Classic: Displays the camera parameters on Off: Does not display any additional icons on screen screen SD 1234 00:56:00 F2.8 1/50

-0.3 EV 400 ISO Full: Camera parameters with Grid and Histogram SD 1234 00:56:00 F2.8 1/50

-0.3 EV 400 ISO 27 LCD Display Overview of the screen icons in photo shooting mode

SD x3.6x3.6 1234 00:56:00

F3.6F3.6 1/50

-0.3 EV 400 ISO

1 Shooting Mode 2 Macro Mode 3 Self-timer 4 Zoom Display (By turning the Zoom Lever) 5 Focus Frame 6 Memory Card/Built-in Memory 7 Battery Status 28 Image Size 8 White Balance 9 Color Effect 10 Number of remaining shots 11 12 Video Quality 13 14 Remaining Recording Time 15 16 Shutter Speed 17 Histogram 18 Aperture Value Exposure Compensation ISO Value 19 OIS (Optical Image Stabilization) Eye-Fi ON (with signal) 20 HDR 21 22 Expo Metering 23 Continuous Shot 24 AF Mode 25 Flash Mode Overview of the screen icons in movie mode

SD x3.6 00:56:00

-0.3 EV

1 Movie Mode 2 Macro Mode 3 Self-timer 4 Zoom Display (By turning the Zoom Lever) 5 Memory Card/Built-in Memory 6 Battery Status 7 Color Effect 8 Video Quality 9 Remaining Recording Time 10 Exposure Compensation 11 OIS (Optical Image Stabilization) 12 13 Focus Frame Eye-Fi ON (with signal) 14 Expo Metering 15 AF Mode For optimal video shooting, it is recommended that an SDHC memory card be used. Optical Zoom and Digital Zoom can be adjusted (208X in total). Digital Zoom can be adjusted to 4X. 29 Overview of the screen icons in playback mode 4 Memory Card/Built-in Memory 5 Battery Status 6 Zoom Magnification Area 7 8 Image Zoom Ratios Image Zone 9 Shooting Date 10 Continuous Capture Group Playback 11 Eye-Fi ON (with signal) 12 Touch-up 13 HDR 14 Date Folder 1 DPOF File 2 File Protection 3 Memory Space (indicating the current number of photos and total number of photos) 30 30 Using the Mode Dial This camera provides a convenient mode dial that allows you to manually switch among different modes with ease. Select an appropriate capture mode 1. Press the Power button to turn the camera on. Aim the camera at the object and then frame with the LCD. 2. Rotate the mode dial to select an appropriate shooting mode. Auto Mode Program AE Manual Mode Face Beautifier Movie Mode Custom Settings Shutter priority Wi-Fi Mode Aperture priority Scene Mode 3. Rotate the zoom lever to zoom in or out of the subjects and compose a photo within the framing scope. 4. Press the Shutter button half way down to focus on the subject. When the focus frame turns green, press the Shutter button completely down to take the picture. 31 Auto Mode The camera will automatically detect the most suitable scene to capture the best pictures. SD 1234 00:56:00 Auto Mode The camera will automatically adjust the exposure and focus to ensure the best possible pictures. Landscape Mode For landscapes, will automatically adjust the exposure and reproduce vivid green and blue colors. 32 Portrait Mode Most suitable for capturing people with focus on their faces. Night Portrait When you take portraits at night, or in low light conditions, will automatically adjust the exposure for people and night scenes. Backlit Portrait When the sun or any other light source is behind you, will automatically adjust the foreground exposure to produce the best pictures possible. Night Mode For night scenes, will automatically increase the ISO value to compensate for low light. Macro Mode To produce more detailed close-ups, will automatically engage the cameras Macro Mode and automatically focus the lens. 33 Program AE The user can switch the ISO and EV value according to personal preference, the camera can automatically set the shutter speed and aperture value. Shutter priority The user can adjust the shutter speed, EV and ISO values. It is mostly used to shoot the moving object. Aperture priority The user can adjust the aperture size, EV and ISO values. It is generally used to shoot inanimate object and control the view depth. Manual Mode The user can adjust the aperture size, shutter speed and ISO values manually. It is generally used to shoot static photos. 34 Mode:

Follow the steps below to adjust the parameters:

1. Rotate the mode dial to select a mode you want, press the button to configure settings. F2.8F2.8 1/50 1/50 0.3 EV 0.3 EV 400 ISO 400 ISO 2. Press the 3. Press the 4. Press the

/

/

button to select an adjustment item.

button to adjust the parameters. button to confirm the settings and enter the shooting screen. Items that can be adjusted under mode: ( : Optional : Not optional, auto display) Items Mode Aperture value Shutter speed EV value ISO value 35 Face Beautifier The camera is set to automatically adjust camera exposure for realistic portrayal of skin tones. 1. Rotate the mode dial to select

. button and press the 2. Press the 3. Press the

/

button to select an option and press the button to confirm and

/

button to select

. return to photo shooting mode. SD x3.6x3.6 1234 00:56:00

-0.3 EV 400 ISO Effect 1: Skin Soften Effect 2: Skin Soften+Eye Brightening Effect 3: Skin Soften+Eye Brightening+Eye Enlargement 36 Wi-Fi Mode Make image transmission and remote control by connecting smart device with Wi-Fi. Matters needing attention before use Your smart device operating system version needs to be iOS 7 or higher, or Android 4.2 or higher. If not, please upgrade your smart device before using the APP. Please do not use in places having high intensity magnetic field, electrostatic and electric wave interference (for example near a microwave oven), which may cause failure in receiving signals. To maintain a connection, please keep the camera within 10 meters (32.8 feet) without signal shielding interference. Please do not use Wi-Fi connection functionality on a plane. The camera and the smart device can only be connected one to one. 37 Route of downloading the APP package:

Please download APP installation package (APP name: PIXPRO Remote Viewer) to your smart device from the path below and install this application procedure. Android system:

iOS system:

For Android devices, search and download the App PIXPRO Remote Viewer Google play, and install it following the instructions on the interface. in For Apple devices, search and download the App PIXPRO Remote Viewer in App store, and install it following the instructions on the interface. https://play.google.com/store/apps/

details?id=com.jkimaging.pixproremoteviewer https://itunes.apple.com/us/app/

pixpro-remote-viewer/id833154167?mt=8 Refer to the "PIXPRO Remote Viewer User Manual" located on the web:

Americas Europe http://kodakpixpro.com/

Americas/support/downloads.php http://www.kodakpixpro.com/

Europe/support/multi-lang-downloads.php 38 1. Rotate the mode dial to select and then enter the Wi-Fi selection interface. Wi-Fi Mode Settings Station AP mode In AP mode, the camera will act as an access point enabling another Wi-Fi device to connect to it. 2. Press the

/

button to select and set options. Settings: Customize the Wi-Fi settings for the camera system. Station:

Use the Station Mode to connect to a "Personal Hotspot" created by your mobile device. AP mode:

In AP mode, the camera will act as an access point enabling another Wi-Fi device to connect to it. Rotate the mode dial to disconnect. 39 Settings of Smart Device:

2. Enable the Wi-Fi of smart device and then search surrounding wireless devices. 3. Select the name of camera SSID to be connected and then input the eight-digit number password after WPA2 PSK on the camera. 4. Click the icon of the APP to enable the APP. Set up completion:

5. Once the APP is connected to the camera, functional operations can be enabled on the smart device. AP mode This camera may connect with your smart device through Wi-Fi. Settings of Camera:

1. Select and press the button to enter the setting interface. AP mode Setting pre-connected device for the following serial number:

SSID: PIXPRO AZ527_XXXX WPA2 PSK: XXXXXXXX Refresh Back Press the

/

button to select:

Refresh: Create a new WPA2 PSK password Back:

Back to previous page 40 Station Enable image transmission and remote control by connecting the camera with a Wi-Fi access point created by your smart device. 1. Enable the Wi-Fi access point of smart device. 2. Select on camera and then press the button to confirm connection with smart device. Wi-Fi Mode 3. Press the

/

button to select the name of smart device to be connected and then press the button to confirm. Then, the camera enters the password input interface. Enter Password A K U 4 B C D E F G L M N O P Q V W X Y Z A/a H R 1 I S 2 J T 3 5 6 7 9 0

#!?

Type the network security key Save Cancel Station Searching for devices.

*SSID Device1-SSID Device2-SSID Device3-SSID

Meanings of interface icons:

Icon Description Press the

/

button to select:

Scan: Search again surrounding wireless

:

devices. Select the name of device to be connected. Back: Back to Wi-Fi mode select screen. Delete the last letter

#!?

Switch the display of letters in capital and lowercase Move the Cursor Switch the symbol input Input Space 41 Display of Wi-Fi Connection Status

The Wi-Fi has successfully connected but APP is not enabled:

Wi-Fi Mode AP mode Connected with device

Disconnect The Wi-Fi has successfully connected and APP is enabled:

Wi-Fi Mode Connected with APP XXXXX Disconnect 4. Press the

/

/

/

buttons to select and then press the button to confirm your selection. Enter the completion of WPA2 PSK after password storage.

5. Connect immediately after saving. If connected, the LCD will display as shown below:

Wi-Fi Mode Station Connected with device SSID: XXXXXXXX Disconnect If connect failed, please check Wi-Fi device and try again. 6. After connection, click the icon of the APP on the smart device, you may use it to carry out relative operation. 42 For interrupting the connection:

The Wi-Fi of smart device interrupts:

Wi-Fi Mode Disconnect from device?

No Yes Wi-Fi Mode AP mode Disconnected, please check Wi-Fi device and try again. Back No:

Keep Wi-Fi connected and back to previous page. Yes: Disconnect and back to Wi-Fi mode for interface connection. Back: Back to Wi-Fi mode SSID screen. 43 Settings The name of this camera can be changed through key stroking. 1. Select and then press the button to enter the setting interface. DSC Device The default name of DSC Device isPIXPRO AZ527. Change the name of DSC device through key stroking. 2. Press the button to select the option to be adjusted and then press the

/

button to enter the menu. DSC Device PIXPRO AZ527 MAC Address :

38:67:93:XX:XX:XX 3. Press the button to confirm settings and then skip the menu. 44 DSC Device PIXPRO AZ527 A K U 4 B C D E F G L M N O P Q V W X Y Z A/a H R 1 I S 2 J T 3 5 6 7 9 0

#!?

Name between 1-18 Letters Save Cancel For the method of input, please refer to the introduction on password input on Page 41. MAC Address Check the wireless MAC Address of this camera. Scene Mode The user can select an appropriate mode from the 13 scene modes according to the type of environment you are shooting. The camera then configures the most appropriate settings automatically. 1. Rotate the mode dial to select

/

2. Press the to confirm.

/

.

/

Multi Exposure

buttons to select a scene, and press the button 3. If any need of changing the scene, please press the button and then the button and finally the

/

/

/

buttons to reselect the scene. 45 Handheld Night Reduce blur when shooting low light/ illuminated scenes. Quickly take 4 photos below 8M (including 8M) and then overlap as a clear night image. Pet Mode Rapidly identify pet (dog/cat), capture the dynamic moment of pet. When a cat /dog face is detected, a white focus frame appears. The camera will take a picture and save it regardless of whether the focus is successful (if successful, there appears a green focus frame; if not, there is an orange frame). At most, 10 dog/cat faces can be detected at one time. Sunset For sunsets. Capture subjects in strong sunlight. Fireworks For fireworks at night. Suggest using tripod. 46 Multi Exposure Suitable for shooting moving objects (as many as 7) in the same background. Keep camera steady before shooting. Press and hold the Shutter button to take 7 photos continuously when it will stop automatically. To stop shooting, release the Shutter button in the midway. Objects shall be moved only from left to the right in order to be recorded. Objects moving from other directions would not be recorded. Shooting effect will be influenced if object is moving too fast or too close. Sport For fast-moving subjects. Capture sharp action shots without blur. Night Portrait For portraits against night time scenery (Suggest using tripod). Landscape Speed adjusted for brilliant images. 47 Portrait For shooting portraits Snow For subjects in the snow. Reduce underexposure. Children For kids and pets. Flash is disabled for eye protection. Party For subjects at night without using a tripod. Capture sharp shots without blur. Panorama Mode This feature allows you to capture a panoramic view that will have significantly more content than a single photograph. Follow the instruction arrow with a smooth and steady movement of the camera to seamlessly shoot an ultra-wide scene of up to 360 degrees. Follow the steps below:

1. Select Panorama Mode (

2. Press the

/

), and then press the button to confirm. buttons to select a shooting direction. (The right direction is used as default if you do not make any choice) 2 seconds later, the camera is ready to take pictures. You can also press the take pictures. button or half press the Shutter button to be ready to

/

/ 48 3. Compose your shot on the LCD and half press the Shutter button to focus on the subject. After focusing, fully press the Shutter button down to take picture. At this time, the process dialog of panorama mode stitching appears on the screen. 4. Rotate the camera according to the set direction. When the range of rotation does not exceed the range that the camera can detect, the progress dialog along the indication arrow partially turns red. When it completely turns red, panorama mode shooting is finished. Panoramic image can be played back by the method of flash playing. Please see the animation panoramic playback on page 70. During shooting, the flash, self-timer, macro modes and exposure compensation are not available. Focus adjustment is also not available at this time. During panorama mode shooting, press the current pictures taken. Press the

previously taken pictures.

button to interrupt shooting and save the button to cancel shooting and not to save the During panorama mode shooting, when the moving direction of the camera is wrong or the angle deviates from the internal settings, the LCD shows a warning messageImproper alignment. Please try again.and the current pictures taken are saved. 49 Movie Mode Switch to this mode to record videos. Follow the steps below:

1. Rotate the mode dial to select

, and it will enter the movie screen. 2. Press the button or the Shutter button to start recording. x3.6 00:00:06 3. Press the button or the Shutter button again to stop recording, save it automatically and then the camera will return to the movie screen. In the recording process, you can rotate the zoom lever to zoom in or out of the subject. 50 Custom Settings The user can store frequently used shooting modes or scene modes with parameters and switch to this mode for quick adjustment. Settings under after reset):

mode (unset state or state Go to setting CS mode. 1. Rotate the mode dial to select

, and then the camera enters the setting interface as shown below:

Select one capture mode to define CS . Auto Mode Save Exit 2. As shown in the picture, press the

/

button to select a capture mode that

you want to define as button to enter the shooting screen.

, and press the

3. As shown in the picture, press the button to confirm setting or to exit without setting by turning the mode dial. Yes Or Rotate the mode dial to skip . For setting under other modes (use this method to select a different custom setting):

1. Select any mode or scene mode to be stored. 2. Set your desired parameters in the current mode. 3. Press the

button to select button and then the

, and press the

/

4. Press the button to enter the menu.

/

, and press the

/

button to select

button to enter the menu. 51 7. Rotate the mode dial to switch to

.

/

8. The photo settings you stored the last time are invoked. mode is used for the first When the time, there is no preset parameter stored in the mode. If you want to remove the parameter setting ofCustom Settings, please utilize the reset function as described on page 98.

5. Press the

button to select Custom Settingsand then press the

button to enter the menu

Custom Settings 6. SelectYesto save orNoto cancel. Custom Settings Reset camera settings to custom settings mode. No Yes 52 52 Basic Operation Using the Zoom Function Your camera is equipped with two types of zoom functions: optical zoom and digital zoom. Toggle the zoom lever of the camera to zoom in or out of the subject while taking pictures. Zoom Out Zoom In Zoom Lever When the optical zoom reaches the threshold as digital zoom, release and turn the zoom lever to T to switch between the optical zoom and digital zoom. Zoom Indicator 53 Focus Setting This function can be adjusted in settings:

1. Press the

button to enter the Focus menu. mode, please follow the steps below to configure the Single-AF 2. Press the

/

button to select the following 3 modes:

Single-AF The focus frame appears on the center of the LCD to focus on the subject. Multi-AF The camera automatically focuses the subject in a wide area to find the focus point. Object Tracking Smart tracking of the object in motion under the focusing shooting. 3. Press the button to confirm the settings and enter the shooting screen. Once enabled, Object Tracking will only work when lens is focused on the object. 54 Macro Mode The Macro Setting is ideal for shooting small objects or close-up photos. This mode allows you to focus on subjects very close to the camera. It can be adjusted in 1. Press the mode, please follow the steps below to configure the settings:

button to enter the Marco menu. Macro Off 2. Press the

/

button to select the following 2 modes:

Macro Off Select this option to disable Macro. Macro On Select this option to make focusing on the object closer to the lens (At the W side, the shooting distance should be more than 1 cm). 3. Press the button to confirm the settings and enter the shooting screen. 55 Self-timer Setting Using this function can take photos at regular time. The camera can be set to shoot after 2 seconds, 10 seconds since pressing the Shutter button or shoot after smile. It can be adjusted in settings:

1. Press the mode, please follow the steps below to configure the button to enter the

Self-timer Smile Self-timer menu. Press the shutter button and a picture will be taken immediately after a smile is detected. 3. Press the button to confirm the settings and enter the shooting screen. When enabling the self-timer, pressing the shutter button or the

button can disable the self-timer and return to the shooting screen while keeping the self-timer setting.

When enabling the smile detection, pressing the shutter button or the button can disable the self-timer and return to the shooting screen without keeping the self-timer Smile setting. Self-timer Off 2. Press the

/

following 4 modes:

button to select the Self-timer Off Disables the Self-timer. Self-timer 2 sec A single picture is shot 2 seconds after the shutter button is pressed. Self-timer 10 sec A single picture is shot 10 seconds after the shutter button is pressed. 56 Flash Mode The flash provides supplemental light for the scene. The flash is usually used when shooting against the light to highlight the object; it is also suitable for metering and shooting in darker scenes to improve the exposure. It can be adjusted in 1. Press the Flash Button mode, please follow the steps below to configure the settings:

to pop up the flash. 2 1 2. Press the

button to enter the Flash menu.

Force Off 3. Press the

/

button to select the following 6 modes:

Force Off Flash is turned off. Flash Auto Camera flash goes off automatically based on existing light conditions. Fill Flash The flash will engage with each shot even if there is enough available light to take the photo without flash. Slow Sync. This allows you to take pictures of people at night that clearly show both your subjects and the night time backdrop. The use of a tripod is recommended when shooting with this setting. Slow Sync. + Red-Eye Use this mode for slow synchro shots with red-eye reduction. Red-Eye Reduction The camera emits a brief pre-flash before the picture is taken to reduce red-eye effects. 4. Press the button to confirm the settings and enter the shooting screen. 57 White Balance Setting The white balance function allows adjustment of the color temperature for different light sources. It can be adjusted in mode, please follow the steps below to configure the settings:

Fluorescent Fluorescent CWF Incandescent Manual WB

(Fully press the Shutter button to detect the white balance value) Color Temp. (1900K~10000K)

/

Press the button to "Adjust the K value";

Press the K value.

button to exit the

3. Press the button to confirm the settings and enter the shooting screen. 1. Press menu. button to enter the White Balance

AWBAWB 2. Press the

/

following 8 modes:

button to select the AWB Daylight Cloudy 58 Continuous Shot This function can be adjusted in settings:

1. Press the button to enter the Continuous Shot menu. Single 2. Press the

/

following 5 modes:

button to select the Single Capture a single shot only. Continuous Shot Take several pictures at a time. mode, please follow the steps below to configure the Cont.Shot-High Speed (VGA) For continuous shot with VGA pixel. Cont.Shot-Fast (2M) For continuous shot with 2M pixels. Time-Lapse Take pictures based on the preset interval (30sec/ 1min/ 5min/

10min). 3. Press the button to confirm the settings and enter the shooting screen. 4. Press the Shutter button to start continuous shooting. In Continuous Shot mode, the flash is automatically set to Force Off in order to achieve quick succession of shots. 59 EV Setting The EV function menu of the camera includes functions, such as EV adjustment, ISO adjustment, Shutter adjustment, Aperture adjustment, etc. Using the appropriate function settings can improve your pictures. Please follow the steps below to configure the settings:

1. Press the button to display the settings screen. Exposure Compensation Set up to adjust the picture brightness. In the case of a very high contrast between the photographed object and the background, the brightness of the picture can be appropriately adjusted. (Adjustable in Mode) 2. Press the

/

the setting options.

/

the option values. 3. Press the

button to select

button to adjust 4. Press the button to confirm the settings and enter the shooting screen. F2.8F2.8 1/50 1/50 0.3 EV 0.3 EV 400 ISO 400 ISO The adjustable range of exposure value is from EV -3.0 to EV+3.0. 60 ISO ISO allows you to set the sensitivity of the camera sensor. Please use a higher ISO value in darker places and a lower value in brighter conditions. (Adjustable in Mode). F2.8F2.8 1/501/50 0.3 EV 0.3 EV 400 ISO 400 ISO The cameras ISO settings include: Auto, 100, 200, 400, 800, 1600 and 3200. Shutter Adjustment For shutter speed, the camera may automatically set the aperture value corresponding to the manually set shutter speed so as to obtain a most suitable exposure value. The movement of object may be shown by adjusting the shutter speed. High shutter value will allow you to clearly capture the movement of fast moving objects while a low shutter value will allow you to take a picture of a fast moving object while showing a strong sense of movement. (Adjustable in Mode). F2.8F2.8 1/50 1/50 0.3 EV 0.3 EV

-1.0 EV 400 ISO 400 ISO 61 Aperture Adjustment You can adjust the aperture size value. Selecting a large aperture opening will emphasize the point of focus and show a blurry background and foreground. A small aperture opening will keep both the background and main object in clear focus. (Adjustable in Mode) Using Quick Recording In shooting mode, press the recording video. button to begin F2.8F2.8 1/501/50 0.3 EV 0.3 EV 400 ISO 400 ISO After recording, press the shutter button to stop recording. The camera will store the video and return to the shooting screen. button or the 62 i Button Function Menu The Image Color Setting allows you to select different color effects. It can be adjusted in mode, please follow the steps below to configure the settings:

1. Press the button to select the Image Color Setting Menu. 2. Press the

/

button to select the Image Color Setting options.

(

) represents optional in Movie mode. Normal There are 20 Image Color options in photo shooting mode

:

Normal (

) Sepia (

) Vivid (

) Japan Style Italian Style French Style Punk Black and White (

) Partial Color-Red (

) ) Partial Color-Blue (

) Partial Color-Yellow (

Partial Color-Green (

)

) Negative Dreamy Vignetting Salon Fish Eye (20M Not optional) Reflection 4 Grids - Stylish

(2M) Sketch 63 Playback Mode Viewing Photos and Videos To view photos and videos on the LCD:

1. After pressing the 2. Use the

/

button, the last photo or video clip taken will be displayed on the LCD.

button to scroll through the photos or video clips stored in the internal memory or on the memory card. 3. To play a selected video clip, press the button to enter the movie playback mode. During video playback, the operating instructions will appear on the screen. Press the appropriate buttons to enable the corresponding functions. Under Playback Paused Mute 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 00:00:47 00:01:23 Back to the beginning of the video Play Play video forward Cancel playback 6 7 8 9 10 Play video backward 00:00:47 00:01:23 1 2 3 4 5 Increase volume Pause Fast forward Decrease volume Rewind 64 Thumbnail View When in playback mode, rotate the zoom lever counter to the images of the photos and videos on the screen. W position to display thumbnail 1. Slide the zoom lever to switch between 3x3 and 4x4 thumbnails. 2. Press the press the

/

/

/

buttons to select a picture or video clip to view and button to restore it to the original size. When the icon appears, it means this is a video file. 65 65 Using Zoom Playback (for still pictures only) When playing back photos, you can also use the Zoom Lever to zoom in on the photos 2 to 8 times. 1. Press the 2. Press the zoomed in. button to switch to playback mode. button to select a picture to be

/

3. Rotate the zoom lever clockwise to to zoom in. T Zoom In 4. The screen will display the number of times and x2 5. Press the area of the photo zooming operation.

/

buttons to navigate and select a part of the image to be zoomed in.

/

/

6. Press the button to return the image to its original scale. Movie images cannot be magnified. 66 Photos and Video Deletion In playback mode, press the

To delete photos or videos:

button to delete your photos and videos.

1. Press the 2. Press the 3. Press the

button to switch to playback mode.

/

button to select the photos and videos to be deleted.

button and the deletion screen is displayed. Delete One Exit 4. Press the to confirm.

/

button to select Delete OneorExitand press the

button Erased photos/video clips cannot be recovered. Please refer to page 91 for instructions on deleting more than one image at a time. 67 Slideshow This setting allows you to view all the stored images as a slideshow. 1. Press the button to enter playback screen. button to enter slide option. 2. Press the 3. Press the

/

playback screen.

button to select slideshow playing orCancelto return to the Cancel 4. Press the button to confirm the setting. The continuous capture group playback may be displayed by slideshow. Pictures rotate automatically during a slide show. Slide playing function supports movie playing. 68 Continuous Capture Group Playback Cont.Shot-High Speed (VGA) and Cont.Shot-Fast (2M) can make continuous capture for group image playback. button to enter playback screen.

/

button to select cont. group. 1. Press 2. Press the 3. Press to start playback. 1/45 SD 25 20152015 04-08 04-08 00:00 00:00 69 Animation panorama play Panoramic animation playing is to play full size image in accordance with the shooting direction. After playing, it will automatically return to the static screen of panoramic image. 1. Press the 2. Press the 3. Press the button to enter playback screen.

/

button to select animated panoramic photos. button to play in selected shooting direction.

In the process of panoramic animation playback, press the playing and return to the playback screen.

button (

) to stop 70 70 Using the Menus Photo Setup Menu Functions that can be enabled are different under each mode. Mode:

1. In photo shooting mode, press the button to enter the shooting menu. 2. Press the

/

button to Expo Metering Use this setting to select the target size of the cameras field of view to be metered. select the item to be set.

3. Press the

/

select an option and press the button to confirm. button to Refer to the following pages for more details about each setting. AiAE (Artificial Intelligence AE):

Automatically selects the central and peripheral metering, to calculate the reasonable value of metering by weighting. Spot: For metering targets a small area in the center of the cameras field of view. Center: For metering targets a slightly larger area in the center of the cameras field of view. It can be adjusted in all modes except for Panorama Mode. 71

 

 

Image Size The size setting refers to the image resolution in pixels. A higher image resolution allows you to print that image in larger sizes without degrading the image quality. Size: A3 printing Size: A4 printing Size: 4x 6 printing Size: E-Mail The larger the number of recorded pixels, the larger the file size and the fewer files that can be saved on your memory card. Size: High quality printing Size: Full size printing Size: 16:9 display Size: Poster printing 72 OIS (Optical Image Stabilization) This mode can help reduce photo blur caused by unintentional hand shake, low light. Cont. AF Enable the continuous AF to be able to continuously focus automatically when taking pictures. OIS: Off OIS: On Use this image stabilization mode in dark environments. Shooting in a windy or unstable environment (such as a moving vehicle) may cause blurred images. Cont.AF: Off Cont.AF: On 73 HDR Use this setting to control wide dynamic image range when taking static pictures. Photos with extreme contrast of bright and dark areas will still maintain distinguishable detail and depth.

(Suggest using tripod) Beautifier Set the effect of the face beautifier mode. Effect 1: Skin Soften Effect 2: Skin Soften+Eye Brightening Effect 3: Skin Soften+Eye Brightening +Eye Enlargement HDR: Off HDR: On In the scenario with high light contrast

(too dark or too light), this function can be used to shoot satisfactory photos. 74 Scene Select the scene mode under the SCN mode. Press SET To Select Scene Night Portrait Shooting menu in the Photo shooting mode

( : Optional : Not optional) Options Photo Shooting Modes 75 Photo Shooting Settings Menu Mode:

1. Press the button in Photo Shooting mode and press the

.

/

button to select 2. Press the 3. Press the menu. button to enter the menu.

/

button to select

, and press the

/

button to enter the 4. Press the

/

to enter the menu.

/

5. Press the

button to select the item to be set and press the

/

button

button to select an option and press the button to confirm. 76 Quality The Quality Setting can be used to adjust the image compression ratio. AF Assist Beam In a darker environment, AF Assist Beam can be turned on for better focus. Quality Best Fine Normal AF Assist Beam Off On Best Fine Normal Digital Zoom This setting is for adjusting digital zoom. If this function is disabled, only optical zoom can be used. Off On Digital Zoom 77 Date Imprint Include a Date/Time stamp on the photo image. Quick Review This option allows quick review of the photos immediately after they are taken. Each photo is displayed on the LCD based on the selected time. Off Date Date/Time Date Imprint Off 1 sec 2 sec 3 sec Quick Review Off 1 sec 2 sec 3 sec Off Date Date/Time 78 Custom Settings Custom Settings stores the current photo shooting mode or scene mode and its parameters. The stored mode and parameters are directly invoked in mode. Custom Settings Reset camera settings to custom settings mode. No Yes There are 2 options:

No Yes mode, selectCustom Settings In the camera will enter the setting interface as shown below:

Select one capture mode to define CS . Auto Mode Save Exit 79 Movie Menu Mode:

1. Rotate the mode dial to select and press the button to enter the movie menu. 2. Press the

/

the movie menu to be set.

button to select 3. Press the

/

option and press the

button to select an button to confirm. Expo Metering Use this setting to select the target size of the cameras field of view to be metered. Expo Metering: AiAE AiAE (Artificial Intelligence AE) Automatically selects the central and peripheral metering, to calculate the reasonable value of metering by weighting. Spot For metering targets a small area in the center of the cameras field of view. Center For metering targets a slightly larger area in the center of the cameras field of view. 80 Movie Size Set the image resolution used during video recording. Size: 1080p 30fps Size: 1080p 30fps Size: 720p 60fps Size: 720p 30fps Size: 640x480 30fps Size: 640x360 120fps

(High Speed Movie) The speed requirements for reading and writing high image pixel images to memory card are as follows:

No. Image Pixel Frame Recommendation Recording time (4GB) About 1 2 3 4 5 1920x1080 *

1280x720 *

1280x720 *

640x480 640x360 30 60 30 30 120 Class 4 Class 4 Class 4 Class 4 Class 4 30 minutes 32 minutes 59 minutes 106 minutes 54 minutes

* The longest recording time is 29 minutes at one time. 81 When recording in higher pixel resolutions for extended periods of time, this can cause the camera to generate heat. This is not a camera malfunction. When the video format is set as 640x360 (120fps), shooting time is 30 seconds, playback time is 2 minutes. Sound recording is disabled when 640x360 120fps is chosen. OIS (Optical Image Stabilization) This mode can help reduce images blur caused by unintentional hand shake, low light.

OIS: Off OIS: On Use this image stabilization mode in dark environments. Shooting in a windy or unstable environment (such as a moving vehicle) may cause blurred images. 82 to enter the video recording screen.

/

button to select

, and press the button Movie Setting Menu Mode:

1. Rotate the Mode Dial and select button, press the 2. Press the to enter the menu. Press SET To Enter Menu 3. Press the menu.

/

button to select

, and press the

/

button to enter the 4. Select the item to be set and press the 5. Press the

/

button to select an option and press the

/

button to enter the menu. button to confirm. 83 Digital Zoom This setting is for adjusting digital zoom. If this function is disabled, only optical zoom can be used. Custom Settings Custom Settings stores the current movie mode and its parameters. The stored mode and parameters can be invoked directly in mode. Digital Zoom Off On Custom Settings Reset camera settings to custom settings mode. No Yes 84 Playback Menu Mode:

1. Press the button to display the button 2. Press the playback screen and press the to enter the menu.

/

button to select the item to be set and press the button to enter.

3. Press the

an option and press the confirm.

/

button to select button to Press SET To Confirm Normal Mode Refer to the following pages for more details about each setting. Playback Mode Select settings screen:

, and press the button to enter the Normal Mode: Display all images. Normal Mode:

Display all images. Date Mode:

Arranged by date. Cont. Photo Mode:

Arranged by Cont. Photo Group. The Date Folder is displayed in date order based on camera's Date/Time Settings. If there is no continuous shot image file in memory, continuous shot playback mode cannot be enabled. 85 HDR With the HDR function, pictures that are overexposed may be corrected to optimize the highlights and lowlights captured to more accurately represent the actual scene. Select the settings screen:

button to enter

, and press the Touch-up The playback beauty feature allows for beautification using three individual effects. Select button to enter the settings screen:

, and press the HDR HDR Cancel After using the HDR function, the image will be saved as a new file and the original file is still stored in the memory. 86 Red-Eye Reduction Red-Eye Reduction Skin Soften Eye Brightening Eye Enlargement Cancel Using the face beautifier mode allows you to select from single, two, or all three effects combined. Rotate You can use this setting to change the orientation of the picture. Select

, and press the the settings screen:

button to enter Resize This setting allows you to resize a picture to a particular resolution and saves it as a new picture. Select the settings screen:

, and press the button to enter Turn Right Turn Right Turn Left Cancel Resize to 1024x768 Resize to 1024x768 Resize to 640x480 Cancel Videos and panoramic pictures cannot be rotated. The rotated picture file will replace the original photo. Only for adjusting pictures with high resolution to those with low resolution. Sizes of photos taken in panorama mode or rotated cannot be adjusted. 87 Color Effect This setting allows you to change the picture color effect. The file is saved as a new photo and stored in memory together with the original photo. Press the button to enter the settings screen:

Cancel There are 19 options available:

Cancel Vivid Japan Style (8M) Italian Style (8M) French Style (8M) Punk (4M) Sepia Partial Color-Red Partial Color-Blue Partial Color-Yellow Partial Color-Green Negative (8M) Vignetting Salon Fish Eye (20M Not optional) Reflection 4 Grids - Stylish(2M) Black and White Dreamy 88 Playback Settings Menu Mode:

1. Press the

button to select 2. Press the

/

menu. Protect Delete DPOF Trim button to show the playback screen, press the button, press the

/

, and press the

button to select button to enter the menu.

, and press the

/

button to enter the

button to select the item to be set and press the

/

button 3. Press the

/

to enter the menu.

/

4. Press the Refer to the following pages for more details about each setting.

button to select an option and press the button to confirm. 89 Protect To prevent any pictures or videos from being accidentally erased, use this setting to lock one or all of the files. Protect One Date Folder Cont. Group ResetAll Reset There are 5 options available:

One:

Lock the selected photo or video if they are unprotected; unlock the selected photo or video if they are protected. Date Folder:

Protect all photos in the date folder. Cont. Group: Protect all photos in the cont. photo folder. All:

Lock all photos or videos. Reset:

Cancel all locked photos or videos. 90 Delete You can delete one or all photo/video files. Delete One Date Folder Cont. Group All There are 4 options available:

One:

Delete one photo or video. Date Folder: Delete all photos in the date folder. Cont. Group: Delete all photos in the cont. photo folder. All:

Delete all photos or videos. The file can be deleted. indicator means a file is protected. File protection must be removed first before a Deleting files will cause DPOF settings to be reset. When one photo in the cont. photo and date folders is protected, it will be kept but any other photos will be deleted. 91 DPOF (Digital Print Order Format) The DPOF feature allows you to compile and select a group of pictures that you would like to print and will save your selection on the memory card so that you can use the memory card to print without having to individually specify the photos you want to print. One All Reset DPOF The printer that supports DPOF is needed for printing. Trim The Trim Setting allows you to crop photos and save them as new pictures. 1. SelectYesto confirm trim. Rotate the zoom lever to select the aspect ratio and press the

to trim. buttons to adjust the part you want

/

/

/

2. Press the button and theSave Change?prompt appears. Select Select return to the trim prompt screen. to cancel changes and to change and save the picture. 92 The image cannot be clipped/trimmed again once it has been clipped to 640X480. Setup Menu Mode:

1. Press the button in any mode, press the button to enter the menu.

/

2. Press the button to select menu.

/

button to select

, and press the

, and press the

/

button to enter the Sound Settings Power Saver Language World Time Auto English Home Date & Time 2015.04.08 00:00 3. Press the

/

to enter the menu.

/

4. Press the

button to select the item to be set and press the

/

button

button to select an option and press the button to confirm. Refer to the following pages for more details about each setting. 93 Sound Settings With this setting you may adjust the sound volume. Press the volume and press the setting. button to adjust the button to confirm our

/

Sound Settings Volume Back 94 Power Saver This setting allows you to save power and get the maximum possible running time for your cameras batteries. Turn the LCD and camera off automatically after a consecutive period of inactivity. Power Saver Auto Normal Best Auto Normal Best Power Saver Auto Normal Best LCD power off time 3 min 1 min 30 s Turn off time 5 min 3 min 1 min Language Refer to the Reset your language section on page 25. Date/Time Refer to the Reset Date/Time section on page 26. World Time The world time setting is a useful function for your overseas trips. This feature enables you to display the local time on the LCD while you are abroad. 1. Press the button to select

/

) and destination the departure place (

(

) fields. 2. Press the

/

button to select a city located in the same time zone as that of the field. Press the button to confirm settings. LCD Brightness Use this setting to adjust the brightness of your LCD. Press the the brightness of screen, and press the button to confirm our setting.

button to adjust

/

LCD Brightness Normal+2

+1 Normal

-1

-2 95 File Setting Mode:

1. Press the button, press the

/

button to select and press the button to enter the menu. 2. Press the menu.

/

button to select and press the

/

button to enter the 3. Press the

/

to enter the menu.

button to select the item to be set and press the

/

button Format Copy to Card File Numbering Reset FW Version X.XX 4. Press the

/

button to select an option and press the button to confirm. Refer to the following pages for more details about each setting. 96 Format Please note: formatting enables you to delete all contents in the memory card and built-in memory, including protected photo and movie files. Format Doing so will clear all data. No Yes If you selectYesthe camera formats its memory. If there is no memory card in the camera, the built-in memory will be formatted;

if there is a memory card, it will be formatted only. Copy to Card Use this setting to copy the files stored in the built-in memory to a memory card. Copy to Card Copy files from built-in memory to the memory card. No Yes If there is no card available in the camera, this function will not be displayed. 97 File Numbering After you take a picture or video clip, the camera will save it with a sequential number. You can use this to reset the file numbering to 0001. File Numbering Create a new directory and reset the file number. No Yes Reset Use this setting to restore the camera to its original default settings. Reset Reset camera settings to factory defaults. No Yes 98 FW Version Use this setting to view the current camera firmware version. When there is a new firmware version in the memory card, selectYesto update. FW Version Current Ver:1.XX Back FW Version Current Ver:1.XX New Ver.:2.XX Update Firmware?

Yes Cancel 99 Connection Settings Mode:

1. Press the button, press the

/

button to select and press the button to enter the menu. 2. Press the

/

button to select and press the

/

button to enter the menu. 3. Press the

/

to enter the menu.

button to select the item to be set and press the

/

button USB TV-System Eye-Fi PC NTSC Off 4. Press the

/

button to select an option and press the button to confirm. Refer to the following pages for more details about each setting. 100 Connecting to a Computer You can use the Micro USB cable to connect the camera and copy (transmit) photos to a computer, printer or other device. Setting the USB Mode The cameras USB port can be set to connect with either a computer or a printer. The following steps will allow you to ensure that the camera is correctly configured to connect with a PC. 1. Press the the menu. 2. Press the button to selectUSBand press the button to selectPCand press the button to confirm. button to enter

/

/

/

USB PC Printer 101 101 Transferring files to your computer The computer will automatically detect the camera as a removable drive. Double-click the My Computer icon on the desktop to locate the removable drive and to copy folders and files in the drive to a directory on your PC as you would copy any typical folder or file. Follow the steps below to connect the camera to a computer. 1. Make sure the computer is turned on. 2. Connect one end of the supplied Micro USB cable to the USB port on your camera. 3. Connect the other end of the Micro USB cable to an available USB port on your computer. 4. After the transmission is complete, disconnect the Micro USB cable according to the instructions specifying how to safely remove USB devices. 102 Connecting to a PictBridge Compatible Printer PictBridge technology allows printing of the photos saved in the memory card by the printer. To find out if a printer is PictBridge compatible, simply look for the PictBridge logo on the packaging or check the owners manual for specifications. With the PictBridge function on your camera, you can print the captured photos directly to a PictBridge compatible printer using the supplied Micro USB cable, without the need for a PC. Setting the USB Mode The cameras USB port can be set to connect with either a PC or a Printer; the following steps will ensure that the camera is correctly configured to connect with a Printer. 1. Press the button to

/

selectUSBand press the button to enter the menu.

/

2. Press the

/

button to selectPrinterand press the to confirm. button USB PC Printer After the camera is reset, it will switch to PC mode automatically from USB mode. See Using the PictBridge Menu section on page 105. 103 Connecting to your Printer 1. Make sure the printer is turned on. 2. Connect one end of the supplied Micro USB cable to the USB port on your camera. 3. Connect the other end of the Micro USB cable to the USB port on the printer. If the camera is not connected to a PictBridge compatible printer, the following error message will appear on the LCD. Connection Failed!

The error message above will also appear if the USB mode is set incorrectly, in which case you should disconnect the Micro USB cable, check the USB mode settings, ensure that the printer is turned on, and then try connecting the Micro USB cable again. 104 Using the PictBridge Menu After setting the USB mode to Printer, the PictBridge menu will appear. PictBridge Print (with Date) Print (without Date) Print Index Print DPOF Images Exit

/

Press the menu item and press the enter the item.

button to select a button to

/

Refer to the following sections for more detailed information on each setting. Print (with Date) If you have set the date and time on your camera, the date and time will be recorded and saved with each photo you take. 1. In the PictBridge menu, selectPrint (with Date)and the screen as shown below appears. 01 Back 2. Press the

photo to be printed.

/

button to select a 105 Print (without Date) 3. Press the

/

button to select the number of copies for the currently displayed photo. 4. Press the button and the following screen will appear. Use this setting to print the photos without dates on them. 1. In the PictBridge menu, selectPrint

(without Date)and the screen as shown below appears. Print (with Date) Yes Cancel 01 Back 5. SelectYesand press the button to confirm printing; selectCanceland press the button to cancel printing.

/

2. Press the

photo to be printed.

/

3. Press the

button to select a

button to select the number of copies for the currently displayed photo. 106 4. Press the button and the following screen will appear. You can print all photos in the camera via this function. Print Index Print (Without Date) Yes Cancel 5. SelectYesand press the button to confirm printing; selectCanceland press the button to cancel printing. 1. In the PictBridge menu, selectPrint Indexand the screen as shown below appears. Print Index Yes Yes Cancel 2. SelectYesand press the button to confirm printing; selectCanceland press the button to cancel printing. 107 Print DPOF Images Exit To use DPOF printing, you must select your photos for printing using the DPOF settings beforehand. See DPOF section on page 92. 1. In the PictBridge menu, selectPrint DPOF Imagesand the screen as shown below appears. SelectExitto exit the PictBridge menu. At this time, the messageRemove USB Cable!

appears on the screen. Disconnect the Micro USB cable from the camera and printer. Print DPOF Images Yes Cancel 2. SelectYesand press the button to confirm printing; selectCanceland press the button to cancel printing. 108 Video System You can use the AV cable (which should be purchased separately) to connect the camera and the television for realizing the video output. Connect one end of the AV cable to USB/AV port of the camera; connect the other end to AV-OUT port of the television. Adjust the format of the video output system according to your requirements, and the steps are as follows:

1. Press the

button to selectTV-Systemand press the

/

/

button to enter the menu. 2. Press the

/

button to selectNTSC, and press the button to confirm. TV-System PAL NTSC The video output system would change accordingly based upon the changes of the selected language. NTSC: English, Chinese (Traditional), Japanese, French, Korean, Russian, Vietnamese, PAL:

Greek, Hungarian German, Spanish, Italian, Chinese (Simplified), Portuguese, Swedish, Danish, Finnish, Indonesia, Norwegian, Dutch, Turkish, Polish, Thai, Croatian, Czech, Arabic, Hindi 109 Set Eye-Fi Card Connection Mode This camera supports the wireless connection for Eye-Fi memory card, Enable Eye-Fi connection by following below steps. 1. Press the

/

the menu. 2. Press the button to selectOnorOffand press the button to selectEye-Fiand press the button to enter button to

/

/

confirm. Eye-Fi Off On If the Eye-Fi card is not available in the camera, this feature is not displayed. 110 Supported HDMI Connections HDMI (High Definition Multimedia Interface) is a fully digital audio/video transmission interface, through which uncompressed audio and video signals are transmitted. Direct transmission of digital video signals to your TV reduces conversion loss and improves image quality. HDMI

(Type D) Connecting HDMI-Ready TV 1. Use the cable with high resolution output terminal (which should be purchased separately) to connect the camera to the television which meets HDMI standard. 2. The camera will be automatically detected by the TV. 3. After connecting via HDMI, the camera enters Playback Mode. Make sure the camera and the TV are both turned on before connecting. Refer to your TV instruction manual for information on what resolution sizes it will support. The resolution and output formats that are not supported will be grayed out on the cameras LCD. 111 Appendices Product Specifications Design and specifications are subject to change without notice. Image Sensor Type Effective Pixels Total Pixels Focal Length 35mm film equivalent F number 1/2.3BSI CMOS 20.68 Megapixels 21.14 Megapixels 4.3mm (Wide) 223.6mm (Tele) 24mm (Wide) 1248mm (Tele) F2.8 (Wide) ~ F5.6 (Tele) Lens Lens Construction 13 groups 15 elements Optical Zoom Optical Zoom Autofocus System Anti-Handshake Digital Zoom 52x Normal: (Wide) 60cm ~ , (Tele) 300cm ~ ;

Macro: 1cm ~ (Wide Only) TTL Autofocus Optical Image Stabilization 4x Digital Zoom (Combined Zoom: 208x) 112 Still Image Number of Recording Pixels Movie Image Compression DCF, DPOF (Ver1.1) Support

(3:2) 18MP: 5184 X 3456

(16:9) 15MP: 5120 X 2880 2MP: 1920 X 1080

(4:3) 20MP: 5184 X 3888 10MP: 3648 X 2736 5MP: 2592 X 1944 3MP: 2048 X 1536 0.3MP: 640 X 480 1920 X 1080 (30fps), 1280 X 720 (60fps/30fps), 640 X 480 (30fps), High-Speed Movie: 640 X 360 (120fps) Best, Fine, Normal Yes Still Image Exif 2.3 (JPEG) File Format Movie Shooting Modes Scene Mode Detection Features Photo Touch-up HDR MOV [Image: H.264; Audio: Linear PCM (Stereo)]

Auto Mode, Program AE, Shutter priority, Aperture priority, Manual Mode, Face Beautifier, Wi-Fi Mode, Scene Mode, Movie Mode, Custom Settings Handheld Night, Pet Mode, Sunset, Fireworks, Multi Exposure, Sport, Night Portrait, Landscape, Portrait, Snow, Children, Party, Panorama Mode Face, Smile, Blink, Cat, Dog Red-Eye Reduction, Skin Soften, Eye Brightening, Eye Enlargement Yes 113 113 Scan Panorama LCD Image Auto Rotation ISO Sensitivity AF Method Up to 360 3.0 inch (460k Pixels) Yes Auto, ISO100/200/400/800/1600/3200 Single AF, Multi-AF (TTL 25-point), Object Tracking, Face-Detection Artificial Intelligence AE (AiAE), Center-Weighted Average, Spot

(Fixed to Center of Frame), Face AE Exposure Metering Method Exposure Control Method Program AE (AE-Lock Available), Shutter Prior AE, Aperture Prior AE Exposure Compensation Shutter Speed Continuous Shot Playback Modes White Balance Control Flash Flash Method Flash Modes 3 EV in 1/3 Step Increments 1/2000 ~ 30 Seconds Yes Single, Index (9/16 Thumbnails), Slide Show, Date, Continuous Shooting, Zoom (Approx. x2 ~ x8) AWB, Daylight, Cloudy, Fluorescent, Fluorescent CWF, Incandescent, Manual WB, Color Temp. (1900K ~ 10000K) Pop-up (Manual) Force Off, Flash Auto, Fill Flash, Slow Sync., Slow Sync.+Red-Eye, Red-Eye Reduction 114 Recording Media Internal Memory: Approx. 8MB SD/SDHC Card (Up to 32GB Support) [MMC Card Not Supported]

Multi-Language Support 27 Languages Jacks AV-OUT/USB 2.0 (Micro 5 pin USB), HDMI (Type D) Eye-Fi Support Yes Wi-Fi Yes (802.11b/g/n) Remote Viewfinder Yes (via ios/Android device) Power Shooting Capability

(Battery Performance) Rechargeable Li-ion Battery LB-060, 3.7V 1100mAh, In-Camera Charging Approx. 240 Shots (Based on CIPA Standards) Operation Environment Temperature: 0 ~ 40C, Humidity: 0 ~ 90%

Dimensions (W X H X D) Approx. 121.3 X 85.8 X 97.5mm (Based on CIPA Standards) Weight Approx. 508g (Body only) 115 Prompts and Warning Messages Message Warning! Battery exhausted. Lens obstruction, Re-start Camera. Description Action Warning before power off when the camera battery is exhausted. Charge the battery. The lens is jammed or some foreign object is preventing the lens from functioning properly. Turn off the camera and restart it to reset the lens. Suggest using tripod. The message will appear when shooting in low light/illuminated scenes. Use of a tripod or other support is suggested. Built-in memory error!

An error occurs in built-in memory. Format the internal memory. Improper alignment. Please try again. The offset is too big for panorama shooting. Warning! Do not turn off your camera during update!

The message appears during the firmware update process. Remove the message after 2 seconds and return to shooting. The message disappears after the camera update and restart. 116 Message Description Action Remove USB Cable!

Indicates that you can disconnect the Micro USB cable. The message disappears after you disconnect the Micro USB cable. Connection Failed!

Failure to connect to your PC, printer, TV (with HDMI). Remove the cable and retry connection. Write Protect !

The memory card is locked. Card Full !

Indicates that the memory card is full. Unlock the write-protect switch of the memory card. Insert a new memory card or delete unwanted images. Memory Full !

Indicates that the internal memory is full. Insert a new memory card or delete unwanted images. 117 Message Description Action Card Error !

The memory card cant be identified after being formatted. Insert a new memory card or format the card with this camera. Card is not formatted. The inserted memory card is unformatted or has been formatted on a computer or other device and is not compatible with this camera. Disappear after 2 seconds and enter the formatting process. Slow access When a memory card lower than Class 4 is used to record a HD movie, the writing speed will be slower and recording will not continue. Use an memory card with Class 4 or higher. No Red-Eye Detected!

Red eyes have not been detected in the image. The message will disappear after 2 seconds. This image cannot be edited. The file format does not support editing or the edited file cannot be edited again. The message will disappear after 2 seconds. 118 Message Description Action Exceeded maximum folder number. Prompt message when the archives or file folders in the memory card have reached the maximum (9999 for archives, 999 for file folder). Copy the images to your PC and format the memory card with this camera. Too many pictures for fast processing. During the playback by date, the images exceed specifications so that it is not possible to play by date. This may be solved by deleting unnecessary images. Unable to recognize files. The format of the file to be viewed is not supported or the file is corrupted so it cannot be properly read. No Picture!

When you press the play button, no image files exist in the camera or memory card. No continuous group file. When you switch from the playback mode to continuous photo mode, there is no continuous group file. You may be able to play it back on another brand of camera or on your computer. The message disappears 2 seconds later to return to the photo shooting screen. The message disappears after 2 seconds and the camera returns to the normal playback mode. Protected!

Undeletable!

The file is protected. The message appears when you delete it. Unprotect the file before deleting. 119 Troubleshooting Problem Possible Causes Solution Camera does not turn on Camera turns off suddenly during operation The battery has been depleted. The battery is not inserted correctly. Recharge the battery. Correctly reinstall the battery. The batteries have been depleted. Recharge the battery. The picture is blurred Camera shakes while taking a picture. Images and video files cannot be saved The memory card is full. The memory card is locked. Turn on OIS feature. Please use tripod for high magnification (above 15X) optical zoom. Use another memory card or delete unnecessary files. Unlock the memory card. Check the connection between the Images will not print from the connected printer The camera is not connected to camera and printer. the printer correctly. Use a PictBridge compatible The printer is not PictBridge printer. compatible. The printer is out of paper or ink. The printer paper is jammed. Load paper into the printer or replace the ink cartridge in the printer. Remove the jammed paper. 120 Problem Possible Causes Solution Saving data to memory card is slow Using a memory card below Class Use an memory card with 4 may result in slower recording times. write Class higher than 4 to improve performance. Cannot write to the memory card Too many movies to process The memory card has been locked. The number of pictures or folders in the memory card exceed the specifications, so the playback of data folder cannot be displayed. Release the write lock of the memory card or replace with another card. Delete unwanted files. The flash icon appears on the LCD Current shooting environment requires flash. Turn on flash. When shooting with stacked filters attached, the corners of the photo may turn dark

(Vignetting effect) because the filter holder blocks light from reaching the camera image sensor; especially, at wide angle zoom control settings. Please take test shots and review the results when using stacked filters. 121 Please enter the new password on smart device after changing Wi-Fi password. Some models of smart device will remember the Wi-Fi password previously entered, so please clear the old password on smart device manually before connection (For different models, this operation may be varied, please subject to your user manual.) iOS system Android system 1 2 3 1 2 122 Licensed Product The Kodak trademark and trade dress are used under license from Kodak. 2015 JK Imaging Ltd. All Rights Reserved. JK Imaging Ltd., 17239 So. Main Street, Gardena, CA 90248 USA JK Imaging Europe, 71 Clarendon Road, Watford, WD17 1DS, UK http://kodakpixpro.com Ver. 2

 

 

6 Mode Dial Description Rotating the mode dial can allow you to easily switch among modes. Auto Scene The camera may automatically detect the currently most suitable scene to give you best pictures. Mode Name Auto Landscape Backlight Macro Night Portrait Night Portrait Description The camera will automatically adjusts the exposure and focus to ensure the best possible pictures. For landscapes, will automatically adjust the exposure and reproduce vivid green and blue colors. When the sun or any other light source is behind you, will automatically adjust the foreground exposure to produce the best pictures possible. To produce more detailed close-ups, will automatically engage the camera's Macro Mode and automatically focus the lens. For night scenes, will automatically increase the ISO value to compensate for low light. Most suitable for capturing people with focus on their faces. When you take portraits at night, or in low light conditions, will automatically adjust the exposure for people and night scenes. 36 36 Program AE For adjusting the EV and ISO values. Shutter priority For adjusting the shutter speed, EV and ISO values. The camera may automatically set the aperture value according to the set shutter speed and ISO value to obtain a most suitable exposure value. Aperture priority For adjusting the aperture size, EV and ISO values. The large aperture is to highlight the object focused through blurring the background, while the small aperture is for clear focusing on both the background and the object. Manual Mode For manually setting the aperture, shutter speed and ISO value. Please refer to the table below if any nonadjustable options in

(O: Optional X: Not optional) mode Mode Options Aperture Shutter EV ISO X

(Display) X

(Display) X

(Display) O X

(Display) O O O O O O X

(Display) O O O O 1. Rotate the mode dial to select the mode you want. 2. Press the [

setting.

] button to enter 3. Press the [

] to select the items to be adjusted. 4. Press the [

parameters.

] to adjust 37 37 Scene Mode You can select an appropriate mode from the 14 scene modes according to the type of environment you are shooting. The camera then configures the most appropriate settings automatically. 1. Rotate the mode dial to

, then the LCD screen will display as below:

Panorama Mode For shooting 360-degree landscape. Follow the steps below:

1. Select the panorama mode (

then press the button to confirm. 2. Press the arrow buttons to select a

) and shooting direction (The right direction is used as default if you do not make any choice). 2 seconds later, the camera is ready to take pictures. You can also press the button to be ready to take pictures. button or half press the shutter 3. Compose your shot on the LCD screen and half press the shutter button to focus on the subject. After focusing, fully press the shutter button down to take picture. At this time, the process dialog of panorama mode stitching appears on the screen. 2. Press the arrow buttons to select a button to scene, and press the confirm. 3. If any need of changing the scene, please button and then the press the button and finally the directional buttons to reselect the scene. 38 F00.0 0/000 Cancel OK Save 4. Rotate the camera according to the set direction. When the range of rotation meets the internal settings of the camera, the progress dialog along the indication arrow partially turns red. When it completely turns red, panorama mode shooting is finished. Panoramic image can be played back by the method of flash playing. Please see the animation panoramic playback on page 109. In the course of panoramic shot, you may button to interrupt press the shutter or shooting and save the video that has been shot. Press the [

shooting with pictures not saved.

] button to cancel During panorama mode shooting, when the moving direction of the camera is wrong or the angle deviates from the internal settings, the LCD shows a warning messageImproper alignment. Please try again.and the current pictures taken are saved. The movie size is 2M in the course of panoramic shot. Handheld Night Reduce blur when shooting low light/

illuminated scenes. Quickly take 4 photos below 8M

(including 8M) and then overlap as a clear night image. Smile shutter cannot be used under this mode. Clear night pictures also can be taken easily without the tripod. 39 Beautifier Make skin rosy and beautiful. Please follow the following steps to operate:

) and then 1. Select the face beautifier (

press the button to confirm. 2. Press again the options. button to enter 3. Press the [

button to select option (

). 4. Roll the [

] to select an option and then press the button to confirm. Effect 1: Skin Soften Effect 2: Skin Soften + Eye Brightening Effect 3: Skin Soften + Eye Brightening + Eye Enlargement 40 Multi Exposure Take several shots and overlap as a single image. Snow For subjects in the snow. Reduce underexposure. Party For subjects at night without using a tripod. Capture sharp shots without blur. Sport For fast-moving subjects. Capture sharp action shots without blur. Suggest using tripod. The image size is fixed 5M in the course of shooting. Cat/Dog The camera automatically takes a picture when a dog's face is detected. When a cat /dog face is detected, a white focus frame appears. The camera will take a picture and save it regardless of whether the focus is successful (if successful, there appears a green focus frame; if not, there is an orange frame). 10 faces of dogs and cats at most can be detected. 41 Night Portrait For portraits against night time scenery. Suggest using tripod. To take a clear picture, please keep the object still for about 1 second after shooting. Portrait For shooting portraits. Under this mode, take a bokeh effect background to highlight portrait and soften the skin to obtain a better shooting effect. Children For kids and pets. Flash is disabled for eye protection. Landscape For landscapes. Vivid reproduction of greens and blues. This mode is not suitable to night. Sunset For sunsets. Capture subjects in strong sunlight. Fireworks For fireworks at night. Slow shutter speed adjusted for brilliant images. 42 Functions that can be adjusted in each scene are as below:

Scene Handheld Night Face Beautifier Multi Exposure Cat/Dog Snow Party Sport Night Portrait Portrait Children Landscape Sunset Fireworks Adjustable Functions Self-timer */Time-lapse/Expo Metering Self-timer/Tile-lapse/Expo Metering/Beautifier/Flash Time-lapse/Expo Metering Auto Shooting/Continuous Shot/Time-lapse/Expo Metering Self-timer/Continuous Shot/Time-lapse/Expo Metering/Flash Self-timer/Continuous Shot/Time-lapse/HDR/Expo Metering/Flash Continuous Shot/Time-lapse/Expo Metering Self-timer/Time-lapse/HDR/Expo Metering Self-timer/Continuous Shot/Time-lapse/HDR/Expo Metering/Flash Continuous Shot/Time-lapse/Expo Metering Self-timer */Time-lapse/Expo Metering Self-timer */Time-lapse/HDR/Expo Metering Self-timer */Continuous Shot/Time-lapse/Expo Metering

* Means smile shutter is not included in the self-timer. For continuous shot, there are onlyContinuous ShotandTime-Lapsefor selection. 43 Wi-Fi Make image transmission and remote control by connecting smart device with Wi-Fi. Matters needing attention before use:

The system version of your smart device should be iOS 4 and above or Android 2.3 and above. If not, please upgrade the system of your device first. Please don't use the camera in places with strong magnetic field, static or wave interference (e.g. near a microwave oven), as which may cause failure to receive signals. Please keep the distance between camera and smart device within 10m without any signal shielding or interference. Please don't use the wireless connection on a plane. Only one-to-one connection is allowed for camera and smart device. 44 1. Rotate the mode dial to and then enter the Wi-Fi selection interface. 2. Press the [

button to select and set options.

Settings : Customize the Wi-Fi settings for the camera system. Station : Configuring the primary Wi-Fi base station. AP Mode: Configuring device as AP mode to Wi-Fi connect. After connection with smart device, the LCD closes and stays dark. Rotate the mode dial to disconnect. If the Wi-Fi is disconnected, the LCD restores its display. AP Mode Settings of Camera:

This camera may connect with your smart device through Wi-Fi. 1. Select and press the enter the setting interface. button to 2. Press the [

] button to select options to be adjusted, and press the button to enter the option setting interface. Refresh: Camera automatically updates a group of passwords. Back: Back to previous page. 45 4. When it is detected that the smart device's APP is enabled, the connection can be performed. After successful connection, the name of smart device appears and relative operation can be carried out on it. Settings of Smart Device:

1. Enable the Wi-Fi of smart device and then search surrounding wireless devices. 2. Select the name of camera SSID to be connected and then input the eight-digit number password after WPA2-PSK on the camera. 3. Download a dedicated installation package from the application store corresponding to the device (APP name:

PIXPRO Remote Viewer) and then install it. 4. Click the icon of APP and then open it. 46 Display of Wi-Fi Connection Status The Wi-Fi has successfully connected but APP isn't enabled. If the Wi-Fi of smart device is not enabled:

For interrupting the connection:

Back: Back to previous page. No: Keep Wi-Fi connected and back to previous page. Yes: Disconnect and back to Wi-Fi mode for interface selection. 47 Press the [

to select:

] button Scan: Search again surrounding

wireless devices. Select the name of device to be connected. Back: Back to previous page. 4. Press the [

] button or roll the jog dial to select and then press the

button to confirm your selection. Enter the password of WPA2- PSK after saving. Station Mode Make image transmission and remote control by connecting the camera with Wi-Fi access point of smart device. 1. Enable the Wi-Fi access point of smart device. 2. Select the on camera and then press button to confirm connection with the smart device. 3. Press the [

] button to select the name of smart device to be connected and then press the button to confirm. Then, the camera enters the password input interface. 48 5. Input the set WPA2- PSK password of smart device and save it, and then connect. If connected, the LCD screen will display as shown below:

Meanings of Interface Icons:

Icon Description Delete the last letter

Switch the display of letters in capital and lowercase Move the Cursor Switch the symbol input Input Space If failure of connection or the device doesn't enable its Wi-Fi access point, please check Wi-Fi device and try again. 6. After connection, you may use the dedicated APP installed on smart device to carry out relative operation. 49 Setting The name of this camera can be changed through keystroking. 1. Select the and then press the button to enter the setting interface. 2. Press the [

] button to select options to be adjusted and then press the button to enter the menu. 3. Press the button to confirm settings and then skip the menu. 50 DSC Device The default name of DSC device isKodak S-1. Change the name of DSC device through keystroking. For the method of input, please refer to the introduction on password input on Page 49. Check the MAC address Check the wireless MAC address of this camera. CS Setting The user can store the frequently used shooting modes and parameters and switch to this mode for quick adjustment. Settings under state after reset):

1. Rotate the mode dial to mode (unset state or

, and then the camera enters the setting interface as shown below:

For setting under other modes (except the 1. Select any mode or scene mode to be mode):

stored. 2. Set your desired parameters in the current mode. 2. As shown in the picture, press the

a scene and then press the enter the shooting interface.

] button to select button to 3. As shown in the picture, press the button to select whether the setting of mode goes on or not. 3. Press the

2 . button and then the

] button to select

4. Select Custom Settingsand then button to enter the menu. press the 51 mode is used for the When the first time, there is no preset parameter stored in the mode. If you want to remove the parameter setting ofCustom Settings, please see the reset function on page 89 to operate. 5. SelectYesto save orNoto cancel. 6. Turn the mode dial to switch to the custom settings (

). 52 52 7 Introduction on Functions of Buttons Introduction of Functions of Timer/ Self-timer Button Mode:

For setting the single, self-timer, continuous shot, time-lapse, HDR or AE bracketing

(Functions that can be enabled under each mode may be different). Please follow the following steps to set:

1. Press the [

] button to enter the Single Capture a single shot only. Self-timer 2 sec A single picture is shot 2 seconds after the Shutter Button is pressed. setting interface. 2. Press the [

button to select options to be adjusted. Self-timer 10 sec A single picture is shot 10 seconds after the Shutter Button is pressed. Self-timer Smile Press the Shutter Button and a picture will be taken immediately after a smile is detected. Continuous Shot For taking more than one picture continuously. Cont. Shot-Fast (4M) For continuous shot with 4M pixels. 53 53 HDR PRO (-3EV, 0EV, +3EV):

Using this function can take satisfactory pictures under the scene with a big light contrast

(darker or brighter). AE Bracketing (0.3EV, 0.7EV, 1.0EV, 1.3EV, 1.7EV, 2.0EV):

The camera will automatically and continuously take three pictures separately with a brightness of original, darker and brighter as long as you press the shutter button to once. Press the select the range of exposure. 3. Press the button to complete setting and then enter shooting interface. Time-Lapse button to Take pictures with the preset interval time (30sec, 1min, 5min or 10min). Press the select the interval time. Time-lapse Movie For shooting for a long time with certain time intervals (1sec, 5sec, 10sec, 20sec, 30sec, 1min, 5min, 10min and 1h), so as to concentrate the course that needs a long time to complete into a short video for presentation. Press the time. HDR (-1EV, 0EV, +1EV) This setting is to control the high dynamic image range in taking still pictures, with vivid effect in highlight and that the effect in dark parts can identify the outline and depth of the object. button to select the lapse 54 Time-lapse Movie:

1 Only FHD and HD pixels are selectable. The default pixel is FHD 30fps in enabling the time-lapse movie. 2 Fully press the shutter button to start shooting; press this button again to stop shooting and then the file will be merged and saved automatically. 3 999 pictures at most can be taken. 4 Sound cannot be recorded. Prohibit the flash working when shooting with HDR. Suggest using tripod.

Introduction of Functions of Lock Button Mode:

Lock the current AE and AF ranges. This function cannot be enabled until the AE/

AF Lock option is selected first with the button. See P74 for detailed operation. Before use, please refer to contents on P74 to use the button to set what you want. Then, follow the following steps to operate:

Press the [

] button to lock the AE value and the AF range. (Press the button again to release the lock)

00:00:00 0000 16M EV

+0.0+0.0 F00.0 0/000 ISO00000 55

 

 

Introduction of Functions of Message Button Mode:

Display of Messages on Control Interface. Press the [

4 screens. Function Message Display

] button to switch among 00:00:00 0000 16M Function Message Display EV+0.0+0.0 F00.0 0/000 ISO00000 Message Display 00:00:00 0000 16M EV

+0.0+0.0 F00.0 0/000 ISO00000 EV+0.0+0.0 F00.0 0/000 ISO00000 Display with Grid and Histogram 00:00:00 0000 16M EV+0.0+0.0 F00.0 0/000 ISO00000 56 Mode:

Press the [

3 screens. Function Message Display

] button to switch among 0000/00/00 000-0000 16M No Message Display Thumbnail3x3 Detailed Message Display 0000/00/00 000-0000 16M

+0.0+0.0 EV F00.0 000mm 0/000 ISO00000 57 Introduction on Functions of Exposure Button For adjusting the EV value, ISO value, shutter speed and aperture size. Please follow the steps below to set:

1. Press the [

] button to enter the

setting interface. EV Value Setting For adjusting the brightness of pictures to be adjusted. Applicable to conditions with a big contrast between the object and the background. (Adjustable under mode)

4 options inExposure Button Functions:

ISO Value EV Value Setting Shutter Speed Setting Aperture Adjustment 2. Press the [

to select options to be adjusted.

] button EV

+0.0+0.0 ISO00000 3. Press the [

adjust parameters.

] button to The EV value may be adjusted between EV-3.0 and EV+3.0. 58 ISO Value ISO may allow you to set the sensitivity of the camera sensor. Please use a higher ISO value in darker places while a lower value in brighter conditions.

(Adjustable under mode) Shutter Speed Setting For shutter speed, the camera may automatically set the aperture value corresponding to the manually set shutter speed so as to obtain a most suitable exposure value. The movement of object may be shown by adjusting the shutter speed. High shutter value can make you clearly capture the movement of fast moving object while low shutter value can allow you to take a picture for fact moving object with a strong sense of bouncing. (Adjustable under mode) EV-0.0 F00.0 0/0000 ISO00000 Options of ISO value: Auto, 200, 400, 800, 1600, 3200, 6400 and 12800. EV+0.0+0.0 0/000 ISO00000 With BULB (shutter B) selected, press the shutter button to start exposing and then the exposure time (30min at most) will be displayed on the screen. Press again the shutter button to stop exposing and complete shooting. (Suggest using tripod.) 59 Introduction on Functions of Quick Record Button The camera will directly enter the record mode and then start recording by pressing the Quick Record mode. button under the photo 00:00:00 00/15 15 pictures at most can be taken by pressing the shutter when recording. The sizes of images taken are as below when playing them back:

FHD -> 2M 2M HD -> 1M DVD -> VGA After recording, press again the Quick Record then back to the recording screen. button to save the video and Aperture Adjustment You can adjust the aperture size value. Selecting a large aperture opening will emphasize the point of focus and show a blurry background. A small aperture opening will keep both the background and main object in clear focus. (Adjustable under the mode) EV+0.0+0.0 F00.0 ISO00000 60 Introduction on Functions of OK Button Mode:

1. Press the button to enter the shooting menu under the photo mode. 9 options in OK Button Functions:

Timer/Self-timer Mode (refer to P53) Metering Mode AF Area WB Mode Focus Mode Picture Effect Flash Mode OIS WDR 2. Press the [

the shooting menu to be set.

] button to select 3. Roll the [

] to select options of the shooting menu to be set and then press the button to confirm. Please refer to the following sections to know details of each setting. Functions that can be enabled are different under each mode. 61 Metering Mode For setting the AE area. AF Area In different photo shooting modes, you can select different focus methods. Spot For metering the block displayed area in central screen. Center For metering the object in central screen. Multi For performing brightness distribution for the whole screen and then automatically measuring a most suitable metering. (Used to shoot images with even brightness without sharp contrast.) AiAE For automatically selecting the central and surrounding metering to weight a proper metering value. 62 Center-AF The focus frame appears on the center of the LCD screen to focus on the subject. Multi-AF The camera automatically focuses the subject in a wide area to find the focus point. Spot Focus Judge single-point focus position voluntarily within the scope of focus Object Tracking Smart tracking of the object in motion under the focusing shooting. After enabling spot focus, roll the [

to adjust the position of focus point in the screen.

The function of object tracking cannot be enabled until successful focus. For tracking the focus, you need to keep the shutter semi-pressed. WB Mode The WB function may allow user to adjust color temperatures under different light sources, so as to confirm that the color can be presented properly. AWB For auto shooting based on lighting conditions. Daylight For outdoor shooting in sunny day. Cloudy For outdoor shooting in cloudy day. Shadow For shooting under outdoor shadow in sunny day. 63 Fluorescent For indoor shooting in the light of fluorescent. Fluorescent H For indoor shooting in the light of fluorescent H. Incandescent For indoor shooting in the light of incandescent. Manual WB For changing the WB based on current light source. Press the button to set. Color Temp. (1900K~10000K) to enter and roll the Press the jog dial [

] to adjust the color temperature value; then, press again the button to confirm your selection. WB Bracketing Press once the shutter button to take three photos with different WB settings. (Adjustable under the mode) button to enter options and WB Bracketing:

Press the then press the directional buttons to adjust the shift and roll the jog dial to adjust the BTK value (0, 1 and 2). Rotate clockwise to adjust X axis (B-A). BTK value Rotate counterclockwise to adjust Y axis

(G-M). BTK value Press the button to confirm your settings. WB Bracketing : BG 1+

2G Shift B 9 BKT 1 Confirm WB bracketing is for setting the bracketing range. Shift to both sides for 3 spaces at most. If at the page border, shift only to the other side and 2 photos can be taken. If no shift, only one photo can be taken. 64 Focus Mode For auto and manual focus settings. Single AF Applicable to shoot relatively still landscape; semi-press the shutter first and release it after the focus is complete. Cont. AF Applicable to shoot moving objects (such as moving persons). Perform continuous focus when the shutter is semi-pressed. The shutter can be released even if the focus isn't fully complete. Manual Focus Manually rotate the focus ring to obtain a clear focus. Auto + Manual Focus After auto focus, you may use the focus ring to manually adjust the focus as needed while semi-pressing the shutter button. Manual focus and AF area cannot work at the same time. Subject to in the final settings. Manual focus works only under the mode. 65

 

 

The MF assist needs to be enabled with the button. (See P79 for details) After enabling manual focus (non AF+MF):

00:00:00 0000 16M EV

+0.0+0.0 F00.0 0/000 ISO00000

] again, the AF If the lens focus ring is operated or the jog dial is rolled [

enlargement frame will appear on the LCD screen. After a best position you want is obtained through manual adjustment, press the button to close the AF enlargement frame and make the camera back to normal shooting screen. Semi-pressing the shutter button will have no effect; you need to fully press the shutter button to take a normal photo. 66 The focus frame displayed after enabling the auto + manual focus depends on the settings of AF area (center-AF/multi-AF). F00.0 0/000 button to close the AF Semi-press the shutter button for auto focus and then rotate the lens focus ring or the

], to focus on areas enlarged on the screen. Press the enlargement frame and make the camera back to normal framing screen and then press the shutter to take a normal photo. After semi-pressing the shutter, shooting will be carried out mainly based on manual focus settings. If the shutter is semi-pressed again for AF after completion of manual focus, shooting will be carried out mainly based on the final AF settings. 67 Picture Effect Picture effect allows user to select different color effects. Normal Vivid Black and White Dreamy Vignetting Ektachrome Kodachrome 68 Kodacolor Salon Punk Negative Reflection Sketch Fish Eye 4 Grids - Stylish (2M) Four combined effects: Fine +

Warm Yellow + New Japanese +

Cold Green 4 Grids - Partial Color (2M) Four partial colors of blue, yellow, green and red to form combined effects. Flash Mode The flash is mainly for supplementing light for the scene. The flash is usually used in shooting against the light to highlight the object shot through lightening the object while darkening the background; it is also suitable for metering and shooting in darker scenes through exposure. (For installation steps of the flash, please refer to P23.) Force Off Flash is turned off. Force Flash For fill flash at the moment of taking a picture. Flash Auto Camera flash goes off automatically based on existing light conditions. Red-Eye Reduction The camera emits a brief pre-flash before the picture is taken to reduce red-eye effects. Slow Sync. Flash first to make the object photic and then expose for a long time to make the background brighter. Slow Sync. + Red-Eye Reduction The camera uses both slow sync. And red-eye reduction in flashing. 69 OIS This mode can help reduce photo blur caused by unintentional hand shake. Rear curtain sync Press the shutter to make it on normally, and then the flash gives a flash to expose at the moment that the shutter closes.

(Mainly used to shoot fast-moving objects.) If the flash is disconnected or closed, its default mode is DISABLE and isn't optional. OIS: Off OIS: On Use Stabilization Mode in dark environments or when using a slower shutter speed. The effect of OIS may be unsatisfactory when shooting with fierce shake of camera (e.g. in the running vehicle). 70 WDR When the camera detects that there is a big contrast in brightness between scenes and such scenes are against the light, it will use DSP to automatically adjust the brightness and saturation to make pictures taken restore the scene more closely. (Adjustable under the mode) WDR is mutually exclusive with RAW/

RAW+JPG. When WDR works, the quality will automatically change from RAW or RAW+JPG to default JPG. WDR Off WDR On 71 Introduction on Functions of Menu Button Mode:

button to enter the menu. 3. Press the [

] button to select the setting options and the Press the button to enter the menu. 4. Press the [

to select and the Press the confirm.

] button button to 2 Please refer to the sections below to know details of each option.

Menu:

1. Press the 2. Press the [

button to select. 8 options in Fn Settings Shoot Settings 1 Shoot Settings 2 Playback Menu

(See P100 for details) Normal Settings File & Firmware Settings Connection Settings

(See P112 for details) Wi-Fi

(See P44 for details) Functions that can be enabled are different under each mode. 72 Fn Settings 3 options in Fn Settings Fn1 Fn2 AE/AF Lock Fn1/Fn2 Settings This function can be used to customize the quick access with Fn1 or Fn2 button. After saving the functions of Fn1 or Fn2 button, the camera goes back to the shooting status. Pressing Fn1 or Fn2 button can quickly enable relative functions. 73 AE/AF Lock For simultaneously locking current AE value and AF range.

[AE-L]: AE Lock For locking the current AE value. (Only the AE lock works in shooting with manual focus.)

[AF-L]: AF Lock For locking the current AF value. (Only the AF lock works in shooting under manual exposure mode.)

[AE/AF-L]: AE/AF Lock For simultaneously locking the current AE value and the AF range. Button Fn1/Fn2 Functions (Referred Pages) Image Size (P81) Movie Size (P82) Quality (P83) Focus Mode (P65) AF Area (P62) Metering Mode (P62) Flash mode (P69) Picture Effect (P68) Beautifier (P40) WB Mode (P63) WDR (P71) OIS (P70) Fn1 is for picture effect while Fn2 for AF Area by default. 74 Shoot Settings 1 6 options in Shoot Settings 1:

Face Detection AF Assist Beam Date Imprint Quick Review Digital Zoom MF Assist Face Detection For detecting and focusing on faces to make all faces as much as clear under the photo mode. 1. Hold the camera steadily and then focus on the object to detect its face. A focus frame will appear at the face on the screen when a face is detected. 75 AF Assist Beam In a darker environment, AF Assist Beam can be turned on for better focus. 2. Aim at the object and then semi-press the shutter button to focus. Off On F2.9 1/50 3. Press the shutter button to take a picture. The closed eyes detection is usually on. If the camera detects in the course of quick review there is a face with eyes closed, a prompt of closed eyes will appear

. 76 Date Imprint Include a Date/Time imprint on the photo image. Quick Review This option can provide you immediate quick review on pictures after taking. Each picture will be displayed on the LCD screen at the time of being selected. Off Date Date/Time Off 2 sec 5 sec Playback If you select playback, the camera will directly enter PLAYBACK mode after each time of picture taking. 77 Remarks:

*1 A common quick review on pictures should be done before playback. The time of review depends on saving time.

*2 The closed eyes detection needs to enable the face detection first.

*3 The last picture can be reviewed as per settings of quick review. The total time of quickly reviewing the first two pictures is about 1 second. Quick Review each shooting mode supports a corresponding album for quick review of pictures. O-the number of seconds can be set;

X-the number of seconds cannot be set. Quick Review for 2 secons or 5 seconds Fixed 2 sec Fixed 2 sec O Cat/Dog Self-timer Smile Panorama Continuous Shot Fixed 2 sec Cont. Shot-Fast Fixed 2 sec Con. Time-lapse Shot Fixed 2 sec X O O O O *3 Fixed 2 sec X O Video HDR WDR Color WB Bracketing EV Bracketing Time-lapse Movie Others 78 Quick Review Playback *1 Closed Eyes Detection *2 X X O X X X X O O O O X X O X O X X X X X O O O X X X O Digital Zoom This setting is for adjusting digital zoom. If this function is disabled, only optical zoom can be used. MF Assist For manually focusing on the object by operating the lens focus ring through manual.

(Adjustable under the mode) Off 2x 4x Off On 79 Shoot Settings 2 5 options in Shoot Settings 2:

2 Custom Settings Image Size Movie Size Quality Flash Exp. Comp. Custom Settings Custom Settings stores the current photo shooting mode and its parameters. The stored mode and parameters are directly invoked in Custom Settings mode. No Yes 80 Image Size The size setting refers to the image resolution in pixels. A higher image resolution allows you to print that image in larger sizes without degrading the image quality. The bigger the number of recorded pixels is, the better the image quality becomes. As the number of recorded pixels lessen, you will be able to record more images on a memory card. 16M: High quality printing 14M-3:2: Full size printing 12M-16:9: display 10M: Poster printing 4M: A3 printing 3M: A4 printing 2M-16:9: 4"x 6" printing VGA: E-Mail 81 Movie Size Set the image resolution used during video recording. Movie Size:

1920x1080: record with Full HD. The aspect ratio is 16:9. 1280x720: record with HD. The aspect ratio is 16:9. 640x480: record with standard definition. The aspect ratio is 4:3. Time recorded in videoing with HD:

No. Image Pixel Frame (fps) Recommendation 1 2 3 4 5 1920x1080 1280x720 1280x720 640x480 640x480 30 60 30 30 120 Class 6 Class 6 Class 4 Class 4 Class 6 Recording time (about )

(4GB) 30min 32min 59min 120min 54min

(8GB) 60min 65min 117min 250min 107min 82 Recording time limit above 1280x720 30 fps format is under 29 minutes. When recording in higher pixel resolutions for extended periods of time, this can cause the camera to generate heat. This is not a camera malfunction. If 640x480 30fps is selected, you may be required to save the video file in another disk when it reaches 4GB. When the video format is set as 640x480 (120fps), shooting time is 30 seconds, playback time is 2 minutes. Sound recording is disabled when 640x480 120fps is chosen. Quality The Quality Setting can be used to adjust the image compression ratio. RAW+JPEG Best Creates two images: one in RAW and the other in JPEG best. (Average file size under 16M image size:

29.1MB+6.0MB) RAW More data can be left on image. Serve the purpose of editing on computer. (Average file size under 16M image size: 29.0MB) JPEG Best (average file size under 16M image size: 2.6MB) JPEG Fine (average file size under 16M image size: 5.9MB) 83 The quality is on:

If RAW or RAW+JPEG is first on, the settings of Picture Effect, Continuous Shot, Cont. Shot-Fast, HDR, HDRPRO and AE Bracketing all cannot be adjusted. Flash Exp. Comp. The flash exposure compensation is for adjusting flash volume so as to improve the brightness of background of the object.

(Range from -3.0EV to +3.0EV, with 1/3EV as the increment.) 00:00:00 0000 16M Flash Exp. Comp. EV

+0.0+0.0 F00.0 0/000 ISO00000 Select OK Set Exit Press the button The flash exposure compensation cannot be adjusted if the flash is disconnected or closed. 84 Normal Settings 6 options in [ Normal Settings ] :

Sound Settings Power Saver LCD Brightness Language World Time Date & Time Sound Settings With this setting you may adjust the volume of sound in pressing buttons. Press the [

to adjust the volume and then press the button to confirm your setting.

] button

85 LCD Brightness Use this setting to adjust the brightness of your LCD screen.

] button Press the [

to adjust the brightness of screen and then button to confirm your setting. press the

Language Refer to the Reset your language section on page 30. Power Saver Power Saver This setting allows you to save power and get the maximum possible running time for your camera's batteries. Follow the steps below to turn the LCD screen and camera off automatically after a consecutive period of inactivity. Auto Normal Best Power Saver Auto Normal Best 86 LCD power off time 3 min 1 min 30 s Turn off time 5 min 3 min 1 min World Time When traveling abroad, you may use this function to display local time on the screen. 1. Press the [

select the places of departure (

destination (

] button to

) and 2. Press the [

button to select a city with same time shown in the field and then press the button to confirm your setting.

File & Firmware Settings 6 options in [File & Firmware Settings] :

Format Copy to Card File Numbering Reset Settings FW Version Cleaning Mode Date & Time Refer to the Reset Date/Time section on page 31. 87 Format Please note: formatting enables you to delete all contents in the memory card and built-in memory, including protected photo and movie files. 1. Press the

] button to select [ Yes ] or [ No ] and then press the

button to confirm your setting. Note that when you perform the Format Memory function, it only formats the active memory. If a memory card is inserted, the memory card is active and will be formatted. If there is no memory card, the internal memory is active and the internal memory will be formatted. Formatting the memory card will not automatically format the internal memory. Copy to Card Use this setting to copy the files stored in the internal memory to a memory card. 2. If you selectYesthe camera formats its memory. 88 If there is no card available in the camera, this function will not be displayed. File Numbering After you complete taking pictures or videos, the camera will automatically save them as files and number them with serial numbers. You may use this function to decide whether a picture is numbered by following the previous picture number or renumbered and then saved in another new folder in the memory card. Reset Settings Use this setting to restore the camera to its original default settings. 89 Version You may use this option to check the camera current FW version. Cleaning Mode For clearing dust and debris on the sensor through high speed vibration. Automatic Press the Power button to make the camera on after selecting Onand then the camera starts automatically cleaning the sensor. Enter Setting of camera and select FW Version. There is a new version of FW in the memory card for updating:

90

 

 

Instantly The camera will perform instant and automatic cleaning after you select Yes. It will shut itself down after completion of cleaning. For the best effect, please vertically and steadily place the camera on the desk or other flat surfaces for sensing of cleaning. Even if no lens is installed. The clean sensor can work normally. Dust that could not be removed by the automatic sensor cleaning can be removed manually with a blower, etc. Before cleaning the sensor, detach the lens from the camera. 1 As the image sensor surface is extremely precise, please clean the sensor with care. 2 Please don't use compressed air or gas to clean the sensor. As the high pressure air can damage or be freezed on the sensor. 3 If there is some residue that cannot be removed with blowing, suggest sending the sensor to a maintenance center for cleaning. 91 8 Viewing Photos and Videos In quicking reviewing pictures and videos taken vertically or horizontally, they all keep obverse when being played back vertically or horizontally. For viewing taken photos and videos on the LCD screen:

1. After pressing the button, the last photo or video clip taken will be displayed on the LCD

] button to roll pictures or videos saved in memory card screen. 2. Press the [

or built-in memory. 3. To play a selected video clip, press the button to enter the Movie Playback Mode. An operation guide appears on the screen when playing back a video. Press concerned buttons to directly enable corresponding functions. Under Playback Paused 00:00:00 00:00:00 00:00:00 00:00:00 Pause Rewind Fast Forward Cancel Play Clockwise Volume Up Counterclockwise Volume Down Volume Mute Play Frame Backward Frame Forward Capture Videos Cancel Play 92 92 Description on Screen Icons under Playback Mode 6 7 1 3 2 4 5 16 15 14 13 12 File Name 1 Eye-Fi ON (with signal) 2 Quality 3 Capture Date 4 5 Shooting Pixel Ratio 6 7 Battery Status 8 File Shooting Pixel Image Area 2013/12/26 2013/12/26 000-0000 16M 0000 x2

3x3 8 9 10 11 9 Current Display Area 10 Image Zoom Ratio 11 Index Prompt 12 Cont. Group and Number Tab 13 Touch-up 14 HDR 15 DPOF File Icon 16 File Protection Icon 93 93 4 options in [Index Mode] :

Single Index Date Folder Cont. Group Play Slide Show When the icon this is a video file. (Including the time-lapse movie files) appears, it means When the icon this is a continuous group file. appears, it means Thumbnail View For displaying thumbnails of pictures and videos on the screen under playback mode. 1. Press the [

] button to switch displaying 3x3. 2. When the 3x3 thumbnails are displayed, you may press the arrow button fast to select one picture or video to view. Select index mode Select index mode 3. Press the original size. 4. Press the mode. button to restore it to the button to select index 94 Photos and Video Deletion Under the single playback mode, you may press the [

To delete photos or videos:

1. Press the 2. Press the [

3. A prompt of deletion is displayed on the screen after press the [

button to enter playback screen.

] button to select pictures or videos to be deleted.

] button.

] button to delete pictures and videos. 4. Press the [

] button to select [ Delete One ] or [ Exit ] and then press the button to confirm. Erased photos/video clips cannot be recovered. Please refer to page 101 for instructions on deleting more than one image at a time. 95 Introduction on Functions of Playback OK Menu Mode:

1. Press the button to enter PLAYBACK button to enter the menu. screen and select a picture and then press the 5 options in [Playback OK Menu]:

Rotate Color HDR Touch-up Resize 2. Press the [

select the shooting menu to be set and then press the button to confirm.

] button to 3. Press the [

button to select options of the shooting menu to be set and then press the button to confirm. Please refer to the sections below to know details of each setting. 96 Rotate You can use this setting to change the orientation of the picture. Exit Turn Left Turn Right Videos, Time-lapse Movie and panoramic pictures cannot be rotated. The rotated picture file will replace the original photo. Color This setting allows you to change the picture color effect. The file is saved as a new photo and stored in memory together with the original photo. Exit Vivid Black and White Dreamy Vignetting Salon Punk (4M) Negative (8M) Reflection Fish Eye 4 Grids - Stylish (2M) Four combined effects: Fine +

Warm Yellow + New Japanese +

Cold Green 4 Grids - Partial Color (2M) Four partial colors of blue, yellow, green and red to form combined effects. 97 HDR With the HDR function, pictures that are overexposed may be corrected to optimize the highlights and lowlights captured to more accurately represent the actual scene. Select [

] with HDR:

0000/00/00 000-0000 16M

3x3 Pictures with HDR touch-up will be saved as new files in the memory together with originals. Exit HDR HDR is not applicable to panoramic pictures. 98 Touch-up The beauty feature mentioned here is the individual beautification for three effects, beauty mode allows you to select from single, two, or all three effects combined. Select [

] with touch-up:

0000/00/00 000-0000 16M Exit Red-Eye Reduction Skin Soften Eye Brightening Eye Enlargement

3x3 99 Resize This setting allows you to resize a picture to a particular resolution and saves it as a new picture. Introduction on Playback Menu 6 options in [ Playback Menu ] :

Auto Rotate Delete Protect DPOF Trim Play Slide Show Exit Resize to 1024x768 Resize to 640x480 Only for adjusting pictures with high resolution to those with low resolution. 100 Auto Rotate Pictures taken with enabled auto rotate will automatically rotate and always keep obverse in playing them back. Delete You may delete pictures or video files. Off On One Delete one photo or video. Date Folder Delete all photos or videos in the Date Folder. Cont. Group Delete all photos in the Cont. Photo Folder. All Delete all photos or videos. 101 The indicator means a file is protected. File protection must be removed first before a file can be deleted. When one photo in the Cont. Photo and Date Folders is protected, it will be kept but any other photos will be deleted. Protect You may lock pictures and video files to avoid deletion by mistake. One Lock the selected photo or video if they are unprotected; unlock the selected photo or video if they are protected. Date Folder Protect all photos or videos in the Date Folder. Cont. Group Protect all photos in the Cont. Photo Folder. 102 All Lock all photos or videos. Reset Cancel all locked photos or videos. DPOF The DPOF feature allows you to compile and select a group of pictures that you would like to print and will save your selection on the memory card so that you can use the memory card to print without having to individually specify the photos you want to print. Trim The Trim Setting allows you to crop photos and save them as new pictures. 1. Select [ Yes ] to confirm trimming; press

] to select the aspect ratio and the [

press the [

the part you want to trim

] button to adjust One All Reset The printer that supports DPOF is needed for printing. 2. Press the button and theSave change?prompt appears. Select to change and save the picture. Select to cancel changes and return to the trim prompt screen. 103 Play Slide Show This setting allows you to view all the stored images as a slideshow. The image cannot be clipped/trimmed again once it has been clipped to 640X480. Videos, RAW files and those under protection cannot be trimmed. The picture after trimming cannot be trimmed again. All Files: to display and play back all images in memory card. Still Captures: to display and play back images of photo files in memory card. Videos: to only play back images of videos in memory card. Cont. Group: to only play back images arranged by cont. group in memory card. 104 Press the [

to select options to be set and then press the

] button

button to enter the menu. Exit Type 1: Slow-in and slow-out Type 2: Separate interlacing on the left and right Type 3: Block spread in If no continuously shot video files are saved in the memory, the camera will give a warning message when you select the mode of continuous group for quick review. Then, the camera will return to the playback mode and cancel changing settings of playback mode of continuous shot. 105 Setting of defaults of playback options under each mode:

Mode Playback Video Panorama Static Image Adjustable?

O O Default All Images All Images Video O All Images Adjustable?

O O O Default Effect 1 Effect 1 Effect 1 Adjustable?

Default Adjustable?

Default Adjustable?

O One O One O O One O One X O One X One X Default Back Back Back Menu Slide Show Play Type Slide Show Play Effect Protect DPOF Trim Mode Playback Video Panorama Static Image Video Adjustable?

Default Adjustable?

Default Adjustable?

Default Adjustable?

Default Adjustable?

Default Adjustable?

Default Adjustable?

O Off O Off O Off O Off O Off O On O X Off X Off X Off X Off X Off O On O X Off X Off X Off X Off X Off O On O Default One One One Menu Rotate Resize Color Touch-

up HDR Auto Rotate Delete 106 Continuous Capture Group Playback Playback of Images in Fast (4M) Continuous Group:

1. Press the 2. Press the [

3. Press the button to enter playback screen. button to start playback.

] button to select pictures in continuous group. 0000/00/00 000-0000 16M 0000/00/00 000-0000 16M 0000

3x3 Cont. Group Pause Cancel Play (back to full size playback for continuous group) Playing 00 00 00 00 Playing Pause Play Previous photo (loop available only in continuous group) Next photo (loop available only in continuous group) Cancel Play (back to full size playback for continuous group) Pause 107 Time-lapse Movie Playback For playing back time-lapse movie in continuous group:

1. Press the 2. Press the [

3. Press the button to enter playback mode. button to start playing back.

] button to select time-lapse pictures. 0000/00/00 000-0000 16M 00:00:00

3x3 Time-lapse Movie Pause Rewind Fast Forward Cancel Play Playing 108 00:00:00 00:00:00 00:00:00 00:00:00 Playing Pause Play Frame Backward Frame Forward Cancel Play Pause Animation panorama play Panoramic animation playing is to play full size image in accordance with the shooting direction. After playing, it will automatically return to the static screen of panoramic image. 1. Press the 2. Press the [

3. Press the key to play in selected shooting direction.

] button to select panorama videos. button to enter playback screen.

0000/00/00 000-0000 2M

3x3 Video Panorama Pause Cancel Play Playing Pause In the process of panoramic animation playback, press the return to the playback screen. key to stop playing and Gravity induction will not be detected during panorama play or pause. 109 4. Press the [

to select play effect and then press the button to confirm.

] button Slideshow This setting allows you to view all the stored images as a slideshow. 1. Press the button to enter playback screen. 2. Press the [

] button to switch displaying 3x3 and then press the button to select the index mode.

3. Press the [

button to select slide show playback and then press the button to confirm. Slide Show Exit Playing 110

 

 

button to enter playback screen. Using Zoom Playback (for still pictures only) In playing back pictures, you may press the 1. Press the 2. Press the [

3. Press the 4. Roll the [

5. The bottom right corner of the screen will display button to enter zoom-in screen.

] clockwise to zoom in and counterclockwise to zoom out.

the number of times and area of the photo zooming operation. button to zoom in them for 2 to 8 times.

] button to select a picture to be zoomed in for view. 6. Press the [

part to be zoomed in and viewed. x2

] button to shift and select the 7. Press the button to return the image to its original scale. 111 9 Connection Settings Connection to a Computer You can use a USB cable to connect the camera and copy (transmit) photos to a computer, printer or other device. Setting the USB Mode The camera's USB port can be set to connect with either a computer or a printer. The following steps will allow you to ensure that the camera is correctly configured to connect with a PC. 1. Press the [

] button

to selectUSBand then press the button to enter the menu.

2. Press the [

to selectPCand then press the button to confirm.

] button 4 options in [ Connection Settings ] :

USB TV-System Eye-Fi HDMI CEC Control 112 112 Transferring files to your computer The computer will automatically detect the camera as a removable drive. Double-click the My Computer icon on the desktop to locate the removable drive and to copy folders and files in the drive to a directory on your PC as you would copy any typical folder or file. Follow the steps below to connect the camera to a computer. 1. Make sure both the camera and computer are turned on. 2. Connect one end of the supplied USB cable to the USB OUT port on your camera. 3. Connect the other end of the cable to an available USB port on your computer. 4. After the transmission is complete, disconnect the USB cable according to the instructions specifying how to safely remove USB devices. 113 113 Connecting to a PictBridge Compatible Printer PictBridge technology allows printing the photos saved in the memory card by the printer. To find out if a printer is PictBridge compatible, simply look for the PictBridge logo on the packaging or check the owner's manual for specifications. With the PictBridge function on your camera, you can print the captured photos directly to a PictBridge compatible printer using the supplied USB cable, without the need for a PC. Setting the USB Mode The camera's USB port can be set to connect with either a PC or a Printer, the following steps will ensure that the camera is correctly configured to connect with a Printer. 1. Press the [

] button

to selectUSBand then press the button to enter the menu.

2. Press the [

] button to button selectPrinterand press the to confirm. 114 After the camera is reset, it will switch to PC mode automatically from USB mode. See "PictBridge" section on page 116. Connecting to your Printer 1. Make sure both the camera and computer are turned on. 2. Connect one end of the supplied USB cable to the USB port on your camera. 3. Connect the other end of the cable to the USB port on the printer. If the camera is not connected to a PictBridge compatible printer, the following error message will appear on the LCD screen. The error message above will also appear if the USB mode is set incorrectly, in which case you should disconnect the USB cable, check the USB mode settings, ensure that the Printer is turned on, and then try connecting the USB cable again. 115 Using the PictBridge Menu After setting the USB mode to Printer, the PictBridge Menu will appear. Print (with Date) If you have set the date and time on your camera, the date and time will be recorded and saved with each photo you take. 1. In the PictBridge menu, selectPrint

(with Date)and the screen as shown below appears.

] button to

Press the [

select a menu item and press the to enter the item. Refer to the following sections for more detailed information on each setting. button Back 01

2. Press the [

button to select a photo to be printed. 116 3. Press the [

] button to select the number of copies for the currently displayed photo.

4. Press the button and the following screen will appear. 5. SelectYesand press the button to confirm; selectCancelto cancel printing. Print (without Date) Use this setting to print the photos without dates on them. 1. In the PictBridge menu, selectPrint

(without Date)and the screen as shown below appears. 01 Back 2. Press the [

button to select a photo to be printed.

3. Press the [

] button to select the number of copies for the currently displayed photo.

4. Press the button and the following screen will appear. 117 Print Index You can print all photos in the camera via this function. 1. In the PictBridge menu, selectPrint Indexand the screen as shown below appears. 2. SelectYesand press the button to confirm; selectCancelto cancel printing. 5. SelectYesand press the button to confirm; selectCancelto cancel printing. 118 Print DPOF Images To use DPOF printing, you must select your photos for printing using the DPOF settings beforehand. See DPOF section on page 103. 1. In the PictBridge menu, selectPrint DPOF Imagesand the screen as shown below appears. Exit SelectExitto exit the PictBridge menu. At this time, the messageRemove USB Cable!appears on the screen. Disconnect the USB cable from the camera and printer. 2. SelectYesand press the button to confirm; selectCancelto cancel printing. 119 NTSC: English, Chinese (Traditional), Japanese, French, Korean, Russian, Vietnamese, Greek, Hungarian PAL: German, Spanish, Italian, Chinese (Simplified), Portuguese, Swedish, Danish, Finnish, Indonesia, Norwegian, Dutch, Turkish, Polish, Thai, Croatian, Czech, Arabic, Hindi The video output system would change accordingly based upon the changes of the selected language. Video System You can use the AV cable (which should be purchased separately) to connect the camera and the television for realizing the video output. Connect one end of the AV cable to USB/AV port of the camera, connect the other end to AV-OUT port of the television. Adjust the format of the video output system according to your requirements, and the steps are as follows:

1. Press the [

] button to selectTV-Systemand then press the

button to enter the menu. 2. Press the [

] button to selectNTSCorPALand the Press the button to confirm.

120 Set Eye-Fi Card Connection Mode This camera supports wireless connection for Eye-Fi card. Please follow the steps below to upload files in camera to the Internet. Supported HDMI Connections HDMI (High Definition Multimedia Interface), is a fully digital audio/video transmission interface, through which uncompressed audio and video signals are transmitted. If the Eye-Fi card is not available in the camera, this feature is not displayed. HDMI

(Type D) 121 HDMI CEC Control After connecting the camera with TV-System, you may view pictures taken with the camera on the TV screen and operate the camera with your TV remote control to view and edit all images. Connecting HDMI-Ready TV 1. Use the cable with high resolution output terminal (which should be purchased separately) to connect the camera to the television which meets HDMI standard. 2. The camera will be automatically detected by the TV. 3. After connecting via HDMI, the camera enters Playback Mode. Make sure the camera and the TV are both turned on before connecting. It is required that the TV-System supports HDMI CEC. After the camera is successfully connected with TV-System, other buttons of the camera except the Power button cannot work, with the LCD staying dark. Please refer to TV manual for relative settings of TV-System. 122 Introduction on Icons 1. 2. Info Hiding/Display Zoom-in

: Zoom in Images

: Zoom out Images 3. Rotate Images

: Only Turn Left Image Index

: 5*3 Index Playback

: 10*5 Index Playback

: 3*1 Date Folder Index

: 5*3 Cont. Group Index Back Play Slide Show Button for Switching Between Previous and Next Images 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. Videos Time-lapse Movies 10. Movie Length: 00:00:00 11. Cont. Group File 12.

: First Image Mark 13. 000/000: Current Sorting/Total Number of Images in Group

: Confirm Effect 14. 15.

: No Change 123 The following operations are available during HDMI CEC playback:

1:1 Single Playback Zoom-in Playback Rotate Index Playback Cont. Group Playback Slide Show Playback Video Play Time-lapse Movie Play Panoramic File Play Image Edit Pressing the four-color button on remote control can enable relative functions displayed on the TV-System screen. Remote control TV-System Red Green Yellow Blue 124 1:1 Single Playback:

Pressing the left and right arrow buttons can switch among images. Zoom-in Playback:

Under the 1:1 single playback mode, press the red button to zoom in images;

press the red and green buttons on remote control to zoom out images. Rotate:

Under the 1:1 single playback mode, press the blue button to rotate single picture. Index Playback:

Under the 1:1 playback mode, press the green button to enter index playback;

press the central button to enter image selection and then the arrow buttons to select files you want and finally press the central button again to back to the 1:1 single playback. Under the 5*3 index playback mode, press the green button to enter index selection and then the left and right arrow buttons to select and

, and finally press the central button

, again to confirm your selection. Cont. Group Playback:

Under the 1:1 single playback mode, press the central button to start playing images in continuous group. If no images in the cameras cont. group, there will appear a prompt of no pictures if you select interface. on the index playback Slide Show Playback:

Under the 1:1 single playback mode, press the down arrow button to enter slide show playback. During the playing, you may press the left and right arrow buttons to directly switch between previous and next images and the central button to end playing. Video Play:

Under the 1:1 single playback mode, select a video and then press the central button to start playing. During the playing, you may use the arrow buttons and the central button to perform operations such as fast forward/

backward, pause, frame forward/

backward, back to play, etc. according to prompts on the screen. Time-lapse Movie Play:

Same play mode as that of images. There is no volume in playing time-lapse files. Panoramic File Play:

Under the 1:1 single playback mode, select a panoramic file and then press the central button to begin playing. 125

 

 

Edit tings corresponding to each type of files can be tabled. O Available; X Non-available HDR Color Beautifier Delete Normal

(face) Normal (no face) Panorama Time-lapse Video O O X X X O O X X X O X X X X O O O O O Image Edit:

Multiple edit can be repeated under image edit mode. Only one picture is saved finally. Under the 1:1 single playback mode, select a picture and then press the up arrow button to enter image edit and start detecting face. Press the up arrow button to do HDR editing. Press the down arrow button to delete one picture. Press the left and right arrow buttons to edit the color. 12 effects in total for selection. The following beautifier touch-up functions cannot be enabled until a face is detected. You may press relative color buttons to edit.

: Skin Soften

: Eye Enlargement

: Eye Brightening 126 HDMI CEC Connection Function Full Size Playback Zoom-in Playback Index Playback Video/Time-lapse Movie Play Cont. Group Play Panoramic File Play Zoom In Zoom Out Rotate Play Slide Show Edit Image Info Hiding/

Display Delete O (Movable to four directions during zoom-in) O O X O (turn left only) O (turn left only) O O*1 O O X X O X X X X X X X X X X X O O O*2 O*3 X X X O O X X X O O O*2 O*3 O*2 O*3

*1 After entering the image edit, relative operation of the beautifier cannot appear until a face is detected.

*2 It is available before and in playing and during pause.

*3 The function of Delete One cannot work until the camera enters image edit mode. 127 10 Smart Device APP Operating Method Position Service Function If your smart device supports GPS, APP can record GPS location on picture files. This function is non-available for video files. Android system:

1. There will appear a prompt that ["PIXPRO Remote Viewer" Would Like to Use Your GPS services !!] in your first time of enabling APP. If GPS of your smart device is off, you may select enabling or disabling it according to the prompt on the screen. 2. If GPS is on in your second time of or later enabling APP, your device will directly enter the home page of APP; if GPS is off, you may select enabling or disabling it according to the prompt on the screen. 128 128 iOS system:

1. When the APP is enabled for the first time, if the position service is enabled, it will prompt whether to notPIXPRO Remote Viewer wants to share your current location; if the position service is disabled, it will promptTurn on Location services to allow "PIXPRO Remote Viewer" to determine Your Location.; and if clicking setting, the smart device position service setting interface will appear. 2. When the APP is enabled for the second time or later, status of position service:

Position service state selected at the first-time enabling of the APP The second-time or later enabling of the APP The position service is enabled The position service is Off Enable Enable the position service A prompting message Turn on Location services to allow "PIXPRO Remote Viewer" to determine Your Locationwill appear; and if clicking setting, the smart device position service setting interface will appear. Off A prompting message thatLocation Service is disabled for "PIXPRO Remote Viewer" Please exit PIXPRO SP1, then go to Settings; General; Location Services and enable the service for "PIXPRO Remote Viewer"; and if clicking Confirm, the APP home interface will appear. Besides, the position service will be automatically disabled. 129 129 APP Home After connecting Wi-Fi, click the icon on the smart device interface and enter into APP homepage after setting the global positioning function. Remote Viewfinder Click [Remote Viewfinder] in APP homepage to enter the shoot mode, use intelligent device to control the camera's recording. Intelligent device shooting image:

16M 12345 EV-3.0 ISO400 F3.5 1/2000 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 1. Enter the index playback state on the camera

[Playback]:

[Remote Viewfinder]:

Enter playback state Camera shooting is controlled through intelligent device. Check the version of the APP.

[About]:

to In the interface of the APP, click back to the previous stage of interface. But in index Playback and Remote Viewfinder states, click the APP home directly. to back to 130 2. Enter into menu. 7. Self-timer Can be adjusted in mode. 16M 12345

Menu Reset Format EV-3.0 ISO400 F3.5 1/2000

: Off

: 2s

: 10s Click the blank space outside menu to exit. 3. Zoom control (T: zoom in, W: zoom out) 4. ISO value options: Auto, 200, 400, 800, 1600, 3200, 6400, 12800. Can be adjusted in 5. Exposure compensation

(scope: +3.0~-3.0) Can be adjusted in 6. Touch focus display mode. mode. 8. Zoom display Bar 9. Flash mode display Can be adjusted in

: Flash auto

: Fill flash

: Force Off mode. 10. Image size Can be adjusted in mode. 4:3 16MP: 46403480 10MP: 36482736 4MP: 23361752 3MP: 20481536 0.3MP: 640480 131 3: 2 14MP: 46083072 16: 9 12MP: 46082592 2MP: 19201080 11. White balance allow the users to adjust the color temperature in different light sources to make sure color will appear correctly. Can be adjusted in mode. 12. ASCN automatically adjusts a proper exposure mode to make sure a clear focus for good photos. 1 Click ASCN to enter menu setting interface. 16M 12345 Mode ASCN AE Bracketing WDR HDR EV-3.0 ISO400 F3.5 1/2000 Continuous shooting

: AWB

: Daylight

: Cloudy

: Shadow

: Fluorescent

: Fluorescent H

: Tungsten

: Custom

: Color temperature compensation

(1900K~10000K) 132 2 Select the sub-menu and save it. 3 Click the blank space outside menu to exit. 13. Battery life 14. Available shots 15. No SD Card in Camera side 16. Shutter speed (scope: 1/4000 ~ 30s) Can be adjusted in mode. 17. Aperture value (scope: F3.5 ~ F5.6, divided by the equipped lens. mode. Can be adjusted in 18. Shoot photos 19. Switch shooting mode to record mode. All files in APP shooting are saved in the camera. Slide the roller to change the values for EV, ISO, aperture and shutter. 16M 12345 EV-3.0 ISO400

Shooting mode method of operation:

1. Click icons at the top of the interface to set corresponding parameters. 2. Click 3. Click state. to shoot photos. to enter the index playback In capture mode, the touch shooting function defaults to ON, the camera focuses at touch point before shooting and take shots whether it fails or not. 133 Smart device recording image:

7 8 9 6 5 4 EV-3.0 5. Video size setup 16:9 1080p30 (19201080@30fps) 720p60 (1280720@60fps) 720p30 (1280720@30fps) 4:3 VGA (640480@30fps) 640480 (120fps) 3 2 1 1. Switch shooting mode to record mode 2. Start video recording 3. Enter the index playback state on the camera 4. EV: adjust the animation brightness. Adjustment range: +3.0~-3.0 6. Self-timer

: Off

: 10s 7. Video icon 8. Battery life 9. Record time 134 Video mode method of operation:

1. Click icons at the top of the interface to set corresponding parameters. 2. Click to start video recording, and click to stop video recording. 3. Click state. to enter the index playback Playback Clickplaybackin the APP Home to enter the playback state. There are two options in playback mode. Index playback (camera/smart device) Single playback (video/photo) 135 Index playback (Camera / smart device) 1. In the APP Home, clickplaybackto enter the index playback state, and enter the photo album of the camera in default. 2. The index playback interfaces of the smart device and the camera can be switched by shifting a red dot on the interface of the smart device. 3. The index playback interface of the smart device displays files downloaded from the camera to the smart device. 4 item slected

: Enter the shooting status

: Download the files in the camera into the smart devices

: Select multiple files to delete

: Enter the shooting status

: Multiple photos selection 136 Setting function Click at the right upper corner of the interface so that the setting interface can appear. Enter the selection interface after selecting

, and click thumbnails so that files can be selected. Clicking the same thumbnail for the second time will cancel selection.

: Share files directly to social networks

: Play back in the form of slide show

: Delete the selected files

In Android system, the download size can be set and cookies can be deleted. In iOS system, the download size can be set and cookies can be deleted. And the iOS 5 system has log-in and log-out functions. But for iOS 6 system or above, the account log-in is decided by the device system. 137 The currently selected files, including the files being downloaded and wait for downloading, can't be more than 20. In the index playback interface, clicking or will pause downloading. Download will restart when the playback interface appears again.

Download function In the index playback interface of the camera, click mode. Select a file to begin downloading. to enter the download

: Downloading

: Wait downloading

: The download is complete

: Cancel download

: Fail in downloading

: Grey and inaction 138 Delete function 1. In the index playback interface of the to enter the selection camera, click interface, select the files to be deleted, click again to delete the files, and select whether or not to delete in the delete prompting interface. 2. In the index playback interface of the smart device, click to enter the selection interface, select the files needing to be deleted, click the files, and select whether or not to delete in the delete prompting interface. to delete

2 item slected 4 item slected

Current file being loaded or waiting for being loaded can not be deleted. The files which are being downloaded and wait downloading cannot be deleted. No select box is displayed on the file which is being downloaded. 139 Clicking a photo in slide play will stop slide play and the single photo interface will appear. When playing movie in a slide, only the first frame is displayed; clicking the movie will stop slide play and the movie play interface will appear. Slide play function 1. In the index playback interface of the smart device, click selection interface. to enter the 2. Firstly, select the files to be played, and then click to start slide play. 3. If no file is selected, directly click that all files will be played. so 4 item slected

140

 

 

Share function 1. In the index playback interface of the smart device, click selection interface. to enter the 2. Select the files to be shared, and click to pop up the share option. 4 item slected

Transmission procedure is determined according to the settings of the smart device. Single Photo In the index playback interface, click one to enter the single playback interface. Sliding around to browse around the files. Click one photo file and enter the index playback interface, double click the photo to enter 100% zoom picture, and double click again to restore the original size. 141 1. Executable operations in single photo playback of the files at the camera side:

2. Executable operations in single photo playback of the files on the smart device:

File name File name

: Enter the shooting status

: Download the current file to the smart device

: Delete the current file iOS system interface has one more function than the Android system:

: start play / pause play

: Rotate the photo

: Hare the current file directly to social networks (set according to the smart device)

: Play back in the form of slide show

: Process effects of the image of picture file, and trim the video file

: Delete the current file 142 Rotate Select the photo file, click on file is directly saved automatically after the rotation. The file is directly saved automatically after the rotation. The File name File name Edit function:

1. Editing photo files:

Click to enter the effect interface, where filter effects, brightness adjustment and modeling effects can be set. Filter effects:

The filter effects are divided into 23 types. More effect options can be viewed by sliding the effect option bar from side to side. File name Effect Effect option bar 143 Brightness adjustment effects:

: Off

: Auto Modeling effects:

: Off

: Centering on dot 2. Editing movie files:

Click to enter the trim interface. Trim Trim

: Centering on strip (lateral direction)

First click to select your favourite effect, to select save, and then click on upload to social networks options or cancel.

and

: Play movies

: Increase the number of frames

: Shorten the number of frames

: Trim starting point

: Trim finishing point 144 Steps of movie trim:

or 1 Click movies. to start playing 2 Slide the quick browse bar from side to side to choose the point you need, according to the desired trim accuracy of the movie, click or to increase or shorten the number of frames. 3 Slide the quick browse bar from side to side so that the vertical line stays on thumbnails needing to be cut, and click point. to select the trim starting 4 Slide the quick browse bar again to the left so that the vertical line stays on the thumbnails needing to be cut, and click point. 5 Click to select the save, to select the trim finishing upload to social networks options orcancel. About Click About in the APP homepage to view APP version and camera brand. Click the link on screen to enter the website:

http://www.kodakcamera.jkiltd.com 145 11 Appendices Camera Specifications Design and specifications are subject to change without notice. Type Lens Mount Sensor Type Image Sensor Size Effective Pixels Anti-Handshake Number of Recording Pixels Still Image Movie 146 146 Digital Interchangeable Lens System Camera Micro Four Thirds Mount 4/3 CMOS 17.313mm 16.83 Megapixels Sensor Shift

(4:3) 16MP: 46403480 10MP: 36482736 4MP: 23361752 3MP: 20481536 0.3MP: 640480

(FULL HD) 19201080, 30fps

(3:2) 14MP: 46083072

(16:9) 12MP: 46082592 2MP: 19201080

(HD) 1280720, 60fps 1280720, 30fps

(VGA) 640480, 30fps High-Speed Movie: VGA(120fps) Digital Zoom File System File Format Still Image Movie Shooting Modes Scan Panorama LCD Display ISO Sensitivity Focus Modes Focusing Area Selection AE/AF Lock AF Assist Lamp 2x, 4x DCF 2.0, DPOF, Exif 2.3, PictBridge JPEG (Fine, Standard), RAW, RAW+ JPEG (Fine) MOV (H.264), Audio: Linear PCM [Stereo]

Auto Scene, Program AE, Shutter priority, Aperture priority, Manual Mode, Scene Mode [Panorama Mode, Handheld Night, Face Beautifier, Multi Exposure, Cat/Dog, Snow, Party, Sport, Night Portrait, Portrait, Children, Landscape, Sunset, Fireworks], Wi-Fi, Custom Settings Max. 360 3.0inch (920k Pixels), Tilting Auto, ISO 200/400/800/1600/3200/6400/12800 Single AF, Continuous AF, Manual Focus, Manual Focus + Single AF 1-Area-Focusing, 25-Area-Focusing, Face Detection, Manual Area Focusing Yes Yes 147 147 Exposure Modes Metering Range AE Bracket Exposure Compensation Shutter Type Shutter Speed Continuous Shooting Playback Modes White Balance Control Artificial Intelligence AE (AiAE), Center-Weighted Average, Spot, Multi-Spot, Face AE Program AE (AE-Lock Available), Aperture Prior AE, Shutter Prior AE, Manual EV 0~16 (F3.5,ISO200) Manual:3 Stops in 1/3 Stop Increments AEB :2 Stops in 1/3 Stop Increments 3EV in 1/3 Step Increments Mechanical, Electronically-controlled, Focal-plane Shutter 1/4000 ~ 30 Seconds (Manual: 30 Minutes) Approx. 5fps (Full Resolution) Single Photo, Index (9/16Thumbnails), Date, Burst Shooting, Zoom (Approx. 2~8) , Slide Show (Still/Movie/Still + Movie) AWB, Daylight, Cloudy, Shadow, Fluorescent, Fluorescent H, Incandescent, Manual WB, Color Temperature Setting

(1900K ~10000K), WB Bracketing 148 Flash Filter Other Features PC Interface Jacks Flash Method Flash Modes Wi-Fi Support Multi-Language Support External Force Off, Force Flash, Flash Auto, Red-Eye Reduction, Slow Sync., Slow Sync. + Red-Eye Reduction, Rear curtain sync Normal, Vivid, Black and White, Dreamy, Vignetting, Ektachrome, Kodachrome, Kodacolor, Salon, Punk, Negative, Reflection, Sketch, Fish Eye, 4 Grids - Stylish, 4 Grids - Partial Color Yes (Build in Camera) 27 Languages USB 2.0 TV Interface HDMI Type-D Flash Attachment Hot Shoe 149 Eye-Fi Support Wi-Fi Remote Viewfinder Power Shooting Capability (Battery Performance) Operation Environment Dimensions (WHD) Weight Yes Yes (802.11 b/g/n) Yes (via smartphone) Rechargeable Li-ion Battery LB-070, 7.4V 1000mAh, In-Camera Charging Approx. 410 Shots with SZ ED 12-45mm F3.5-6.3 AF Lens

(Based on CIPA Standards) Temperature: 0 ~ 40, Humidity: 0 ~ 90%

Approx. 115.668.435.6mm (Based on CIPA Standards) Approx. 290g (Body Only) 150 Prompt and warning messages Messages Warning! Battery exhausted. Description Warning before power off when the camera battery is exhausted. Built-in memory error In the case of built-in memory error. Warning! Do not turn off the camera during firmware upgrade. Connection failed!

Settings cannot be changed under this mode. Appear during upgrade of firmware. In the case of failing to connect to a PC or a printer. In the case of failing to connect to a TV-system (including HDMI). In the case of the setting items under the shooting mode cannot be set when pressing button Fn1/Fn2 or independent function button. Please re-install the lens The lens is not installed properly and it cannot be started. Reset mode Displaying that it will power off after 2 seconds. Disappear after 2 seconds and return to shooting Turn it off and remove the message after completing the upgrade. Remove transmission line to stop connection, and the message is removed. Remove the message after 2 seconds and back to shooting. Do not reset, turn off manually and reinstall the lens. 151 Messages Description Beyond alignment. Please shoot again. In the case of overlarge joint offset in the Panorama shooting. Reset mode Remove the message after 2 seconds and back to shooting. This color effect cannot be used in video!

Capture reached maximum limit In this capture ********

still size limited to

** M electing Normal, Dreamy, When Vignetting, Kodacolor, Salon, Reflection, Sketch, Fish Eye and 4-Grids (Stylish / Partial Color) effects under color effect, this restriction description will be displayed below the options. Remain displaying below the options without hiding. When encountering the shooting mode of limiting still size and pressing the Fn1 / Fn2 button in the case of setting the image size to Fn1 /

Fn2 button in the shooting mode. Remove the message after 2 seconds and back to shooting. 152 Description Reset mode The lens is not installed or not installed properly and it cannot be started. Do not reset, turn off manually and reinstall the lens. The lens has been installed, but the lens cannot communicate after turning the camera on. Do not reset, turn off manually and reinstall the lens. Messages The lens is not installed properly. Please re-install the lens. The Lens signal can not be linked. Please re-install the lens. This Lens is not supported. Please confirm the lens. The lens has been installed, but it does not push out when the camera is turned on. Prevent writing to memory card!

In the case that there is lock protection for the card when saving the image. Push the lens out manually. (In the case that the lens has to be pushed out manually) Disappear after 2 seconds and back to the previous image. 153 Messages Description Card full!

Memory full!

Exceeded maximum folder number. In the case that the camera detects the card capacity is insufficient when turning on or pressing the shutter. In the case that the camera detects the memory capacity is insufficient when turning on or pressing the shutter. When the folder number in the card exceeds the maximum folder number

(999), the time for turning on and reading will be too long, when it will prompt the message until the reading is completed. Reset mode Disappear after 2 seconds and back to the previous image. Disappear after 2 seconds and back to the previous image. The message will be ended after the camera processing is completed. Card error!

The card cannot be recognized after being formatted. Normal display. Card is not formatted!

When the card reading error occurs, the message of not formatted will be displayed subsequently. Disappear after 2 seconds and enter to the formatting process. 154 Messages Description Reset mode Slow access of the card Cannot write to SD card No image!

Currently no continuous group file No Red-Eye Detected!

When the card lower than Class 4 is recording movie above HD, it may be accessed slowly and the recording cannot be continued, and the operation image may appear after 2 seconds (it may need to wait up to 9 seconds for the built-in memory). The recording cannot be continued if there are problems which may cause interruption of the recording during writing to the card or recording in the process of shooting or recording. there When pressing the button is not any image in the camera or the card. When it switches from playback mode to Cont. playback mode, if there is not any continuous group file in the files, this prompt message will display. No red-eye detected when pressing for red-eye removing in playback touch-up. Remove the message after 2 seconds and back to the shooting image. Disappear after 2 seconds and back to the shooting. Back to the shooting image after 2 seconds. Remove the message after 2 seconds and back to Thumbnail 3x3 mode. Disappear after 2 seconds and back to the touch-up menu. 155 Messages Description Reset mode Too many pictures for fast processing Bad file or the file cannot be recognized Protected!

Undeletable!

The image may be unable to enter the date playback if the image exceeds the specification in the case of date playback. (when the image number in the card cannot exceed 5000) When the format of the file viewed is not supported or the file is damaged and cannot be recognized properly. This message will be displayed on the image immediately when executing delete action to the protected files. This image cannot be edited. When pressing bad files. to play back the Cannot edit because no face detected!

After no face image entering to the touch-up menu. Remove the message after 2 seconds and back to Thumbnail 3x3 mode. This image message only can be removed by deleting the file. Disappear after 2 seconds and back to the previous image. Remove the message after 2 seconds and back to the original image. Remove the message after 2 seconds and back to the menu. 156 Troubleshooting Problem Camera does not turn on Camera turns off suddenly during operation The picture is blurred Images and video files cannot be saved Images will not print from the connected printer Possible causes The battery has been The battery is not inserted depleted. correctly. Solution Recharge the battery. Correctly reinstall the battery. The battery has been depleted. Recharge the battery. Camera shakes while taking a picture. Turn on OIS feature. Please use tripod for high magnification (above 15X) optical zoom. The memory card is full. The memory card is locked. The camera is not connected to the printer correctly. The printer is not PictBridge compatible. Use another memory card or delete unnecessary files. Unlock the memory card. Check the connection between the camera and printer. Use a PictBridge compatible The printer is out of paper or printer. ink. The printer paper is jammed. Load paper into the printer or replace the ink cartridge in the printer. Remove the jammed paper. 157 Problem Saving data to memory card is slow Possible causes Solution Using a memory card below Class 4 may result in slower recording times. Use an memory card with write Class higher than 4 to improve performance. Cannot write to the memory card The memory card has been locked. Too many movies to process The camera may experience trouble recording HD movies to memory card with a rating lower than Class 4. The number of pictures or folders in the memory card exceed the specifications, so the playback of data folder can not be displayed. Release the write lock of the memory card or replace with another card. Use an memory card with write Class higher than 4 to improve performance. Delete unwanted files. 158 The Kodak trademark and trade dress are used under license from Kodak. 2014 by JK Imaging Ltd. All rights reserved. JK Imaging Ltd. 1411 W. 190th Street, Suite 550, Gardena, CA 90248, USA www.kodakcamera.jkiltd.com Ver. 1

 

 

SMART LENS Camera User Manual About this Manual Thank you for purchasing the KODAK PIXPRO SMART LENS Camera. Please carefully read this manual and keep it for future reference. JK Imaging Ltd. reserves all rights of this document. No part of this published manual may be reproduced, transmitted, transcribed, stored in a retrieval system or translated into any language or computer language, in any form, by any means, without the prior written permission of JK Imaging Ltd.. All trademarks mentioned in this manual are used for identification purposes only and are properties of their respective owners. This manual is to introduce you how to operate this KODAK PIXPRO SMART LENS Camera. JK Imaging Ltd. has tried its utmost to ensure the correctness of all contents here, but reserves the right to modify. All of these contents are subject to change without prior notice. Declaration of Conformity Responsible Party:

Address: JK Imaging Ltd. 17239 South Main Street, Gardena, CA 90248, USA JK Imaging Ltd. JK Imaging Europe, 71 Clarendon road, Watford, WD17 1DS, UK Company Website:

www.kodakpixpro.com In this manual:

The memory card referred to in this manual is a microSD Card or microSDHC card. 1 INDUSTRY CANADA This device complies with Canadian RSS-210. This device complies with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard (s).Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. Radiation Exposure Statement:

This product complies with the Canadian portable RF exposure limit set forth for an uncontrolled environment and is safe for intended operation as described in this manual. Additional RF exposure reduction can be achieved if the product can be kept as far as possible from the user body or set the device to lower output power if such function is available. For Customers in Europe This symbol [crossed-out wheel bin WEEE Annex IV] indicates separate collection of electrical waste and electronic equipment in the European countries. Please do not throw the equipment into domestic refuse. Please use the return and collection systems available in your country for proper, safe disposal of this product. 2 CE mark indicates that this product complies with the European requirements for safety, health, environment and customer protection. CE marked cameras are intended for sales in Europe. Europe EU Declaration of Conformity This device complies with the essential requirements of the R&TTE Directive 1999/5/

EC. The following test methods have been applied in order to prove presumption of conformity with the essential requirements of the R&TTE Directive 1999/5/EC:

- EN 60950-1: 2006+A11:2009 +A1:2010 +A12:2011 Safety of Information Technology Equipment

- EN 50566: 2013 Product standard to demonstrate compliance of radio frequency fields from handheld and body- mounted wireless communication devices used by the general public (30 MHz 6 GHz)

- EN 62209-2: 2010 Human exposure to radio frequency fields from handheld and bodymounted wireless communication devices Human models, instrumentation, and procedures Part 2: Procedure to determine the specific absorption rate (SAR) for wireless communication devices used in close proximity to the human body (frequency range of 30 MHz to 6 GHz)

- EN 300 328 V1.8.1 : 2012 3 Electromagnetic compatibility and Radio spectrum Matters (ERM); Wideband Transmission systems; Data transmission equipment operating in the 2.4 GHz ISM band and using spread spectrum modulation techniques; Harmonized EN covering essential requirements under article 3.2 of the R&TTE Directive.

- EN 301 489-1 V1.9.2: 2011 Electromagnetic compatibility and Radio Spectrum Matters (ERM); Electro Magnetic Compatibility (EMC) standard for radio equipment and services; Part 1: Common technical requirements.

- EN 301 489-17 V2.2.1:2012 Electromagnetic compatibility and Radio spectrum Matters (ERM); Electro Magnetic Compatibility (EMC) standard for radio equipment and services; Part 17: Specific conditions for 2.4 GHz wideband transmission systems and 5 GHz high performance RLAN equipment. For Customers in the U.S.A. Federal Communication Commission Interference Statement This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. 4 This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one of the following measures:

- Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.

- Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.

- Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.

- Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help. FCC Caution: Any changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the users authority to operate this equipment. This transmitter must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter. 5 Radiation Exposure Statement:

This product complies with the FCC portable RF exposure limit set forth for an uncontrolled environment and is safe for intended operation as described in this manual. Additional RF exposure reduction can be achieved if the product can be kept as far as possible from the user body or set the device to lower output power if such function is available. 6 Safety Notes Safety notes for this camera Do not disassemble or repair this camera by yourself. Do not drop the camera or allow it to hit solid objects. To prevent the camera from being damaged by moisture, do not use or store the camera in very humid environments, such as in rain or near bodies of water. Turn the camera off, remove the battery and the memory card, and dry it within 24 hours if water accidentally comes in contact with the camera. Do not use or store the camera in dusty places or on a beach to prevent dust or sand from entering the camera, causing possible damage to it. Do not use or store the camera in a hot environment or under direct sunlight. Please do not use in places having high intensity magnetic field, electrostatic and electric wave interference (for example near a microwave oven), which may cause failure in receiving signals. Before you remove the battery and memory card, the camera should be turned off. Advise to use soft lens cloth to regularly clean the cameras body. 7 In cleaning the camera body, please dont use corrosive cleaning agents or those with alcohol or organic solvent. If this camera is not in use for a long time, please keep it in a dry and clean condition. Our company will not pay compensation for any failure of playback of pictures or videos caused by improper operation. When using your camera on an airplane, observe the relevant rules specified by the airline. Do not place the product where it can be reached by infants and children. The handset shall not be used for general phone conversations while the camera is installed on the handset. Please always remove the camera from the handset when it is not in use. Using the handset while having the camera attached to it may affect the handset RF exposure characteristics and is not safe. Safety notes for battery Please use a battery that is the same type as the one included. Please use the attached charger to charge the battery. If the liquid leaking from the battery contacts with your skin, please immediately flush with water and seek medical treatment. If the liquid leaks into the camera, please contact the retailer. Please dispose of the wasted battery in accordance with local (national or regional) regulations. 8 To prevent the battery from being damaged, do not drop the battery or allow it to hit solid objects or to be scratched by the objects. Do not let the battery come in contact with metal objects (including coins) to avoid short circuiting, discharging, excessive heat, or possible leakage. Do not attempt to disassemble the battery. Do not expose the battery to water. Always keep the battery contacts dry. Do not heat the battery or throw it into a fire to avoid a possible explosion. Do not store the battery in a hot environment or in direct sunlight. If an overheating happens during charging or use, please immediately stop charging or using and then take out the battery with care in shutdown mode to wait it for cooling. If it is not used for a long time, please remove the battery for proper keeping. In a colder environment, the performance of the battery could be noticeably reduced. Safety notes for memory card A memory card is optional and is not included in the product package. It needs to be purchased separately. Please use an original memory card which is Class 4 or higher and has a capacity of 4GB to 32GB. Before using a brand new memory card, please format the memory card first. Do not make the memory card fall off from high places or hit by heavy objects to prevent damaging it. 9 Do not attempt to disassemble or repair the memory card. Do not expose the memory card to water. Always keep it dry. Do not remove the memory card when the camera is turned on. Otherwise, the memory card could be damaged. Do not directly edit the data on the memory card. Copy the data to your PC before you edit them. When the camera is stored for a long period of time, be sure to download your photos and remove the memory card. Store it in a dry environment. Do not modify the name of the files or folders of the memory card using your PC. Modifying the file names may cause the files to not be recognized on the camera or a possible error may occur. A photo taken with the camera will be stored in the folder that is automatically generated on the memory card. Do not store photos that are not taken using this camera in these folders as the pictures cannot be recognized during the playback. 10 Product Specifications Image Sensor Effective Pixels Total Pixels Focal Length 1/2.3 BSI CMOS 16.35 Megapixels 16.76 Megapixels 5.1mm (Wide) ~ 25.5mm (Tele) 35mm film equivalent 28mm (Wide) ~ 140mm (Tele) F number F3.9 (Wide) ~ F6.3 (Tele) Optical Zoom 5x Focusing Range Normal: (Wide) 60cm ~ , (Tele) 100cm ~

Macro: 5cm ~ (Wide Only) Autofocus System TTL Autofocus 11 Number of Recording Pixels Still Image Movie File Format

(4:3) 16MP: 46083456 10MP:36482736

(16:9) 12MP: 46082592 2MP: 19201080 19201080 (30fps), 1280720 (30fps), High-Speed Movie: 848480(120fps) Still Image: Exif 2.3 (JPEG) Movie : MP4 [Image: H.264; Audio: AAC(Monaural)]

ISO Sensitivity Auto, ISO100/200/400/800/1600/3200 AF Method Single AF, Touch focus Exposure Metering Method Artificial Intelligence AE (AiAE) 12 Exposure Control Method Program AE (AE-Lock Available) Exposure Compensation 3EV in 1/3 Step Increments Shutter Burst Mode 1/2000 ~ 4 Seconds Yes Flash Flash Method Internal Flash Modes Force Off, Flash Auto, Fill Flash Recording Media Micro SD/ Micro SDHC Card (Up to 32GB Support)

[MMC Card Not Supported]

Jacks USB 2.0 (Micro 5 pin USB) 13 Wi-Fi NFC Yes (802.11 b/g/n) Yes Remote Control Yes (via smart device) Power Rechargeable Li-ion Battery LB-012, 3.7V 700mAh, In-Camera Charging Shooting Capability Approx. 160 Shots (Based on CIPA Standards) Operation Environment Temperature: 0 ~ 40C, Humidity: 0 ~ 90%

Dimensions (WHD) 54.854.842.9mm (Based on CIPA Standards) Weight Approx. 122g (Body only) 14 Getting Ready Accessories Included Your camera box should contain the camera model you purchased along with the following accessories. If anything is missing or appears to be damaged, please contact your retailer. Rechargeable Li-ion battery AC adapter Micro USB cable Wrist strap Quick start guide Service card Warranty card 15 Part Names Flash lamp Indicator lamp 1 2 3 Microphone 4 Battery cover 5 Wrist strap buckles 6 7 8 9 10 NFC mark Shutter button Zoom lever Power button Tripod socket After turning the camera on, you may move the camera's zoom lever to zoom, and press the shutter button to take photos. 16 Installation of Wrist Strap It is recommended to use the wrist strap to prevent the camera falling off during use. Please install it on the camera and then wear it around your hand per the diagram below. 17 Installing Battery and Memory Card 1. Open the battery cover. 2. Insert the battery into the battery compartment according to the negative and positive directions as illustrated in the picture. Push the battery down until it locks in place. 18 3. Insert the memory card into the memory card slot as shown in the diagram. Push it down until it locks in place. 4. Close the battery cover. When you insert a memory card, make sure the notch of the card matches the markings on the top of the card slot. To remove your memory card, open the battery cover, gently press the memory card to eject it and remove it carefully. 19 Charging Battery Please insert the battery and charge it under shutdown mode. 1. Connect the camera and the power charger using the supplied Micro USB cable. 2. Insert the plug of the power charger into the power outlet to charge the battery. Please charge the battery indoors between 0C and 40C. The indicator lamp shows orange in charging. The indicator will go out once charging is finished. To have maximum battery life, charge the battery for at least 4 hours the first time. 20 Indicator lamp When the camera is turned off, you can also connect the camera to your PC using a Micro USB cable to charge the battery. 21 Connect the smart device Install APP Download a dedicated installation package from the application store corresponding to the device (APP name: PIXPRO Remote Viewer) and then install it. Before use, please confirm that your smart device is a smart phone with Android 2.3 or 4.x system, a tablet computer with Android 4.x or is an iOS6/7 system. If not, please upgrade your smart device before using the APP. Wi-Fi connection (Android system and iOS system) 1. Press the power button to turn the camera on. 2. Enable the Wi-Fi feature of your smart device to automatically search surrounding hotspots. 3. Select "PIXPRO-SL5_XXXX", and input the eight-digit number password [12345678].

(The camera's SSID and password are located on the back side of the battery cover.) 22 To maintain a connection, please keep the camera within 10 meters (32.8 feet) without signal shielding interference. The camera and the smart device can only be connected one to one. Power Button PIXPRO-SL5_XXXX PIXPRO SL5_XXXX 1 2 3 23 NFC Connection (Android system) 1. Enable the NFC of your smart device. 2. Use your smart device to slightly touch the NFC mark on the camera. The APP will open automatically. 24 The NFC feature will be available only when your smart device's screen is unlocked. After successful connection of your smart device with camera, if you use another camera to touch the smart device, or if you use another smart device to touch the camera, the previous connection will be replaced. App Operating Instructions Refer to the "PIXPRO Remote Viewer User Manual" located on the web:

Americas Europe http://kodakpixpro.com/Americas/

support/downloads.php http://www.kodakpixpro.com/Europe/

support/multi-lang-downloads.php 25 Installation on smart phone. 1. Open the clasp arm of the camera as shown in Figure 1. 2. Insert smart phone into the clasp as shown in Figure 2. Please don't swing the phone/lens after installation to prevent them from damage. Please take care not to pinch your fingers during installation. Clasp 26 1 2 3 Troubleshooting Camera does not turn on Correctly reinstall the battery per the instructions in this manual. The battery power is low, so please charge it or replace it with a fully charged battery. Camera turns off suddenly during operation The battery power is low. Charge it or replace it with a fully charged battery. The camera starts up automatically. If you enable the NFC by touching your smart device with the camera, the camera will start up automatically. This is normal. Pictures are blurry. Suggest using tripod. Saving data to memory card is slow Use a memory card with write Class 4 or higher to improve performance. Connection Failed!

Please check the wireless settings of your smart device and the SSID and password you entered. Reinstall the APP. Battery temperature is too high. Battery overheat, remove the battery when the product is turned off. Continue to use the battery when it cools. 27 The Kodak trademark and trade dress are used under license from Kodak. 2014 by JK Imaging Ltd. All rights reserved. JK Imaging Ltd. 17239 South Main Street, Gardena, CA 90248, USA JK Imaging Europe, 71 Clarendon road, Watford, WD17 1DS, UK www.kodakpixpro.com Ver. 1

 

 

SMART LENS Camera User Manual Manuel dutilisation Manual de usuario Manual do utilizador English Franais Espaol Portugus About this Manual Thank you for purchasing the KODAK PIXPRO SMART LENS Camera. Please carefully read this manual and keep it for future reference. JK Imaging Ltd. reserves all rights of this document. No part of this published manual may be reproduced, transmitted, transcribed, stored in a retrieval system or translated into any language or computer language, in any form, by any means, without the prior written permission of JK Imaging Ltd.. All trademarks mentioned in this manual are used for identification purposes only and are properties of their respective owners. This manual is to introduce you how to operate this KODAK PIXPRO SMART LENS Camera. JK Imaging Ltd. has tried its utmost to ensure the correctness of all contents here, but reserves the right to modify. All of these contents are subject to change without prior notice. Declaration of Conformity Responsible Party: JK Imaging Ltd. Address: 1411 W. 190th Street, Suite 550, Gardena, CA 90248, USA Company Website: www.kodakpixpro.com In this manual:

The memory card referred to in this manual is a Micro SD card or Micro SDHC card. 1 EN INDUSTRY CANADA This device complies with Canadian RSS-210. This device complies with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard (s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. Radiation Exposure Statement:

This product complies with the Canadian portable RF exposure limit set forth for an uncontrolled environment and is safe for intended operation as described in this manual. Additional RF exposure reduction can be achieved if the product can be kept as far as possible from the user body or set the device to lower output power if such function is available. Industry Canada statement:

Ce dispositif est conforme la norme CNR-210 dIndustrie Canada applicable aux appareils radio exempts de licence. Son fonctionnement est sujet aux deux conditions suivantes: (1) le dispositif ne doit pas produire de brouillage prjudiciable, et (2) ce dispositif doit accepter tout brouillage reu, y compris un brouillage susceptible de provoquer un fonctionnement indsirable. Dclaration dexposition aux radiations:

2 EN Le produit est conforme aux limites dexposition pour les appareils portables RF pour les Etats-Unis et le Canada tablies pour un environnement non contrl. Le produit est sr pour un fonctionnement tel que dcrit dans ce manuel. La rduction aux expositions RF peut tre augmente si lappareil peut tre conserv aussi loin que possible du corps de lutilisateur ou que le dispositif est rgl sur la puissance de sortie la plus faible si une telle fonction est disponible. For Customers in Europe This symbol [crossed-out wheel bin WEEE Annex IV] indicates separate collection of electrical waste and electronic equipment in the European countries. Please do not throw the equipment into domestic refuse. Please use the return and collection systems available in your country for proper, safe disposal of this product. CE mark indicates that this product complies with the European requirements for safety, health, environment and customer protection. CE marked cameras are intended for sales in Europe. Europe EU Declaration of Conformity This device complies with the essential requirements of the R&TTE Directive 1999/5/EC. The following test methods have been applied in order to prove 3 EN presumption of conformity with the essential requirements of the R&TTE Directive 1999/5/EC:

- EN 60950-1: 2006+A11:2009 +A1:2010 +A12:2011 Safety of Information Technology Equipment

- EN 50566: 2013 Product standard to demonstrate compliance of radio frequency fields from handheld and body- mounted wireless communication devices used by the general public (30 MHz 6 GHz)

- EN 62209-2: 2010 Human exposure to radio frequency fields from handheld and bodymounted wireless communication devices Human models, instrumentation, and procedures Part 2: Procedure to determine the specific absorption rate (SAR) for wireless communication devices used in close proximity to the human body (frequency range of 30 MHz to 6 GHz)

- EN 300 328 V1.8.1 : 2012 Electromagnetic compatibility and Radio spectrum Matters (ERM); Wideband Transmission systems; Data transmission equipment operating in the 2.4 GHz ISM band and using spread spectrum modulation techniques; Harmonized EN covering essential requirements under article 3.2 of the R&TTE Directive.

- EN 301 489-1 V1.9.2: 2008 4 EN Electromagnetic compatibility and Radio Spectrum Matters (ERM); Electro Magnetic Compatibility (EMC) standard for radio equipment and services; Part 1:

Common technical requirements.

- EN 301 489-17 V2.2.1:2012 Electromagnetic compatibility and Radio spectrum Matters (ERM); Electro Magnetic Compatibility (EMC) standard for radio equipment and services; Part 17:

Specific conditions for 2.4 GHz wideband transmission systems and 5 GHz high performance RLAN equipment. For Customers in the U.S.A. Federal Communication Commission Interference Statement This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and

(2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this 5 EN equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one of the following measures:

- Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.

- Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.

- Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.

- Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help. FCC Caution: Any changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the users authority to operate this equipment. This transmitter must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter. Radiation Exposure Statement:

This product complies with the FCC portable RF exposure limit set forth for an uncontrolled environment and is safe for intended operation as described in this manual. Additional RF exposure reduction can be achieved if the product can be kept as far as possible from the user body or set the device to lower output power if such function is available. 6 EN Safety Notes Safety notes for this camera Do not disassemble or repair this camera by yourself. Do not drop the camera or allow it to hit solid objects. To prevent the camera from being damaged by moisture, do not use or store the camera in very humid environments, such as in rain or near bodies of water. Turn the camera off, remove the battery and the memory card, and dry it within 24 hours if water accidentally comes in contact with the camera. Do not use or store the camera in dusty places or on a beach to prevent dust or sand from entering the camera, causing possible damage to it. Do not use or store the camera in a hot environment or under direct sunlight. Please do not use in places having high intensity magnetic field, electrostatic and electric wave interference (for example near a microwave oven), which may cause failure in receiving signals. Before you remove the battery and memory card, the camera should be turned off. Advise to use soft lens cloth to regularly clean the cameras body and lens mount. 7 EN In cleaning the camera body, please dont use corrosive cleaning agents or those with alcohol or organic solvent. If this camera is not in use for a long time, please keep it in a dry and clean condition. Our company will not pay compensation for any failure of playback of pictures or videos caused by improper operation. When using your camera on an airplane, observe the relevant rules specified by the airline. Do not place the product where it can be reached by infants and children. Safety notes for battery Please use a battery that is the same type as the one included. Please use the attached charger to charge the battery. If the liquid leaking from the battery contacts with your skin, please immediately flush with water and seek medical treatment. If the liquid leaks into the camera, please contact the retailer. Please dispose of the wasted battery in accordance with local (national or regional) regulations. To prevent the battery from being damaged, do not drop the battery or allow it to hit solid objects or to be scratched by the objects. 8 EN Do not let the battery come in contact with metal objects (including coins) to avoid short circuiting, discharging, excessive heat, or possible leakage. Do not attempt to disassemble the battery. Do not expose the battery to water. Always keep the battery contacts dry. Do not heat the battery or throw it into a fire to avoid a possible explosion. Do not store the battery in a hot environment or in direct sunlight. If an overheating happens during charging or use, please immediately stop charging or using and then take out the battery with care in shutdown mode to wait it for cooling. If it is not used for a long time, please remove the battery for proper keeping. In a colder environment, the performance of the battery could be noticeably reduced. Safety notes for memory card A memory card is optional and is not included in the product package. It needs to be purchased separately. Please use an original memory card which is Class 4 or higher and has a capacity of 4GB to 32GB. Before using a brand new memory card, please format the memory card first. Do not make the memory card fall off from high places or hit by heavy objects to prevent damaging it. 9 EN Do not attempt to disassemble or repair the memory card. Do not expose the memory card to water. Always keep it dry. Do not remove the memory card when the camera is turned on. Otherwise, the memory card could be damaged. Do not directly edit the data on the memory card. Copy the data to your PC before you edit them. When the camera is stored for a long period of time, be sure to download your photos and remove the memory card. Store it in a dry environment. Do not modify the name of the files or folders of the memory card using your PC. Modifying the file names may cause the files to not be recognized on the camera or a possible error may occur. A photo taken with the camera will be stored in the folder that is automatically generated on the memory card. Do not store photos that are not taken using this camera in these folders as the pictures cannot be recognized during the playback. 10 EN Product Specifications Image Sensor Total Pixels Effective Pixels Focal Length 35mm film equivalent F number Optical Zoom Focusing Range Anti-Handshake 1/2.3 BSI CMOS 16.76 Megapixels 16.35 Megapixels 4.3mm (Wide) ~ 107.5mm (Tele) 24mm (Wide) ~ 600mm (Tele) F3.7 (Wide) ~ F6.2 (Tele) 25x Normal: (Wide) 60cm ~ , (Tele) 250cm ~

Macro: 3cm ~ (Wide Only) Optical Image Stabilization 11 EN Wi-Fi NFC Remote Control File Format Power Shooting Capability Operation Environment Dimensions (WHD) Weight Yes (802.11 b/g/n) Yes Yes (via smart device) Still Image: Exif 2.3 (JPEG) Movie: MP4 [Image: H.264; Audio: AAC(Stereo)]

Rechargeable Li-ion Battery LB-052, 3.7V 880mAh, In-Camera Charging Approx. 240 Shots (Based on CIPA Standards) Temperature: 0 ~ 40C, Humidity: 0 ~ 90%

71.058.665.2mm (Based on CIPA Standards) Approx. 210g (Body only) 12 EN Getting Ready Accessories Included Your camera box should contain the camera model you purchased along with the following accessories. If anything is missing or appears to be damaged, please contact your retailer. Rechargeable Li-ion battery AC adapter Micro USB cable Wrist strap User manual Service card Warranty card 13 EN Part Names

1 Microphone 2 3 4 5 Wrist Strap Buckles Power Button NFC Mark Battery Cover 6 7 8 9 Speaker Zoom Lever Shutter Button Tripod Socket After turning the camera on, you may move the camera's zoom lever to zoom, and press the shutter button to take photos. 14 EN Installation of Wrist Strap It is recommended to use the wrist strap to prevent the camera falling off during use. Please install it on the camera and then wear it around your hand per the diagram below. 15 EN Installing Battery and Memory Card 1. Open the battery cover. 2. Insert the battery into the battery compartment according to the negative and positive directions as illustrated in the picture. Push the battery down until it locks in place. 16 EN 3. Insert the memory card into the memory card slot as shown in the diagram. Push it down until it locks in place. 4. Close the battery cover. When you insert a memory card, make sure the notch of the card matches the markings on the top of the card slot. 17 EN Charging Battery For charging, you may use the included AC Adapter and Micro USB cable to charge the camera when it is off. You also may connect the Micro USB cable to computer for charging. Charging indicator Charging indicator:

Steady orange: Charging. The indicator will go out once charging is finished, and the camera will be powered off automatically. The camera will only charge while powered off. If the camera is turned on while connected to power, normal camera functions will be available for use, but the camera will not charge until it is turned off. 18 EN Connect the smart device Install APP Download a dedicated installation package from the application store corresponding to the device (APP name: PIXPRO Remote Viewer) and then install it. Before use, please confirm that your smart device is a smart phone with Android 2.3 or 4.x system, a tablet computer with Android 4.x or is an iOS6/7 system. If not, please upgrade your smart device before using the APP. Wi-Fi connection (Android system and iOS system) 1. Press the power button to turn the camera on. 2. Enable the Wi-Fi feature of your smart device to automatically search surrounding hotspots. 3. Select "PIXPRO-SL25_XXXX", and input the eight-digit number password.

(The camera's SSID and password are located on the back side of the battery cover.) 19 EN To maintain a connection, please keep the camera within 10 meters (32.8 feet) without signal shielding interference. The camera and the smart device can only be connected one to one. Power Button PIXPRO-SL25_XXXX KODAK PIXPRO SL25_XXXX 1 2 3 20 EN NFC Connection (Android system) 1. Enable the NFC of your smart device. 2. Use your smart device to slightly touch the NFC mark on the camera. The APP will open automatically. 21 EN The NFC feature will be available only when your smart device's screen lock is unlocked. After successful connection of your smart device with camera, if you use another camera to touch the smart device, or if you use another smart device to touch the camera, the previous connection will be replaced. App Operating Instructions Refer to the "PIXPRO Remote Viewer User Manual" located on the web:

Americas Europe http://kodakpixpro.com/Americas/

support/downloads.php http://kodakpixpro.com/Europe/

support/downloads.php 22 EN Installation on smart phone. 1. Open the clasp arm of the camera as shown in Figure 1. 2. Insert smart phone into the clasp as shown in Figure 2. Please don't swing the phone/lens after installation to prevent them from damage. Please take care not to pinch your fingers during installation. Clasp 1 2 3 23 EN Troubleshooting Camera does not turn on Correctly reinstall the battery per the instructions in this manual. The battery power is low, so please charge it or replace it with a fully charged battery. Camera turns off suddenly during operation The battery power is low. Charge it or replace it with a fully charged battery. The camera starts up automatically. If you enable the NFC by touching your smart device with the camera, the camera will start up automatically. This is normal. Pictures are blurry. Suggest using tripod. Saving data to memory card is slow Use a memory card with write Class 4 or higher to improve performance. Connection Failed!

Please check the wireless settings of your smart device and the SSID and password you entered. Reinstall the APP. Battery temperature is too high. Battery overheat, remove the battery when the product is turned off. Continue to use the battery when it cools. 24 EN The Kodak trademark and trade dress are used under license from Kodak. 2014 by JK Imaging Ltd. All rights reserved. JK Imaging Ltd. 1411 W. 190th Street, Suite 550, Gardena, CA 90248, USA www.kodakpixpro.com Printed in China CR292080499-1

 

 

KODAK PIXPRO AZ652 DIGITAL CAMERA User Manual BEFORE YOU START Declaration of Conformity Responsible Party: JK Imaging Ltd. Address: JK Imaging Ltd., 17239 So. Main Street, Gardena, CA 90248 USA Company Website: kodakpixpro.com JK Imaging Europe, 71 Clarendon Road, Watford, WD17 1DS, UK INDUSTRY CANADA This device complies with Canadian RSS-210. This device complies with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard (s).Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. Radiation Exposure Statement:

This product complies with the Canadian portable RF exposure limit set forth for an uncontrolled environment and is safe for intended operation as described in this manual. Additional RF exposure reduction can be achieved if the product can be kept as far as possible from the user body or set the device to lower output power if such function is available. 1 1 For Customers in Europe This symbol [crossed-out wheel bin WEEE Annex IV] indicates separate collection of electrical waste and electronic equipment in the European countries. Please do not throw the equipment into domestic refuse. Please use the return and collection systems available in your country for proper, safe disposal of this product. CE mark indicates that this product complies with the European requirements for safety, health, environment and customer protection. CE marked cameras are intended for sales in Europe. Europe EU Declaration of Conformity This device complies with the essential requirements of the R&TTE Directive 2014/53/EU. The following test methods have been applied in order to prove presumption of conformity with the essential requirements of the R&TTE Directive 2014/53/EU:

- EN 60950-1: 2006+A11:2009 +A1:2010 +A12:2011 Safety of Information Technology Equipment

- EN 50566: 2013 Product standard to demonstrate compliance of radio frequency fields from handheld and body- mounted wireless communication devices used by the general public (30 MHz 6 GHz)

- EN 62209-2: 2010 Human exposure to radio frequency fields from handheld and bodymounted wireless communication devices Human models, instrumentation, and procedures Part 2: Procedure to determine the specific absorption rate (SAR) for wireless communication devices used in close proximity to the human body (frequency range of 30 MHz to 6 GHz) 2

- EN 300 328 V1.9.1 : 2015 Electromagnetic compatibility and Radio spectrum Matters (ERM); Wideband transmission systems; Data transmission equipment operating in the 2.4GHz ISM band andusing wide band modulation techniques; Harmonized EN covering the essential requirements of article

- EN 301 489-1 V1.9.2: 2011 Electromagnetic compatibility and Radio Spectrum Matters (ERM); Electro Magnetic Compatibility (EMC) standard for radio equipment and services; Part 1:

Common technical requirements.

- EN 301 489-17 V2.2.1:2012 Electromagnetic compatibility and Radio spectrum Matters (ERM); ElectroMagnetic Compatibility (EMC) standard for radio equipment; Part 17: Specific conditions for Broadband Data Transmission Systems Hereby, Sintai Optical (Shenzhen) Co., Ltd, declares that this PIXPRO AZ652 is in compliance with the essential requirements and other relevant provisions of Directive 2014/53/EU. Manufacturer: Sintai Optical (Shenzhen) Co., Ltd Address:

Qiwei Ind Sec, 1st, 2nd,& 3RD Bldg, Lisonglang Village, Gongming Town, Baoan District, Shenzhen, Guangdong, China Batteries: Please dispose of used batteries at designated collection centers. Packaging: Please follow local regulations for the recycling of packaging. For Customers in the U.S.A. Federal Communication Commission Interference Statement This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. 3 This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one of the following measures:

- Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.

- Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.

- Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.

- Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help. FCC Caution: Any changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the users authority to operate this equipment. This transmitter must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter. Radiation Exposure Statement:

This product complies with the FCC portable RF exposure limit set forth for an uncontrolled environment and is safe for intended operation as described in this manual. Additional RF exposure reduction can be achieved if the product can be kept as far as possible from the user body or set the device to lower output power if such function is available. 4 About this Manual Thank you for purchasing this KODAK PIXPRO Digital Camera. Please read this manual carefully and keep it in a safe place for future reference. JK Imaging reserves all rights of this document. No part of this published manual may be reproduced, transmitted, transcribed, stored in a retrieval system or translated into any language or computer language, in any form, by any means, without the prior written permission of JK Imaging. All trademarks mentioned in this manual are used for identification purposes only and are properties of their respective owners. This manual will instruct you on how to operate the KODAK PIXPRO Digital Camera. JK Imaging has tried its utmost to ensure the correctness of the user manual contents, but reserves the right to modify as necessary. All of these contents are subject to change without prior notice. Throughout this manual, the following symbols are used to help you locate information quickly and easily:

Indicates useful information. In the instructions below, the following symbols may be used throughout this manual on how to operate the camera. This is to facilitate better understanding. Item properties The optional properties in the camera interface are indicated by the symbol . 5 SAFETY NOTES Safety notes for this camera Do not drop the camera or allow it to hit solid objects. Do not attempt to disassemble or repair the camera. Do not use or store the camera in dusty places or on a beach to prevent dust or sand from entering the camera, causing possible damage to it. Do not use or store the camera in a hot environment or under direct sunlight. Do not use or store the camera near a powerful magnetic field, for example near a magnet or transformer. Avoid touching the lens of the camera. Do not expose the camera to direct sunlight for a long period of time. To prevent the camera from being damaged by moisture, do not use or store the camera in very humid environments, such as in rain or near bodies of water. If water accidentally comes in contact with the camera, turn the camera off, remove the battery and the memory card, and dry it within 24 hours. 6 When you take the camera from a cold place to a warmer environment, condensation may occur. Please wait for a reasonable period of time before you turn it on. Before you remove the battery and memory card, the camera should be turned off. When you clean the body of the camera, do not use abrasive, alcohol-

based or organic cleaner. Use a professional lens wiping cloth and dedicated cleaner to wipe and clean the lens. Download your photos and remove the memory card when you are going to store the camera for a long period of time. If this camera is not in use for a long time, please keep it in a dry and clean condition. Our company will not pay compensation for any failure of playback of pictures or videos caused by improper operation. Safety notes for battery Please use a battery that is the same type as the one included. Please use the attached charger to charge the battery. If battery fluid leaks inside the camera, contact our customer service department. If battery fluid leaks onto your skin, rinse your skin with clean water and seek immediate medical attention. Disposal of used batteries should be carried out in accordance with the local (national or regional) regulations. To prevent the battery from being damaged, do not drop the battery or allow it to hit solid objects or to be scratched by the objects. Do not let the battery come in contact with metal objects (including coins) to avoid short circuiting, discharging, excessive heat, or possible leakage. Do not attempt to disassemble the battery. Do not heat the battery or throw it into a fire to avoid a possible explosion. Do not store the battery in a hot environment or in direct sunlight. If the battery overheats during charging or use, stop charging or use immediately. Turn off the product, remove the battery carefully, and wait until it cools down. When the camera is stored for a long period of time, remove the battery and keep it in a dry place that is not accessible to infants and children. In a colder environment, the performance of the battery could be noticeably reduced. When you install the battery, install it according to the positive and negative markings on the battery compartment. Never force it into the battery compartment. Do not expose the battery to water. Always keep the battery contacts dry. 7 7 Do not modify the name of the files or folders of the memory card using your PC. Modifying the file names may cause the files to not be recognized on the camera or a possible error may occur. A photo taken with the camera will be stored in the folder that is automatically generated on the memory card. Do not store photos that are not taken using this camera in these folders as the pictures cannot be recognized during the playback. When you insert a memory card, make sure the notch of the card matches the markings on the top of the card slot. Safety notes for memory card We suggest buying only well-known, name brand memory cards to ensure peak performance. Format the memory card using the camera before you use it or insert a new one. Do not drop the memory card or allow it to hit solid objects to avoid damaging it. Do not attempt to disassemble or repair the memory card. Do not expose the memory card to water. Always keep it dry. Do not remove the memory card when the camera is turned on. Otherwise, the memory card could be damaged. Do not directly edit the data on the memory card. Copy the data to your PC before you edit them. When the camera is stored for a long period of time, be sure to download your photos and remove the memory card. Store it in a dry environment. 8 Other Safety Notes Do not disconnect the power or turn the camera off during the update process. Doing so may cause incorrect data to be written and the camera may not power on later. Do not hang the neck strap of the camera around the neck of a child. When using your camera on an airplane, observe the relevant rules specified by the airline. Due to the limitations of manufacturing technology, the LCD may have a few dead or bright pixels. These pixels do no effect the quality or performance of the camera, photos or video. Do not expose the LCD to water. In a humid environment, only wipe it with a soft and dry cleaning cloth. If the LCD is damaged and the liquid crystal comes into contact with your skin, wipe your skin with a dry cloth immediately and rinse it with clean water. If liquid crystal comes into contact with your eyes, wash them with clean water at least for 15 minutes and seek immediate medical attention. If you accidentally swallow liquid crystal, rinse your mouth immediately and seek medical attention. 9 CONTENTS BEFORE YOU START .............. 1 SAFETY NOTES ..................... 6 CONTENTS ...........................10 GETTING READY ...................14 Accessories Included ......................14 Install Lens Cap and Neck Strap .....15 Part Names ......................................16 Installing Battery and Memory Card .19 Charging Battery .............................21 Vari-angle LCD .................................22 Turning Camera On and Off ...........23 Set your Language, Date/Time after the first power-on .............24 Set your Language, Date/Time .......24 Resetting your Language ..........25 Resetting Date/Time .................26 10 MODE OVERVIEW ................27 LCD Display......................................27 Overview of the Screen Icons in Shooting Mode .........................27 Overview of the Screen Icons in Movie Mode ...............................29 Overview of the Screen Icons in Playback Mode ..........................30 How to Take Pictures .......................31 Using the Mode Dial ........................32

..................35

.........................36

....................43

.................49 Face Beautifier Wi-Fi Mode Scene Mode Custom Settings BASIC OPERATION ...............51 Using EVF (Electronic View Finder) .51 Using the Zoom Function................52 Display Setting ................................53 AF Area ............................................55 Macro Mode.....................................56 Self-timer Mode ..............................57 Flash Mode .....................................58 WB (White Balance) Mode ..............60 Continuous Shot Mode ...................62 Exposure Compensation Functions Setting .............................................64 EV Adjustment...........................64 ISO Adjustment .........................65 Shutter Speed Adjustment .......65 Aperture Adjustment ................66 Using Quick Recording ...................66 i Button Function Menu ...................67 Using the Lens Function Ring .........68 Zoom/AF Mode ..........................68 Function Ring (Smart) Mode ....69 MF(Manual Focus) Mode ...........70 PLAYBACK ............................71 Viewing Photos and Videos ............71 Thumbnail View ...............................72 Using Zoom Playback (for still pictures only) ...................................73 Continuous Shot Group Playback ..74 Animation Panorama Play ...............75 Slideshow ........................................76 Photos and Video Deletion .............77 USING THE MENUS ..............78 Shooting Menu ................................78 Expo Metering ...........................79 OIS (Optical Image Stabilization) .............................79 Beautifier ...................................80 Select Scene .............................80 Shoot Setting1 .................................81 Image Size .................................82 11 11 Movie Size .................................83 Quality .......................................84 MF (Manual Focus) Assist .........85 AF Assist Beam ..........................86 Digital Zoom ..............................86 Shoot Setting 2................................87 Date Imprint ..............................88 Quick Review.............................88 Cont. AF .....................................89 Face Detection ..........................89 Custom Settings .......................90 Function Ring (Smart) ...............91 Playback Menu ................................92

...................................92

.......................93

..................................93

...................................94

.....................................95 Menu Display Mode Rotate Color HDR Touch-up Resize

.............................96

.................................97 Playback Settings ...........................97 Protect .......................................98 Delete ........................................98 DPOF (Digital Print Order Format) ......................................99 Trim ............................................100 Play Slide Show .........................100 General Settings ..............................101 Sound Settings..........................102 Power Saver...............................102 Language ...................................103 World Time ................................103 Date & Time ...............................103 LCD Brightness ..........................103 File Settings .....................................104 Format ......................................105 12 Exit .............................................115 Video System ..................................116 Supported HDMI Connections .......117 Connecting HDMI-Ready TV .....117 HDMI CEC Control ...........................118 Set Eye-Fi SD Card Connection Mode ................................................123 APPENDICES ...................... 124 Product Specifications ....................124 Prompts and Warning Messages ....128 Troubleshooting ..............................133 Copy to Card .............................106 File Numbering ..........................106 Reset Settings ...........................107 Version .......................................107 CONNECTION SETTINGS .. 108 Connecting to a Computer .............108 Setting the USB Mode ..............108 Transferring files to your computer ...................................109 Connecting to a PictBridge Compatible Printer ..........................110 Setting the USB Mode ..............110 Connecting to your Printer .......111 Using the PictBridge Menu .............112 Print (with Date) ........................112 Print (without Date) ...................113 Print Index .................................114 Print DPOF Images ....................115 13 GETTING READY Accessories Included Your camera box should contain the camera model you purchased along with the following accessories. If anything is missing or appears to be damaged, please contact your retailer.(Based on sales in different countries or regions, the shape of the AC adapter will vary. Please subject to the actual product will prevail.) Rechargeable Li-ion battery AC Adapter Micro USB Cable Neck Strap Lens Cap With Strap Quick Start Guide STOP Quick Start Guide Warranty Card Service Card CD-ROM 14 14 Install Lens Cap and Neck Strap

15 15 Part Names 7654 98 3 2 1 16 10 11 1. Micro HDMI Port 2. Micro USB Port 3. Zoom Lever 4. Shutter Button 5. Strap Eyelet 6. 7. 8. Power Button 9. AF Assist Beam/Self-timer Lamp 10. Flash Lamp 11. Lens Exposure Compensation Button Continuous Shot Button 5 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 12. Microphone 13. Electronic View Finder (EVF) 14. EVF / LCD Switch Button 15. Indicator Lamp 16. Mode Dial 17. 18. 19. Fast Video Recording Button Menu Button Jog Dial

[

[

Button/Down Button

[

[

] Macro Button/Left Button

] Flash Button/Right Button

] AF Button/Up Button

] Delete Button/Self-timer 23 22 21 20 20. 21 . 22. 23. Display Button Playback Button SET Button i Button Rolling the right button. jog dial can be for fast selection instead of pressing the up/down/left/

17 17 24. Vari-angle LCD 25. Diopter Adjustment Knob 26. Speaker 27. Lens Function Ring Lever 28. Lens Function Ring 29. Battery Cover 30. Tripod Socket 28 27 26 25 24 30 29 18 18 Installing Battery and Memory Card 1. Open the battery cover. 1 2 2. Insert the battery into the battery compartment according to the negative and positive directions as illustrated in the picture. Push the battery down until it locks in place. Battery Lock Knob 19 3. Insert the memory card into the memory card slot as shown in the diagram. 4. Close the battery cover. Write Protection Buckle 1 2 The memory card (SD/SDHC) is optional and not included in all camera packaging. It needs to be purchased separately. Please use an original memory card which is Class 4 or higher and has a capacity of 4GB to 32GB. To remove your memory card, open the battery cover, gently press the memory card to eject it and remove it carefully. 20 20 Charging Battery Please insert the battery and charge it under shutdown mode. 1. Connect the camera and the power charger using the supplied Micro USB cable. 2. Insert the plug of the power charger into the power outlet to charge the battery. After the battery is stored for a long period of time, use the supplied power charger to charge the battery prior to use. Charging indicator:

Steady orange: Charging Steady green: Charging complete To have maximum battery life, charge the battery for at least 4 hours the first time. Please charge the battery indoors between 0C and 40C. 2 1 Indicator Lamp 21 Vari-angle LCD The LCD is housed in the cameras body. You may follow the directions shown below to move it as needed:

2 3 1 4 1. Turn on the LCD along the direction shown by arrow . 2. Available to rotate 180 along the direction shown by arrow . 3. Available to rotate 90 along the direction shown by arrow . 4. Turn off the LCD along the direction shown by arrow . Please dont rotate the LCD with excessive force to prevent damages. Please turn off the LCD along the direction shown by arrow after use to protect it from scratches. 22 Turning Camera On and Off Press the power button to turn the camera on. To turn the camera off, press the power button again. Power Button When the power is off, press and hold the playback mode. button to power on and enter 23 Set your Language, Date/Time Set your Language, Date/Time after the first power-on 1. When you turn the camera on for the first time, the language selection screen appears. 2. Press the [

]/[

] button to select your desired language. 3. After you press the button to confirm the selection, the Date/Time settings screen appears. 4. Press the [

]/[

] button to select the Date/Time to be adjusted:

Time is displayed in YYYY.MM.DD HH:MM. Language Auto Auto English nglish Home Home 00:00 2017.04.29 00:00 Sound Settings Soun

Power Saver Powe

Language Lang

World World Time

Date Date & Time English LCD Brightness LCD B Franais Select Se Set Exit Exit Date & Time H-M 5. Press the [

] button to adjust the value for the selected Date/

Time.

]/[

2017

. 04 29 00 00

.

:

6. Press the button to confirm the time settings and the shooting screen appears. Select Set Exit 24 Resetting your Language After you set your language for the first time, follow the instructions below to reset your language. 1. Press the button, press the [

]

/[

press the 2. Press the [

] button to select

, and button to enter the menu.

] button to select

]/[

. 3. Press the [

]/[

] button to selectLanguageand press the button to enter the menu. 4. Press the [

] button to select your desired language and press the button to confirm.

]/[

5. Press the button and the shooting screen appears. Sound Settings Power Saver Language World Time Date & Time LCD Brightness Auto English Home 2017.04.29 00:00 Select Set Exit Language Sound Settings Soun

Power Saver Powe

Language Lang

World World Time

Date Date & Time English LCD Brightness LCD B Franais Auto Auto English nglish Home Home 00:00 2017.04.29 00:00 Select Se Set Exit Exit 25 25 Resetting Date/Time After you set your Date/Time for the first time, follow the instructions below to reset date and time. 1. Press the button, press the [

]

] button to select

, and button to enter the menu.

]/[

] button to

/[

press the 2. Press the [

. 3. Press the [

select

]/[

] button to selectDate & Timeand press the button to enter the menu. 4. Press the [

]/[

] button to select the Date/Time to be adjusted:

Time is displayed in YYYY.MM.DD HH:MM. Sound Settings Power Saver Language World Time Date & Time LCD Brightness Auto English Home 2017.04.29 00:00 Select Set Exit Date & Time H-M 5. Press the [

] button to press the value for your selected block. After you finish your settings, press the

]/[

button to confirm. 6. Press the button and the shooting screen appears. 2017

. 04 29 00 00

.

:

Select Set Exit 26 26 MODE OVERVIEW LCD Display Overview of the Screen Icons in Shooting Mode 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 9 1011 8 00:00:00 x3.0 0000 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 EV-0.0 F00.0 0/0000 ISO00000 1 2 Eye-Fi ON (with signal) Focus Mode 3 Quality 4 Face Detection 5 Maximum Record Time 6 Recording Speed (fps) Zoom Lever) 7 Video Pixels 8 Zoom Display(By turning the 9 Number of Pictures in Static 10 Ratio of Shooting Pixels 11 12 Battery Status Image Size Mode 13 Color Effect 14 No Memory Card 15 Beautifier 16 Flash Mode 17 OIS 18 Self-timer 27 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 00:00:00 x3.0 0000 EV-0.0 F00.0 0/0000 ISO00000 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 19 Lens Function Ring Custom Settings 20 ISO Value 21 Shutter Speed 24 Focus Frame 25 Exposure 26 Shooting Mode Compensation Value 22 Histogram 27 Custom Settings 23 Aperture Value 28 Macro Mode 29 White Balance 30 AF Area 31 Expo Metering 32 Single / Continuous Shot /

HDR / WDR / AE Bracketing 28 Overview of the Screen Icons in Movie Mode 1 00:00:00 00/15 2 3 Battery Status 4 1 2 Number of Videos Captured 3 Continuous Recording Time 4 Movie Mode 29 Overview of the Screen Icons in Playback Mode 16 15 14 13 1 2 3 4 6 75 2016/04/18 2016/04/18 000-0000 0000 x2 Thumbnail3x3 8 9 10 11 12 Eye-Fi ON (with signal) 1 2 Quality 3 Capture Date 4 File Name 5 Shooting Pixel Ratio 6 Image Size 7 Battery Status 8 Continuous Shot Group Playback Image Zoom Ratio 9 Image Area 10 Zoom Magnification Area 11 12 Index Prompt 13 Touch-up 14 HDR 15 DPOF File Icon 16 File Protection Icon 30 30 How to Take Pictures 1. Hold the camera with both hands as shown in the figure, not blocking the flash and lens by fingers. 2. Aim the camera at the object and then frame with the LCD. 3. Use the zoom lever to select Tele or Wide positions to zoom in or out on your subject. 4. Press the shutter button half way to focus on the subject. When the focus frame turns green, press the shutter button completely down to take the picture. 31 Using the Mode Dial This camera provides a convenient mode dial that allows you to manually switch between different modes with ease. The available modes are listed below:

Mode Name Icon Description Auto Mode Program AE Shutter priority Aperture priority In this mode, the optimal conditions for taking pictures will be set based on the subject and environment. It is the most commonly used mode for taking pictures. Under different scenes, the user can switch the ISO and EV value according to personal preference, the camera can automatically set the shutter speed and aperture value. Setting allows you to adjust the shutter speed / EV value and ISO value. The camera automatically sets the aperture value based on the shutter speed and ISO value to get the most appropriate exposure value. In this mode, you can adjusting the aperture size, EV and ISO values. The large aperture is to highlight the object focused through blurring the background, while the small aperture is for clear focusing on both the background and the object. 32 Manual Mode Face Beautifier Wi-Fi Mode Scene Mode This mode is for manually setting the aperture, shutter speed and ISO value. This mode automatically enhances facial features with skin softening touches and eye brightening capabilities. Enable image transmission and remote control by connecting smart device with Wi-Fi. Choose from 14 different pre-set scene types and effects for your photos. Movie Mode Record videos. Custom Settings The user can store frequently used shooting modes and parameters. Switching to this mode enables quick adjustment. 33 33 Please refer to the table below if any nonadjustable options in

(O: Optional X: Not optional) mode:

Options Mode Aperture Shutter EV ISO X

(Display) X

(Display) O O X

(Display) O X

(Display) O O O O X

(Display) O O O O mode you want. button to configure settings. 1. Turn the mode dial to select the 2. Press the 3. Press the [

4. Press the [

5. Press the

]/[

]/[

] button to select an adjustment setting.

] button to adjust the parameters. button to confirm the settings and enter the shooting screen. 34

 

 

Face Beautifier 1. Turn the mode dial to select face beautifier mode (

2. Press the 3. Press the [

]/[

] button or rolling the button and press the [

]/[

the button to confirm and enter the shooting screen.

).

] button to select

. jog dial to select an option and press Beautifier:Effect 1 Skin Soften Effect 1: Skin Soften Effect 2: Skin Soften + Eye Brightening Effect 3: Skin Soften + Eye Brightening + Eye Enlargement 35 Wi-Fi Mode Enable image transmission and remote control by connecting smart device with Wi-Fi. Matters needing attention before use:

Your smart device operating system version needs to be iOS 8 or higher, or Android 4.2 or higher. If not, please upgrade your smart device before using the App. Please do not use in places having high intensity magnetic field, electrostatic and electric wave interference (for example near a microwave oven), which may cause failure in receiving signals. To maintain a connection, please keep the camera within 10 meters (32.8 feet) without signal shielding interference. Please do not use Wi-Fi connection functionality on a plane. The camera and the smart device can only be connected one to one. Downloading the App package:

Download a dedicated installation package from the application store (App name:

PIXPRO Remote Viewer

) and then install it. Android devices : Search and download the App PIXPRO Remote Viewer in Google play, and install it following the instructions on the interface. iOS devices :

Search and download the App PIXPRO Remote Viewer store, and install it following the instructions on the interface. in App 36 1. Rotate the mode dial to and then enter the Wi-Fi selection interface.

] button to 2. Press the [

]/[

select and set options. Wi-Fi Mode Settings Station AP mode In AP mode, the camera will act as an access point enabling another Wi-Fi device to connect to it. Settings Customize the Wi-Fi settings for the camera system. Station Use the Station Mode to connect to a Personal Hotspot created by your mobile device. AP Mode In AP mode, the camera will act as an access point enabling another Wi-Fi device to connect to it. Rotate the mode dial to disconnect. AP Mode This camera may connect with your smart device through Wi-Fi. Settings of Camera:

1. Select and press the enter the setting interface. button to 2. Press the [

]/[

] button to select options to be adjusted, and press the setting interface. button to enter the option AP mode Setting pre-connected device for the following serial number:

SSID: PIXPRO AZ652_XXXX WPA2-PSK: XXXXXXXX Refresh Back Refresh: Create a new WPA2 PSK password. Back: Back to previous page. 37 Station Enable image transmission and remote control by connecting the camera with a Wi-Fi access point created by your smart device. 1. Enable the Wi-Fi access point of smart device. 2. Select the button to confirm press the connection with smart device. on camera and then 3. Press the [

]/[

] button to select the name of smart device to be connected and then press the button to confirm. Then, the camera enters the password input interface. Settings of Smart Device:

1. Enable the Wi-Fi of smart device and then search surrounding wireless devices. 2. Select the name of camera SSID to be connected and then input the eight-

digit number password after WPA2-PSK on the camera. 3. Click the icon of the App the APP. to enable Set up completion:

Once the App is connected to the camera, functional operations can be enabled on the smart device. 38 Press the [

]/[

] button to select:

Scan: Search again surrounding wireless devices.

: Select the name of device to be connected. Back: Back to Wi-Fi mode select screen. 4. Press the [

]/[

]/ [

]/

jog

] button or rolling the

[

dial to select and then press the button to confirm your selection. Enter the completion of WPA2- PSK after password storage. Enter Password A/a

#!?

Type the network security key Save Cancel Meanings of Interface Icons:

Icon Description Delete the last letter

#!?

Switch the display of letters in capital and lowercase Move the Cursor Switch the symbol input Input Space 39 Display of Wi-Fi Connection Status:

The Wi-Fi has successfully connected but App is not enabled. Wi-Fi Mode AP mode AP mode Connected with device MAC address: xx:xx:xx Disconnect The Wi-Fi has successfully connected and App is enabled. Wi-Fi Mode Connected with APP XXXXX Disconnect 5. Connect to network after storing the password. If connected, the LCD will display as shown below:

Wi-Fi Mode Station Connected with device SSID: XXXXXXXX Disconnect If connect failed, please check Wi-Fi device and try again. 6. After connection, click the icon of the on the smart device, you may App use it to carry out relative operation. 40 For interrupting the connection:

Wi-Fi Mode Disconnect from device?

No Yes No: Keep Wi-Fi connected and back to previous page. Yes: Disconnect and back to Wi-Fi connection screen. The Wi-Fi of smart device interrupts:

Setting The name of this camera can be changed through key stroking. 1. Select the and then press the button to enter the setting interface. 2. Press the [

] button to select options to be adjusted and then press the button to enter the menu.

]/[

DSC device MAC address PIXPRO AZ652_XXXX 38:67:93:XX:XX:XX Wi-Fi Mode Select Set Exit 3. Press the button to confirm settings and then skip the menu. AP mode Disconnected, please check Wi-Fi device and try again. Back Back: Back to the SSID interface. 41 DSC Device The default name of DSC device isPIXPRO AZ652_XXXX. Change the name of DSC device through key stroking. App Operating Instructions Refer to the "PIXPRO Remote Viewer User Manual" located on the web:

Americas DSC device PIXPRO AZ652_XXXX

#!?

Name between 1-18 Letters Save Cancel For the method of input, please refer to the introduction on password input on page 39. MAC address Check the wireless MAC address of this camera. 42 http://kodakpixpro.com/

Americas/support/downloads.php Europe http://kodakpixpro.com/Europe/

support/downloads.php Scene Mode You can select an appropriate mode from the 14 scene modes according to the type of environment you are shooting. The camera then configures the most appropriate settings automatically. 1. Rotate the mode dial to

, then the LCD will display as below:

Auto Scence The camera automatically detects the most suitable shooting scene. 2. Press the [

3. If any need of changing the scene, please press the

] button to select a scene, and press the

]/[

and finally the [

]/[

] button to reselect the scene. button and then the button to confirm. button 43 Scene Auto Scene Description The camera automatically detects the most suitable shooting scene. Panorama Mode For shooting up to 360-degrees of landscape. Handheld Night Reduce blur when shooting low light/ illuminated scenes. Multi Exposure Cat/Dog Snow Party Sport Night Portrait Portrait Children Take several shots and overlap as a single image. The camera automatically takes a picture when a dog or cat face is detected. For subjects in the snow. Reduce underexposure. For subjects at night without using a tripod. Capture sharp shots without blur. For fast-moving subjects. Capture sharp action shots without blur. For portraits against night time scenery. For shooting portraits For kids and pets. Flash is disabled for eye protection. Landscape Speed adjusted for brilliant images. Sunset Fireworks For sunsets. Capture subjects in strong sunlight. For fireworks at night. Slow shutter speed adjusted for brilliant images. 44 Auto Scene (ASCN) In ASCN scene mode, the camera can detect different environments intelligently and automatically select the best scene and photo settings for you. ASCN can intelligently detect the following scenes:

Mode Name Auto Landscape Backlit Portrait Macro Night Landscape Portrait Description The camera will automatically adjust the exposure and focus to ensure the best possible pictures. For landscapes, will automatically adjust the exposure to match the background. When the sun or any other light source is behind you, will automatically adjust the foreground exposure to produce the best pictures possible. The Macro setting is ideal for shooting small objects or close-up photos. For night scenes, will automatically increase the ISO value to compensate for low light. Most suitable for capturing people with focus on their faces. Night Portrait When you take portraits at night, or in low light conditions, will automatically adjust the exposure for people and night scenes. 45 Panorama Mode This feature allows you to capture a panoramic view that will have significantly more content than a single photograph. Follow the instruction arrow with a smooth and steady movement of the camera to seamlessly shoot an ultra-wide scene of up to 360 degrees. Follow the steps below:

1. Select the panorama mode (

) and then press the 2. Press the [

button to confirm.

]/[

]/

]/[

] button to select a shooting

[

direction. (The right direction is used as default if you do not make any choice), 2 seconds later, the camera is ready to take pictures. You can also press the button or half press the shutter button to be ready to take pictures. 3. Compose your shot on the LCD and half press the shutter button to focus on the subject. After focusing, fully press the shutter button down to take the first picture. At this time, the process dialog of panorama mode stitching appears on the screen. 46 F00.0 0/0000 Cancel Save 4. Rotate the camera according to the set direction. When the range of rotation does not exceed the range that the camera can detect, the progress dialog along the indication arrow partially turns red. When it completely turns red, panorama mode shooting is finished. Panoramic image can be played back by the method of flash playing. Please see the animation panoramic playback on page 75. During shooting, the flash, self-

timer, macro modes and exposure compensation are not available. Focus adjustment is also not available at this time. button to interrupt During panorama mode shooting, press the shooting and save the current pictures taken. Press the [

button to cancel shooting and not to save the previously taken pictures.

]

During panorama mode shooting, when the moving direction of the camera is wrong or the angle deviates from the internal settings, the LCD shows a warning message Improper alignment. Please try again.and the current pictures taken are saved. Multi Exposure Suitable for shooting moving objects (as many as 6) in the same background. Keep camera steady before shooting. Press and hold the shutter button to take 6 photos continuously when it will stop automatically. To stop shooting, release the shutter button in the midway. Objects shall be moved only from left to the right in order to be recorded. Objects moving from other directions would not be recorded. Shooting effect will be influenced if object is moving too fast or too close. Cat/Dog 1. It defaults to enabling the auto shoot after entering the Cat/Dog mode. When a face of cat or dog is detected, the camera will take photos automatically. Meanwhile, you also may press down the shutter button to shoot. 2. Press the [

] button to enter Auto Shoot menu. If this function is disabled, you may only take photos manually. At most, 10 cat /dog faces can be detected at one time. 47 Functions that can be adjusted in each scene are as below:

Scene Auto Scene Panorama Mode Handheld Night Multi Exposure Cat/Dog Snow Party Sport Night Portrait Portrait Children Landscape Sunset Fireworks Adjustable Functions Flash*1/Self-timer None Expo Metering/Self-timer*2 Expo Metering Auto Shooting/Continuous Shot/Expo Metering/Macro Continuous Shot/Expo Metering/Flash/Self-timer Continuous Shot/HDR/Expo Metering/Flash/Self-timer/Macro Continuous Shot/Expo Metering HDR/Expo Metering/Self-timer Continuous Shot/HDR/Expo Metering/Flash/Self-timer/Macro Continuous Shot/Expo Metering Expo Metering/Self-timer*2 HDR/WDR/Expo Metering/Flash/Self-timer*2 Continuous Shot/Expo Metering/Self-timer*2

*1 Means the flash as an option of Night Landscape mode in Auto Scene is non-adjustable.

*2 Means self-timer smile is not included in the self-timer. For continuous shot, there are onlyContinuous ShotandTime-Lapsefor selection. 48 Custom Settings The user can store the frequently used shooting modes and parameters and switch to this mode for quick adjustment. Settings under state after reset):

1. Turn the mode dial to select the mode (unset state or mode, and enter the setup screen, as shown in the figure below:

Select one capture mode to define CS . Auto Mode Confirm Exit 2. As shown in the figure, press the [

]

] button to select a capture mode

, and press

/[

that you want to define as the screen. button to enter the shooting 3. As shown in the figure, press the button, and choose whether to continue the the mode dial to skip. mode setting or rotate Go to setting CS mode Yes Or Rotate the mode dial to skip. For setting under other modes (use this method to select a different custom setting):

1. Select any mode to be stored. 2. Set your desired parameters in the current mode. 3. Press the

/[

press the 4. Press the [

button, press the [

] button to select

, and

]

button to enter the menu.

] button to select

]/[

. 49 5. Press the [

] button select Custom Settingsand press the button to enter the menu. 7. Turn the mode dial to switch to the custom settings (

). 8. The photo settings you stored the last time are invoked. When the mode is used for the first time, there is no preset parameter stored in the mode. If you want to remove the parameter setting ofCustom Settings, please see the reset function on page 107 to operate. Date Imprint Quick Review Cont. AF Face Detection Custom Settings Function Ring (Smart) Select Set Off Off Off Off Normal Exit 6. SelectYesto save orNoto cancel. Custom Settings Set camera to user custom mode No Yes 50 50 BASIC OPERATION Using EVF (Electronic View Finder) EVF functions as the LCD, which can be used to observe the scene and objects and for playback, preview and menu operations. EVF has the following advantages:

It will not be affected by ambient light and may avoid poor composition due to light reflection on the LCD. Follow the steps below:

1. Turn the camera on and press the button to switch to the EVF display. At this time, the LCD will become black. 2. View the scenes and objects through the EVF. 3. When the screen display is not clear, rotate the dioptric adjustment knob to adjust the screen sharpness. 4. Press the button again or restart the camera to switch back to the LCD display. The effect of eyes to refract rays of light is referred to as refraction. The capacity of refraction is represented by focal power, which is called diopter. Diopter adjustment is aimed at making the naked eyes of the operators with myopia (-300 or less) or hyperopia (+100) adapt to the viewfinder (EVF). 51 Using the Zoom Function Your camera is equipped with two types of zoom functions: optical zoom and digital zoom. Toggle the zoom lever of the camera to zoom in or out of the subject while taking pictures. x3.0 Zoom Indicator EV-0.0 F00.0 0/0000 ISO00000 When the optical zoom reaches the threshold as digital zoom, release and turn the zoom lever to T to switch between the optical zoom and digital zoom. Zoom Lever 52 Display Setting button to switch among 4 Mode:

Press the screens. Function Message Display No Message Display 00:00:00 x3.0 0000 EV-0.0 F00.0 0/0000 ISO00000 EV-0.0 F00.0 0/0000 ISO00000 Display with Grid and Histogram Message Display 00:00:00 x3.0 0000 x00.0 00:00:00 0000 EV-0.0 F00.0 0/0000 ISO00000 EV-0.0 F00.0 0/0000 ISO00000 53 button to display the playback screen, press the button to switch among No Message Display Mode:

Press the 3 screens. Function Message Display 0000/00/00 000-0000

Detailed Message Display 0000/00/00 000-0000 EV-0.0 F00.0 000mm 0/0000 ISO00000 54 54 AF Area In different photo shooting modes, you can select different focus methods.

(Adjustable in 1. Press the [

] button to display mode) the settings screen. Center-AF 2. Press the [

]/[

] button to select the following 4 modes:

Center-AF The focus frame appears on the center of the LCD to focus on the subject. Multi-AF The camera automatically focuses the subject in a wide area to find the focus point. Spot Focus Choose the single-point focus position within the scope of focus. Object Tracking:

Smart tracking of the object in motion under the focusing shooting. 3. Press the button to confirm the settings and enter the shooting screen. After enabling spot focus, rolling the jog dial to adjust the position of focus point in the screen. The function of object tracking cannot be enabled until successful focus. For tracking the focus, you need to keep the shutter semi-

pressed. 55 Macro Mode The Macro Setting is ideal for shooting small objects or close-up photos. This mode allows you to focus on subjects very close to the camera. 1. Press the [

] button to enter the Marco Menu. Macro On 2. Press the [

] button to select the following 2 modes:

]/[

Macro On Select this option to make focusing on the object closer to the lens (At the W side, the shooting distance should be more than 1 cm). Macro Off Select this option to disable Macro. 3. Press the button to confirm the settings and enter the shooting screen. 56 Self-timer Mode Using this function can take photos at regular time. The camera can be set to shoot after 2 seconds, 10 seconds since pressing the shutter or shoot after smile. 1. Press the [

] button to enter the self-timer menu. Self-timer 2sec Self-timer 10sec A single picture is shot 10 seconds after the shutter button is pressed. Self-timer Smile Press the shutter button and a picture will be taken immediately after a smile is detected. Self-timer Off Disables the self-timer. 2. Press the [

]/[

] button to select the following 4 modes:

Self-timer 2sec A single picture is shot 2 seconds after the Shutter button is pressed. 3. Press the button to confirm the settings and enter the shooting screen. When enabling the self-timer, pressing the shutter or the [

]

button can disable the self-timer and return to the shooting screen while keeping the self-timer setting. 57 When enabling the smile detection, button pressing the shutter or the can disable the self-timer and return to the shooting screen while keeping the self-timer smile setting. Self-timer settings will remain after completion of shooting with the self-timer. They can be canceled by switching modes or by turning the camera off and then on again. 58 Flash Mode The flash provides supplemental light for the scene. The flash is usually used when shooting against the light to highlight the object; it is also suitable for metering and shooting in darker scenes to improve the exposure. 1. Press the [

] button to enter the flash settings menu. Force Off 2. Press the [

]/[

] button to select the following 6 modes:

Force Off Flash is turned off. Fill Flash For fill flash at the moment of taking a picture. Flash Auto Camera flash goes off automatically based on existing light conditions. Red-Eye Reduction The camera emits a brief pre-flash before the picture is taken to reduce red-

eye effects. Slow Sync. This allows you to take pictures of people at night that clearly show both your subjects and the night time backdrop. The use of a tripod is recommended when shooting with this setting. Slow Sync.+Red-Eye Reduction Use this mode for slow synchrony shots with red-eye reduction. 3. Press the button to confirm the settings and enter the shooting screen. After pressing the shutter button half way to achieve focus lock, the flash will automatically pop up if needed. 59 59 WB (White Balance) Mode The white balance function allows adjustment of the color temperature for different light sources. (Adjustable in Mode) Follow the steps below to set white balance of the camera:

1. Press the button to enter white balance menu.

2. Press the [

]/[

] button to select the following 9 modes:

AWB Daylight Cloudy Fluorescent Fluorescent H Incandescent Manual WB Set WB according to the current light source, press the button to set. Color Temp. (1900K~10000K) button to enter Press the and rolling the jog dial to adjust the color temperature value. WB Bracketing Press the shutter button once to take three photos with different WB settings. 60 3. Press the button to confirm the settings and enter the shooting screen. button to enter options and then press the [

WB Bracketing:

Press the button to adjust the shift and rolling the Rotate clockwise to adjust X axis (B-A). BKT value Rotate counterclockwise to adjust Y axis (G-M). BKT value Press the button to confirm your settings. jog dial to adjust the BKT value (0, 1 and 2).

]/[

]/ [

]/[

]

WB Bracketing : BG1 2G Shift B 9 BKT 1 Confirm WB bracketing is for setting the bracketing range. Shift to both sides for 3 spaces at most. If at the page border, shift only to the other side and 2 photos can be taken. If no shift, only one photo can be taken. 61 61 Continuous Shot Mode Functions that can be enabled under each mode may be different. Mode For setting the single, continuous shot, Time-Lapse, HDR , WDR or AE bracketing functions. Please follow the following steps to set:

1. Press the button to enter the continuous shot menu. Single 2. Press the [

]/[

] button to select the following 8 modes:

Single Capture a single shot only. 62 Continuous Shot For taking more than one picture continuously. Cont.Shot-Fast (2M) For continuous shot with 2M pixels. Cont.Shot-High Speed (VGA) For continuous shot with VGA pixel. Time-Lapse Take pictures based on the preset interval (30sec/ 1min/

5min/ 10min).Press the button to select the interval time. HDR (-1EV, 0EV, +1EV) This setting is to control the high dynamic image range in taking still pictures, with vivid effect in highlight and that the effect in dark parts can identify the outline and depth of the object. (Use of tripod is recommended) WDR (Wide Dynamic Range) When the camera detects that there is a big contrast in brightness between scenes and such scenes are against the light, it will automatically adjust the brightness and saturation to capture an image that better represents the scene. AE Bracketing (0.3EV, 0.7EV, 1.0EV, 1.3EV, 1.7EV, 2.0EV) The camera will automatically and continuously take three pictures separately with a brightness of original, darker and brighter as long as you press the shutter once. Press the range of exposure. button to select the 3. Press the button to confirm the settings and then enter shooting screen. Mode:

Single Single WDR 63 63 Exposure Compensation Functions Setting EV Adjustment Set up to adjust the picture brightness. In the case of a very high contrast between the photographed object and the background, the brightness of the picture can be appropriately adjusted. (Adjustable in mode) EV-0.0 F00.0 0/0000 ISO00000 The adjustable range of exposure value is from EV -3.0 to EV+3.0. The EV function menu of the camera includes functions, such as EV adjustment, ISO, shutter adjustment, aperture adjustment, etc. Using the appropriate function settings can improve your pictures. Please follow the steps below to set:

button to display the 1. Press the settings screen. 4 options in [ Exposure Compensation Functions Setting ]:

EV Adjustment ISO Adjustment Shutter Speed Adjustment Aperture Adjustment 2. Press the [

]/[

] button to select the setting options. 3. Press the [

]/[

adjust the option values.

] button to 4. Press the button to complete the setting and enter shooting screen. 64 ISO Adjustment ISO allows you to set the sensitivity of the camera sensor. Please use a higher ISO value in darker places and a lower value in brighter conditions.

(Adjustable in mode) Shutter Speed Adjustment For shutter speed, the camera may automatically set the aperture value corresponding to the manually set shutter speed so as to obtain a most suitable exposure value. The movement of object may be shown by adjusting the shutter speed. High shutter value can make you clearly capture the movement of fast moving object while low shutter value can allow you to take a picture for fact moving object with a strong sense of movement.

(Adjustable in mode) EV-0.0 F00.0 0/0000 ISO00000 Options of ISO value: Auto, 100, 200, 400, 800, 1600 and 3200. EV-0.0 F00.0 0/0000 ISO00000 65 65 Aperture Adjustment You can adjust the aperture size value. Selecting a large aperture opening will emphasize the point of focus and show a blurry background and foreground. A small aperture opening will keep both the background and main object in clear focus.

(Adjustable in mode) EV-0.0 F00.0 0/0000 ISO00000 66 66 Using Quick Recording In shooting mode, press the begin recording video. button to 00:00:00 00/15 15 pictures at most can be taken by pressing the shutter when recording. The sizes of images taken are as below when playing them back:

FHD -> 2M HD -> 1M DVD -> VGA After recording, press the again to stop recording. The camera will store the video and return to the shooting screen. button i Button Function Menu Functions that can be enabled are different under each mode. Mode:

The image color setting allows you to select different effects. 1. Press the button to select the Image color setting menu. Normal 2. Press the [

]/[

] button to select the image color setting options. Normal Vivid Black and White Sepia Partial Color-Red Partial Color-Yellow Partial Color-Blue Partial Color-Green Dreamy Vignetting EKTACHROME Film KODACHROME Film KODACOLOR Film Salon Punk Negative Reflection Sketch Fish Eye 4 Grids - Stylish(2M) Fish Eye effect is not available when shot size is 20M. 67 67 Using the Lens Function Ring There is a lens function ring lever in one side of the lens. Moving it up and down can switch among ZOOM/AF, SMART and MF mode. Zoom/AF Mode Rotate the lens function ring for optical zoom. 1. Switch the lens function ring lever to position

. 2. Rotate the lens function ring to optically zoom the object. x3.0 EV-0.0 F00.0 0/0000 ISO00000 Rotating the lens function ring in Zoom/AF mode is only for optical zoom. 00:00:00 0000 EV-0.0 F00.0 0/0000 ISO00000 68

 

 

Function Ring (Smart) Mode Rotate the lens function ring to set parameters of aperture, shutter, ISO, EV, etc. 1. Switch the lens function ring lever to position

. 2. Rotate the lens function ring or rolling jog dial to select options the needed. EV-0.7 EV+0.7 EV-0.3 EV+0.3 EV+0.0 EV-0.0 F00.0 0/0000 ISO00000 3. Press the button to complete the setting and enter shooting screen. The selection of functions of Function Ring (Smart) in the menu is needed before using Function Ring (Smart) mode. The default setting is Normal.

(See P91 for details) Options Normal Aperture priority Shutter priority EV ISO Continuous Shot Color White Balance Image Size Expo Metering Flash AF Area Referred Pages P64 P66 P65 P64 P65 P62 P67 P60 P82 P79 P58 P55 69 69 MF(Manual Focus) Mode Rotate the lens function ring for manual focus. 1. Switch the lens function ring lever to position

. 2. If the lens function ring is operated jog dial , the focus or rolling the enlargement frame will appear on the LCD. After clear focus is achieved through manual adjustment, press the button to close the focus enlargement frame. The camera will return to the normal shooting screen. Semi-pressing the shutter button will have no effect;

you need to fully press the shutter button to take a normal photo. 00:00:00 0000 EV-0.0 F00.0 0/0000 ISO00000 70 70 00:00:00 0000 10 cm EV-0.0 F00.0 0/0000 ISO00000 mode. Manual focus works only under the The MF assist needs to be enabled in the menu before it will function. (See P85 for details) PLAYBACK Viewing Photos and Videos For viewing taken photos and videos on the LCD:

1. After pressing the button, the last photo or video clip taken will be displayed on the LCD. 2. Press the [

]/[

] button to scroll through the photos or video clips stored in the built-in memory or on the memory card. 3. To play a selected video clip, press the An operation guide appears on the screen when playing back a video. Press the appropriate buttons to enable the corresponding functions. button to enter the movie playback mode. Under Playback Paused 00:00:00 00:00:00 00:00:00 00:00:00 Pause Rewind Fast Forward Clockwise Volume Up Counterclockwise Volume Down Volume Mute Play Frame Backward Frame Forward Cancel playback 71 Thumbnail View When in playback mode, rotate the zoom lever counter to the display thumbnail images of the photos and videos on the screen. position to W Zoom Out T Zoom In 1. Slide the zoom lever to switch between 3x3 and 4x4 thumbnails. Select index mode Select index mode 72 2. Press the [

]/[

]/[

]/

] button to select a picture or

[

video clip to view and press the button to restore it to the original size. 3. As shown in the picture, press the button to select index mode. 4 options in [ Index Mode ] :

Single Index Date Folder Cont. Group Slide Show When the icon this is a video file. appears, it means When the icon this is a continuous group file. appears, it means Using Zoom Playback (for still pictures only) button to switch to playback mode. When playing back photos, you can also use the zoom lever to zoom in on the photos 2 to 8 times. 1. Press the 2. Press the [

3. Rotate the zoom lever to 4. Rolling the 5. The bottom right corner of the LCD will display the number of times and area of the jog dial clockwise to zoom in and counterclockwise to zoom out.

] button to select a picture to be zoomed in. position to zoom in.

]/[

photo zooming operation. x2 x2

]/ [

]/[

] button to navigate and select a part of the 6. Press the [

]/[

image to be zoomed in. 7. Press the button to return the image to its original scale. Movie images cannot be magnified. 73 Continuous Shot Group Playback High speed (VGA) and fast (2M) can make Continuous Shot for group image playback. 1. Press the 2. Press the [

3. Press the

] button to select continuous group. button to enter playback screen. button to start playback.

]/[

0000/00/00 000-0000 0000/00/00 000-0000 0000 Thumbnail3x3 Cont. Group 00 00 00 00 Playing Pause Pause Cancel Play (back to 1:1 playback for continuous group) Playing Play Previous photo (loop available only in continuous group) Next photo (loop available only in continuous group) Cancel Play (back to 1:1 playback for continuous group) Pause 74 Animation Panorama Play Panoramic animation playing is to play full size image in accordance with the shooting direction. After playing, it will automatically return to the static screen of panoramic image. 1. Press the 2. Press the [

3. Press the

] button to select animated panoramic photos. button to play in selected shooting direction. button to enter playback screen.

]/[

0000/00/00 000-0000 Thumbnail3x3 Video Panorama Playing Pause Cancel Play Pause In the process of panoramic animation playback, press the [

playing and return to the playback screen.

] button to stop Picture will not be rotated during panorama play or pause. 75 Slideshow This setting allows you to view all the stored images as a slideshow. 1. Press the button to enter playback screen. 2. Rotate the zoom lever counter to the position to display thumbnails 3x3 button to select and then press the the index mode. Slide show Back 3. Press the [

]/[

] button to select slideshow playing and then press the button to enter slide option. 4. Press the [

]/[

] button to select play effect and then press the button to confirm. 76 Exit Exit Type 1: Slow-in and slow-out Type 2: Separate in middle and move off to the left and right Type 3: Separate into blocks and spin in Photos and Video Deletion

] button to delete your photos and videos. In playback mode, press the [

To delete photos or videos:

1. Press the 2. Press the [

3. Press the [

]/[

button to switch to playback mode.

] button to select the photos or videos to be deleted.

] button and the deletion screen is displayed. 4. Press the [

]/[

button to confirm.

] button to select Delete OneorExitand press the Erased photos/video clips cannot be recovered. Please refer to page 98 for instructions on deleting more than one image at a time. 77 2. Press the [

]/[

] button to select the shooting menu to be set. 3. Press the [

rolling the of the shooting menu to be set and then press the button to confirm.

]/[

jog dial to select options

] button or Refer to the following pages for more details about each setting. USING THE MENUS Shooting Menu button Mode:

1. In shooting mode, press the to enter the shooting menu. 12 options in [ Shooting Menu ]:

Continuous Shot Mode (refer to P62) Expo Metering AF (Auto Focus) Area (refer to P55) WB (White Balance) Mode (refer to P60) Macro Mode (refer to P56) Color (refer to P67) Flash mode (refer to P58) OIS (Optical Image Stabilization) Self-Timer Mode (refer to P57) Beautifier (Adjustable only in Mode) Select Scene

(Adjustable only in Mode) Menu Functions that can be enabled are different under each mode. 78

 

 

Expo Metering Use this setting to select the target size of the cameras field of view to be metered. OIS (Optical Image Stabilization) This mode can help reduce photo blur caused by unintentional hand shake, or low light. Expo Metering: AiAE OIS: On Spot For metering the block displayed in the center of the screen. Center For metering the object in the center of the screen. AiAE (Artificial Intelligence AE) For automatically selecting the central and surrounding metering to weight a proper metering value. OIS: Off OIS: On Use this image stabilization mode in dark environments. Shooting in a windy or unstable environment (such as a moving vehicle) may cause blurred images. Using a tripod, suggest the image stabilizer is deactivated. 79 79 Beautifier Set the effect of the face beautifier mode. Select Scene Select the scene mode under the SCN mode. Beautifier:Effect 1 Select Scene

. Skin Soften Effect 1: Skin Soften Effect 2: Skin Soften

+ Eye Brightening Effect 3: Skin Soften

+ Eye Brightening

+ Eye Enlargement 80 80 Shoot Setting1 Mode:

1. Press the button, press the [

]/

[

] button to select

. 2. Press the 3. Press the [

. button to enter the menu.

]/[

] button to select 6 options in [ Shoot Settings 1 ]:

Image Size Movie Size Quality MF Assist AF Assist Beam Digital Zoom Functions that can be enabled are different under each mode. 4. Press the [

] button to select the item to be set and press the

]/[

button to enter the menu. 5. Press the [

]/[

] button to select an option and press the button to confirm. 81 Image Size The size setting refers to the image resolution in pixels. A higher image resolution allows you to print that image in larger sizes without degrading the image quality. Image Size Image Size Image 20M Movie Movie Size 18M-3:2 Qualit Quality 15M-16:9 MF As MF Assist 10M AF As AF Assist Beam 5M Digita Digital Zoom 3M Se Select 30fps 1920x1080 30fps G Fine JPG Fine Off Off Off Off Off Off Exit Exit Set 20M: High quality printing 18M-3:2: full size printing 15M-16:9: 16:9 display 10M: poster printing 5M: A3 printing 3M: A4 printing 2M-16:9: 4x 6 printing VGA: E-Mail The larger the number of recorded pixels, the larger the file size and the fewer files that can be saved on your memory card. 82 Movie Size Set the image resolution used during video recording. Movie Size Image Size Image 1920x1080 30fps Movie Size Movie 1280x720 60fps Quality Qualit 1280x720 30fps MF Assist MF As 640x480 30fps AF Assist Beam AF As 640x360 120fps Digital Zoom Digita Select Se Set 20M 20M 1920x1080 30fps 30fps JPG Fine G Fine Off Off Off Off Off Off Exit Exit Total time of video recorded for each setting:

No. Image Pixel Frame

(fps) Recommendation Recording time

(approximate)

(4GB) 1 1920x1080 *

1280x720 *

2 3 1280x720 *

4 640x480 5 640x360 30 60 30 30 120 Class 6 Class 6 Class 4 Class 4 Class 6 30 minutes 33 minutes 59 minutes 105 minutes 54 minutes 83

* The longest recording time is 29 minutes at one time. When recording in higher pixel resolutions for extended periods of time, this can cause the camera to generate heat. This is not a camera malfunction. When the video format is set as 640x360 (120fps), shooting time is 30 seconds, playback time is 2 minutes. Sound recording is disabled when 640x360 120fps is chosen. Quality The quality setting can be used to adjust the image compression ratio. Quality Image Size Image RAW+JPG Movie Movie Size RAW Qualit Quality JPG Fine MF As MF Assist JPG Best AF As AF Assist Beam Digita Digital Zoom Select Se Set 20M 20M 30fps 1920x1080 30fps G Fine JPG Fine Off Off Off Off Off Off Exit Exit RAW+JPG Creates two images: one in RAW and the other in JPG best. RAW The image file will contain more data that can be used for the purpose of editing on a computer. JPG Fine JPG Best 84 If RAW or RAW+JPG is selected, the settings of Colour Effect, Continuous Shot, Cont.Shot-Fast (2M), Cont.Shot-

High Speed (VGA), HDR and AE Bracketing cannot be adjusted. 00:00:00 0000 The RAW file format provides lossless compression of the image data, which is not processed by the camera. The RAW file may be opened and modified using the image processing software, PhotoStudio Darkroom, that is located on the CD-ROM included with this camera. PhotoStudio Darkroom supports Windows 7/8/10 and Mac OS X (V10.8~V10.11). EV-0.0 F00.0 0/0000 ISO00000 Single MF (Manual Focus) Assist Enables an enlarged focus window during the use of manual focus to provide the user better visibility for focus control.

(Adjustable in mode) MF Assist 20M 20M 1920x1080 30fps 30fps G Fine JPG Fine Off Off Off Off Off Off Exit Exit Image Size Image Off Movie Size Movie On Qualit Quality MF As MF Assist AF As AF Assist Beam Digita Digital Zoom Select Se Set Off On 85 AF Assist Beam In a darker environment, AF assist beam can be turned on for better focus. AF Assist Beam Image Size Image Off Movie Movie Size On Quali Quality MF A MF Assist AF As AF Assist Beam Digita Digital Zoom Select Se Set 20M 20M 30fps 1920x1080 30fps G Fine JPG Fine Off Off Off Off Off Off Exit Exit Off On Digital Zoom This setting is for adjusting digital zoom. If this function is disabled, only optical zoom can be used. Digital Zoom 20M 20M 1920x1080 30fps 30fps G Fine JPG Fine Off Off Off Off Off Off Exit Exit Image Size Image Off Movie Movie Size On Quali Quality MF A MF Assist AF As AF Assist Beam Digita Digital Zoom Select Se Set Off On 86 86 Shoot Setting 2 Mode:

1. Press the button, press the [

.

] button to select

/[

]

2. Press the 3. Press the [

. button to enter the menu.

]/[

] button to select 6 options in [ Shoot Settings 2 ]:

Date Imprint Quick Review Cont. AF Face Detection Custom Settings Function Ring (Smart) Functions that can be enabled are different under each mode. 4. Press the [

] button to select the item to be set and press the

]/[

button to enter the menu. 5. Press the [

]/[

] button to select an option and press the button to confirm. 87 Date Imprint Include a Date/Time stamp on the photo image. Date Imprint Date Date Imprint Off Quick Quick Review Date Cont. Cont. AF Date/Time Face Face Detection Custo Custom Settings Funct Function Ring (Smart) Se Select Set Off Off Off Off Off Off On On Normal Normal Exit Exit Quick Review This option enables a brief review of images immediately after capture. Each picture will be displayed on the LCD per the selections below. Quick Review Date Date Imprint Off Quick Quick Review 1 Sec Cont. Cont. AF 2 Sec Face Face Detection 3 Sec Custo Custom Settings Funct Function Ring (Smart) Select Se Set Off Off Off Off Off Off On On Normal Normal Exit Exit Off 1 sec 2 sec 3 sec 2017/04/29 00:00 Off Date Date / Time 88

 

 

Cont. AF Enable the continuous AF to be able to continuously focus automatically when taking pictures. Face Detection For detecting and focusing on faces to make all faces as clear as possible in photo mode. Cont. AF Face Detection Date Date Imprint Off Quick Quick Review On Cont. Cont. AF Face Face Detection Custo Custom Settings Funct Function Ring (Smart) Select Se Set Off Off Off Off Off Off On On Normal Normal Exit Exit Off On Date Date Imprint Off Quick Quick Review On Cont. Cont. AF Face Face Detection Custo Custom Settings Funct Function Ring (Smart) Select Se Set Off Off Off Off Off Off On On Normal Normal Exit Exit 1. Hold the camera steadily and then focus on the object to detect its face. A focus frame will appear at the face on the screen when a face is detected. 89 2. Press the shutter button half-way down to focus. The LCD will show a green focus frame when the subject is in focus. Custom Settings Custom Settings stores the current photo shooting mode and its parameters. The stored mode and parameters are directly invoked in Custom Settings mode. Custom Settings Set camera to user custom mode No Yes F2.9 1/50 3. Press the shutter button all the way down to take pictures. No Yes The closed eyes detection is usually on. If the camera detects in the course of quick review there is a face with eyes closed, a prompt of closed eyes will appear

. 90 Function Ring (Smart) The options listed below can be set as Function Ring (Smart) Custom. Once set, the chosen function can be quickly adjusted with the lens function ring during shooting. Function Ring (Smart) Off Off Off Off Off Off Off Off Normal ormal Exit Exit Date Imprint Date Normal Quick Review Quick Aperture priority Cont. Cont. AF Shutter priority Face Detection Face EV Custo Custom Settings ISO Function Ring (Smart) Funct Continuous Shot Select Se Set Normal Aperture priority Shutter priority EV ISO Continuous Shot Color White Balance Image Size Expo Metering Flash AF Area 91 Playback Menu Mode:

1. Press the button to display the playback screen and press the button to enter the menu. 7 options in [ Playback Menu ]:

Menu Display Mode Rotate Color HDR Touch-up Resize 2. Press the [

] button to select the playback to be set and press the button to enter.

]/[

3. Press the [

]/[

select an option and press the button to confirm.

] button to Refer to the following pages for more details about each setting. 92 Menu 7 options in [ Menu ]

Shoot Settings 1

(See P81 for details) Shoot Settings 2

(See P87 for details) Playback Settings

(See P97 for details) General Settings

(See P101 for details) File Settings

(See P104 for details) Connection Settings

(See P108 for details) Wi-Fi Settings

(See P41 for details) Display Mode Rotate You can use this setting to change the orientation of the picture. Date Folder Date Mode: Arranged by date. Back Normal Mode: Display all images. Date Mode: Arranged by date. Cont. Photo Mode: Arranged by Cont. Photo Group. Slide Show The Date Folder is displayed in date order based on photo shooting date/

time. If there is no continuous shot image file in memory, continuous photo mode cannot be enabled. Exit

: Exit

: Turn Left

: Turn Right Videos and panoramic pictures cannot be rotated. The rotated picture file will replace the original photo. 93 93 Vignetting Salon Punk (4M) Negative (8M) Reflection Fish Eye 4 Grids - Stylish (2M) In playing back single photos, press the effect setting menu. button to enter the color Fish Eye effect is not available when shot size is 20M. Color This setting allows you to change the picture color effect. The file is saved as a new photo and stored in memory together with the original photo.

Exit Vivid Black and White Sepia Partial Color-Red Partial Color-Yellow Partial Color-Blue Partial Color-Green Dreamy 94

 

 

HDR With the HDR function, pictures that are overexposed may be corrected to optimize the highlights and lowlights captured to more accurately represent the actual scene. Select with HDR :

0000/00/00 000-0000 Exit Thumbnail3x3 After using the HDR function, the image will be saved as a new file and the original file is still stored in the memory.

: Exit

: HDR 95 Touch-up The playback beauty feature allows for beautification using three individual effects. Select with touch-up:

0000/00/00 000-0000 Thumbnail3x3 Exit

: Exit

: Red-Eye Reduction

: Skin Soften

: Eye Brightening

: Eye Enlargement Using the face beautifier mode allows you to select from single, two, or all three effects combined. 96 96 Resize This setting allows you to resize a picture to a particular resolution and saves it as a new picture. Exit

: Exit

: Resize to 1024x768

: Resize to 640X480 Only for adjusting pictures with high resolution to those with low resolution. Sizes of photos taken in panorama mode or rotated cannot be adjusted. Playback Settings Mode:

1. Press the button, press the [

.

] button to select

/[

]

2. Press the 3. Press the [

. button to enter the menu.

]/[

] button to select 5 options in [ Playback Settings ]:

Protect Delete DPOF Trim Play Slide Show 4. Press the [

] button to select the item to be set and press the

]/[

button to enter the menu. 5. Press the [

]/[

] button to select an option and press the button to confirm. Refer to the following pages for more details about each setting. 97 Protect To prevent any pictures or videos from being accidentally erased, use this setting to lock one or all of the files. Protect Protec Protect One Delete Delete DPOF DPOF Date Folder Cont. Group Trim Trim All Play Slide Show Play S Reset Select Se Set Exit Exit One Lock the selected photo or video if they are unprotected; unlock the selected photo or video if they are protected. Date Folder Protect all photos in the Date Folder. Cont. Group Protect all photos in the Cont. Group. All Lock all photos or videos. Reset Cancel all locked photos or videos. 98 Delete You can delete one or all photo/video files. Delete Protect Prote One Delete Delete DPOF DPOF Date Folder Cont. Group Trim Trim All Play Slide Show Play S Select Se Set Exit Exit One Delete one photo or video. Date Folder Delete all photos in the Date Folder. Cont. Group Delete all photos in the Cont. Group. All Delete all photos or videos. The indicator means a file is protected. File protection must be removed first before a file can be deleted. Deleting files will cause DPOF settings to be reset. When one photo in the Cont. Group and Date Folders is protected, it will be kept but any other photos will be deleted. DPOF (Digital Print Order Format) The DPOF feature allows you to compile and select a group of pictures that you would like to print and will save your selection on the memory card so that you can use the memory card to print without having to individually specify the photos you want to print. DPOF Protect Prote Delete Delete One All DPOF DPOF Reset Trim Trim Play Slide Show Play S Select Se Set Exit Exit One All Reset The printer that supports DPOF is needed for printing. 99 Trim The Trim setting allows you to crop photos and save them as new pictures. 1. SelectYesto confirm trim. Toggle the zoom lever or rolling the jog dial to select the aspect ratio and press the [

] buttons

]/[

]/[

]/[

to adjust the part you want to trim. Yes Back 2. Press the button and theSave change? prompt appears. Select to change and save the picture. Select to cancel changes and return to the trim prompt screen. The image cannot be clipped/trimmed again once it has been clipped to 640X480. Videos, RAW files cannot be trimmed. 100 100 The picture after trimming cannot be trimmed again. Play Slide Show This setting allows you to view all the stored images as a slideshow. Play Slide Show Protect Prote All Files Delete Delete DPOF DPOF Trim Trim Still Captures Videos Cont. Group Play Slide Show Play S Select Se Set Exit Exit All Files To display and play back all images in memory card. Still Captures To display and play back images of photo files in memory card. Videos To play back movies on memory card. Cont. Group To only play back images arranged by cont. group in memory card. General Settings Mode :

1. Press the button, press the [

.

] button to select

/[

]

2. Press the 3. Press the [

. button to enter the menu.

]/[

] button to select 6 options in [ General Settings ] :

Sound Settings Power Saver Language World Time Date & Time LCD Brightness 4. Press the [

] button to select the item to be set and press the

]/[

button to enter the menu. 5. Press the [

]/[

] button to select an option and press the button to confirm. Refer to the following pages for more details about each setting. 101 Sound Settings With this setting you may adjust the sound volume. Press the [

the volume and press the confirm our setting.

] button to adjust button to

]/[

Power Saver This setting allows you to save power and get the maximum possible running time for your camera's batteries. Turn the LCD and camera off automatically after a consecutive period of inactivity. Sound Settings Power Saver Volume Sound Settings Sound Auto Power Saver Power Normal Langua Language Best World T World Time Date & Time Date &

LCD Brightness LCD B Off Off Auto Auto English glish Home ome 2017.04.29 00:00 00:00 Select Set Exit Select Sele Set Exit Exit Auto Normal Best Power Saver Auto Normal Best LCD power off time 3 min 1 min 30 s Turn off time 5 min 3 min 1 min 102 Language Refer to the Reset your language section on page 25. Date & Time Refer to the Reset Date/Time section on page 26. World Time The World Time setting is a useful function for your overseas trips. This feature enables you to display the local time on the LCD while you are abroad. 1. Press the [

]/[

] button to select the departure place (

destination (

) fields.

]/[

] button to 2. Press the [

) and select a city located in the same time zone as that of the field. Press the button to confirm settings. LCD Brightness Use this setting to adjust the brightness of your LCD. Press the [

] button to adjust the brightness of screen and press the button to confirm.

]/[

LCD Brightness Select Set Exit 103 File Settings Mode :

1. Press the button, press the [

.

] button to select

/[

]

2. Press the 3. Press the [

. button to enter the menu.

]/[

] button to select 5 options in [ File Settings ] :

Format Copy to Card File Numbering Reset Settings Version 4. Press the [

] button to select the item to be set and press the

]/[

button to enter the menu. 5. Press the [

]/[

] button to selectYesorNoand press the button to confirm. Refer to the following pages for more details about each setting. 104 Format Please note: formatting enables you to delete all contents in the memory card or built-in memory, including protected photo and movie files. Format Doing so will clear all data. No Yes If you selectYesthe camera formats its memory. If there is no memory card in the camera, the built-in memory will be formatted; if there is a memory card, it will be formatted only. 105 105 Copy to Card Use this setting to copy the files stored in the built-in memory to a memory card. Copy to Card Copy files from built-in memory to the memory card. No Yes If there is no card available in the camera, this function will not be displayed. File Numbering After you take a picture or video clip, the camera will save it with a sequential number. You can use this to reset the file numbering to 1. File Numbering Create a new directory and reset the file number. No Yes 106 Reset Settings Use this setting to restore the camera to its original default settings. Version Use this setting to view the current camera firmware version. Reset Settings Reset camera settings to factory defaults. No Yes

FW Version: X.XX When there is a new firmware version in the memory card, selectYesto update. Version Current Ver: X.XX New Ver: X.XX Update Firmware?

No Yes 107 CONNECTION SETTINGS Connecting to a Computer You can use a Micro USB cable to connect the camera and copy (transmit) photos to a computer, printer or other device. 4. Press the [

]/[

selectPCand press the to confirm.

] button to button Setting the USB Mode The cameras Micro USB port can be set to connect with either a computer or a printer. The following steps will allow you to ensure that the camera is correctly configured to connect with a PC. 1. Press the button, press the [

]

] button to select and button to enter the menu.

]/[

] button to

/[

press the 2. Press the [

. 3. Press the [

select selectUSBand press the to enter the menu.

]/[

] button to button USB USB PC TV-System TV-Sy Printer HDMI CEC Control HDMI USB PC PC NTSC NTSC Off Off Select Se Set Exit Exit 108 Transferring files to your computer The computer will automatically detect the camera as a removable drive. Double-

click the my computer icon on the desktop to locate the removable drive and to copy folders and files in the drive to a directory on your PC as you would copy any typical folder or file. Follow the steps below to connect the camera to a computer. 1. Make sure the computer is turned on. 2. Connect one end of the supplied Micro USB cable to the Micro USB port on your camera. 3. Connect the other end of the cable to an available USB port on your computer. 4. After the transmission is complete, disconnect the Micro USB cable according to the instructions specifying how to safely remove USB devices. 109 109 Connecting to a PictBridge Compatible Printer PictBridge technology allows printing of the photos saved in the memory card by the printer. To find out if a printer is PictBridge compatible, simply look for the PictBridge logo on the packaging or check the owner's manual for specifications. With the PictBridge function on your camera, you can print the captured photos directly to a PictBridge compatible printer using the supplied Micro USB cable, without the need for a PC. Setting the USB Mode The cameras Micro USB port can be set to connect with either a PC or a Printer, the following steps will ensure that the camera is correctly configured to connect with a Printer. 1. Press the button, press the [

]

/[

press the 2. Press the [

. select

] button to select and button to enter the menu.

]/[

] button to 3. Press the [

]/[

selectUSBand press the to enter the menu.

] button to button 4. Press the [

]/[

] button to selectPrinterand press the button to confirm. USB USB PC TV-System TV-System Printer HDMI CEC Control HDMI CEC Control USB Printer Printer NTSC NTSC Off Off Select Select Set Set Exit Exit After the camera is reset, it will switch to PC mode automatically from USB mode. See Using the PictBridge Menu section on page 112. 110 Connecting to your Printer 1. Make sure the printer is turned on. 2. Connect one end of the supplied Micro USB cable to the Micro USB port on your camera. 3. Connect the other end of the cable to the USB port on the printer. If the camera is not connected to a PictBridge compatible printer, the following error message will appear on the LCD. Connect failed The error message above will also appear if the USB mode is set incorrectly, in which case you should disconnect the Micro USB cable, check the USB mode settings, ensure that the printer is turned on, and then try connecting the USB cable again. 111 111 Using the PictBridge Menu After setting the USB mode to printer, the PictBridge menu will appear. PictBridge Print (with Date) Print (without Date) Print Index Print DPOF Images Exit Select Set Print (with Date) If you have set the date and time on your camera, the date and time will be recorded and saved with each photo you take. 1. In the PictBridge menu, selectPrint

(with Date)and the screen as shown below appears.

]/[

] button to Press the [

select a menu item and press the button to enter the item. Refer to the following sections for more detailed information on each setting. 01 Back 2. Press the [

]/[

] button to select a photo to be printed. 112 3. Press the [

]/[

] button to select the number of copies for the currently displayed photo. 4. Press the button and the following screen will appear. PictBridge Print (With Date) Yes Cancel 5. SelectYesand press the button to confirm; selectCancelto cancel printing. Print (without Date) Use this setting to print the photos without dates on them. 1. In the PictBridge menu, selectPrint

(without Date)and the screen as shown below appears. 01 Back 2. Press the [

]/[

] button to select a photo to be printed. 3. Press the [

]/[

] button to select the number of copies for the currently displayed photo. 4. Press the button and the following screen will appear. 113 113

 

 

PictBridge Print (Without Date) Yes Cancel 5. SelectYesand press the button to confirm; selectCancelto cancel printing. Print Index You can print all photos in the camera via this function. 1. In the PictBridge menu, selectPrint Indexand the screen as shown below appears. PictBridge Print Index Yes Cancel 2. SelectYesand press the button to confirm; selectCancelto cancel printing. 114 Print DPOF Images To use DPOF printing, you must select your photos for printing using the DPOF settings beforehand. See DPOF section on page 99. 1. In the PictBridge menu, selectPrint DPOF Imagesand the screen as shown below appears. PictBridge Print DPOF Images Yes Cancel 2. SelectYesand press the button to confirm; selectCancelto cancel printing. Exit SelectExitto exit the PictBridge menu. At this time, the messageRemove USB Cable!appears on the screen. Remove USB Cable!

Disconnect the Micro USB cable from the camera and printer. 115 Video System You can use the AV cable (which should be purchased separately) to connect the camera and the television for realizing the video output. Connect one end of the AV cable to AV port of the camera, connect the other end to AV-OUT port of the television. Adjust the format of the video output system according to your requirements, and the steps are as follows:

1. Press the button, press the [

]

] button to select and button to enter the menu.

/[

press the 2. Press the [

. 3. Press the [

select selectTV-Systemand press the button to enter the menu.

]/[

] button to 4. Press the [

]/[

] button to selectNTSCorPALand press the button to confirm. 116

]/[

] button to PAL:

TV-System USB Mode USB M PAL TV-System TV-Sy NTSC HDMI CEC Control HDMI PC PC NTSC NTSC Off Off Select Se Set Exit Exit NTSC: English, Chinese (Traditional), Japanese, French, Korean, Russian, Vietnamese, Greek, Hungarian German, Spanish, Italian, Chinese (Simplified), Portuguese, Swedish, Danish, Finnish, Indonesia, Norwegian, Dutch, Turkish, Polish, Thai, Croatian, Czech, Arabic, Hindi The video output system would change accordingly based upon the changes of the selected language. Supported HDMI Connections HDMI (High Definition Multimedia Interface), is a fully digital audio/video transmission interface, through which uncompressed audio and video signals are transmitted. Connecting HDMI-Ready TV 1. Use the cable with high resolution output terminal (which should be purchased separately) to connect the camera to the television which meets HDMI standard. 2. The camera will be automatically detected by the TV. 3. After connecting via HDMI, the camera enters Playback Mode. Make sure the camera and the TV are both turned on before connecting. HDMI (Type D) 117 HDMI CEC Control After connecting the camera with TV-

System, you may view pictures taken with the camera on the TV screen and operate the camera with your TV remote control to view and edit all images. HDMI CEC Control USB Mode USB M Off TV-Sy TV-System On HDMI HDMI CEC Control PC PC NTSC NTSC Off Off Introduction on Icons 1. Info Hiding/Display 2. Zoom-in

: Zoom in Images

: Zoom out Images 3. Rotate Images Select Se Set Exit Exit It is required that the TV-System supports HDMI CEC. After the camera is successfully connected with TV-System, other buttons of the camera except the Power button cannot work, with the LCD staying dark. Please refer to TV manual for relative settings of TV-System. 4. 5. 6. 7. 118

: Only Turn Left Image Index

: 5*3 Index Playback

: 10*5 Index Playback

: 3*1 Date Folder Index

: 5*3 Cont. Group Index Back Play Slide Show Button for Switching Between Previous and Next Images 8. Videos 9. Movie Length:00:00:00 10. Cont. Group File 11. First Image Mark 12. 000/000:Current Sorting/Total Number of Images in Group 13.

:Confirm Effect 14.

:No Change The following operations are available during HDMI CEC playback:

1:1 Single Playback Zoom-in Playback Rotate Index Playback Cont. Group Playback Slide Show Playback Video Play Panoramic File Play Image Edit Pressing the four-color button on remote control can enable relative functions displayed on the TV-

System screen. Remote control TV-System Red Green Yellow Blue 119 119 Cont. Group Playback:

Under the 1:1 single playback mode, press the central button to start playing images in continuous group. If no images in the cameras cont. group, there will appear a prompt of no pictures if you select playback interface. Slide Show Playback:

Under the 1:1 single playback mode, on the index press the down arrow button to enter slide show playback. While playing, you may press the left and right arrow buttons to directly switch between previous and next images and the central button to end playing. 1:1 Single Playback:

Pressing the left and right arrow buttons can switch among images. Zoom-in Playback:

Under the 1:1 single playback mode, press the red button to zoom in images; press the red and green buttons on remote control to zoom out images. Rotate:

Under the 1:1 single playback mode, press the blue button to rotate single picture. Index Playback:

Under the 1:1 playback mode, press the green button to enter index playback;

press the central button to enter image selection and then the arrow buttons to select files you want and finally press the central button again to back to the 1:1 single playback. Under the 5*3 index playback mode, press the green button to enter index selection and then the left and right arrow buttons to select

, and

, and finally press the central button again to confirm your selection.

,

, 120 Video Play:

Under the 1:1 single playback mode, select a video and then press the central button to start playing. While playing, you may use the arrow buttons and the central button to perform operations such as fast forward/

backward, pause, frame forward/

backward, back to play, etc. according to prompts on the screen. Panoramic File Play:

Under the 1:1 single playback mode, select a panoramic file and then press the central button to begin playing. Image Edit:

Multiple edit can be repeated under image edit mode. Only one picture is saved finally. Under the 1:1 single playback mode, select a picture and then press the up arrow button to enter image edit and start detecting face. Press the up arrow button to do HDR editing. Press the down arrow button to delete one picture. Press the left and right arrow buttons to edit the color. 12 effects in total for selection. The following beautifier touch-up functions cannot be enabled until a face is detected. You may press relative color buttons to edit.

: Skin Soften

: Eye Enlargement

: Eye Brightening Availability of edit functions corresponding to each type of file (O : Available; X : Not Available) HDR Color Beautifier Delete Normal

(face) Normal

(no face) Panorama Video O O X X O O X X O X X X O O O O 121 HDMI CEC Connection Function Full Size Playback Zoom-in Playback Index Playback Video Play Cont. Group Play Panoramic File Play Zoom In Zoom Out Rotate Play Slide Show Edit Image Info Hiding/

Display Delete O X O

(turn left only) O O*1 O O O

(Movable to four directions during zoom-in) O X X X O X X X X X X X X X X X O O X X X O O X X X O O O*2 O*3 O*2 O*3 O*2 O*3

*1 After entering the image edit, relative operation of the beautifier cannot appear until a face is detected.

*2 It is available before and in playing and during pause.

*3 The function of delete one cannot work until the camera enters image edit mode. 122 122 Set Eye-Fi SD Card Connection Mode This camera supports wireless connection for Eye-Fi memory cards. Enable the Eye-Fi connection by following the steps below. 1. Press the button, press the [

]

] button to select and button to enter the menu.

]/[

] button to

/[

press the 2. Press the [

. 3. Press the [

select to selectEye-Fiand press the button to enter the menu.

]/[

] button 4. Press the [

]/[

] button to selectOnorOffand press the button to confirm. Eye-Fi USB Mode USB M Off TV-System TV-Sy On HDMI HDMI CEC Control Eye-Fi Eye-F PC PC NTSC NTSC Off Off On On Select Sel Set Exit Exit If the Eye-Fi card is not available in the camera, this feature is not displayed. 123 APPENDICES Product Specifications Design and specifications are subject to change without notice. Type 1/2.3 BSI CMOS Image Sensor Effective Pixels 20.68 Megapixels Total Pixels 21.14 Megapixels Focal Length 4.3mm (Wide) 279.5mm (Tele) 35mm film equivalent 24mm (Wide) 1560mm (Tele) F number F2.9 (Wide) F6.7 (Tele) Lens Lens Construction 14 groups 18 elements Optical Zoom 65x Focusing Range Normal: (Wide) 50cm ~ , (Tele) 250cm ~ ;

Macro: 1cm ~ (Wide Only) Autofocus System Electronic Viewfinder Anti-Handshake Digital Zoom 124 TTL Autofocus Yes (-3~+1 diopter) Optical Image Stabilization 4x Digital Zoom (Combined Zoom: 260x)

(3:2) 18MP: 51843456

(16:9) 15MP: 51202880 2MP: 19201080

(4:3) 20MP: 51843888 10MP: 36482736 5MP: 25921944 3MP: 20481536 0.3MP: 640480 19201080 (30fps), 1280720 (60fps), 1280720 (30fps), 640480 (30fps), High-Speed Movie: 640360 (120fps) Best, Fine, Normal Still Image Number of Recording Pixels Movie Image Compression DCF, DPOF (Ver1.1) Support Yes File Format Still Image Movie Shooting Modes Scene Mode Detection Features Photo Touch-up JPEG (Fine, Standard), RAW, RAW+ JPEG (Fine) MOV [Image: H.264; Audio: Linear PCM (Stereo)]

Auto Mode, Program AE, Shutter priority, Aperture priority, Manual Mode, Face Beautifier, Wi-Fi Mode, Scene Mode, Movie Mode, Custom Settings Auto Scene, Panorama Mode, Handheld Night, Multi Exposure, Cat/Dog, Snow, Party , Sport, Night Portrait, Portrait, Children, Landscape, Sunset, Fireworks Face, Smile, Blink, Cat, Dog Red-Eye Reduction, Skin Soften, Eye Brightening, Eye Enlargement 125 125 Yes Up to 360 3.0 inch (920k Pixels) Yes HDR Scan Panorama LCD Display Angle Adjustment Image Auto Rotation ISO Sensitivity Focus Mode Focusing Area Selection Yes Auto, ISO100/200/400/800/1600/3200 Single AF, Continuous AF, Object Tracking, Manual Focus Single Area Focusing, 25-Area-Focusing, Face Detection, Manual Area Focusing Artificial Intelligence AE (AiAE), Center-Weighted Average, Spot (Fixed to Center of Frame), Face AE Exposure Metering Method Exposure Control Method Program AE (AE-Lock Available), Shutter Prior AE, Aperture Prior AE 3EV in 1/3 Step Increments 1/2000 ~ 30 Seconds Yes Single, Index (9/16 Thumbnails), Slide Show, Date, Burst Shooting, Zoom (Approx. x2 ~ x8) Exposure Compensation Shutter Speed Continuous Shooting Playback Modes 126 White Balance Control Flash Flash Method Flash Modes Recording Media AWB, Daylight, Cloudy, Fluorescent, Fluorescent H, Incandescent, Manual WB, Color Temp. (1900K ~ 10000K) Pop-up (Auto) Force Off, Fill Flash, Flash Auto, Red-Eye Reduction, Slow Sync., Slow Sync. + Red-Eye Reduction Internal Memory: Approx. 8MB SD/SDHC Card (Up to 32GB Support) [MMC Card Not Supported ]

Multi-Language Support 27 Languages Jacks Eye-Fi Support Wi-Fi Remote Viewfinder AV-OUT/USB 2.0 (Micro 5 pin USB), HDMI (Type D) Yes Yes (802.11 b/g/n) Yes (via iOS/Android smart device) Rechargeable Li-ion Battery LB-070, 7.4V 1000mAh, In-

Camera Charging Power Shooting Capability

(Battery Performance) Operation Environment Dimensions (WHD) Weight Approx. 400 Shots (Based on CIPA Standards) Temperature: 0 ~ 40C, Humidity: 0 ~ 90%

Approx. 125.989.0113.6mm (Based on CIPA Standards) Approx. 602g (Body only) 127 Prompts and Warning Messages Message Description Action Warning!

Battery exhausted. Warning before power off when the camera battery is exhausted. Displaying that it will power off after 2 seconds. Built-in memory error!

In the case of built-in memory error. Disappear after 2 seconds and return to shooting. Warning! Do not turn off your camera during update!

The message appears during the firmware update process. Battery temperature is too high. Battery temperature is too high. The message disappears after the camera update and restart. The message will disappear after 2 seconds. Let the battery cool before attempting to use the camera again. Please update firmware after the battery is fully charged!

The firmware cannot be updated when power is insufficient. Remove the message after 2 seconds and returning to the update screen. 128 Message Description Action Cannot change settings under this mode. Appears during shooting mode if a function can not be set by rotating the function ring. Remove the message after 2 seconds and return to shooting. Improper alignment. Please try again. The offset is too big for panorama shooting. Connection Failed!

In the case of failing to connect to a PC or a printer. In the case of failing to connect to a TV-system (including HDMI). Remove the message after 2 seconds and return to shooting. Remove cable and retry connection In this capture ********

Still size limited to

** M After choosing the image size in the Function Ring (Smart), this message may occur when the still size limit is reached. Remove the message after 2 seconds and return to shooting. Capture reached maximum limit Press the shutter to capture images in recording a video. If the number of images captured exceeds 15, there will be a prompt if you press the shutter again. The message will disappear in 2 seconds with no influence to video recording. 129 129 Message Description Action Write Protect !

Card Full !

Memory Full !

Exceeded maximum folder number. Card Error !

Card is not formatted. 130 In the case that there is lock protection for the card when saving the image. Disappear after 2 seconds and return to the previous image. In the case that the camera detects the card capacity is insufficient when turning on or pressing the shutter. In the case that the camera detects the memory capacity is insufficient when turning on or pressing the shutter. When the folder number in the card exceeds the maximum folder number (999), the time for turning on and reading will be too long, it will prompt the message until the reading is completed. Disappear after 2 seconds and return to the previous image. Disappear after 2 seconds and return to the previous image. The message will end after the camera processing is complete. The card cannot be recognized after being formatted. Normal display. When the card reading error occurs,the message of not formatted will be displayed. Disappear after 2 seconds and enter the formatting process. Message Description Action Slow access Cannot write to SD card. When a card lower than Class 4 is recording movie above HD, it may be accessed slowly and the recording cannot be continued. The recording cannot be continued if there are problems which may cause interruption of the recording during writing to the card or recording in the process of shooting or recording. Remove the message after 2 seconds and return to the shooting image. Disappear after 2 seconds and return to shooting. No Picture!

When pressing the button there is no image in the camera or the card. Disappear after 2 seconds and return to shooting. No continuous group file. When it switches from playback mode to Cont. playback mode, if there is no continuous group file in the files, this prompt message will display. Remove the message after 2 seconds and return to Thumbnail 3x3 mode. No Red-Eye Detected!

No red-eye detected when pressing for red-eye removing in playback touch-up. Disappear after 2 seconds and return to the touch-up menu. 131 Message Description Action Too many pictures for fast processing. The image may be unable to enter the date playback if the image exceeds the specification in the case of date playback. Remove the message after 2 seconds and return to Thumbnail 3x3 mode. Unable to recognize files. Protected!

Undeletable!

When the format of the file viewed is not supported or the file is damaged and cannot be recognized properly. This message will be displayed on the image immediately when executing delete action to the protected files. This image cannot be edited. The file format does not support editing or the edited file cannot be edited again. Cannot edit because no face detected!

No face image entered into the touch-up menu. This image message disappears only after the file is deleted. Disappear after 2 seconds and return to the previous image. Remove the message after 2 seconds and return to the original image. Remove the message after 2 seconds and return to the touch-up menu. 132 132 Troubleshooting Problem Camera does not turn on Camera turns off suddenly during operation Possible causes The battery has been The battery is not inserted depleted. correctly. Solution Recharge the battery. Correctly reinstall the battery. The batteries have been depleted. Recharge the battery. The picture is blurred Camera shakes while taking a picture. Images and video files cannot be saved The memory card is full. The memory card is locked. Images will not print from the connected printer The camera is not connected to the printer correctly. The printer is not PictBridge compatible. The printer is out of paper or ink. The printer paper is jammed. Saving data to memory card is slow Using a memory card below Class 4 may result in slower recording times. Turn on OIS feature. Please use tripod for high magnification (above 15X) optical zoom. Use another memory card or delete unnecessary files. Unlock the memory card. Check the connection between the camera and printer. Use a PictBridge compatible printer. Load paper into the printer or replace the ink cartridge in the printer. Remove the jammed paper. Use a memory card with write Class 4 or higher than 4 to improve performance. 133 Problem Possible Causes Solution Cannot write to the memory card The memory card has been locked. Too many movies to process The number of pictures or folders in the memory card exceed the specifications, so the playback of data folder can not be displayed. Release the write lock of the memory card or replace with another card. Delete unwanted files. When shooting with stacked filters attached, the corners of the photo may turn dark

(vignetting effect) because the filter holder blocks light from reaching the camera image sensor; especially, at wide angle zoom control settings. Please take test shots and review the results when using stacked filters. (Filter size : 52mm) Please enter the new password on smart device after changing Wi-Fi password. Some models of smart device will remember the Wi-Fi password previously entered, so please clear the old password on smart device manually before connection (For different models, this operation may be varied, please subject to your user manual) . iOS devices Android devices 1 2 3 1 2 134 The Kodak and Kodachrome, Kodacolor and Ektachrome trademarks, logo and trade dress are used under license from Kodak. 2017 JK Imaging Ltd. All Rights Reserved. JK Imaging Ltd., 17239 So. Main Street, Gardena, CA 90248 USA JK Imaging Europe, 71 Clarendon Road, Watford, WD17 1DS, UK kodakpixpro.com Made in Myanmar Ver. 1

 

 

KODAK DIGITAL CAMERA PIXPRO AZ528 User Manual BEFORE YOU START Declaration of Conformity Responsible Party:

Address:

Company Website:

JK Imaging Ltd. JK Imaging Ltd., 17239 So. Main Street, Gardena, CA 90248 USA kodakpixpro.com INDUSTRY CANADA This device complies with Canadian RSS-210. This device complies with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard (s).Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. Radiation Exposure Statement:

This product complies with the Canadian portable RF exposure limit set forth for an uncontrolled environment and is safe for intended operation as described in this manual. Additional RF exposure reduction can be achieved if the product can be kept as far as possible from the user body or set the device to lower output power if such function is available. 1 1 For Customers in Europe This symbol [crossed-out wheel bin WEEE Annex IV] indicates separate collection of electrical waste and electronic equipment in the European countries. Please do not throw the equipment into domestic refuse. Please use the return and collection systems available in your country for proper, safe disposal of this product. CE mark indicates that this product complies with the European requirements for safety, health, environment and customer protection. CE marked cameras are intended for sales in Europe. Europe EU Declaration of Conformity This device complies with the essential requirements of the R&TTE Directive 2014/53/EU. The following test methods have been applied in order to provepre-

sumption of conformity with the essential requirements of the R&TTE Directive 2014/53/EU:

- EN 60950-1: 2006+A11:2009 +A1:2010 +A12:2011 Safety of Information Technology Equipment

- EN 50566: 2013 Product standard to demonstrate compliance of radio frequency fields from handheld and body- mounted wireless communication devices used by the general public (30 MHz 6 GHz)

- EN 62209-2: 2010 Human exposure to radio frequency fields from handheld and bodymounted wireless communication devices Human models, instrumentation, and procedures Part 2: Procedure to determine the specific absorption rate (SAR) for wireless communication devices used in close proximity to the human body (frequency range of 30 MHz to 6 GHz) 2

- EN 300 328 V1.8.1 : 2012 Electromagnetic compatibility and Radio spectrum Matters (ERM); Wideband Transmission systems; Data transmission equipment operating in the 2.4 GHz ISM band and using spread spectrum modulation techniques; Harmonized EN covering essential requirements under article 3.2 of the R&TTE Directive.

- EN 301 489-1 V1.9.2: 2011 Electromagnetic compatibility and Radio Spectrum Matters (ERM); Electro Magnetic Compatibility (EMC) standard for radio equipment and services; Part 1:

Common technical requirements.

- EN 301 489-17 V2.2.1:2012 Electromagnetic compatibility and Radio spectrum Matters (ERM); Electro Magnetic Compatibility (EMC) standard for radio equipment and services; Part 17:

Specific conditions for 2.4 GHz wideband transmission systems and 5 GHz high performance RLAN equipment. Manufacturer: Sintai Optical (Shenzhen) Co., Ltd Address:

Qiwei Ind Sec, 1st, 2nd,& 3RD Bldg, Lisonglang Village, Gongming Town, Baoan District, Shenzhen, Guangdong, China Batteries: Please dispose of used batteries at designated collection centers. Packaging: Please follow local regulations for the recycling of packaging. For Customers in the U.S.A. Federal Communication Commission Interference Statement This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. 3 This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one of the following measures:

- Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.

- Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.

- Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.

- Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help. FCC Caution: Any changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the users authority to operate this equipment. This transmitter must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter. Radiation Exposure Statement:

This product complies with the FCC portable RF exposure limit set forth for an uncontrolled environment and is safe for intended operation as described in this manual. Additional RF exposure reduction can be achieved if the product can be kept as far as possible from the user body or set the device to lower output power if such function is available. 4 About this Manual Thank you for purchasing the KODAK PIXPRO Digital Camera. Please carefully read this manual and keep it well for future reference. JK Imaging Ltd. reserves all rights of this document. No part of this published manual may be reproduced, transmitted, transcribed, stored in a retrieval system or translated into any language or computer language, in any form, by any means, without the prior written permission of JK Imaging Ltd. All trademarks mentioned in this manual are used for identification purposes only and are properties of their respective owners. This manual provides you with instructions on how to use your new KODAK PIXPRO Digital Camera. Every effort has been made to ensure that the contents of this manual are accurate; however JK Imaging Ltd. reserves the right to make changes without notice. Throughout this manual, the following symbols are used to help you locate information quickly and easily:

Indicates useful information. In introducing you how to operate this camera, the following symbols may appear to facilitate your understanding:

Item propertiesThe optional properties in the camera interface are indicated by the symbol . 5 SAFETY NOTES Safety notes for this camera Do not drop the camera or allow it to hit solid objects. Do not attempt to disassemble or repair the camera. Do not use or store the camera in dusty places or on a beach to prevent dust or sand from entering the camera, causing possible damage. Do not use or store the camera in a hot environment or in direct sunlight. Do not use or store the camera near a powerful magnetic field, such as a magnet or transformer. Avoid touching the lens of the camera. Do not expose the camera to direct sunlight for a long period of time. To prevent the camera from being damaged by moisture, do not use or store the camera in very humid environments, such as in rain or near bodies of water. If water accidentally comes in contact with the camera, turn the camera off, remove the battery and the memory card, and dry it completely within 24 hours. When you take the camera from a cold environment to a warmer environment, condensation may occur. Please wait for a reasonable period of time before you turn the camera on. Before you remove the battery and memory card, the camera should be turned off. When you clean the body of the camera, do not use abrasive, alcohol-based or organic cleansers or solvents. Use a professional lens cleaning cloth and appropriate cleaner to wipe and clean the lens. Download your photos and remove the memory card when you are going to store the If this camera is not in use for a long period of time, please keep it in a dry and clean camera for a long period of time. storage location. Our company will not pay compensation for any failure of playback including: pictures or videos damaged or unrecoverable by improper operation. 6 Safety notes for battery Please use a battery that is the same type as the one included. Please use the attached charger to charge the battery. If battery fluid leaks inside the camera, contact our customer service department immediately. If battery fluid leaks onto your skin, rinse your skin with clean water and seek immediate medical attention. Disposal of used batteries should be carried out in accordance with the local (national or regional) regulations. To prevent the battery from being damaged, do not drop the battery or allow it to hit solid objects or to be scratched by foreign objects. Do not let the battery come in contact with metal objects (including coins) to avoid short circuiting, discharging, excessive heat, or possible leakage. Do not attempt to disassemble the battery. Do not expose the battery to water. Always keep the battery contacts dry. Do not heat the battery or throw it into a fire to avoid a possible explosion. Do not store the battery in a hot environment or in direct sunlight. If the battery overheats during charging or use, stop charging or stop use immediately. Turn off the product, remove the battery carefully, and wait until it cools down. When the camera is stored for a long period of time, remove the battery and keep it in a dry place that is not accessible to infants and children. In a colder environment, the performance of the battery could be noticeably reduced. When you install the battery, align the battery markings according to the positive and negative markings inside the battery compartment. Never force the battery into the battery compartment. 7 7 Safety notes for memory card We suggest buying only well-known, name brand memory cards to ensure peak performance and reliability. Format the memory card using the camera before you use it or insert a new one. Do not drop the memory card or allow it to hit solid objects to avoid damaging it. Do not attempt to disassemble or repair the memory card. Do not expose the memory card to water. Always keep it dry. Do not remove the memory card when the camera is turned on. Otherwise, the memory card and photo/video files could be permanently damaged. Do not directly edit the data on the memory card. Copy the data to your computer before you edit them. When the camera is stored for a long period of time, be sure to download your photos and remove the memory card. Store the memory card in a dry environment. Do not modify the name of the files or folders of the memory card using your computer. Modifying the file names may cause the files to not be recognized on the camera or a possible permanent error may occur. A photo taken with the camera will be stored in the folder that is automatically generated on the memory card. Do not store photos that are not taken using this camera in these folders as the pictures cannot be recognized during the playback. When you insert the memory card, make sure the notch of the card matches the markings on the top of the camera card slot. 8 Other Safety Notes Do not disconnect the power or turn the camera off during the update process. Doing so may cause incorrect data to be written and the camera may not power on later. Do not hang the neck strap of the camera around the neck of a child. When using your camera on an airplane, observe the relevant rules specified by the airline and FAA regulations. Due to the limitations of manufacturing technology, the LCD may have a few dead or bright pixels. These pixels do no effect the quality or performance of the camera, photos or video. Do not expose the cameras LCD to water. In a humid environment, only wipe it with a soft and dry cleaning cloth. If the LCD screen is damaged, pay particular attention to the liquid crystal in the screen. If any of the following situations arise, immediately take the steps listed below:

1. If liquid crystal comes in contact with your skin, please wipe with a dry cloth, wash thoroughly with soap, and rinse with plenty of clean water. 2. If liquid crystal gets into your eye, flush the eye immediately with plenty of clean water for at least 15 minutes and then seek medical assistance. 3. If liquid crystal is swallowed, immediately rinse your mouth thoroughly with clean water and induce vomiting. Seek medical assistance. 9 CONTENTS BEFORE YOU START ...............1 Set your Language, Date/Time after the First Power-On ............. 24 SAFETY NOTES ......................6 Resetting your Language ........... 25 CONTENTS ........................... 10 Resetting Date/Time .................. 26 GETTING READY ................... 15 MODE OVERVIEW ................ 27 Accessories Included ....................... 15 Display Setting ................................. 27 Install Lens Cap and Neck Strap ...... 16 LCD Display....................................... 28 Part Names ....................................... 17 Installing Battery and Memory Card .................................... 19 Charging Battery .............................. 21 Turning Camera On and Off............. 23 Set your Language, Date/Time ........ 24 Overview of the screen icons in photo shooting mode ................ 28 Overview of the screen icons in movie mode ............................... 29 Overview of the screen icons in playback mode ........................... 30 How to Take Pictures ........................ 31 Using the Mode Dial ......................... 32 10 Auto Mode .................................. 35 White Balance Setting ...................... 58 Face Beautifier ........................... 37 Continuous Shot .............................. 59 Wi-Fi Mode ................................ 38 EV Settings ....................................... 60 Scene Mode ............................... 45 EV Adjustment...................... 60 Panorama Mode ......................... 47 ISO Adjustment .....................61 Movie Mode ................................ 50 Shutter Adjustment .................... 61 Custom Settings ........................ 51 Aperture Adjustment ................. 62 BASIC OPERATION ............... 53 Using the Zoom Function................. 53 Using Quick Recording .................... 62 i Button Function Menu .................... 63 Focus Setting.................................... 54 PLAYBACK MODE ................. 64 Macro Mode...................................... 55 Viewing Photos and Videos ............. 64 Self-Timer Setting ............................. 56 Thumbnail View ................................ 65 Flash Mode ....................................... 57 11 11 Using Zoom Playback (for still pictures only) .................................... 66 Deleting Photos and Videos ............. 67 Slideshow ......................................... 68 Continuous Capture Group Playback ............................................ 69 HDR (High Dynamic Range) ....... 74 Beautifier .................................... 74 Scene .......................................... 75 Photo Shooting Settings Menu ........ 76 Quality ........................................ 77 Animation Panorama Play ................ 70 AF Assist Beam ........................... 77 USING THE MENUS .............. 71 Photo Setup Menu ............................ 71 Expo Metering ............................ 71 Image Size .................................. 72 OIS (Optical Image Stabilization) .............................. 73 Cont. AF (Continuous Auto-Focus) ................................ 73 12 Digital Zoom ............................... 77 Date Imprint ............................... 78 Quick Review.............................. 78 Custom Settings ........................ 79 Movie Menu ...................................... 80 Expo Metering (Exposure Metering) .................................... 80 Movie Size .................................. 81 OIS (Optical Image Stabilization) .............................. 82 Movie Setting Menu ......................... 83 Delete ......................................... 91 DPOF (Digital Print Order Format) ....................................... 92 Digital Zoom ............................... 84 Trim ............................................. 92 Custom Settings ........................ 84 General Settings Menu .................... 93 Playback Menu ................................. 85 Sound Settings........................... 94 Playback Mode ........................... 85 Power Saver................................ 94 HDR (High Dynamic Range) ....... 86 Language .................................... 95 Touch-Up .................................... 86 Zone ............................................ 95 Rotate ......................................... 87 Date/Time ................................... 95 Resize ......................................... 87 LCD Brightness ........................... 95 Color ........................................... 88 File Settings ...................................... 96 Playback Settings Menu ................... 89 Format ........................................ 97 Protect ........................................ 90 13 Copy to Card .............................. 97 File Numbering ........................... 98 Reset ........................................... 98 Using the PICTBRIDGE Menu .............................................. 105 Video System ................................ 109 FW Version.................................. 99 APPENDICES ....................... 110 Product Specifications .....................110 Prompts and Warning Messages ..... 114 Troubleshooting ............................... 118 CONNECTION SETTINGS ...100 Connecting to a Computer ............. 101 Setting the USB Mode .............. 101 Transferring files to your computer ................................... 102 Connecting to a PICTBRIDGE Compatible Printer ......................... 103 Setting the USB Mode ............ 103 Connecting to your Printer ..... 104 14 14 GETTING READY Accessories Included Your camera box should contain the camera model you purchased along with the follow-

ing accessories. If anything is missing or appears to be damaged, please contact your retailer first or our customer service center. (The battery chargers may be a little different in shape due to the different countries or regions this camera is sold to. The illustration may not match the actual product.) Rechargeable Li-ion Battery AC Adapter Micro USB Cable Lens Cap With Strap Quick Start Guide STOP Neck Strap Quick Start Guide Warranty Card Service Card 15 Install Lens Cap and Neck Strap

16 Part Names

1. Micro USB Port 2. Zoom Lever 3. Shutter Button 4. Strap Eyelet 5. 6. 7. Power Button 8. AF Assist Beam/Self-Timer Lamp 9. Flash Lamp 10. Lens Exposure Compensation Button Continuous Shot Button 17

27 28 18 18 Indicator Lamp 11. Flash Button 12. Microphones 13. 14. Mode Dial 15. 16.

17. 18.

19. 20.

Fast Video Recording Button Menu Button

AF Button/Up Button

Macro Button/Left Button

Flash Button/Right Button

Delete Button/Self-Timer Button/Down Button Display Button Playback Button SET Button i Button 21. 22. 23. 24. 25. LCD 26. Speaker 27. Battery Cover Door 28. Tripod Socket (1/4'' Standard) Installing Battery and Memory Card 1. Open the battery cover according to the direction of arrow. 2. Insert the battery into the battery compartment according to the negative and positive directions as illustrated in the picture. Push the battery down until it locks in place. 2 1 Battery Lock Knob 19 3. Insert the memory card into the memory card slot as shown in the diagram. 4. Close the battery cover. Write Protection Buckle 1 2 A standard SD memory card is not included in the camera packaging and needs to be purchased separately. This camera takes a standard (SD/SDHC) memory card. We recommend using a name brand memory card that is Class 4 or higher and has a capacity of 4GB to 32GB. The camera is not compatible with Micro SD, Ultra, Ultra Plus, Extreme, or adapters for any of these other memory cards. To remove your memory card, open the battery cover, gently press the memory card to eject it and remove it carefully. 20 20 Charging Battery Before you charge the battery, ensure that the battery is inserted properly and the camera is off. 1. Connect the camera and the power charger using the supplied Micro USB cable. 2. Insert the plug of the power charger into the power outlet to charge the battery. After the battery is stored for a long period of time, use the supplied power charger to charge the battery prior to use. To have maximum battery life, charge the battery for at least 4 hours the first time. Charging indicator:

Steady orange: Charging The indicator will go out once charging is finished. 2 1 Indicator Lamp 21 3. When the camera is turned off, you can also connect the camera to your PC using a USB cable to charge the battery. 3 Please charge the battery indoors between 0C and 40C (32F and 104F). 22 22 Turning Camera On and Off Press the power button to turn the camera on. To turn the camera off, press the power button again. Power Button When the power is off, press and hold the mode. button to power on and enter playback 23 Set your Language, Date/Time Set your Language, Date/Time after the First Power-On 1. When you turn the camera on for the first Language

English Franais Date & Time Espaol Portugus Italiano Deutsch y Svenska H-M 2019 03

21 00 00

:

time, the language selection screen will appear.

/

2. Press the

buttons to select your desired language. button to confirm 3. After you press the

/

/

the selection, the Date/Time settings screen appears.

/

button to select 4. Press the

the Date/Time to be adjusted: Time is displayed in YYYY.MM.DD HH:MM. 5. Press the

/

button to adjust

the value for the selected Date/Time. 6. Press the button to confirm the time settings and the shooting screen will appear. 24 Resetting your Language After you set your language for the first time, follow the instructions below to reset your desired language. 1. Press the button, press the

/

button to select

, and press the button to enter the menu. 2. Press the

/

, and press the button to select

button to enter

/

the menu. 3. Press the

/

button to select

/

Languageand press the button to enter the menu.

/

4. Press the

buttons to select your desired language and press the button to confirm.

/

/

5. Press the button and the shooting screen appears. Sound Settings Power Saver Language World Time Auto English Home Date & Time 2019.03.21 00:00 Language

English Franais Espaol Portugus Italiano Deutsch y Svenska 25 25 Resetting Date/Time After you set your Date/Time for the first time, follow the instructions below to reset date and time. 1. Press the button, press the

/

button to select

, and press the button to enter the menu. 2. Press the

/

, and press the button to select

button to enter

/

the menu. 3. Press the

/

button to select Date & Timeand press the button to enter the menu.

/

4. Press the button to select the Date/Time to be adjusted: Time is displayed in YYYY.MM.DD HH:MM.

/

5. Press the

/

button to press the value for your selected block. After you finish your settings, press the button to confirm. 6. Press the button and the shooting screen appears. 26 26 Sound Settings Power Saver Language World Time Auto English Home Date & Time 2019.03.21 00:00 Date & Time H-M 2019 03

21 00 00

:

Back MODE OVERVIEW Display Setting Press the Classic: Displays the camera parameters button to display the settings: Classic, Full, Off. on screen SD 1234 00:56:00 F2.8 1/50

-0.3 EV 400 ISO Full: Camera parameters with Grid and Histogram SD 1234 00:56:00 F2.8 1/50

-0.3 EV 400 ISO Off: Does not display any additional icons on screen 27 LCD Display Overview of the screen icons in photo shooting mode

SD x3.6x3.6 1234 16M 00:56:00 F3.6F3.6 1/50

-0.3 EV 400 ISO

1 Shooting Mode 2 Macro Mode 3 Self-Timer 4 Zoom Display (By turning the Zoom Lever) 5 Focus Frame 6 SD Memory Card/Built-in Memory 7 Battery Status 28 ISO Value Image Size 8 White Balance 9 Color Effect 10 Number of Remaining Shots 11 12 Video Quality 13 14 Remaining Recording Time 15 Exposure Compensation 16 Shutter Speed 17 Histogram 18 Aperture Value 19 OIS (Optical Image Stabilization) 20 HDR 21 Expo Metering 22 Continuous Shot 23 AF Mode 24 Flash Mode Overview of the screen icons in movie mode

SD x3.6 00:56:00 00:56:00

-0.3 EV

1 Movie Mode 2 Macro Mode 3 Self-Timer 4 Zoom Display (By turning the Zoom Lever) 5 SD Memory Card/Built-in Memory 6 Battery Status 7 Color Effect 8 Video Quality 9 Remaining Recording Time 10 Exposure Compensation 11 OIS (Optical Image Stabilization) 12 Focus Frame 13 Expo Metering 14 AF Mode For optimal video shooting, it is recommended that an SDHC memory card be used. Optical Zoom and Digital Zoom can be adjusted (208X in total). Digital Zoom can be adjusted to 4X. 29 29 Overview of the screen icons in playback mode Image Zoom Ratios Image Zone 4 SD Memory Card/Built-in Memory 5 Battery Status 6 Zoom Magnification Area 7 8 9 Shooting Date 10 Continuous Capture Group Playback 11 Touch-up 12 HDR 13 Date Folder 1 DPOF File 2 File Protection 3 Memory Space (indicating the current number of photos and total number of photos) 30 30 How to Take Pictures 1. Hold the camera securely with both hands, being careful not to block the flash and lens with fingers. 2. Point the lens toward the object you want to take a picture of. 3. Use the zoom lever to select Tele or Wide position to zoom in or out on your subject. 4. Press the shutter button down half-way to allow the camera to focus on your subject. 5. When the frame around your subject turns green and the LCD is focused to your liking, push the shutter button down completely to take the picture. 31 Using the Mode Dial Thiscameraprovidesaconvenientmodedialthatallowsyoutomanuallyswitchbe-

tweendifferentmodeswithease.Theavailablemodesarelistedbelow:

Mode Name Icon Description Auto Mode Program AE Shutter priority Aperture priority In this mode, the optimal conditions for taking pictures will be set based on the subject and environment. It is the most com-

monly used mode for taking pictures. Under different scenes, the user can switch the ISO and EV value according to personal preference, the camera can automatically set the shutter speed and aperture value. Setting allows you to adjust the shutter speed / EV value and ISO value. The camera automatically sets the aperture value based on the shutter speed and ISO value to get the most ap-

propriate exposure value. In this mode, you can adjusting the aperture size, EV and ISO val-

ues. The large aperture is to highlight the object focused through blurring the background, while the small aperture is for clear focusing on both the background and the object. 32 Manual Mode Face Beautifier Wi-Fi Mode Scene Mode This mode is for manually setting the aperture, shutter speed and ISO value. This mode automatically enhances facial features with skin softening touches and eye brightening capabilities. Enable image transmission and remote control by connecting smart device with Wi-Fi. Choose from 13 different pre-set scene types and effects for your photos. Movie Mode Record videos. Custom Settings The user can store frequently used shooting modes and parameters. Switching to this mode enables quick adjustment. 33 33 Mode:

Follow the steps below to adjust the parameters:

1. Rotate the mode dial to select a mode you want, press the settings. button to configure F2.8F2.8 1/50 1/50 0.3 EV 0.3 EV 400 ISO 400 ISO

/

/

button to select an adjustment setting. 2. Press the 3. Press the 4. Press the Please refer to the table below for any nonadjustable options in Available X: Not Available) button to adjust the parameters.

button to confirm the settings and enter the shooting screen. mode: (O:

Options Mode Aperture Shutter EV ISO X X O O X O X O O O O X O O O O 34 Please note that even if an option is not able to be adjusted in a particular mode, its value will still be displayed on the shooting screen. Auto Mode The camera will automatically detect the most suitable scene to capture the best pictures. SD 00:56:00 Auto Mode The camera automatically adjusts the exposure and focus to ensure the best possible pictures. Landscape Mode For landscapes, automatically adjusts the exposure to match the background. 35 Portrait Mode Most suitable for capturing people with focus on their faces. Night Portrait When you take portraits at night or in low light conditions, automatically adjust the expo-

sure for people and night scenes. Backlit Portrait When the sun or any other light source is behind you, automatically adjusts the fore-

ground exposure to produce the best pictures possible. Night Mode For night scenes, automatically increases the ISO value to compensate for low light. Macro Mode To produce more detailed close-ups, will automatically engage the cameras Macro Mode and automatically focus the lens. 36 Face Beautifier The camera is set to automatically adjust camera exposure for realistic portrayal of skin tones. 1. Turn the mode dial to select face beautifier mode 2. Press the button to select

3. Press the button to select an option and press the button and press the button to confirm

/

/

.

and return to photo shooting mode. SD x3.6x3.6 1234 16M 00:56:00

-0.3 EV 400 ISO Effect 1: Skin Soften Effect 2: Skin Soften+Eye Brightening Effect 3: Skin Soften+Eye Brightening+Eye Enlargement 37 Wi-Fi Mode Enable image transmission and remote control by connecting smart device with Wi-Fi. Before utilizing Wi-Fi Mode, please review the following:

Your smart device operating system version needs to be iOS 10 or higher, or Android 5.0 or higher. If not, please upgrade your smart device before using the App. Please do not use in places having high intensity magnetic field, electrostatic and electric wave interference (for example near a microwave oven), which may cause failure in receiving signals. To maintain a connection, please keep the camera within 10 meters (32.8 feet) without signal shielding interference. Please do not use Wi-Fi connection functionality on a plane. The camera and the smart device can only be connected one to one. Downloading the App package:

Download a dedicated installation package from the application store (App name: PIX-

PRO Remote Viewer

) and then install it. Android devices : Search and download the App PIXPRO Remote Viewer in Google play, and install it following the instructions on the interface. iOS devices :

Search and download the App PIXPRO Remote Viewer store, and install it following the instructions on the interface. in App 38 1. Rotate the mode dial to and then enter the Wi-Fi selection interface. Wi-Fi Mode Settings Station AP mode In AP mode, the camera will act as an access point enabling another Wi-Fi device to connect to it. 2. Press the

/

button to select and set options. Settings: Customize the Wi-Fi settings for the camera system. Station: Use the Station Mode to connect to a "Personal Hotspot" created by your mobile device. AP mode: In AP mode, the camera will act as an access point enabling another Wi-Fi device to connect to it. Rotate the mode dial to disconnect. 39 AP Mode This camera may connect with your smart device through Wi-Fi. Settings of Camera:

1. Select and press the enter the setting interface. button to AP mode Setting pre-connected device for the following serial number:

SSID: PIXPRO AZ528_XXXX WPA2 PSK: XXXXXXXX Refresh Back 2. Press the select:

/

button to

Settings of Smart Device:

1. Enable the Wi-Fi of smart device and then search surrounding wireless devices. 2. Select the name of camera SSID to be connected and then input the eight-

digit number password after WPA2-PSK on the camera. 3. Click the icon of the App the App. to enable Set up completion:

Once the App is connected to the camera, functional operations can be enabled on the smart device. Refresh: Create a new WPA2 PSK password Back to previous page Back:

40 Station Enable image transmission and remote control by connecting the camera with a Wi-Fi access point created by your smart device. 1. Enable the Wi-Fi access point of smart device. 2. Select on camera and then press button to confirm connection the with smart device. Wi-Fi Mode Station Searching for devices.

*SSID Device1-SSID Device2-SSID Device3-SSID

3. Press the

/

button to

select the name of smart device to be connected and then press the button to confirm. Then, the camera enters the password input interface. Enter Password A K U 4 B C D E F G L M N O P Q V W X Y Z A/a H R 1 I S 2 J T 3 5 6 7 9 0

#!?

Type the network security key Save Cancel Meanings of interface icons:

Icon Description Press the Scan: Search again surrounding button to select:

/

:

wireless devices. Select the name of device to be connected. Back: Back to Wi-Fi mode select screen. Backspace

#!?

Switch between capital and lowercase letters Move the Cursor Switch the symbol input Space 41 Display of Wi-Fi Connection Status The Wi-Fi has successfully connected but App is not enabled:

Wi-Fi Mode AP mode Connected with device

Disconnect The Wi-Fi has successfully connected and App is enabled:

Wi-Fi Mode Connected with APP XXXXX Disconnect

/

/

4. Press the

/

buttons to select and then

press the selection. Enter the completion of WPA2 PSK after password storage. 5. Connect immediately after saving. button to confirm your If connected, the LCD will display as shown below:

Wi-Fi Mode Station Connected with device SSID: XXXXXXXX Disconnect If connect failed, please check Wi-Fi device and try again. 6. After connection, click the icon of the on the smart device, you may App use it to carry out relative operation. 42 ToDisconnectfromWi-Fi:

Wi-Fi Mode Disconnect from device?

No Yes No: Keep Wi-Fi connected and back to previous page. Yes: Disconnect and back to Wi-Fi connection screen. Disconnected from smart device Wi-Fi :

Wi-Fi Mode AP mode Disconnected, please check Wi-Fi device and try again. Back Back: Back to the SSID interface. Settings The name of this camera can be changed under Wi-Fi settings. 1. Select the and then press the 2. Press the button to enter the setting interface. button to

select the option to be adjusted and then press the button to enter the menu.

/

DSC Device PIXPRO AZ528 MAC Address 386793XXXXXX 3. Press the button to confirm settings and then skip the menu. 43 DSC Device The default name of DSC Device isPIXPRO AZ528. Change the name of DSC device through typing. App Operating Instructions Refer to the "PIXPRO Remote Viewer User Manual" located on the web:

Americas DSC Device PIXPRO AZ528 A K U 4 B C D E F G L M N O P Q V W X Y Z A/a H R 1 I S 2 J T 3 5 6 7 9 0

#!?

Name between 1-18 Letters Save Cancel For the method of input, please refer to the introduction on password input on Page 41. MAC Address Check the wireless MAC Address of this camera. 44 http://kodakpixpro.com/Ameri-

cas/support/downloads.php Europe http://kodakpixpro.com/Europe/

support/downloads.php Scene Mode The user can select an appropriate mode from the 13 scene modes according to the type of environment you are shooting in. The camera then configures the most appropriate settings for the best possible photos. 1. Rotate the mode dial to select 2. Press the buttons to select a scene, and press the

/

/

.

/

button to confirm. Multi Exposure 3. To change to a different scene, please press the finally the

/

/

/

button and then the buttons to reselect the scene.

button and 45 Scene Description Handheld Night Reduce blur when shooting low light/ illuminated scenes. Cat/Dog Sunset Rapidly identify pet (dog/cat), capture the dynamic moment of pet. For sunsets. Capture subjects in strong sunlight. Fireworks Multi Exposure Sport Night Portrait For fireworks at night. Suggest using tripod. Suitable for shooting moving objects (as many as 7) in the same background. For fast-moving subjects. Capture sharp action shots without blur. For portraits against night time scenery (Suggest using tripod). Landscape Speed adjusted for brilliant images. Portrait Snow Children Party Panorama Mode 46 For shooting portraits. For subjects in the snow. Reduce underexposure. For kids and pets. Flash is disabled for eye protection. For subjects at night without using a tripod. Capture sharp shots without blur. For shooting up to 360-degrees of landscape. This feature allows you to capture a panoramic view that will have signifi-

cantly more content than a single photograph. Handheld Night Quickly take 4 photos below 8M (including 8M) and then overlap as a clear night image. Pet Mode When a cat /dog face is detected, a white focus frame appears. The camera will take a picture and save it regardless of whether the focus is successful (if successful, there appears a green focus frame; if not, there is an orange frame). At most, 10 dog/cat faces can be detected at one time. Multi Exposure Keep camera steady before shooting. Press and hold the Shutter button to take 7 photos continuously when it will stop automatically. To stop shooting, release the Shutter button in the midway. Objects shall be moved only from left to the right in order to be recorded. Objects moving from other directions would not be recorded. Shooting effect will be influenced if object is moving too fast or too close. 47 Panorama Mode Follow the arrow while keeping the camera steady to seamlessly shoot an ultra-wide scene of up to 360 degrees. Follow the steps below:

1. Select the Panorama Mode (

2. Press the

/

) and then press the

/

button to select a shooting direction. (Should you not select the direction, the default shooting direction is "right"). 2 seconds later, the camera is ready to take pictures. You can also press the Shutter button halfway down to be ready to take pictures. button or press the button to confirm.

/

3. Compose your shot on the LCD and half press the shutter button to focus on the subject. After focusing, fully press the down shutter button to take the first picture. At this time, the process dialog of panorama mode stitching appears on the screen. 4. Move the camera according to the set direction. When the range of motion does not exceed the range that the camera can detect, the progress dialog along the indication arrow partially turns red. When it completely turns red, panorama mode shooting is finished. 48 Panoramic image can be played back by the method of flash playing. Please see the animation panoramic playback on page 70. During shooting, the flash, self-timer, macro modes and exposure compensation are not available. Focus adjustment is also not available at this time. During panorama mode shooting, press the save the current pictures taken. Press the

not to save the previously taken pictures. button to interrupt shooting and button to cancel shooting and

During panorama mode shooting, when the moving direction of the camera is wrong or the angle deviates from the internal settings, the LCD shows a warning messageImproper alignment. Please try again.and the current pictures taken are saved. 49 Movie Mode Switch to this mode to record videos. Follow the steps below:

1. Rotate the mode dial to select 2. Press the

, and it will enter the movie screen. button or the Shutter button to start recording. x3.6 00:00:06 3. Press the button or the Shutter button again to stop recording, save it automatically and then the camera will return to the movie screen. In the recording process, you can rotate the zoom lever to zoom in or out on the subject. 50 Custom Settings The user can store the frequently used shooting modes and parameters and switch to this mode for quick adjustment. Settings under state after reset):

1. Turn the mode dial to select the 3. As shown in the picture, press the button to confirm setting or to exit without setting by turning the mode dial. mode (unset state or mode, and enter the setup screen, as shown in the figure below:

Select one capture mode to define CS . Go to setting CS mode. Yes Or Rotate the mode dial to skip . Auto Mode Save Exit 2. As shown in the picture, press the

/

button to select a capture

mode that you want to define as and press the button to enter the shooting screen.

, For setting under other modes (use this method to select a different custom setting):

1. Select any mode or scene mode to be stored. 2. Set your desired parameters in the current mode. 51 3. Press the

/

and press the menu. button and then the button to select

button to enter the

, 4. Press the button to

select

, and press the

button to enter the menu.

/

/

5. Press the

button to select

Custom Settingsand then press the

/

button to enter the menu Custom Settings 6. SelectYesto save orNoto cancel. 52 52 Custom Settings Reset camera settings to custom settings mode. No Yes 7. Rotate the mode dial to switch to

. 8. The photo settings you stored the last time are invoked. When the mode is used for the first time, there is no preset parameter stored in the mode. If you want to remove the parame-

ter setting ofCustom Settings, please see the reset function on page 98 to operate. BASIC OPERATION Using the Zoom Function Your camera is equipped with two types of zoom functions: Optical Zoom and Digital Zoom. Toggle the Zoom Lever of the camera to zoom in or out on the subject while taking pictures. Zoom Lever When the Optical Zoom reaches the threshold as Digital Zoom, release and turn the Zoom Lever to T to switch between the Optical Zoom and Digital Zoom. Zoom Indicator 53 Focus Setting This function can be adjusted in configure the settings:

1. Press the

button to enter the Focus menu. mode, please follow the steps below to Single-AF

button to select the following 3 modes:

2. Press the

/

Single-AF The focus frame appears on the center of the LCD to focus on the subject. Multi-AF The camera automatically focuses the subject in a wide area to find the focus point. Object Tracking Smart tracking of the object in motion under the focusing shooting. 3. Press the button to confirm the settings and exit the menu. Once enabled, Object Tracking will only work when lens is focused on the object. 54 Macro Mode The Macro Setting is ideal for shooting small objects or close-up photos. This mode allows you to focus on subjects very close to the camera. It can be adjusted in settings:

1. Press the

button to enter the Macro menu. mode. Please follow the steps below to configure the Macro Off 2. Press the

/

button to select the following 2 modes:

Macro Off Select this option to disable Macro. Macro On Select this option to make focusing on the object closer to the lens. (At the W side, the shooting distance should be more than 1 cm). 3. Press the button to confirm the settings and exit the menu. 55 Self-Timer Setting Use this function to take pictures at pre-set intervals. The camera can be set to shoot after 2 seconds, 10 seconds after pressing the shutter or when a smile is detected. It can be adjusted in the settings:

1. Press the mode. Please follow the steps below to configure button to enter the

Self-Timer Smile Self-Timer menu. Press the Shutter Button and a picture will be taken immediately after a smile is detected. Self-timer Off 3. Press the button to confirm the settings and exit the menu. 2. Press the

the following 4 modes:

Self-Timer Off

/

button to select Disables the Self-Timer. Self-Timer 2 sec A single picture is shot 2 seconds after the Shutter Button is pressed. Self-Timer 10 sec A single picture is shot 10 seconds after the Shutter Button is pressed. 56

When enabling the Self-Timer, pressing the Shutter Button or button will select the the

highlighted Self-Timer option and return to the shooting screen, and keep the Self-Timer setting. When enabling the smile detection, pressing the Shutter Button or the button will select the Self-Timer smile option (if highlighted) and return to the shooting screen, and keeping the Self-Timer smile setting. Flash Mode The flash provides supplemental light for a scene. The flash is usually used when shoot-

ing against the light to highlight the object. It is also suitable for metering and shooting in darker scenes to improve the exposure. It can be adjusted in settings:

1. Press the Flash Button mode. Please follow the steps below to configure the to pop up the flash. 2 1 2. Press the

button to enter the Flash Settings Menu.

Force Off 3. Press the

/

button to select the following 6 modes:

Force Off Flash is turned off. Flash Auto Camera flash goes off automatically based on existing light conditions. Fill Flash The flash goes off when a picture is taken, supplementing the existing light in a scene and helping to eliminate shadows. Slow Sync. This allows you to take pictures of people at night that clearly show both your subjects and the night time backdrop. The use of a tripod is recommended when shooting with this setting. Slow Sync. + Red-Eye Use this mode for slow synchro shots with red-eye reduction. Red-Eye Reduction The camera emits a brief pre-flash before the picture is taken to reduce red-eye effects. 4. Press the button to confirm the settings and enter the shooting screen. 57 White Balance Setting The white balance function allows adjustment of the color temperature for different light sources. It can be adjusted in settings:

1. Press mode. Please follow the steps below to configure the button to enter the White Fluorescent Balance menu. Fluorescent CWF Incandescent Manual WB

(Fully press the Shutter button to detect the white balance value) Color Temp. (1900K~10000K)

/

Press the button to "Adjust the K value";

Press the

button to exit the K value.

3. Press the button to confirm the settings and exit the menu.

AWBAWB 2. Press the

the following 8 modes:

/

button to select AWB Daylight Cloudy 58 Continuous Shot This function can be adjusted in configure the settings:

1. Press the button to enter the Continuous Shot menu. mode. Please follow the steps below to Single button to select

/

2. Press the

the following 5 modes:

Single Capture a single shot only. Continuous Shot Take several pictures at a time. Cont.Shot-High Speed (VGA) For continuous shot with VGA pixel. Cont.Shot-Fast (4M) For continuous shot with 4M pixels. Time-Lapse Take pictures based on the preset interval (30sec/ 1min/

5min/ 10min). 3. Press the button to confirm the settings and exit the menu. 4. Press the Shutter button to start continuous shooting. In Continuous Shot mode, the flash is automatically set to Force Off in order to achieve quick succession of shots. 59 EV Settings The EV function menu of the camera includes functions, such as EV (Exposure Value) Adjustment, ISO, Shutter Adjust-

ment, Aperture Adjustment, etc. Using the appropriate function settings can improve your pictures. Please follow the steps below to set:

button to display the 1. Press the settings screen.

/

2. Press the

the setting options.

/

3. Press the adjust the option values.

button to select

button to 4. Press the button to complete the setting and enter shooting mode. 60 EV Adjustment Set up to adjust the picture brightness. In the case of a very high contrast between the photographed object and the background, the brightness of the picture can be appropriately adjusted. (Adjustable in Mode) F2.8F2.8 1/50 1/50 0.3 EV 0.3 EV 400 ISO 400 ISO The adjustable range of exposure value is from EV -3.0 to EV+3.0. ISO Adjustment ISO allows you to set the sensitivity of the camera sensor. Please use a higher ISO value in darker places and a lower value in brighter conditions. (Adjustable in Mode). Shutter Adjustment For shutter speed, the camera may automatically set the aperture value corresponding to the manually set shutter speed so as to obtain a most suitable exposure value. The movement of object may be shown by adjusting the shutter speed. High shutter value can help you more clearly capture fast moving objects while low shutter value can better show the movement of objects. (Adjustable in Mode). F2.8F2.8 1/501/50 0.3 EV 0.3 EV 400 ISO 400 ISO Options for ISO value: Auto, 100, 200, 400, 800, 1600 and 3200. F2.8F2.8 1/50 1/50 0.3 EV 0.3 EV

-1.0 EV 400 ISO 400 ISO 61 61 Aperture Adjustment You can adjust the aperture size value. Selecting a large aperture opening will emphasize the point of focus and show a blurry background and foreground. A small aperture opening will keep both the background and main object in clear focus. (Adjustable in Mode) Using Quick Recording In shooting mode, press the begin recording video. button to F2.8F2.8 1/501/50 0.3 EV 0.3 EV 400 ISO 400 ISO After recording, press the again or press the Shutter Button to stop recording. The camera will save the video and return to the shooting screen. button 62 62 i Button Function Menu The Image Color Setting allows you to select different color effects. mode. Please It can be adjusted in follow the steps below to configure the settings:

1. Press the button to select the Image Color Setting Menu. 2. Press the

/

button to select the Image Color Setting options. Normal

) represents options that are available

(

in Movie mode. There are 20 Image Color options in photo shooting mode

:

) Normal (

Vivid (

) Japan Style Italian Style French Style Punk Black and White (

)

) Sepia (

Partial Color-Red (

Partial Color-Blue (

Partial Color-Yellow (

Partial Color-Green (

) )

)

)

) Negative Dreamy Vignetting Salon Fish Eye Reflection 4 Grids -

Stylish(2M) Sketch 63 63 PLAYBACK MODE Viewing Photos and Videos For viewing previously taken photos and videos on the LCD:

1. After pressing the button, the last photo or video clip taken will be displayed on the LCD. 2. Press the

/

button to scroll through the photos or video clips stored in the internal memory or on the memory card. 3. To play a selected video clip, press the An operation guide appears on the screen when playing back a video. Press the appropriate buttons to enable the corresponding functions. button to enter the Movie Playback mode. Under Playback Paused Mute 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 00:00:47 00:01:23 Back to the beginning of the video 6 Play 7 8 Frame Forward 9 Cancel playback 10 Frame Backward 00:00:47 00:01:23 1 2 3 4 5 Increase Volume Pause Fast Forward Decrease Volume Rewind 64 64 Thumbnail View When in Playback Mode, rotate the Zoom Lever counter clockwise to the display thumbnail images of the photos and videos on the screen. position to W Zoom Out T Zoom Out 1. Slide the Zoom Lever to switch between 3x3 and 4x4 thumbnails. 2. Press the

/

view and press the

/

/

buttons to select a picture or video clip to button to restore it to the original size. When the icon appears, it means this is a video file. 65 65 Using Zoom Playback (for still pictures only) When playing back photos, you can also use the Zoom Lever to zoom in on the photos 2 to 8 times. 1. Press the 2. Press the 3. Rotate the Zoom Lever clockwise to 4. The screen will display the number of times and button to select a picture to be zoomed in on. button to switch to Playback Mode. to zoom in.

/

area of the photo zooming operation. x2 5. Press the

/

image to be zoomed in on.

/

/

buttons to navigate and select a part of the 6. Press the button to return the image to its original scale. Movie images cannot be magnified. 66 Deleting Photos and Videos button to delete your photos and videos.

In Playback Mode, press the

To delete photos or videos:

1. Press the 2. Press the 3. Press the

/

button to switch to Playback Mode.

button to select the photos and videos to be deleted.

button and the deletion screen is displayed.

Delete One Exit 4. Press the

/

button to confirm.

button to select Delete OneorExitand press the Erased photos/video clips cannot be recovered. Please refer to page 91 for instructions on deleting more than one image at a time. 67 Slideshow This setting allows you to view all the stored images as a slideshow. 1. Press the 2. Press the 3. Press the button to enter playback screen. button to enter slide option.

/

to return to the playback screen. button to select the slideshow playing option orCancel Cancel 4. Press the button to confirm the setting. The Continuous Capture Group Playback may be displayed by slideshow. Pictures rotate automatically during a slide show. Slide playing function supports movie playing. 68 Continuous Capture Group Playback Cont.Shot-High Speed (VGA) and Cont.Shot-Fast (4M) can make continuous capture for group image playback. 1. Press 2. Press the 3. Press to start playback. button to enter playback screen.

/

button to select Cont. Group. 1/45 SD 25 42014 06-20 00:00 06-20 00:00 69 Animation Panorama Play Panoramic Animation Playing is when full sized images are played in accordance with the shooting direction. After playing, it will automatically return to the initial panorama screen. 1. Press the 2. Press the 3. Press the button to select animated panoramic photos. button to play in selected shooting direction. button to enter Playback Screen.

/

In the process of Panoramic Animation Playback, press the

stop playing and return to the Playback Screen. button (

) to 70 70

 

 

USING THE MENUS Photo Setup Menu Mode:

1. In Photo Shooting Mode, press the button to enter the Photo Setup menu. Expo Metering Use this setting to select the target size of the cameras field of view to be metered. 2. Press the

to select the item to be set.

/

button 3. Press the

/

button to select an option and press the button to confirm. Refer to the following pages for more details about each setting. AiAE (Artificial Intelligence AE):

Evaluates the light intensity at multiple points in the frame and automatically determines the best value for the light meter. Spot: For metering the block displayed in the center of the screen. Center: For metering the object in the center of the screen. It can be adjusted in all modes except for Panorama Mode. 71 71 Image Size The size setting refers to the image reso-

lution in pixels. A higher image resolution allows you to print that image in larger sizes without sacrificing the image quality. Size: A3 printing Size: A4 printing Size: 4x 6 printing Size: E-Mail The larger the number of recorded pixels, the larger the file size and the fewer files that can be saved on your memory card. Size: High quality printing Size: Full size printing Size: 16:9 display Size: Poster printing 72 OIS (Optical Image Stabilization) This mode can help reduce photo blur caused by unsteady hands and low light. Cont. AF (Continuous Auto-Focus) Enable Continuous AF to be able to con-

tinuously focus automatically when taking pictures. Cont.AF: Off Cont.AF: On OIS: Off OIS: On Use this image stabilization mode in dark environments. Shooting in a windy or unstable environment (such as a moving vehicle) may cause blurry images. It is recommended to turn off OIS when using a tripod. 73 Beautifier Select an effect of the Face Beautifier Mode. HDR (High Dynamic Range) Use this setting to control wide dynamic image range when taking static pictures. Photos with extreme contrast of bright and dark areas will still maintain distinguishable detail and depth. (Use of a tripod is recommended with this setting) Effect 1: Skin Soften Effect 2: Skin Soften+Eye Brightening Effect 3: Skin Soften+Eye Brightening +Eye Enlargement Please refer to P37 for more detailed instructions. HDR: Off HDR: On In a setting with extreme contrast

(very dark or very bright), this function can be used to shoot better photos. 74 Scene Select the scene mode under the SCN mode. Shooting menu in the Photo Shooting Mode

(O: Available X: Not Available) Options Photo Shooting Modes Press SET To Select Scene Night Portrait Please refer to P45 for more detailed instructions. O O X X X X O O O O O X O O O O O X O O O O O X O O O O O X O O O O X O 75 Photo Shooting Settings Menu Mode:

1. Press the

. select button in Photo Shooting Mode and press the

/

button to

button to enter the menu. 2. Press the 3. Press the enter the menu.

/

button to select

, and press the

/

button to

/

4. Press the button to select the item to be set and press the

button to enter the menu. button to select an option and press the

5. Press the

/

button to

/

confirm. 76 Quality The Quality Setting can be used to adjust the image compression ratio. AF Assist Beam In a darker environment, AF Assist Beam can be turned on for better focus. Quality Best Fine Normal AF Assist Beam Off On There are three options for picture quality:

Best Fine Normal Digital Zoom Turn on or off the digital zoom. Off On Digital Zoom 77 77 Date Imprint Include a Date/Time stamp on the photo image. Quick Review This option enables a quick review of the photos immediately after they are taken. Each photo is displayed on the LCD based on the selected time. Off Date Date/Time Date Imprint Off 1 sec 2 sec 3 sec Quick Review There are 4 options:

Off 1 sec 2 sec 3 sec Off Date Date/Time 78 Custom Settings Custom Settings stores the current photo shooting mode or scene mode and its parameters. The stored mode and parameters are retrieved in mode. Custom Settings Reset camera settings to custom settings mode. No Yes There are 2 options:

No Yes mode, selectCustom In Settingsthe camera will enter the setting menu as shown below:

Select one capture mode to define CS . Auto Mode Save Exit 79 Movie Menu Mode:

1. Rotate the mode dial to select and button to enter the Movie press the menu. Expo Metering (Exposure Metering) Use this setting to select the target size of the cameras field of view to be metered. Expo Metering: AiAE Expo Metering: AiAE 2. Press the

/

select the item to be set. button to

3. Press the

/

button to select an option and press the confirm. button to 80 AiAE (Artificial Intelligence AE):

Evaluates the light intensity at multiple points in the frame and automatically determines the best value for the light meter. Spot: For metering the block displayed in the center of the screen. Center: For metering the object in the center of the screen. Movie Size Set the image resolution used during video recording. Size: 1080p 30fps Size: 1080p 30fps Size: 720p 60fps Size: 720p 30fps Size: 640x480 30fps Size: High Speed Movie The speed requirements for reading and writing high image pixel images to SD card are as follows:

No. Image Pixel Frame Recommendation Recording time (4GB) About 1 2 3 4 5 1920x1080 *

1280x720 *

1280x720 *

640x480 640x480 30 60 30 30 120 Class 6 Class 6 Class 4 Class 4 Class 6 30 minutes 32 minutes 59 minutes 106 minutes 54 minutes 81 81

* The longest recording time is 29 minutes at one time. When recording in higher pixel resolutions for extended periods of time, this can cause the camera to generate heat. This is not a camera malfunction. When the video format is set as 640x480 (120fps), shooting time is 30 seconds, playback time is 2 minutes. Sound recording is disabled when 640x480 120fps is chosen. OIS (Optical Image Stabilization) This mode can help reduce photo blur caused by unsteady hands and low light.

OIS: Off OIS: On Use this image stabilization mode in dark environments. Shooting in a windy or unstable environment (such as a moving vehicle) may cause blurry images. It is recommended to turn off OIS when using a tripod. 82 82 Movie Setting Menu Mode:

1. Rotate the Mode Dial and select button, press the 2. Press the to enter the video recording screen.

/

button to enter the Movie Setting menu. button to select

, and press the Press SET To Enter Menu 3. Press the

/

enter the menu. button to select

, and press the

/

button to 4. Select the item to be set and press the 5. Press the

/

confirm.

/

button to enter the menu. button to select an option and press the

button to 83 Digital Zoom Turn the Digital Zoom on or off. Digital Zoom Off On Custom Settings Custom Settings stores the current movie mode and its parameters. The stored mode and parameters can be retrieved directly in mode. Custom Settings Reset camera settings to custom settings mode. No Yes 84 84 Playback Mode Select the settings screen:

, and press the button to enter Playback Menu Mode:

1. Press the button to display the playback screen and press the button to enter the menu. button to

select the item to be set and press the

/

2. Press the button to enter.

/

3. Press the button to select an option and press the button to confirm. Normal Mode: Display all images. Press SET To Confirm Normal Mode Refer to the following pages for more details about each setting. Normal Mode:

Display all images. Date Mode:

Arranged by date. Cont. Photo Mode:

Arranged by Cont. Photo Group. The Date Folder is displayed in date order based on camera's Date/Time Settings. If there is no Continuous Shot image file in memory, Continuous Shot Playback mode cannot be enabled. 85 HDR (High Dynamic Range) With the HDR function, pictures that are overexposed may be corrected to optimize the highlights and lowlights captured to more accurately represent the actual scene. Select

, and press the enter the settings screen:

button to Touch-Up The playback beauty feature allows for beautification using three individual effects.

, and press the Select enter the settings screen:

button to HDR HDR Cancel Red-Eye Reduction Red-Eye Reduction Skin Soften Eye Brightening Eye Enlargement Cancel After using the HDR function, the image will be saved as a new file and the original file is still stored in the memory. 86 Using the Face Beautifier Mode allows you to select from one, two, or all three effects combined. Rotate You can use this setting to change the orientation of the picture. Select

, and press the enter the settings screen:

button to Resize This setting allows you to resize a picture to a particular resolution and saves it as a new picture.

, and press the Select enter the settings screen:

button to Turn Right Turn Right Turn Left Cancel Resize to 1024x768 Resize to 1024x768 Resize to 640x480 Cancel Videos and panoramic pictures cannot be rotated. The rotated picture file will replace the original photo. This function can only be used to downsize photos to a lower resolution. Sizes of photos taken in panorama mode or rotated cannot be adjusted. 87 Color This setting allows you to change the picture color effect. The file is saved as a new photo and stored in memory together with the original photo. Press the button to enter the settings screen:

Cancel There are 19 options available:

Cancel Vivid Japan Style (8M) Italian Style (8M) French Style (8M) Punk (4M) Sepia Partial Color-Red Partial Color-Blue Partial Color-Yellow Partial Color-Green Negative (8M) Black and White Dreamy 88 88 Vignetting Salon Fish Eye Reflection 4 Grids - Stylish(2M) Playback Settings Menu button to show the playback screen, press the

, and press the button, press the button to enter the menu. button to select

, and press the

/

button to enter button to select

/

Mode:

1. Press the

/

2. Press the the menu. Protect Delete DPOF Trim

/

3. Press the button to select the item to be set and press the

button to enter the menu. button to select an option and press the

4. Press the

/

button to

/

confirm. Refer to the following pages for more details about each setting. 89 Protect To prevent any pictures or videos from being accidentally erased, use this setting to lock one or all of the files. Protect One Date Folder Cont. Group ResetAll Reset There are 5 options available:

One:

Lock the selected photo or video if it is unprotected; unlock the selected photo or video if it is protected. Date Folder: Protect all photos in the Date Folder. Cont. Group: Protect all photos in the Cont. Photo Folder. All:

Lock all photos or videos. Reset:

Unlock all photos or videos. 90 Delete You can delete one or all photo/video files. Delete One Date Folder Cont. Group All There are 4 options available:

Delete one photo or video. One:

Date Folder: Delete all photos in the Date Folder. Cont. Group: Delete all photos in the Cont. Photo Folder. All:

Delete all photos or videos The before a file can be deleted. indicator means a file is protected. File protection must be removed first Deleting files will cause DPOF settings to be reset. When one photo in the Cont. Photo and Date Folders is protected, it will be kept but any other photos will be deleted. 91 DPOF (Digital Print Order Format) The DPOF feature allows you to compile and select a group of pictures that you would like to print and will save your selection on the memory card so that you can use the SD memory card to print without having to individually specify the photos you want to print. One All Reset DPOF The printer that supports DPOF is needed for printing. 92 92 Trim The Trim Setting allows you to crop photos and save them as new pictures. 1. SelectYesto confirm trim. Rotate the zoom lever to select the aspect ratio and press the

/

buttons to adjust the

part you want to trim.

/

/

2. Press the button and theSave change?prompt appears. Select to change and save the picture. Select to cancel changes and return to the trim prompt screen. The image cannot be clipped/

trimmed again once it has been clipped to 640X480. General Settings Menu Mode:

1. Press the press the 2. Press the the menu. button in any mode, press the button to enter the menu.

/

button to select

, and

/

button to select

, and press the

/

button to enter Sound Settings Power Saver Language World Time Auto English Home Date & Time 2019.03.21 00:00

/

3. Press the button to select the item to be set and press the

button to enter the menu. button to select an option and press the

4. Press the

/

button to

/

confirm. Refer to the following pages for more details about each setting. 93 Sound Settings With this setting you may adjust the sound volume. Press the the volume and press the confirm your setting. button to adjust button to

/

Sound Settings Volume Back 94 Power Saver This setting allows you to save power and get the maximum possible running time for your cameras batteries. It turns the LCD and camera off automatically after a certain period of inactivity. Power Saver Auto Normal Best Auto Normal Best Power Saver Auto Normal Best LCD power off time 3 min 1 min 30 sec Turn off time 5 min 3 min 1 min Language Refer to the Reset your language section on page 25. Date/Time Refer to the Reset Date/Time section on page 26. Zone The Zone setting is a useful function for your overseas trips. This feature enables you to display the local time on the LCD while you are abroad.

/

1. Press the

button to

) and select the departure place (

destination (

2. Press the button to select a city located in the same time zone as that of the field. Press the button to confirm settings.

) fields.

/

LCD Brightness Use this setting to adjust the brightness of your LCD. Press the the brightness of screen and press the button to confirm. button to adjust

/

LCD Brightness Normal+2

+1 Normal

-1

-2 95 File Settings Mode:

1. Press the button, press the

/

button to enter the menu. button to select

/

2. Press the the menu. 3. Press the button to select

and press the and press the

/

button to enter button to select the item to be set and press the

button to enter the menu.

/

/

Format Copy to Card File Numbering Reset FW Version X.XX 4. Press the confirm.

/

button to select an option and press the

button to Refer to the following pages for more details about each setting. 96 Format Please note: formatting enables you to delete all contents in the memory card and built-in memory, including protected photo and movie files. Format Doing so will clear all data. No Yes If you selectYesthe camera will format its memory. If there is no memory card in the camera, the built-in memory will be formatted; if there is a memory card, only the card will be formatted. Copy to Card Use this setting to copy the files stored in the built-in memory to a memory card. Copy to Card Copy files from built-in memory to the memory card. No Yes If there is no card available in the camera, this function will not be displayed. 97 97 File Numbering After you take a picture or video clip, the camera will save it with a sequential number. You can use this to reset the file numbering to 1. File Numbering Create a new directory and reset the file number. No Yes Reset Use this setting to restore the camera to its original default settings. Reset Reset camera settings to factory defaults. No Yes 98 FW Version Use this setting to view the current camera firmware version. When there is a new firmware version in the memory card, selectYesto update. FW Version Current Ver:1.XX Back FW Version Current Ver:1.XX New Ver.:2.XX Update Firmware?

Yes Cancel 99 CONNECTION SETTINGS Mode:

1. Press the button, press the

/

button to enter the menu. button to select

/

2. Press the the menu. 3. Press the

button to enter the menu.

/

button to select

and press the and press the

/

button to enter button to select the item to be set and press the

/

USB TV-System PC NTSC 4. Press the confirm.

/

button to select an option and press the

button to Refer to the following pages for more details about each setting. 100 100 Connecting to a Computer You can use the Micro USB cable to connect the camera and copy (transmit) photos to a computer, printer or other device. Setting the USB Mode The cameras Micro USB port can be set to connect with either a computer or a printer. The following steps will allow you to ensure that the camera is correctly configured to connect with a PC. 1. Press the button to selectUSBand press the button to

/

/

enter the menu. 2. Press the

/

button to selectPCand press the

button to confirm. USB PC Printer 101 101 Transferring files to your computer The computer will automatically detect the camera as a removable drive. Double-click the My Computer icon on the desktop to locate the removable drive and to copy folders and files in the drive to a directory on your PC as you would copy any typical folder or file. Follow the steps below to connect the camera to a computer. 1. Make sure the computer is turned on. 2. Connect one end of the supplied Micro USB cable to the Micro USB port on your camera. 3. Connect the other end of the cable to an available USB port on your computer. 4. After the transmission is complete, disconnect the Micro USB cable according to the instructions specifying how to safely remove USB devices. 102 102 Connecting to a PICTBRIDGE Compatible Printer

/

button to 2. Press the selectPrinterand press the button to confirm. PICTBRIDGE technology allows printing of the photos saved in the memory card by the printer. To find out if a printer is PICTBRIDGE compatible, simply look for the PICTBRIDGE logo on the packaging or check the owners manual for specifications. With the PICTBRIDGE function on your camera, you can print the captured photos directly to a PICTBRIDGE compatible printer using the supplied Micro USB cable, without the need for a PC. Setting the USB Mode The cameras Micro USB port can be set to connect with either a PC or a Printer;

the following steps will ensure that the camera is correctly configured to connect with a Printer. 1. Press the After the camera is reset, it will switch to PC mode automatically from USB mode. button to

Printer USB

/

PC selectUSBand press the button to enter the menu.

/

See PICTBRIDGE section on page 105. 103 Connecting to your Printer 1. Make sure the printer is turned on. 2. Connect one end of the supplied Micro USB cable to the Micro USB port on your camera. 3. Connect the other end of the cable to the USB port on the printer. If the camera is not connected to a PICTBRIDGE compatible printer, the following error message will appear on the LCD. Connection Failed!

The error message above will also appear if the USB mode is set incorrectly, in which case you should disconnect the Micro USB cable, check the USB mode settings, ensure that the printer is turned on, and then try connecting the Micro USB cable again. 104 104 Using the PICTBRIDGE Menu After setting the USB mode to Printer, the PICTBRIDGE menu will appear. PictBridge Print (with Date) Print (without Date) Print Index Print DPOF Images Exit Print (with Date) If you have set the date and time on your camera, the date and time will be recorded and saved with each photo you take. 1. In the PICTBRIDGE menu, selectPrint (with Date)and the screen as shown below appears.

/

button to select

Press the a menu item and press the button to enter the item. Refer to the following sections for more detailed information on each setting.

/

01 Back 2. Press the

a photo to be printed.

/

button to select 105 3. Press the button to

select the number of copies for the currently displayed photo.

/

4. Press the button and the following screen will appear. Print (without Date) Use this setting to print the photos without dates on them. 1. In the PICTBRIDGE menu, selectPrint (without Date)and the screen as shown below appears. Print (with Date) Yes Cancel 01 Back 5. SelectYesand press the button to confirm printing; selectCancel andpress the printing. button to cancel 106 2. Press the

a photo to be printed.

/

button to select 3. Press the button to

select the number of copies for the currently displayed photo.

/

4. Press the button and the following screen will appear. Print (Without Date) Yes Cancel 5. SelectYesand press the button to confirm printing; selectCancel andpress the printing. button to cancel Print Index You can print all photos in the camera via this function. 1. In the PICTBRIDGE menu, selectPrint Indexand the screen as shown below appears. Print Index Yes Yes Cancel 2. SelectYesand press the button to confirm printing; selectCancel andpress the printing. button to cancel 107 Print DPOF Images To use DPOF printing, you must select your photos for printing using the DPOF settings beforehand. See DPOF section on page 92. 1. In the PICTBRIDGE menu, selectPrint DPOF Imagesand the screen as shown below appears. Exit SelectExitto exit the PICTBRIDGE menu. At this time, the messageRemove USB Cable!appears on the screen. Remove USB Cable!

Print DPOF Images Yes Cancel Disconnect the Micro USB cable from the camera and printer. 2. SelectYesand press the button to confirm printing; selectCancel andpress the printing. button to cancel 108 108 Video System You can use the AV cable (which should be purchased separately) to connect the camera and the television for the video output. Connect one end of the AV cable to USB/AV port of the camera; connect the other end to AV-OUT port of the television. Adjust the format of the video output system according to your requirements, and the steps are as follows:

1. Press the button to selectTV-Systemand press the

button to enter the menu.

button to selectNTSC, and press the 2. Press the button to

/

/

/

confirm. TV-System PAL NTSC The video output system would change accordingly based upon the changes of the selected language. NTSC: English, Chinese (Traditional), Japanese, French, Korean, Russian, PAL:

Vietnamese, Greek, Hungarian German, Spanish, Italian, Chinese (Simplified), Portuguese, Swedish, Danish, Finnish, Indonesia, Norwegian, Dutch, Turkish, Polish, Thai, Croatian, Czech, Arabic, Hindi 109 APPENDICES Product Specifications Design and specifications are subject to change without notice. Image Sensor Lens Type Effective Pixels Total Pixels Focal Length 35mm film equivalent F number Lens Construction Optical Zoom Optical Zoom Autofocus System Anti-Handshake Digital Zoom 110 1/2.3BSI CMOS 16.35 Megapixels 16.76 Megapixels 4.3mm (Wide) 223.6mm (Tele) 24mm (Wide) 1248mm (Tele) F2.8 (Wide) ~ F5.6 (Tele) 13 groups 15 elements 52x Normal: (Wide) 60cm ~ , (Tele) 300cm ~ ;

Macro: 1cm ~ (Wide Only) TTL Autofocus Optical Image Stabilization 4x Digital Zoom (Combined Zoom: 208x) Number of Recording Pixels Still Image Movie

(3:2) 14MP: 4608 X 3072

(4:3) 16MP: 4608 X 3456 10MP: 3648 X 2736 5MP: 2592 X 1944 3MP: 2048 X 1536 0.3MP: 640 X 480 1920 X 1080 (30fps), 1280 X 720 (60fps/30fps), 640 X 480

(30fps), High-Speed Movie: 640 X 480 (120fps)

(16:9) 12MP: 4608 X 2592 2MP: 1920 X 1080 Image Compression Best, Fine, Normal DCF, DPOF (Ver1.1) Support Yes File Format Exif 2.3 (JPEG) Still Image Movie MOV [Image: H.264; Audio: Linear PCM (Stereo)]

Shooting Modes Scene Mode Detection Features Photo Touch-up HDR Auto Mode, Program AE, Shutter priority, Aperture priority, Manual Mode, Face Beautifier, Wi-Fi Mode, Scene Mode, Movie Mode, Custom Settings Handheld Night, Pet Mode, Sunset, Fireworks, Multi Exposure, Sport, Night Portrait, Landscape, Portrait, Snow, Children, Party, Panorama Mode Face, Smile, Blink, Cat, Dog Red-Eye Reduction, Skin Soften, Eye Brightening, Eye Enlargement Yes 111 111 Scan Panorama LCD Image Auto Rotation ISO Sensitivity AF Method Exposure Metering Method Exposure Control Method Exposure Compensation Shutter Speed Continuous Shot Playback Modes Up to 360 3.0 inch (460k Pixels) Yes Auto, ISO100/200/400/800/1600/3200 Single AF, Multi-AF (TTL 25-point), Object Tracking , Face-Detection Artificial Intelligence AE (AiAE), Center-Weighted Average, Spot (Fixed to Center of Frame), Face AE Program AE (AE-Lock Available), Shutter Prior AE, Aperture Prior AE 3 EV in 1/3 Step Increments 1/2000 ~ 30 Seconds Yes Single, Index (9/16 Thumbnails), Slide Show, Date, Continuous Shooting, Zoom (Approx. X 2 ~ X 8) White Balance Control AWB, Daylight, Cloudy, Fluorescent, Fluorescent CWF, Incandescent, Manual WB, Color Temp. (1900K ~ 10000K) Flash Method Pop-up (Manual) Flash Flash Modes Force Off, Flash Auto, Fill Flash, Red-Eye Reduction, Slow Sync., Slow Sync.+Red-Eye Reduction 112 Recording Media Multi-Language Support Jacks Wi-Fi Remote Viewfinder Power Shooting Capability

(Battery Performance) Operation Environment Dimensions (W X H X D) Weight Internal Memory: Approx. 8MB SD/SDHC Card (Up to 32GB Support) [MMC Card Not Supported]

27 Languages AV-OUT/USB 2.0 (Micro 5 pin USB) Yes (802.11b/g/n) Yes (via smart device) Rechargeable Li-ion Battery LB-060, 3.7V 1100mAh, In-Camera Charging Approx. 240 Shots (Based on CIPA Standards) Temperature: 0 ~ 40C, Humidity: 0 ~ 90%

Approx. 121.3 X 85.8 X 97.5mm (Based on CIPA Standards) Approx. 508g (Body only) 113 Prompts and Warning Messages Message Description Action Warning! Battery exhausted. Lens obstruction, Re-start Camera. Suggest using tripod. Camera battery is depleted. It is a warning indicating that the camera is going to shut off. The lens is jammed or some foreign object is preventing the lens from functioning properly. When continuous exposure is enabled, this prompt message is displayed when the photo shooting screen is displayed for the first time. Built-in memory error!

An error has occurred in the built in memory. Improper alignment. Please try again. Warning! Do not turn off your camera during update!

The offset is too big for panorama shooting. The message appears during the firmware update process. Charge battery or replace with a charged battery. Turn off the camera and restart it to reset the lens. The message will disappear after 2 seconds. Try shutting off the camera and turning it on again. Keep the camera steady while shooting to maintain alignment. The message disappears after the camera update and restart. 114 Message Remove USB Cable!

Connection Failed!

Description Indicates that you can disconnect the Micro USB cable. Failure to connect to PC, printer, or TV-system. Write Protect !

The SD card is locked. Card Full !

The memory of the SD card is full. Memory Full !

The cameras internal memory is full. Action The message disappears after you disconnect the Micro USB cable. Remove cable, reinsert cable, and retry connection. Turn off camera and remove SD card. Slide tab on the side of card to unlock. Either delete photos or videos to create room on the card, or replace with another card that has available memory. Erase files or insert a memory card that has available memory. 115 115 Message Description Action Card Error !

The card cannot be recog-

nized after being formatted. Card is not formatted. An error has occurred with the memory card. Slow access When a card lower than Class 4 is recording movie above HD, the writing speed will be slower and the re-

cording will not continue. Cannot write to SD card. The camera cannot write to the SD card. No Red-Eye Detected!

This image cannot be edited. No red-eye is detected when selecting Red-Eye Removal in Playback Touch-up. The file format does not sup-

port editing or the edited file cannot be edited again. Check that the SD card is compatible with the camera. Format the memory card. This will erase all data on the card; be sure to copy the data from the card onto another device if you wish to keep it. Replace SD card with a Class 4 or higher card. Turn off the camera. Remove and reinsert the SD card and turn the camera on to try again. Check if the SD card is in a locked position, or if the memory is full. The message will disappear after 2 seconds and return to the touch-up menu. The message will disappear after 2 seconds and return to the original image. 116 Message Exceeded maximum folder number. Description The folder number in the card exceeds the maximum folder number (999). Too many pictures for fast processing. During Playback by Date, the images exceed specifications so it is not possible to play by date. Unable to recognize files. The format of the file viewed is not sup-

ported or the file is damaged and cannot be recognized properly. No Picture!

When the play button is pushed and there are no files on memory card or in camera. No continuous group file. When the camera switches from Playback Mode to Cont. Playback Mode, and there are no continuous group files, this mes-

sage will be displayed. Protected!

Undeletable!

The file is protected and cannot be de-

leted. Action Copy the data to your PC, and format the memory card. The message will dis-

appear after 2 seconds and return to Thumb-

nail 3x3 mode. This message will only disappear after the file is deleted. The message will dis-

appear after 2 seconds and return to previous screen. The message will dis-

appear after 2 seconds and return to Thumb-

nail 3x3 mode. Unlocked file under Protect, and make sure SD card is un-

locked. 117 Troubleshooting Problem Camera does not turn on Possible Causes The battery has been depleted. The battery is not inserted correctly. Camera turns off suddenly during operation The batteries have been depleted. The picture is blurry Camera shakes while taking a picture. Solution Recharge the battery. Correctly reinstall the battery. Recharge the battery. Make sure the camera is actually shutting off and not entering Power Save Mode, where the LCD will turn off after the camera has been idle for a period of time. Turn on OIS feature. Please use tripod for high magnification (above 15X) optical zoom. If you are holding the camera, be sure to use both hands. Images and video files cannot be saved The SD memory card is full. The memory card is locked. Use another memory card or delete unnecessary files. Unlock the memory card. 118 Problem Possible Causes Solution Images will not print from the connected printer The camera is not connected to the printer correctly. The printer is not PICTBRIDGE compatible. The printer is out of paper or ink. The printer paper is jammed. Saving data to memory card is slow Using a memory card below Class 4 may result in slower recording times. Cannot write to the memory card The SD memory card has been locked. Too many movies to process The number of pictures or folders in the memory card exceed the specifications, so the playback of data folder can not be displayed. Check the connection between the camera and printer. Use a PICTBRIDGE compatible printer. Load paper into the printer or replace the ink cartridge in the printer. Remove the jammed paper. Use a memory card with write Class 4 or higher than 4 to improve performance. Release the write lock of the memory card or replace with another card. Delete unwanted files. The flash icon appears on the LCD Current shooting environment requires flash. Turn on flash. 119 119 When shooting with stacked filters attached, the corners of the photo may turn dark

(Vignetting effect) because the filter holder blocks light from reaching the camera image sensor; especially, at wide angle zoom control settings. Please take test shots and review the results when using stacked filters. Please enter the new password on smart device after changing Wi-Fi password. Some models of smart device will remember the Wi-Fi password previously entered, so please clear the old password on smart device manually before connection (For different models, this operation may be varied, please subject to your user manual.) iOS system Android system 1 2 3 1 2 120 2019 JK Imaging Ltd. All Rights Reserved. The Kodak and Kodachrome, Kodacolor and Ektachrome trademarks, logo and trade dress are used under license from Eastman Kodak Company. All other logos, products or company names that are referred to in this document are trade names, trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective owners and holders. The owners and holders are not affiliated with JK Imaging Ltd., our products or our website. JK Imaging Ltd., 17239 So. Main Street, Gardena, CA 90248 USA kodakpixpro.com Made in Myanmar Ver.1